This is a modern-English version of Time and Free Will: An Essay on the Immediate Data of Consciousness, originally written by Bergson, Henri.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

TIME
AND FREE WILL
An Essay on the Immediate Data
of Consciousness
BY
HENRI BERGSON
MEMBER OF THE INSTITUTE
PROFESSOR AT THE COLLÈGE DE FRANCE
Authorized Translation by
F. L. POGSON, M.A.
LONDON
GEORGE ALLEN & COMPANY, LTD.
RUSKIN HOUSE, 44 AND 45 RATHBONE PLACE
NEW YORK: THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
1913
Καὶ εἴ τις δὲ τὴν φύσίν ἔροιτο τίνος ἔνεκα ποίεῐ
εἰ τοῡ ἐρωτῶντος ἐθέλοι ἐπαΐειν καὶ λέγειν, εἴποι
ἄν "ἐχρῆν μὲν μὴ ἐρωτἂν, ἀλλὰ συνιέναι καὶ αὐτὸν
σιωπῇ, ὤσπερ ἐγὼ σιωπώ καὶ οὐκ εἴθισμαι λέγειν."
PLOTINUS
Καὶ εἴ τις δὲ τὴν φύσίν ἔροιτο τίνος ἔνεκα ποίεῐ
εἰ τοῡ ἐρωτῶντος ἐθέλοι ἐπαΐειν καὶ λέγειν, εἴποι
ἄν "ἐχρῆν μὲν μὴ ἐρωτἂν, ἀλλὰ συνιέναι καὶ αὐτὸν
σιωπῇ, ὤσπερ ἐγὼ σιωπώ καὶ οὐκ εἴθισμαι λέγειν."
PLOTINUS
TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE
Henri Louis Bergson was born in Paris, October 18, 1859. He entered the École normale in 1878, and was admitted agrégé de philosophie in 1881 and docteur ès lettres in 1889. After holding professorships in various provincial and Parisian lycées, he became maître de conférences at the École normale supérieure in 1897, and since 1900 has been professor at the Collège de France. In 1901 he became a member of the Institute on his election to the Académie des Sciences morales et politiques.
Henri Louis Bergson was born in Paris on October 18, 1859. He started at the École normale in 1878, earned his agrégé de philosophie in 1881, and received his docteur ès lettres in 1889. After teaching at various high schools in Paris and the provinces, he became a lecturer at the École normale supérieure in 1897, and he has been a professor at the Collège de France since 1900. In 1901, he was elected to the Institute as a member of the Académie des Sciences morales et politiques.
A full list of Professor Bergson's works is given in the appended bibliography. In making the following translation of his Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience I have had the great advantage of his co-operation at every stage, and the aid which he has given has been most generous and untiring. The book itself was worked out and written during the years 1883 to 1887 and was originally published in 1889. The foot-notes in the French edition contain a certain number of references to French translations of English works. In the present translation I am responsible for citing these references from the original English. This will account[Pg vi] for the fact that editions are sometimes referred to which have appeared subsequently to 1889. I have also added fairly extensive marginal summaries and a full index.
A complete list of Professor Bergson's works can be found in the attached bibliography. While translating his Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, I had the tremendous benefit of his collaboration at every stage, and the support he provided has been extremely generous and tireless. The book itself was developed and written between 1883 and 1887 and was first published in 1889. The footnotes in the French edition include several references to French translations of English works. In this translation, I take responsibility for citing these references from the original English. This explains why some editions mentioned may have been published after 1889. I have also included fairly detailed marginal summaries and a complete index.
In France the Essai is already in its seventh edition. Indeed, one of the most striking facts about Professor Bergson's works is the extent to which they have appealed not only to the professional philosophers, but also to the ordinary cultivated public. The method which he pursues is not the conceptual and abstract method which has been the dominant tradition in philosophy. For him reality is not to be reached by any elaborate construction of thought: it is given in immediate experience as a flux, a continuous process of becoming, to be grasped by intuition, by sympathetic insight. Concepts break up the continuous flow of reality into parts external to one another, they further the interests of language and social life and are useful primarily for practical purposes. But they give us nothing of the life and movement of reality; rather, by substituting for this an artificial reconstruction, a patchwork of dead fragments, they lead to the difficulties which have always beset the intellectualist philosophy, and which on its premises are insoluble. Instead of attempting a solution in the intellectualist sense, Professor Bergson calls upon his readers to put these broken fragments of reality behind them, to immerse themselves in the living stream of things and to[Pg vii] find their difficulties swept away in its resistless flow.
In France, the Essai is already in its seventh edition. One of the most remarkable things about Professor Bergson's works is how much they've attracted not just professional philosophers, but also the educated general public. His approach isn’t the typical conceptual and abstract method that has been dominant in philosophy. For him, reality isn't something to be discovered through complicated thought processes; it's experienced directly as a continuous flow, a process of constant change that we grasp through intuition and empathetic insight. Concepts break apart the seamless flow of reality into separate parts, serving the needs of language and social interaction, and are mainly useful for practical reasons. However, they don't give us any sense of the life and movement of reality; instead, they replace it with an artificial reconstruction, a mix of dead pieces, leading to the challenges that have always troubled intellectualist philosophy, which are solvable only on its own terms. Instead of seeking a solution in the typical intellectual sense, Professor Bergson encourages his readers to leave these fragmented pieces of reality behind, to dive into the living stream of things, and to find their problems washed away in its unstoppable flow.
In the present volume Professor Bergson first deals with the intensity of conscious states. He shows that quantitative differences are applicable only to magnitudes, that is, in the last resort, to space, and that intensity in itself is purely qualitative. Passing then from the consideration of separate conscious states to their multiplicity, he finds that there are two forms of multiplicity: quantitative or discrete multiplicity involves the intuition of space, but the multiplicity of conscious states is wholly qualitative. This unfolding multiplicity constitutes duration, which is a succession without distinction, an interpenetration of elements so heterogeneous that former states can never recur. The idea of a homogeneous and measurable time is shown to be an artificial concept, formed by the intrusion of the idea of space into the realm of pure duration. Indeed, the whole of Professor Bergson's philosophy centres round his conception of real concrete duration and the specific feeling of duration which our consciousness has when it does away with convention and habit and gets back to its natural attitude. At the root of most errors in philosophy he finds a confusion between this concrete duration and the abstract time which mathematics, physics, and even language and common sense, substitute for it. Applying these results to the problem of free will, he shows that the difficulties arise[Pg viii] from taking up one's stand after the act has been performed, and applying the conceptual method to it. From the point of view of the living, developing self these difficulties are shown to be illusory, and freedom, though not definable in abstract or conceptual terms, is declared to be one of the clearest facts established by observation.
In this volume, Professor Bergson first explores the intensity of conscious states. He demonstrates that quantitative differences only apply to magnitudes, essentially to space, and that intensity itself is purely qualitative. Moving from analyzing individual conscious states to their multiplicity, he identifies two forms of multiplicity: quantitative or discrete multiplicity involves the perception of space, while the multiplicity of conscious states is entirely qualitative. This unfolding multiplicity makes up duration, which is a succession without distinction, an overlap of elements so different that past states can never repeat. The idea of a uniform and measurable time is shown to be an artificial concept, created by the influence of the idea of space into the realm of pure duration. Indeed, the core of Professor Bergson's philosophy centers around his concept of real concrete duration and the specific feeling of duration that our consciousness experiences when it moves beyond convention and habit and returns to its natural state. At the root of many philosophical errors, he finds a mix-up between this concrete duration and the abstract time that mathematics, physics, and even language and common sense use as substitutes. By applying these insights to the issue of free will, he shows that the difficulties arise from examining the situation after the action has occurred and applying a conceptual approach to it. From the perspective of the living, evolving self, these challenges are revealed to be illusory, and freedom, while not definable in abstract or conceptual terms, is asserted to be one of the clearest facts confirmed by observation.
It is no doubt misleading to attempt to sum up a system of philosophy in a sentence, but perhaps some part of the spirit of Professor Bergson's philosophy may be gathered from the motto which, with his permission, I have prefixed to this translation:—"If a man were to inquire of Nature the reason of her creative activity, and if she were willing to give ear and answer, she would say—'Ask me not, but understand in silence, even as I am silent and am not wont to speak.'"
It’s definitely misleading to try to capture a whole philosophy in a single sentence, but maybe you can get some sense of Professor Bergson’s philosophy from the motto that I’ve included at the beginning of this translation with his permission: “If a man were to ask Nature why she creates, and if she were willing to listen and respond, she would say—‘Don’t ask me, but understand in silence, just as I am silent and don’t usually speak.’”
F. L. POGSON.
F. L. Pogson.
OXFORD,
OXFORD,
June,1910.
June 1910.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
I. WORKS BY BERGSON.
I. BERGSON'S WORKS.
(a) Books.
Books.
Quid Aristoteles de loco senserit, (Thesis), Paris, 1889. Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, Paris, 1889, 1910.7
Quid Aristoteles de loco senserit, (Thesis), Paris, 1889. Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, Paris, 1889, 1910.7
Matière et Mémoire, Essai sur la relation du corps avec l'esprit, Paris, 1896, 1910.6
Matter and Memory, An Essay on the Relationship Between the Body and the Mind, Paris, 1896, 1910.6
Le Rire, Essai sur la signification du comique, Paris, 1900, 1910.6 (First published in the Revue de Paris, 1900, Vol. I., pp. 512-545 and 759-791.)
Le Rire, Essay on the Meaning of Comedy, Paris, 1900, 1910.6 (First published in the Revue de Paris, 1900, Vol. I., pp. 512-545 and 759-791.)
L'Évolution créatrice, Paris, 1907, 1910.6
L'Évolution créatrice, Paris, 1907, 1910.6
(b) Articles.
(b) Articles.
La Spécialité. (Address at the distribution of prizes at the lycée of Angers, Aug. 1882.)
La Spécialité. (Address at the awards ceremony at the lycée of Angers, Aug. 1882.)
De la simulation inconsciente dans l'état d'hypnotisme. Revue philosophique, Vol. 22, 1886, pp. 525-531. Le bon sens et les études classiques. (Address at the distribution of prizes at the "Concours général des lycées et collèges," 1895.)
De la simulation inconsciente dans l'état d'hypnotisme. Revue philosophique, Vol. 22, 1886, pp. 525-531. Le bon sens et les études classiques. (Address at the distribution of prizes at the "Concours général des lycées et collèges," 1895.)
Mémoire et reconnaissance. (Revue philos. Mar., Apr. 1896, pp. 225-248 and 380-399. Republished in Matière et Mémoire.)
Mémoire and Recognition. (Philosophical Review Mar., Apr. 1896, pp. 225-248 and 380-399. Republished in Matter and Memory.)
Perception et matière. (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. May 1896, pp. 257-277. Republished in Matière et Mémoire.)
Perception and Matter. (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. May 1896, pp. 257-277. Republished in Matière et Mémoire.)
Note sur les origines psychologiques de notre croyance à la loi de causalité. (Lecture at the Philosophical Congress in Paris, 1900, published in the Bibliothèque du Congrès International de Philosophie; cf. Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale, Sept. 1900, pp. 655 ff.)
Note on the psychological origins of our belief in the law of causality. (Lecture at the Philosophical Congress in Paris, 1900, published in the Library of the International Congress of Philosophy; see Review of Metaphysics and Morality, Sept. 1900, pp. 655 ff.)
Le Rêve. (Lecture at the Institut psychologique international: published in the Bulletin de l'Institut psych. intern. May 1901; cf. Revue scientifique, 4e S., Vol. 15, June 8, 1901, pp. 705-713, and Revue de Philosophie, June 1901, pp. 486-488.)
Le Rêve. (Lecture at the International Psychological Institute: published in the Bulletin of the International Psych. Inst. May 1901; see Scientific Review, 4th Series, Vol. 15, June 8, 1901, pp. 705-713, and Philosophy Review, June 1901, pp. 486-488.)
Le Parallélisme psycho-physique et la métaphysique[Pg x] positive. Bulletin de la Société française de Philosophie, June 1901.
Le Parallélisme psycho-physique et la métaphysique[Pg x] positive. Bulletin de la Société française de Philosophie, June 1901.
L'Effort intellectuel. Revue philosophique, Jan. 1902. Introduction à la métaphysique. Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1903.
L'Effort intellectuel. Revue philosophique, Jan. 1902. Introduction to Metaphysics. Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1903.
Le Paralogisme psycho-physiologique. (Lecture at the Philosophical Congress in Geneva, 1904, published in the Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1904, pp. 895-908; see also pp. 1027-1036.)
Le Paralogisme psycho-physiologique. (Lecture at the Philosophical Congress in Geneva, 1904, published in the Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1904, pp. 895-908; see also pp. 1027-1036.)
L'Idée de néant, Rev. philos. Nov. 1906, pp. 449-466. (Part of Chap. 4 of L'Évolution créatrice.)
L'Idée de néant, Rev. philos. Nov. 1906, pp. 449-466. (Part of Chap. 4 of L'Évolution créatrice.)
Notice sur la vie et les œuvres de M. Félix Ravaisson-Mollien. (Lecture before the Académie des Sciences morales et politiques: published in the Proceedings of the Academy, Vol. 25, pp. 1 ff. Paris, 1907.)
Notice on the life and works of Mr. Félix Ravaisson-Mollien. (Lecture before the Academy of Moral and Political Sciences: published in the Proceedings of the Academy, Vol. 25, pp. 1 ff. Paris, 1907.)
Le Souvenir du présent et la fausse reconnaissance. Rev. philos. Dec. 1908, pp. 561-593.
Le Souvenir du présent et la fausse reconnaissance. Rev. philos. Dec. 1908, pp. 561-593.
(c) Miscellaneous.
(c) Various.
Lucrèce: Extraits ... avec une étude sur la poésie, la philosophie, la physique, le texte et la langue de Lucrèce. Paris, 1884.
Lucretius: Excerpts ... with a study on poetry, philosophy, physics, the text, and the language of Lucretius. Paris, 1884.
Principes de métaphysique et de psychologie d'après M. Paul Janet. Revue philos., Vol. 44, Nov. 1897, pp. 525-551.
Principles of Metaphysics and Psychology according to M. Paul Janet. Philosophical Review, Vol. 44, Nov. 1897, pp. 525-551.
Collaboration au Vocabulaire philosophique, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. July 1902, Aug. 1907, Aug. 1908, Aug. 1909.
Collaboration in Philosophical Vocabulary, Bulletin of the French Philosophical Society. July 1902, Aug. 1907, Aug. 1908, Aug. 1909.
Remarques sur la place et le caractère de la Philosophie dans l'Enseignement secondaire, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Feb. 1903, pp. 44 ff.
Remarques sur la place et le caractère de la Philosophie dans l'Enseignement secondaire, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Feb. 1903, pp. 44 ff.
Remarques sur la notion de la liberté morale, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Apr. 1903, pp. 101-103.
Remarques sur la notion de la liberté morale, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Apr. 1903, pp. 101-103.
Remarques à propos de la philosophie sociale de Cournot, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Aug. 1903, p. 229.
Remarques sur la philosophie sociale de Cournot, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Août 1903, p. 229.
Préface de la Psychologie rationnelle de M. Lubac, Paris, Alcan, 1904.
Préface de la Psychologie rationnelle de M. Lubac, Paris, Alcan, 1904.
Sur sa relation à W. James, Revue philosophique, Vol. 60, 1905, p. 229 f.
Sur sa relation à W. James, Revue philosophique, Vol. 60, 1905, p. 229 f.
Sur sa théorie de la perception, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Philos. Mar. 1905, pp. 94 ff.
Sur sa théorie de la perception, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Philos. Mar. 1905, pp. 94 ff.
Rapport sur le concours pour le prix Bordin, 1905, ayant pour sujet Maine de Biran. (Mémoires de l'Académie des Sciences morales et politiques, Vol. 25, pp. 809 ff., Paris, 1907.)
Rapport on the competition for the Bordin Prize, 1905, focusing on Maine de Biran. (Memoirs of the Academy of Moral and Political Sciences, Vol. 25, pp. 809 ff., Paris, 1907.)
Rapport sur le concours pour le prix Le Dissez de Penanrun, 1907. (Mémoires de l'Académie des Sciences morales et politiques, Vol. 26, pp. 771 ff. Paris, 1909.)
Rapport on the competition for the Le Dissez de Penanrun prize, 1907. (Memoirs of the Academy of Moral and Political Sciences, Vol. 26, pp. 771 ff. Paris, 1909.)
Sur l'Êvolution créatrice, Revue du Mois, Sept. 1907, p. 351.
Sur l'Êvolution créatrice, Revue du Mois, Sept. 1907, p. 351.
A propos de l'évolution de l'intelligence géométrique, Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1908, pp. 28-33.
A propos de l'évolution de l'intelligence géométrique, Revue de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1908, pp. 28-33.
Sur l'influence de sa philosophie sur les élèves des lycées, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Philos., Jan. 1908, p. 21; cf. L'Année psychologique, 1908, pp. 229-231.
Sur l'influence de sa philosophie sur les élèves des lycées, Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Philos., Jan. 1908, p. 21; cf. L'Année psychologique, 1908, pp. 229-231.
Réponse à une enquête sur la question religieuse (La Question religieuse par Frédéric Charpin, Paris, 1908).
Réponse à une enquête sur la question religieuse (La Question religieuse par Frédéric Charpin, Paris, 1908).
Remarques sur l'organisation des Congrès de Philosophie. Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Jan. 1909, p. 11 f.
Remarques sur l'organisation des Congrès de Philosophie. Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil. Jan. 1909, p. 11 f.
Préface à un volume de la collection Les grands philosophes, (G. Tarde, par ses fils). Paris. Michaud, 1909.
Préface à un volume de la collection Les grands philosophes, (G. Tarde, par ses fils). Paris. Michaud, 1909.
Remarques à propos d'une thèse soutenue par M. Dwelshauvers "L'inconscient dans la vie mentale." Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil., Feb. 1910.
Remarques sur une thèse soutenue par M. Dwelshauvers "L'inconscient dans la vie mentale." Bulletin de la Soc. fr. de Phil., février 1910.
A propos d'un article de Mr. W. B. Pitkin intitule "James and Bergson." Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. VII, No. 14, July 7, 1910, pp. 385-388.
A discussion about an article by Mr. W. B. Pitkin titled "James and Bergson." Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. VII, No. 14, July 7, 1910, pp. 385-388.
II. SELECT LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES
DEALING IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITH BERGSON AND HIS PHILOSOPHY.
II. SELECT LIST OF BOOKS AND ARTICLES
DEALING IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITH BERGSON AND HIS PHILOSOPHY.
(Arranged alphabetically under each language.)
(Arranged alphabetically by language.)
S. Alexander, Matière et Mémoire, (Mind, Oct. 1897, pp. 572-3).
S. Alexander, Matter and Memory, (Mind, Oct. 1897, pp. 572-3).
B. H. Bode, L'Évolution créatrice, (Philosophical Review, 1908, pp. 84-89).
B. H. Bode, Creative Evolution, (Philosophical Review, 1908, pp. 84-89).
W. Boyd, L'Évolution créatrice, (Review of Theology and Philosophy, Oct. 1907, pp. 249-251).
W. Boyd, L'Évolution créatrice, (Review of Theology and Philosophy, Oct. 1907, pp. 249-251).
H. Wildon Carr, Bergson's Theory of Knowledge, (Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, London, 1909. New Series, Vol. IX, pp. 41-60).
H. Wildon Carr, Bergson's Theory of Knowledge, (Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, London, 1909. New Series, Vol. IX, pp. 41-60).
H. Wildon Carr, Bergson's Theory of Instinct, (Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, London, 1910, N.S., Vol. X).
H. Wildon Carr, Bergson's Theory of Instinct, (Proceedings of the Aristotelian Society, London, 1910, N.S., Vol. X).
H. Wildon Carr, The Philosophy of Bergson, (Hibbert Journal, July 1910, pp. 873-883).
H. Wildon Carr, The Philosophy of Bergson, (Hibbert Journal, July 1910, pp. 873-883).
W. J. Ferrar, L'Évolution créatrice, (Commonwealth, Dec. 1909, pp. 364-367).
W. J. Ferrar, Creative Evolution, (Commonwealth, Dec. 1909, pp. 364-367).
H. N. Gardiner, Mémoire et reconnaissance, (Psychological Review, 1896, pp. 578-580).
H. N. Gardiner, Memory and Recognition, (Psychological Review, 1896, pp. 578-580).
T. E. Hulme, The New Philosophy, (New Age, July 1, 29, 1909).
T. E. Hulme, The New Philosophy, (New Age, July 1, 29, 1909).
William James, A Pluralistic Universe, London, 1909, pp. 225-273.
William James, A Pluralistic Universe, London, 1909, pp. 225-273.
William James, The Philosophy of Bergson, (Hibbert Journal, April 1909, pp. 562-577. Reprinted in A Pluralistic Universe; see above).
William James, The Philosophy of Bergson, (Hibbert Journal, April 1909, pp. 562-577. Reprinted in A Pluralistic Universe; see above).
William James, Bradley or Bergson? (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. VII, No. 2, Jan. 20, 1910, pp. 29-33).
William James, Bradley or Bergson? (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. VII, No. 2, Jan. 20, 1910, pp. 29-33).
H. M. Kallen, James, Bergson and Mr. Pitkin, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, June 23, 1910, pp. 353-357).
H. M. Kallen, James, Bergson and Mr. Pitkin, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, June 23, 1910, pp. 353-357).
A. Lalande, Philosophy in France, 1907, (Philosophical Review, May, 1908).
A. Lalande, Philosophy in France, 1907, (Philosophical Review, May, 1908).
J. A. Leighton, On Continuity and Discreteness, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Apr. 28, 1910, pp. 231-238).
J. A. Leighton, On Continuity and Discreteness, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Apr. 28, 1910, pp. 231-238).
T. Loveday, L'Évolution créatrice, (Mind, July 1908, pp. 402-8).
T. Loveday, Creative Evolution, (Mind, July 1908, pp. 402-8).
A. O. Lovejoy, The Metaphysician of the Life-Force, (Nation, New York, Sept. 30, 1909).
A. O. Lovejoy, The Metaphysician of the Life-Force, (Nation, New York, Sept. 30, 1909).
A. Mitchell, L'Évolution créatrice, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. V, No. 22, Oct. 22, 1908, pp. 603-612).
A. Mitchell, The Creative Evolution, (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Vol. V, No. 22, Oct. 22, 1908, pp. 603-612).
W. Scott Palmer, Presence and Omnipresence, (Contemporary Review, June 1908, pp. 734-742).
W. Scott Palmer, Presence and Omnipresence, (Contemporary Review, June 1908, pp. 734-742).
W. Scott Palmer, Thought and Instinct, (Nation, June 5, 1909).
W. Scott Palmer, Thought and Instinct, (Nation, June 5, 1909).
W. Scott Palmer, Life and the Brain, (Contemporary Review, Oct., 1909, pp. 474-484).
W. Scott Palmer, Life and the Brain, (Contemporary Review, Oct. 1909, pp. 474-484).
W. B. Pitkin, James and Bergson; or, Who is against Intellect? (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Apr. 28, 1910, pp. 225-231).
W. B. Pitkin, James and Bergson; or, Who's against Intellect? (Journal of Philosophy, Psychology and Scientific Methods, Apr. 28, 1910, pp. 225-231).
G. R. T. Ross, A New Theory of Laughter, (Nation, Nov. 28, 1908).
G. R. T. Ross, A New Theory of Laughter, (Nation, Nov. 28, 1908).
G. R. T. Ross, The Philosophy of Vitalism, (Nation, Mar. 13, 1909)
G. R. T. Ross, The Philosophy of Vitalism, (Nation, Mar. 13, 1909)
J. Royce, The Reality of the Temporal, (Int. Journal of Ethics, Apr. 1910, pp. 257-271).
J. Royce, The Reality of the Temporal, (Int. Journal of Ethics, Apr. 1910, pp. 257-271).
G. M. Sauvage, The New Philosophy in France, (Catholic University Bulletin, Washington, Apr. 1906, Mar. 1908).
G. M. Sauvage, The New Philosophy in France, (Catholic University Bulletin, Washington, Apr. 1906, Mar. 1908).
Norman Smith, Subjectivism and Realism in Modern Philosophy, (Philosophical Review, Apr. 1908, pp. 138-148).
Norman Smith, Subjectivism and Realism in Modern Philosophy, (Philosophical Review, Apr. 1908, pp. 138-148).
G. F. Stout, Free Will and Determinism, (Speaker, London, May 10, 1890).
G. F. Stout, Free Will and Determinism, (Speaker, London, May 10, 1890).
J. H. Tufts, Humor, (Psychological Review, 1901, pp. 98-99).
J. H. Tufts, Humor, (Psychological Review, 1901, pp. 98-99).
G. Tyrrell, Creative Evolution, (Hibbert Journal, Jan. 1908, pp. 435-442).
G. Tyrrell, Creative Evolution, (Hibbert Journal, Jan. 1908, pp. 435-442).
T. Whittaker, Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, (Mind, Apr. 1890, pp. 292-3).
T. Whittaker, Essay on the Immediate Data of Consciousness, (Mind, Apr. 1890, pp. 292-3).
G. Aimel, Individualisme et philosophie bergsonienne, (Revue de Philos., June 1908).
G. Aimel, Individualism and Bergsonian Philosophy, (Philosophy Review, June 1908).
Balthasar, Le problème de Dieu d'après la philosophie nouvelle, (Revue néo-scolastique, Nov. 1907).
Balthasar, The Problem of God According to New Philosophy, (Néo-Scholastic Review, Nov. 1907).
G. Batault, La philosophie de M. Bergson, (Mercure de France, Mar. 16, 1908, pp. 193-211).
G. Batault, The Philosophy of Mr. Bergson, (Mercure de France, Mar. 16, 1908, pp. 193-211).
G. Belot, Une théorie nouvelle de la liberté, (Revue philosophique, Vol. XXX, 1890, pp. 360-392).
G. Belot, A New Theory of Freedom, (Philosophical Review, Vol. XXX, 1890, pp. 360-392).
G. Belot, Un nouveau spiritualisme, Matière et Mémoire, (Rev. philos. Vol. XLIV, 1897, pp. 183-199).
G. Belot, A New Spiritualism, Matter and Memory, (Philosophical Review. Vol. XLIV, 1897, pp. 183-199).
Jean Blum, La philosophie de M. Bergson et la poésie symboliste, (Mercure de France, Sept. 15, 1906).
Jean Blum, The Philosophy of M. Bergson and Symbolist Poetry, (Mercure de France, Sept. 15, 1906).
C. Bougie, Syndicalistes et Bergsoniens, (Revue du Mois, Apr. 1909, pp. 403-416).
C. Bougie, Syndicalists and Bergsonians, (Monthly Review, Apr. 1909, pp. 403-416).
G. Cantecor, La philosophie nouvelle et la vie de l'esprit, (Rev. philos. Mar. 1903, pp. 252-277).
G. Cantecor, The New Philosophy and the Life of the Mind, (Rev. philos. Mar. 1903, pp. 252-277).
P. Cérésole, Le parallélisme psycho-physiologique et l'argument de M. Bergson, (Archives de Psychologie, Vol. V, Oct. 1905, pp. 112-120).
P. Cérésole, The Psycho-Physiological Parallelism and Mr. Bergson's Argument, (Archives of Psychology, Vol. V, Oct. 1905, pp. 112-120).
A. Chaumeix, La philosophie de M. Bergson, (Journal des Débats, May 24, 1908. Reprinted in Pragmatisme et Modernisme, Paris, Alcan, 1909).
A. Chaumeix, The Philosophy of M. Bergson, (Journal des Débats, May 24, 1908. Reprinted in Pragmatism and Modernism, Paris, Alcan, 1909).
A. Chaumeix, Les critiques du rationalisme, (Revue Hebdomadaire, Paris, Jan. I, 1910, pp. 1-33).
A. Chaumeix, The Critiques of Rationalism, (Weekly Review, Paris, Jan. 1, 1910, pp. 1-33).
A. Chide, Le mobilisme moderne, Paris, Alcan, 1908. (See also Revue philos., Apr. 1908, Dec. 1909).
A. Chide, The Modern Mobility, Paris, Alcan, 1908. (See also Philosophical Review, Apr. 1908, Dec. 1909).
C. Coignet, Kant et Bergson, (Revue Chrétienne, July 1904).
C. Coignet, Kant and Bergson, (Christian Review, July 1904).
C. Coignet, La vie d'après M. Bergson, (Bericht über den III Kongress für Philosophie, Heidelberg, 1909, pp. 358-364).
C. Coignet, Life After M. Bergson, (Report on the III Congress for Philosophy, Heidelberg, 1909, pp. 358-364).
L. Constant, Cours de M. Bergson sur l'histoire de l'idée de temps, (Revue de Philos. Jan. 1904, pp. 105-111. Summary of lectures).
L. Constant, Course by M. Bergson on the History of the Idea of Time, (Review of Philosophy. Jan. 1904, pp. 105-111. Summary of lectures).
P. L. Couchoud, La métaphysique nouvelle, à propos de Matière et Mémoire de M. Bergson, (Revue de Métaphysique et de Morale, Mar. 1902, pp. 225-243).
P. L. Couchoud, The New Metaphysics, regarding Matter and Memory by M. Bergson, (Review of Metaphysics and Morality, Mar. 1902, pp. 225-243).
L. Couturat, La théorie du temps de Bergson, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. 1896, pp. 646-669).
L. Couturat, The Theory of Time by Bergson, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. 1896, pp. 646-669).
Léon Cristiani, Le problème de Dieu et le pragmatisme, Paris, Bloud et Cie., 1908.
Léon Cristiani, The Problem of God and Pragmatism, Paris, Bloud et Cie., 1908.
F. Le Dantec, L'Évolution créatrice, (Revue du Mois, Aug. 1907. Reprinted in Science et Conscience, Paris, Flammarion, 1908).
F. Le Dantec, L'Évolution créatrice, (Revue du Mois, Aug. 1907. Reprinted in Science et Conscience, Paris, Flammarion, 1908).
L. Dauriac, Le Rire, (Revue philos. Dec. 1900, pp. 665-670).
L. Dauriac, Le Rire, (Revue philos. Dec. 1900, pp. 665-670).
V. Delbos, Matière et Mémoire, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. May 1897, pp. 353-389).
V. Delbos, Matter and Memory, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. May 1897, pp. 353-389).
G. L. Duprat, La spatialité des faits psychiques, (Rev. philos., May 1907, pp. 492-501).
G. L. Duprat, The Spatiality of Psychic Facts, (Philosophical Review, May 1907, pp. 492-501).
G. Dwelshauvers, Raison et Intuition, Étude sur la philosophie de M. Bergson, (La Belgique artistique et littéraire, Nov. Dec. 1905, Apr. 1906).
G. Dwelshauvers, Reason and Intuition, Study on the Philosophy of M. Bergson, (The Artistic and Literary Belgium, Nov. Dec. 1905, Apr. 1906).
G. Dwelshauvers, M. Bergson et la méthode intuitive, (Revue du Mois, Sept. 1907, pp. 336-350).
G. Dwelshauvers, M. Bergson and the intuitive method, (Revue du Mois, Sept. 1907, pp. 336-350).
G. Dwelshauvers, De l'intuition dans l'acte de l'esprit, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1908, pp. 55-65).
G. Dwelshauvers, On Intuition in the Act of the Mind, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Jan. 1908, pp. 55-65).
A. Farges, Le problème de la contingence d'après M. Bergson, (Revue pratique d'apologétique, Apr. 15, 1909).
A. Farges, The Problem of Contingency According to M. Bergson, (Practical Review of Apologetics, Apr. 15, 1909).
A. Farges, L'erreur fondamentale de la philosophie nouvelle, (Revue thomiste, May-June, 1909).
A. Farges, The Fundamental Error of the New Philosophy, (Thomist Review, May-June, 1909).
A. Farges, Théorie fondamentale de l'acte, avec la critique de la philosophie nouvelle de M. Bergson, Paris, Berche et Tralin, 1909.
A. Farges, Fundamental Theory of Action, with a Critique of the New Philosophy by M. Bergson, Paris, Berche et Tralin, 1909.
Alfred Fouillée, Le mouvement idéaliste et la réaction contre la science positive, Paris, Alcan, 1896, pp. 198-206.
Alfred Fouillée, The Idealist Movement and the Reaction Against Positive Science, Paris, Alcan, 1896, pp. 198-206.
Fr. Garrigou-Lagrange, Le sens commun, la philosophie de l'être et les formules dogmatiques, Paris, Beauchesne, 1909.
Fr. Garrigou-Lagrange, Common Sense, the Philosophy of Being, and Dogmatic Formulas, Paris, Beauchesne, 1909.
Jules de Gaultier, Le réalisme du continu, (Revue philos., Jan. 1910, pp. 39-64).
Jules de Gaultier, The Realism of Continuity, (Philosophical Review, Jan. 1910, pp. 39-64).
René Gillouin, Henri Bergson, Paris, 1910. (A volume in the series Les grands philosophes).
René Gillouin, Henri Bergson, Paris, 1910. (A volume in the series Les grands philosophes).
A. Hollard, L'Évolution créatrice, (Foi et Vie, Sept. 16, 1907, pp. 545-550).
A. Hollard, The Creative Evolution, (Faith and Life, Sept. 16, 1907, pp. 545-550).
B. Jacob, La philosophie d'hier et celle d'aujourd'hui, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Mar. 1898, pp. 170-201).
B. Jacob, The Philosophy of Yesterday and Today, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Mar. 1898, pp. 170-201).
G. Lechalas, Le nombre et le temps dans leurs rapports avec l'espace, (Ann. de Phil, chrét. N.S. Vol. 22, 1890, pp. 516-540).
G. Lechalas, The number and time in their relationship with space, (Ann. de Phil, chrét. N.S. Vol. 22, 1890, pp. 516-540).
G. Lechalas, Matière et Mémoire, (Ann. de Phil. chrét. N.S. Vol. 36, 1897, pp. 149-164 and 314-334)
G. Lechalas, Matter and Memory, (Ann. de Phil. chrét. N.S. Vol. 36, 1897, pp. 149-164 and 314-334)
A. Joussain, Romantisme et Religion, Paris, Alcan, 1910.
A. Joussain, Romanticism and Religion, Paris, Alcan, 1910.
Legendre, M. Bergson et son Évolution créatrice, (Bulletin de la Semaine, May 6, 1908).
Legendre, M. Bergson and his Creative Evolution, (Bulletin de la Semaine, May 6, 1908).
Lenoble, L'Évolution créatrice, (Revue du Clergé français, Jan., 1908).
Lenoble, The Creative Evolution, (Review of the French Clergy, Jan., 1908).
E. Le Roy, Science et Philosophie, (A Series of articles in the Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. 1899 and 1900).
E. Le Roy, Science and Philosophy, (A Series of articles in the Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. 1899 and 1900).
L. Lévy-Bruhl, L'Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, (Rev. philos., Vol. 29, 1890, pp. 519-538).
L. Lévy-Bruhl, L'Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, (Rev. philos., Vol. 29, 1890, pp. 519-538).
G. H. Luquet, Idées générales de psychologie, Paris, 1906.
G. H. Luquet, General Ideas of Psychology, Paris, 1906.
J. Lux, Nos philosophes, M. Henri Bergson, (Revue Bleue, Dec. 1, 1906).
J. Lux, Our philosophers, M. Henri Bergson, (Revue Bleue, Dec. 1, 1906).
X. Moisant, La notion de multiplicité dans la philosophie de M. Bergson, (Revue de Philos., June, 1902).
X. Moisant, The Concept of Multiplicity in M. Bergson's Philosophy, (Revue de Philos., June, 1902).
X. Moisant, Dieu dans la philosophie de M. Bergson, (Revue de Philos., May, 1905).
X. Moisant, God in the Philosophy of Mr. Bergson, (Review of Philosophy, May, 1905).
G. Mondain, Remarques sur la théorie matérialiste, (Foi et Vie, June 15, 1908, pp. 369-373).
G. Mondain, Observations on Materialist Theory, (Faith and Life, June 15, 1908, pp. 369-373).
D. Parodi, Le Rire, par H. Bergson, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Mar. 1901, pp. 224-236).
D. Parodi, Le Rire, by H. Bergson, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Mar. 1901, pp. 224-236).
T. M. Pègues, L'Évolution créatrice (Revue thomiste, May-June 1908, pp. 137-163).
T. M. Pègues, Creative Evolution (Thomistic Review, May-June 1908, pp. 137-163).
C. Piat, De l'insuffisance des philosophies de l'intuition, Paris, 1908.
C. Piat, The Insufficiency of Intuition Philosophies, Paris, 1908.
Maurice Pradines, Principes de toute philosophie de l'action, Paris, 1910.
Maurice Pradines, Principles of Any Philosophy of Action, Paris, 1910.
G. Rageot, L'Évolution créatrice, (Rev. philos., July 1907). Reprinted and enlarged in Les savants et la philosophie, Paris, Alcan, 1907.
G. Rageot, The Creative Evolution, (Philosophical Review, July 1907). Reprinted and expanded in Scientists and Philosophy, Paris, Alcan, 1907.
F. Rauh, La conscience du devenir, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1897, pp. 659-681, and Jan. 1898, pp. 38-60).
F. Rauh, The Awareness of Becoming, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1897, pp. 659-681, and Jan. 1898, pp. 38-60).
F. Rauh, Sur la position du problème du libre arbitre, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1904, pp. 977-1006).
F. Rauh, On the Position of the Problem of Free Will, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Nov. 1904, pp. 977-1006).
P. P. Raymond, La philosophie de l'intuition et la philosophie du concept, (Études franciscaines, June 1909).
P. P. Raymond, The Philosophy of Intuition and the Philosophy of Concept, (Franciscan Studies, June 1909).
E. Seillière, L'Allemagne et la philosophie bergsonienne, (L'Opinion, July 3, 1909).
E. Seillière, Germany and Bergsonian Philosophy, (Opinion, July 3, 1909).
G. Sorel, L'Évolution créatrice, (Le Mouvement socialiste, Oct. Dec. 1907, Jan. Mar. Apr. 1908).
G. Sorel, Creative Evolution, (The Socialist Movement, Oct. Dec. 1907, Jan. Mar. Apr. 1908).
T. Steeg, Henri Bergson: Notice biographique avec portrait, (Revue universelle, Jan. 1902, pp. 15-16).
T. Steeg, Henri Bergson: Biographical notice with portrait, (Revue universelle, Jan. 1902, pp. 15-16).
J. de Tonquébec, La notion de la vérité dans la philosophie nouvelle, Paris, 1908.
J. de Tonquébec, The Concept of Truth in New Philosophy, Paris, 1908.
J. de Tonquébec, Comment interpréter l'ordre du monde à propos du dernier ouvrage de M. Bergson, Paris, Beauchesne, 1908.
J. de Tonquébec, How to Interpret the Order of the World in Relation to the Latest Work by M. Bergson, Paris, Beauchesne, 1908.
H. Trouche, L'Évolution créatrice, (Revue de Philos. Nov. 1908).
H. Trouche, The Creative Evolution, (Philosophy Review. Nov. 1908).
H. Villassère, L'Évolution créatrice, (Bulletin critique, Sept. 1908, pp. 392-411.)
H. Villassère, Creative Evolution, (Critical Bulletin, Sept. 1908, pp. 392-411.)
Tancrède de Visan, La philosophie de M. Bergson et le lyrisme contemporain, (Vers et Prose, Vol. XXI, 1910, pp. 125-140).
Tancrède de Visan, The Philosophy of M. Bergson and Contemporary Lyricism, (Vers et Prose, Vol. XXI, 1910, pp. 125-140).
L. Weber, L'Évolution créatrice, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Sept. 1907, pp. 620-670).
L. Weber, L'Évolution créatrice, (Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. Sept. 1907, pp. 620-670).
V. Wilbois, L'esprit positif, (A series of articles in the Rev. de Mét. et de Mor.1900 and 1901).
V. Wilbois, The Positive Spirit, (A series of articles in the Rev. de Mét. et de Mor. 1900 and 1901).
I. Benrubi, Henri Bergson, (Die Zukunft, June 4, 1910).
I. Benrubi, Henri Bergson, (The Future, June 4, 1910).
K. Bornhausen, Die Philosophie Henri Bergsons und ihre Bedeutung für den Religionsbegriff, (Zeitschrift für Theologie und Kirche, Tübingen, Jahrg. XX, Heft I 1910, pp. 39-77.)
K. Bornhausen, The Philosophy of Henri Bergson and Its Significance for the Concept of Religion, (Journal of Theology and Church, Tübingen, Vol. XX, No. I 1910, pp. 39-77.)
O. Braun, Materie und Gedächtnis, (Archiv für die gesamte Psychologie, Vol. 15, 1909, Heft 4, pp. 13-15).
O. Braun, Matter and Memory, (Archive for General Psychology, Vol. 15, 1909, Issue 4, pp. 13-15).
Hans Driesch, H. Bergson, der biologische Philosoph., (Zeitschrift für den Ausbau der Entwickelungslehre, Jahrg. II, Heft 1/2, Stuttgart, 1908).
Hans Driesch, H. Bergson, the biological philosopher., (Journal for the Development of Evolutionary Theory, Year II, Issue 1/2, Stuttgart, 1908).
V. Eschbach, Henri Bergson, (Kölnische Volkszeitung, Jan. 20, 1910).
V. Eschbach, Henri Bergson, (Kölnische Volkszeitung, Jan. 20, 1910).
Giessler, Le Rêve, (Zeitschrift für Psychologie und Physiologie der Sinnesorgane, Vol. 29, 1902, p. 231).
Giessler, Le Rêve, (Journal of Psychology and Physiology of the Sense Organs, Vol. 29, 1902, p. 231).
J. Goldstein, Henri Bergson und der Zeitlosigkeitsidealismus, (Frankfurter Zeitung, May 2, 1909).
J. Goldstein, Henri Bergson and the Idealism of Timelessness, (Frankfurter Zeitung, May 2, 1909).
J. Goldstein, Henri Bergson und die Sozialwissenschaft, (Archiv für Sozialwissenschaft und Sozialpolitik, Bd. XXXI, Heft 1, July 1910, pp. 1-22).
J. Goldstein, Henri Bergson and the Social Sciences, (Archive for Social Science and Social Policy, Vol. XXXI, Issue 1, July 1910, pp. 1-22).
A. Gurewitsch, Die französische Metaphysik der Gegenwart (Archiv für system. Philos. Bd. IX, Heft 4, Nov. 1903, pp. 462-490).
A. Gurewitsch, The French Metaphysics of the Present (Archive for Systematic Philosophy Vol. IX, Issue 4, Nov. 1903, pp. 462-490).
Heymans, Le Rire, (Zeitsch. f. Psychol, u. Physiol. d. Sinnesorgane, Vol. 25, 1901, pp. 155-6).
Heymans, Le Rire, (Zeitsch. f. Psychol, u. Physiol. d. Sinnesorgane, Vol. 25, 1901, pp. 155-6).
K. Joël, Neues Denken, (Neue Rundschau, Apr. 1910, pp. 549-558).
K. Joël, New Thinking, (New Review, Apr. 1910, pp. 549-558).
H. von Keyserling, Bergson, (Allgemeine Zeitung, München, Nov. 28, 1908).
H. von Keyserling, Bergson, (Allgemeine Zeitung, Munich, Nov. 28, 1908).
R. Kroner, Henri Bergson, (Logos, Bd. I, Heft 1, Tübingen, 1910).
R. Kroner, Henri Bergson, (Logos, Vol. I, Issue 1, Tübingen, 1910).
A. Lasson, H. Bergson, (Deutsche Literaturzeitung, May 28, 1910).
A. Lasson, H. Bergson, (German Literature Newspaper, May 28, 1910).
R. Müller-Freienfels, Materie und Gedächtnis, (Zeitsch. f. Psychol. u. Physiol. d. Sinnesorgane, May 1910, Vol. 56, Heft 1/2, pp. 126-129).
R. Müller-Freienfels, Matter and Memory, (Journal of Psychology and Physiology of the Sense Organs, May 1910, Vol. 56, Issue 1/2, pp. 126-129).
Α. Pilzecker, Mémoire et reconnaissance, (Zeitsch. f. Psychol. u. Physiol. d. Sinnesorgane, Vol. 13, 1897, pp. 229-232).
A. Pilzecker, Memory and Recognition, (Journal of Psychology and Physiology of the Senses, Vol. 13, 1897, pp. 229-232).
Hans Prager, Henri Bergsons metaphysische Grundanschauung, (Archiv für system. Philos. 1910, Bd. XVI, Heft 3, pp. 310-320).
Hans Prager, Henri Bergson's metaphysical worldview, (Archiv für system. Philos. 1910, Vol. XVI, No. 3, pp. 310-320).
G. Seliber, Der Pragmatismus und seine Gegner, (Archiv für system. Philos. 1909, pp. 287-298).
G. Seliber, The Pragmatism and Its Opponents, (Archive for Systematic Philosophy 1909, pp. 287-298).
A. Steenbergen, Henri Bergsons Intuitive Philosophie, Jena, 1909.
A. Steenbergen, Henri Bergson's Intuitive Philosophy, Jena, 1909.
W. Windelband, Preface to Materie und Gedächtnis, Jena, 1908, pp. I-XV.
W. Windelband, Preface to Materie und Gedächtnis, Jena, 1908, pp. I-XV.
Th. Ziehen, Matière et Mémoire, (Zeitschrift für Philosophie und philos. Kritik, Dec. 1898, pp. 295-299).
Th. Ziehen, Matter and Memory, (Journal for Philosophy and Philosophical Critique, Dec. 1898, pp. 295-299).
Roberto Ardigò, Una pretesa pregiudiziale contro il positivismo, (Rivista di Filosofia e Scienze affini, Jan.-Feb., Mar.-Apr. 1908. Reprinted in Collected Works, Vol. 10).
Roberto Ardigò, A Preliminary Objection to Positivism, (Journal of Philosophy and Related Sciences, Jan.-Feb., Mar.-Apr. 1908. Reprinted in Collected Works, Vol. 10).
A. Crespi, La metafisica di H. Bergson, (Coenobium, July-Aug. 1908).
A. Crespi, The Metaphysics of H. Bergson, (Coenobium, July-Aug. 1908).
L. Ferri, Essai sur les données immédiates de la conscience, (Rivista Italiana di Filosofia, Mar.-Apr. 1890, pp. 248-9).
L. Ferri, Essay on the Immediate Data of Consciousness, (Italian Journal of Philosophy, Mar.-Apr. 1890, pp. 248-9).
A. Levi, Sulle ultime forme dell' indeterminismo francese, Firenze, Civelli, 1903.
A. Levi, On the Latest Forms of French Indeterminism, Florence, Civelli, 1903.
A. Levi, L'Indeterminismo nella filosofia francese contemporanea, Firenze, Seeber, 1905.
A. Levi, The Indeterminism in Contemporary French Philosophy, Florence, Seeber, 1905.
F. Masci, L'idealismo indeterminista, Napoli, 1899.
F. Masci, Indeterministic Idealism, Naples, 1899.
E. Morselli, Un nuovo idealismo, (H. Bergson), Udine, Tosolini, 1900.
E. Morselli, A New Idealism, (H. Bergson), Udine, Tosolini, 1900.
I. Petrone, Sui limiti del determinismo scientifico, Modena, 1900; Roma, 1903.
I. Petrone, On the Limits of Scientific Determinism, Modena, 1900; Rome, 1903.
G. Prezzolini, Del linguaggio come causa di errore, (H. Bergson), Firenze, Spinelli, 1904.
G. Prezzolini, On Language as a Cause of Error, (H. Bergson), Florence, Spinelli, 1904.
G. Prezzolini, La filosofia di H. Bergson, (in La Teoria Sindacalista, Napoli, Perrella, 1909, pp. 283-335).
G. Prezzolini, The Philosophy of H. Bergson, (in The Syndicalist Theory, Naples, Perrella, 1909, pp. 283-335).
F. de Sarlo, Le correnti filosofiche del secolo XIX, (Flegrea, III 6; Sept. 20, 1901, pp. 531-554).
F. de Sarlo, The Philosophical Currents of the 19th Century, (Flegrea, III 6; Sept. 20, 1901, pp. 531-554).
G. Tarozzi, Della necessità nel fatto naturale ed umano, Torino, Loescher, 1896-97.
G. Tarozzi, The Necessity in Natural and Human Facts, Turin, Loescher, 1896-97.
B. Varisco, La filosofia della contingenza, (Rivista filosofica, Vol. VIII, 1905, pp. 1-37).
B. Varisco, The Philosophy of Contingency, (Philosophical Review, Vol. VIII, 1905, pp. 1-37).
B. Varisco, La Creazione, (Rivista filosofica, Mar.-Apr. 1908, pp. 149-180).
B. Varisco, The Creation, (Philosophical Review, Mar.-Apr. 1908, pp. 149-180).
C. Antoniade, Filosofia lui Henri Bergson, (Studii filosofice, Bucarest, 1908, Vol. II, pp. 161-192 and 259-278).
C. Antoniade, The Philosophy of Henri Bergson, (Philosophical Studies, Bucharest, 1908, Vol. II, pp. 161-192 and 259-278).
F. Garcia Calderôn, Dos filosofos franceses, Bergson y Boutroux, (El Comercio, Lima, May 5, 1907).
F. Garcia Calderôn, Two French philosophers, Bergson and Boutroux, (El Comercio, Lima, May 5, 1907).
E. Duprat, Estudios de Filosofia contemporanea: la Filosofia de H. Bergson, (Cultura Espanola, Madrid, 1908, pp. 185-202 and 567-584).
E. Duprat, Studies in Contemporary Philosophy: The Philosophy of H. Bergson, (Spanish Culture, Madrid, 1908, pp. 185-202 and 567-584).
Silberstein, L'Évolution créatrice, (Przeglad Filozoficzny, 1908).
Silberstein, Creative Evolution, (Philosophical Review, 1908).
Michal Sobeski, H. Bergson, (Kurier Warszawski, 20, stycznia, 1910).
Michal Sobeski, H. Bergson, (Kurier Warszawski, January 20, 1910).
AUTHOR'S PREFACE
We necessarily express ourselves by means of words and we usually think in terms of space. That is to say, language requires us to establish between our ideas the same sharp and precise distinctions, the same discontinuity, as between material objects. This assimilation of thought to things is useful in practical life and necessary in most of the sciences. But it may be asked whether the insurmountable difficulties presented by certain philosophical problems do not arise from our placing side by side in space phenomena which do not occupy space, and whether, by merely getting rid of the clumsy symbols round which we are fighting, we might not bring the fight to an end. When an illegitimate translation of the unextended into the extended, of quality into quantity, has introduced contradiction into the very heart of the question, contradiction must, of course, recur in the answer.
We express ourselves through words and usually think in terms of space. In other words, language requires us to create the same clear and precise distinctions, the same separations, as between physical objects. This alignment of thought with things is helpful in practical life and essential in most sciences. However, one might wonder if the overwhelming challenges presented by certain philosophical issues stem from our placing side by side in space phenomena that don’t actually take up space, and whether simply removing the awkward symbols we’re grappling with could lead to a resolution. When an improper translation of the non-extended into the extended, of quality into quantity, introduces contradiction into the very heart of the matter, that contradiction will inevitably appear in the answer.
The problem which I have chosen is one which is common to metaphysics and psychology, the problem of free will. What I attempt to prove is that all discussion between the determinists and their opponents implies a previous confusion[Pg xx] of duration with extensity, of succession with simultaneity, of quality with quantity: this confusion once dispelled, we may perhaps witness the disappearance of the objections raised against free will, of the definitions given of it, and, in a certain sense, of the problem of free will itself. To prove this is the object of the third part of the present volume: the first two chapters, which treat of the conceptions of intensity and duration, have been written as an introduction to the third.
The issue I've selected is one that connects metaphysics and psychology: the problem of free will. My aim is to demonstrate that all arguments between determinists and their critics stem from a prior mix-up of duration with extent, succession with simultaneity, and quality with quantity. Once we clear up this confusion, we might see the objections against free will fade away, along with the definitions provided for it, and in some way, the problem of free will itself could vanish. This is the goal of the third part of this book; the first two chapters, which focus on the concepts of intensity and duration, serve as an introduction to the third.
H. BERGSON.
H. Bergson.
February, 1888.
February 1888.
CONTENTS
CHAPTER I
CHAPTER I
THE INTENSITY OF PSYCHIC STATES
THE INTENSITY OF PSYCHIC STATES
Quantitative differences applicable to magnitudes but not to intensities, 1-4; Attempt to estimate intensities by objective causes or atomic movements, 4-7; Different kinds of intensities, 7; Deep-seated psychic states: desire, 8, hope, 9, joy and sorrow, 10; Aesthetic feelings, 11-18: grace, 12, beauty, 14-18, music, poetry, art, 15-18; Moral feelings, pity, 19; Conscious states involving physical symptoms, 20: muscular effort, 21-26, attention and muscular tension, 27-28; Violent emotions, 29-31: rage, 29, fear, 30; Affective sensations, 32-39: pleasure and pain, 33-39, disgust, 36; Representative sensations, 39-60: and external causes, 42, sensation of sound, 43, intensity, pitch and muscular effort, 45-46, sensations of heat and cold, 46-47, sensations of pressure and weight, 47-50, sensation of light, 50-60, photometric experiments, 52-60, Delbœuf's experiments, 56-60; Psychophysics, 60-72: Weber and Fechner, 61-65, Delbœuf, 67-70, the mistake of regarding sensations as magnitudes, 70-72; Intensity in (1) representative, (2) affective states, intensity and multiplicity, 72-74.
Quantitative differences apply to magnitudes but not to intensities, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; attempts to measure intensities via objective causes or atomic movements, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__; various types of intensities, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__; deep-seated psychological states: desire, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, hope, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, joy and sorrow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__; aesthetic feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_8__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_9__: grace, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_10__, beauty, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_11__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_12__, music, poetry, art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_13__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_14__; moral feelings, pity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_15__; conscious states involving physical symptoms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_16__: muscular effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_17__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_18__, attention and muscular tension, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_19__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_20__; intense emotions, 29-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_21__: anger, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_22__, fear, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_23__; affective sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_24__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_25__: pleasure and pain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_26__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_27__, disgust, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_28__; representative sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_29__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_30__: and external causes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_31__, the sensation of sound, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_32__, intensity, pitch, and muscular effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_33__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_34__, sensations of heat and cold, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_35__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_36__, sensations of pressure and weight, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_37__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_38__, the sensation of light, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_39__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_40__, photometric experiments, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_41__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_42__, Delbœuf's experiments, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_43__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_44__; psychophysics, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_45__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_46__: Weber and Fechner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_47__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_48__, Delbœuf, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_49__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_50__, the mistake of treating sensations as magnitudes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_51__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_52__; intensity in (1) representative, (2) affective states, intensity and multiplicity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_53__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_54__.
CHAPTER II
CHAPTER II
THE MULTIPLICITY OF CONSCIOUS STATES
THE MULTIPLICITY OF CONSCIOUS STATES
THE IDEA OF DURATION
THE IDEA OF DURATION
Number and its units, 75-77, number and accompanying intuition of space, 78-85; Two kinds of multiplicity, of[Pg xxii] material objects and conscious states, 85-87, impenetrability of matter, 88-89, homogeneous time and pure duration, 90-91; Space and its contents, 92, empirical theories of space, 93-94, intuition of empty homogeneous medium peculiar to man, 95-97, time as homogeneous medium reducible to space, 98-99; Duration, succession and space, 100-104, pure duration, 105-106; Is duration measurable? 107-110; Is motion measurable? 111-112; Paradox of the Eleatics, 113-115; Duration and simultaneity, 115-116; Velocity and simultaneity, 117-119; Space alone homogeneous, duration and succession belong to conscious mind, 120-121; Two kinds of multiplicity, qualitative and quantitative, 121-123, superficial psychic states invested with discontinuity of their external causes, 124-126, these eliminated, real duration is felt as a quality, 127-128; The two aspects of the self, on the surface well-defined conscious states, deeper down states which interpenetrate and form organic whole, 129-139, solidifying influence of language on sensation, 129-132, analysis distorts the feelings, 132-134, deeper conscious states forming a part of ourselves, 134-136; Problems soluble only by recourse to the concrete and living self, 137-139.
Number and its units, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_57__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_58__, numbers and our understanding of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_59__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_60__; two types of multiplicity: material objects and conscious experiences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_61__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_62__, the impenetrability of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_63__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_64__, uniform time and pure duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_65__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_66__; space and what it contains, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_67__, empirical theories of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_68__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_69__, the human intuition of an empty, uniform medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_70__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_71__, time as a uniform medium that can be reduced to space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_72__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_73__; duration, succession and space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_74__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_75__, pure duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_76__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_77__; is duration measurable? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_78__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_79__; is motion measurable? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_80__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_81__; the Paradox of the Eleatics, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_82__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_83__; duration and simultaneity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_84__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_85__; velocity and simultaneity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_86__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_87__; space alone is uniform; duration and succession belong to the conscious mind, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_88__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_89__; two types of multiplicity, qualitative and quantitative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_90__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_91__, superficial psychic states that are disconnected from their external causes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_92__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_93__, when these are removed, real duration is experienced as a quality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_94__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_95__; the two aspects of the self, on the surface, include well-defined conscious states, but deeper down are states that interpenetrate and form an organic whole, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_96__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_97__; the solidifying influence of language on sensation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_98__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_99__; analysis distorts our feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_100__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_101__; deeper conscious states that are part of who we are, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_102__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_103__; problems that can only be solved by turning to the concrete and living self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_104__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_105__.
CHAPTER III
CHAPTER III
THE ORGANIZATION OF CONSCIOUS STATES
THE ORGANIZATION OF CONSCIOUS STATES
FREE WILL
FREE WILL
Dynamism and mechanism, 140-142; Two kinds of determinism, 142; Physical determinism, 143-155: and molecular theory of matter, 143, and conservation of energy, 144, if conservation universal, physiological and nervous phenomena necessitated, but perhaps not conscious states, 145-148, but is principle of conversation universal? 149, it may not apply to living beings and conscious states, 150-154, idea of its universality depends on confusion between concrete duration and abstract time, 154-155; Psychological determinism, 155-163:[Pg xxiii] implies associationist conception of mind, 155-158, this involves defective conception of self, 159-163; The free act: freedom as expressing the fundamental self, 165-170; Real duration and contingency, 172-182: could our act have been different? 172-175, geometrical representation of process of coming to a decision, 175-178, the fallacies to which it leads determinists and libertarians, 179-183; Real duration and prediction, 183-198: conditions of Paul's prediction of Peter's action (1) being Peter (2) knowing already his final act, 184-189, the three fallacies involved, 190-192, astronomical prediction depends on hypothetical acceleration of movements, 193-195, duration cannot be thus accelerated, 196-198; Real duration and causality, 199-221: the law "same antecedents, same consequents," 199-201, causality as regular succession, 202-203, causality as prefiguring: two kinds (1) prefiguring as mathematical pre-existence; implies non-duration, but we endure and therefore may be free, 204-210, (2) prefiguring as having idea of future act to be realized by effort; does not involve determinism, 211-214, determinism results from confusing these two senses, 215-218; Freedom real but indefinable, 219-221.
Dynamism and mechanism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_108__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_109__; two types of determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_110__; physical determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_111__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_112__: and the molecular theory of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_113__, and the conservation of energy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_114__; if conservation is universal, physiological and nervous phenomena are necessary but possibly not conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_115__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_116__; but is the principle of conservation universal? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_117__; it may not apply to living beings and conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_118__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_119__; the idea of its universality relies on the confusion between concrete duration and abstract time, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_120__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_121__; psychological determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_122__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_123__: implies an associationist view of the mind, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_124__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_125__; this involves a flawed understanding of the self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_126__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_127__; the free act: freedom as an expression of the fundamental self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_128__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_129__; real duration and contingency, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_130__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_131__; could our action have been different? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_132__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_133__; geometric representation of the process of making a decision, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_134__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_135__; the errors that lead determinists and libertarians astray, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_136__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_137__; real duration and prediction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_138__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_139__; conditions of Paul's prediction of Peter's action (1) being Peter (2) already knowing his final act, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_140__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_141__; the three fallacies involved, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_142__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_143__; astronomical prediction depends on hypothetical acceleration of movements, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_144__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_145__; duration cannot be accelerated this way, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_146__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_147__; real duration and causality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_148__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_149__; the law "same antecedents, same consequents," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_150__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_151__; causality as regular succession, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_152__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_153__; causality as prefiguration: two kinds (1) prefiguration as mathematical pre-existence; implies non-duration, but we endure and therefore may be free, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_154__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_155__; (2) prefiguration as having an idea of a future action to be achieved through effort; does not involve determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_156__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_157__; determinism results from confusing these two senses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_158__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_159__; freedom is real but indefinable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_160__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_161__.
CONCLUSION
CONCLUSION
States of self perceived through forms borrowed from external world, 223; Intensity as quality, 225; Duration as qualitative multiplicity, 226; No duration in the external world, 227; Extensity and duration must be separated, 229; Only the fundamental self free, 231; Kant's mistaken idea of time as homogeneous, 232, hence he put the self which is free outside both space and time, 233; Duration is heterogeneous, relation of psychic state to act is unique, and act is free, 235-240.
States of self are understood through forms derived from the external world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_164__; intensity as a quality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_165__; duration as a qualitative variety, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_166__; no duration exists outside the external world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_167__; extensity and duration need to be differentiated, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_168__; only the fundamental self is free, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_169__; Kant's incorrect view of time as uniform, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_170__, which led him to position the free self outside of both space and time, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_171__; duration is varied, the connection between psychic state and action is unique, and action is free, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_172__-__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_173__.
CHAPTER I
THE INTENSITY OF PSYCHIC STATES
It is usually admitted that states of consciousness, sensations, feelings, passions, efforts, are capable of growth and diminution; we are even told that a sensation can be said to be twice, thrice, four times as intense as another sensation of the same kind. This latter thesis, which is maintained by psychophysicists, we shall examine later; but even the opponents of psychophysics do not see any harm in speaking of one sensation as being more intense than another, of one effort as being greater than another, and in thus setting up differences of quantity between purely internal states. Common sense, moreover, has not the slightest hesitation in giving its verdict on this point; people say they are more or less warm, or more or less sad, and this distinction of more and less, even when it is carried over to the region of subjective facts and unextended objects, surprises nobody. But this involves a very obscure point and a much more important problem than is usually supposed.
It’s generally accepted that states of consciousness, sensations, feelings, passions, and efforts can increase or decrease; we’re even told that one sensation can be described as being twice, three times, or four times as intense as another sensation of the same type. This claim, supported by psychophysicists, will be examined later; however, even those who disagree with psychophysics have no issue discussing one sensation as being more intense than another, or one effort as being greater than another, thereby establishing differences in quantity among purely internal states. Furthermore, common sense has no hesitation in weighing in on this matter; people often say they feel warmer or sadder to varying degrees, and this distinction of more and less, even when applied to subjective experiences and non-physical phenomena, surprises no one. But this brings up a complex issue and a much more significant problem than usually assumed.
When we assert that one number is greater than[Pg 2] another number or one body greater than another body, we know very well what we mean.
When we say that one number is greater than[Pg 2] another number or one object is greater than another object, we know exactly what we mean.
For in both cases we allude to unequal spaces, as shall be shown in detail a little further on, and we call that space the greater which contains the other. But how can a more intense sensation contain one of less intensity? Shall we say that the first implies the second, that we reach the sensation of higher intensity only on condition of having first passed through the less intense stages of the same sensation, and that in a certain sense we are concerned, here also, with the relation of container to contained? This conception of intensive magnitude seems, indeed, to be that of common sense, but we cannot advance it as a philosophical explanation without becoming involved in a vicious circle. For it is beyond doubt that, in the natural series of numbers, the later number exceeds the earlier, but the very possibility of arranging the numbers in ascending order arises from their having to each other relations of container and contained, so that we feel ourselves able to explain precisely in what sense one is greater than the other. The question, then, is how we succeed in forming a series of this kind with intensities, which cannot be superposed on each other, and by what sign we recognize that the members of this series increase, for example, instead of diminishing: but this always comes back to the inquiry, why an intensity can be assimilated to a magnitude.
For both cases, we refer to unequal spaces, which will be discussed in detail a bit later, and we call the larger space the one that includes the smaller. But how can a stronger sensation contain a weaker one? Should we say that the stronger implies the weaker, meaning we only experience the stronger sensation after going through the weaker ones, and that in some way we're dealing with the relationship between the container and the contained? This idea of intensive magnitude seems to be based in common sense, but we can't put it forward as a philosophical explanation without getting stuck in a circular argument. It's clear that, in the natural series of numbers, a later number is greater than an earlier one, but the very ability to arrange numbers in ascending order comes from their relationships as container and contained, which helps us understand precisely how one is greater than the other. The real question, then, is how we manage to create a series like this with intensities that can't be layered on top of each other, and how we recognize that the members of this series increase, rather than decrease; but this consistently leads back to the issue of why an intensity can be compared to a magnitude.
It is only to evade the difficulty to distinguish, as is usually done, between two species of quantity, the first extensive and measurable, the second intensive and not admitting of measure, but of which it can nevertheless be said that it is greater or less than another intensity. For it is recognized thereby that there is something common to these two forms of magnitude, since they are both termed magnitudes and declared to be equally capable of increase and diminution. But, from the point of view of magnitude, what can there be in common between the extensive and the intensive, the extended and the unextended? If, in the first case, we call that which contains the other the greater quantity, why go on speaking of quantity and magnitude when there is no longer a container or a contained? If a quantity can increase and diminish, if we perceive in it, so to speak, the less inside the more, is not such a quantity on this very account divisible, and thereby extended? Is it not then a contradiction to speak of an inextensive quantity? But yet common sense agrees with the philosophers in setting up a pure intensity as a magnitude, just as if it were something extended. And not only do we use the same word, but whether we think of a greater intensity or a greater extensity, we experience in both cases an analogous impression; the terms "greater" and "less" call up in both cases the same idea.[Pg 4] If we now ask ourselves in what does this idea consist, our consciousness still offers us the image of a container and a contained. We picture to ourselves, for example, a greater intensity of effort as a greater length of thread rolled up, or as a spring which, in unwinding, will occupy a greater space. In the idea of intensity, and even in the word which expresses it, we shall find the image of a present contraction and consequently a future expansion, the image of something virtually extended, and, if we may say so, of a compressed space. We are thus led to believe that we translate the intensive into the extensive, and that we compare two intensities, or at least express the comparison, by the confused intuition of a relation between two extensities. But it is just the nature of this operation which it is difficult to determine.
It's only to avoid the challenge of distinguishing, as is often done, between two types of quantity: the first being extensive and measurable, and the second intensive and not quantifiable, although we can still say that one intensity is greater or less than another. This indicates that there is something shared between these two forms of magnitude, since both are referred to as magnitudes and said to be equally capable of increase and decrease. However, from the perspective of magnitude, what can possibly be common between extensive and intensive, between the extended and the unextended? In the first case, if we label that which contains the other as the greater quantity, why continue to talk about quantity and magnitude when there is no longer a container or a contained? If a quantity can increase or decrease, and if we perceive something less within something more, doesn’t that make such a quantity divisible, and therefore extensive? Is it not contradictory to speak of an inextensive quantity? Yet common sense aligns with philosophers in defining pure intensity as a magnitude, as though it were something extended. Not only do we use the same term, but whether we consider greater intensity or greater extent, we have a similar experience in both scenarios; the terms "greater" and "less" evoke the same concept. [Pg 4] If we now ask ourselves what this idea consists of, our consciousness still presents us with the image of a container and a contained. We imagine, for instance, a greater intensity of effort as a longer piece of thread rolled up, or as a spring that, when unwound, occupies a larger space. In the idea of intensity, and even in the word that expresses it, we find an image of a current contraction and, consequently, a future expansion, an image of something potentially extended, and, if we may say, of a compressed space. This leads us to believe that we are translating the intensive into the extensive, and that we are comparing two intensities, or at least expressing that comparison, through a confused understanding of a relationship between two extensities. However, it is precisely the nature of this operation that is difficult to define.
The solution which occurs immediately to the mind, once it has entered upon this path, consists in defining the intensity of a sensation, or of any state whatever of the ego, by the number and magnitude of the objective, and therefore measurable, causes which have given rise to it. Doubtless, a more intense sensation of light is the one which has been obtained, or is obtainable, by means of a larger number of luminous sources, provided they be at the same distance and identical with one another. But, in the immense majority of cases, we decide about[Pg 5] the intensity of the effect without even knowing the nature of the cause, much less its magnitude: indeed, it is the very intensity of the effect which often leads us to venture an hypothesis as to the number and nature of the causes, and thus to revise the judgment of our senses, which at first represented them as insignificant. And it is no use arguing that we are then comparing the actual state of the ego with some previous state in which the cause was perceived in its entirety at the same time as its effect was experienced. No doubt this is our procedure in a fairly large number of cases; but we cannot then explain the differences of intensity which we recognize between deep-seated psychic phenomena, the cause of which is within us and not outside. On the other hand, we are never so bold in judging the intensity of a psychic state as when the subjective aspect of the phenomenon is the only one to strike us, or when the external cause to which we refer it does not easily admit of measurement. Thus it seems evident that we experience a more intense pain at the pulling out of a tooth than of a hair; the artist knows without the possibility of doubt that the picture of a master affords him more intense pleasure than the signboard of a shop; and there is not the slightest need ever to have heard of forces of cohesion to assert that we expend less effort in bending a steel blade than a bar of iron. Thus the comparison of two intensities is usually made without the least appreciation of the[Pg 6] number of causes, their mode of action or their extent.
The solution that comes to mind right away, once we go down this path, is to define the intensity of a sensation, or any state of the self, by the number and size of the objective, and therefore measurable, causes that led to it. Clearly, a stronger sensation of light is produced, or can be produced, by using more light sources, assuming they're at the same distance and are identical. However, in most cases, we judge the intensity of the effect without even knowing the nature of the cause, let alone its size: it's often the intensity of the effect itself that encourages us to hypothesize about the number and nature of the causes, prompting us to reconsider our initial judgment about them being insignificant. And it doesn’t help to argue that we're comparing the current state of the self with a previous state where we fully perceived the cause while experiencing its effect. While this approach applies in a good number of cases, we can't explain the differences in intensity we notice in deep-seated mental phenomena, where the cause is internal rather than external. On the flip side, we tend to be more confident in judging the intensity of a mental state when the subjective aspect is the only one we're aware of, or when the external cause we attribute it to isn't easily measurable. It’s clear that we feel more intense pain when getting a tooth pulled than when a hair is plucked; an artist knows without a doubt that a masterpiece brings greater pleasure than a shop sign; and there's no need to understand cohesion forces to recognize that it takes less effort to bend a steel blade than an iron bar. Thus, comparing two intensities is often done without any real understanding of the number of causes, how they work, or their range.
There is still room, it is true, for an hypothesis of the same nature, but more subtle. We know that mechanical, and especially kinetic, theories aim at explaining the visible and sensible properties of bodies by well defined movements of their ultimate parts, and many of us foresee the time when the intensive differences of qualities, that is to say, of our sensations, will be reduced to extensive differences between the changes taking place behind them. May it not be maintained that, without knowing these theories, we have a vague surmise of them, that behind the more intense sound we guess the presence of ampler vibrations which are propagated in the disturbed medium, and that it is with a reference to this mathematical relation, precise in itself though confusedly perceived, that we assert the higher intensity of a particular sound? Without even going so far, could it not be laid down that every state of consciousness corresponds to a certain disturbance of the molecules and atoms of the cerebral substance, and that the intensity of a sensation measures the amplitude, the complication or the extent of these molecular movements? This last hypothesis is at least as probable as the other, but it no more solves the problem. For, quite possibly, the intensity of a sensation bears witness to a more or[Pg 7] less considerable work accomplished in our organism; but it is the sensation which is given to us in consciousness, and not this mechanical work. Indeed, it is by the intensity of the sensation that we judge of the greater or less amount of work accomplished: intensity then remains, at least apparently, a property of sensation. And still the same question recurs: why do we say of a higher intensity that it is greater? Why do we think of a greater quantity or a greater space?
There’s still room for a hypothesis like this, but one that’s more subtle. We know that mechanical and especially kinetic theories aim to explain the visible and tangible properties of objects through well-defined movements of their smallest parts. Many of us anticipate the time when the intense differences in qualities—meaning our sensations—will be reduced to broader differences related to the changes happening behind them. Can we not propose that, even without fully understanding these theories, we have a vague intuition of them? For instance, behind a louder sound, we sense the presence of larger vibrations that are moving through the disturbed medium, and it’s based on this mathematical relationship—precise in itself but vaguely perceived—that we claim a specific sound is more intense. Without going too far, could we not say that every state of consciousness corresponds to a specific disturbance of the molecules and atoms in our brain, and that the intensity of a sensation measures the amplitude, complexity, or extent of these molecular movements? This last hypothesis is at least as plausible as the others, but it doesn’t resolve the problem. It’s possible that the intensity of a sensation indicates a more or less significant amount of work done in our bodies, but it’s the sensation itself that we experience consciously, not this mechanical work. In fact, we judge the amount of work based on the intensity of the sensation: intensity remains, at least on the surface, a characteristic of sensation. And still, the same question arises: why do we say that a higher intensity is greater? Why do we associate it with a larger quantity or a greater space?
Perhaps the difficulty of the problem lies chiefly in the fact that we call by the same name, and picture to ourselves in the same way, intensities which are very different in nature, e.g. the intensity of a feeling and that of a sensation or an effort.
Perhaps the challenge of the issue mainly comes from the fact that we use the same term and envision the same way intensities that are actually very different in nature, such as the intensity of a feeling compared to that of a sensation or an effort.
The effort is accompanied by a muscular sensation, and the sensations themselves are connected with certain physical conditions which probably count for something in the estimate of their intensity: we have here to do with phenomena which take place on the surface of consciousness, and which are always connected, as we shall see further on, with the perception of a movement or of an external object. But certain states of the soul seem to us, rightly or wrongly, to be self-sufficient, such as deep joy or sorrow, a reflective passion or an aesthetic emotion. Pure intensity ought to be more easily[Pg 8] definable in these simple cases, where no extensive element seems to be involved. We shall see, in fact, that it is reducible here to a certain quality or shade which spreads over a more or less considerable mass of psychic states, or, if the expression be preferred, to the larger or smaller number of simple states which make up the fundamental emotion.
The effort comes with a physical sensation, and these sensations are linked to specific physical conditions that likely impact their intensity. We're dealing with experiences that occur in our awareness and are always related, as we will explore later, to the perception of movement or an external object. However, some emotional states, whether correctly or incorrectly, seem self-contained, like deep happiness or sadness, reflective passion, or aesthetic feelings. Pure intensity should be easier to define in these straightforward cases, where there doesn’t seem to be any extensive element involved. As we will see, it can actually be reduced to a certain quality or nuance that spreads across a significant range of mental states, or, if you prefer, to the greater or lesser number of simple states that compose the core emotion.
For example, an obscure desire gradually becomes a deep passion. Now, you will see that thee feeble intensity of this desire consisted at first in its appearing to be isolated and, as it were, foreign to the remainder of your inner life. But little by little it permeates a larger number of psychic elements, tingeing them, so to speak, with its own colour: and lo! your outlook on the whole of your surroundings seems now to have changed radically. How do you become aware of a deep passion, once it has taken hold of you, if not by perceiving that the same objects no longer impress you in the same manner? All your sensations and all your ideas seem to brighten up: it is like childhood back again. We experience something of the kind in certain dreams, in which we do not imagine anything out of the ordinary, and yet through which there resounds an indescribable note of originality. The fact is that, the further we penetrate into the depths of consciousness, the less right we have to treat psychic phenomena as things which are set side[Pg 9] by side. When it is said that an object occupies a large space in the soul or even that it fills it entirely, we ought to understand by this simply that its image has altered the shade of a thousand perceptions or memories, and that in this sense it pervades them, although it does not itself come into view. But this wholly dynamic way of looking at things is repugnant to the reflective consciousness, because the latter delights in clean cut distinctions, which are easily expressed in words, and in things with well-defined outlines, like those which are perceived in space. It will assume then that, everything else remaining identical, such and such a desire has gone up a scale of magnitudes, as though it were permissible still to speak of magnitude where there is neither multiplicity nor space! But just as consciousness (as will be shown later on) concentrates on a given point of the organism the increasing number of muscular contractions which take place on the surface of the body, thus converting them into one single feeling of effort, of growing intensity, so it will hypostatize under the form of a growing desire the gradual alterations which take place in the confused heap of co-existing psychic states. But that is a change of quality rather than of magnitude.
For example, a vague desire gradually turns into a deep passion. You’ll notice that the weak intensity of this desire initially seemed isolated and, in a way, separate from the rest of your inner life. But little by little, it influences more aspects of your psyche, coloring them, so to speak, with its own hue: and suddenly! Your perspective on your entire surroundings appears to have changed dramatically. How do you realize a deep passion has taken hold of you, if not by noticing that the same things no longer affect you the same way? All your sensations and ideas seem to come alive: it feels like returning to childhood. We experience something similar in certain dreams, where nothing extraordinary occurs, yet they resonate with an indescribable note of originality. The truth is, the deeper we delve into consciousness, the less right we are to view psychic phenomena as separate entities. When we say an object occupies a significant space in the soul or even fills it completely, we should understand this simply means its image has altered the tone of countless perceptions or memories, and in this sense, it permeates them, even though it doesn’t become clear. However, this entirely dynamic view is unwelcome to reflective consciousness, which prefers clear distinctions that can be easily articulated and things with well-defined boundaries, like those perceived in space. Thus, it assumes that, with everything else staying the same, a certain desire has increased in magnitude, as if it were okay to talk about size where there is neither plurality nor space! Just as consciousness (as will be explained later) focuses on a specific point of the body, gathering the increasing number of muscular contractions occurring on the surface and turning them into one single feeling of effort or growing intensity, it similarly creates a notion of a growing desire from the gradual changes happening within the tangled mix of coexisting psychic states. But that reflects a change in quality rather than in magnitude.
What makes hope such an intense pleasure is the fact that the future, which we dispose of to our liking, appears to us at the same time under a multitude of forms, equally attractive and equally[Pg 10] possible. Even if the most coveted of these becomes realized, it will be necessary to give up the others, and we shall have lost a great deal. The idea of the future, pregnant with an infinity of possibilities, is thus more fruitful than the future itself, and this is why we find more charm in hope than in possession, in dreams than in reality.
What makes hope such an intense pleasure is that the future, which we can shape to our liking, presents itself to us in many different forms, all equally appealing and possible. Even if we achieve our most desired outcome, we still have to let go of the others, and we lose a lot in the process. The idea of the future, filled with endless possibilities, is therefore more enriching than the future itself, which is why we find more allure in hope than in having things, in dreams than in reality.
Let us try to discover the nature of an increasing intensity of joy or sorrow in the exceptional cases where no physical symptom intervenes. Neither inner joy nor passion is an isolated inner state which at first occupies a corner of the soul and gradually spreads. At its lowest level it is very like a turning of our states of consciousness towards the future. Then, as if their weight were diminished by this attraction, our ideas and sensations succeed one another with greater rapidity; our movements no longer cost us the same effort. Finally, in cases of extreme joy, our perceptions and memories become tinged with an indefinable quality, as with a kind of heat or light, so novel that now and then, as we stare at our own self, we wonder how it can really exist. Thus there are several characteristic forms of purely inward joy, all of which are successive stages corresponding to qualitative alterations in the whole of our psychic states. But the number of states which are concerned with each of these alterations is more or less considerable, and, without explicitly counting them, we know very[Pg 11] well whether, for example, our joy pervades all the impressions which we receive in the course of the day or whether any escape from its influence. We thus set up points of division in the interval which separates two successive forms of joy, and this gradual transition from one to the other makes them appear in their turn as different intensities of one and the same feeling, which is thus supposed to change in magnitude. It could be easily shown that the different degrees of sorrow also correspond to qualitative changes. Sorrow begins by being nothing more than a facing towards the past, an impoverishment of our sensations and ideas, as if each of them were now contained entirely in the little which it gives out, as if the future were in some way stopped up. And it ends with an impression of crushing failure, the effect of which is that we aspire to nothingness, while every new misfortune, by making us understand better the uselessness of the struggle, causes us a bitter pleasure.
Let’s try to understand the nature of intensifying joy or sorrow in those rare situations where there are no physical signs. Neither inner joy nor passion is just a standalone feeling that starts in a corner of the mind and slowly spreads. At its simplest, it’s like turning our awareness toward the future. Then, as if pulled by this attraction, our thoughts and sensations follow one after another more quickly; our movements become easier. Ultimately, in moments of extreme joy, our perceptions and memories take on an indescribable quality, like a kind of warmth or light, so new that sometimes, when we look at ourselves, we wonder how we really exist. Thus, there are several distinct types of pure inner joy, each representing a stage that corresponds to changes in our overall mental state. However, the number of states associated with each of these changes varies, and without having to count them, we can intuitively tell whether our joy colors all the experiences we have throughout the day or if some escape its impact. We establish dividing points between two consecutive forms of joy, and this gradual shift from one to the next makes them seem like different intensities of the same feeling, which we assume changes in magnitude. It can also be easily shown that different levels of sorrow correspond to qualitative changes. Sorrow starts out as simply looking back at the past, an emptiness in our sensations and ideas, as if each one is fully tied to the little it conveys, as if the future is somehow blocked. It culminates in a feeling of overwhelming failure, leading us to long for nothingness, where each new misfortune, by highlighting the futility of our struggle, brings us a bitter pleasure.
The aesthetic feelings offer us a still more striking example of this progressive stepping in of new elements, which can be detected in the fundamental emotion and which seem to increase its magnitude, although in reality they do nothing more than alter its nature. Let us consider the simplest of them, the feeling of grace. At first it is only the perception of a certain ease, a certain facility in the outward movements. And as those movements[Pg 12] are easy which prepare the way for others, we are led to find a superior ease in the movements which can be foreseen, in the present attitudes in which future attitudes are pointed out and, as it were, prefigured. If jerky movements are wanting in grace, the reason is that each of them is self-sufficient and does not announce those which are to follow. If curves are more graceful than broken lines, the reason is that, while a curved line changes its direction at every moment, every new direction is indicated in the preceding one. Thus the perception of ease in motion passes over into the pleasure of mastering the flow of time and of holding the future in the present. A third element comes in when the graceful movements submit to a rhythm and are accompanied by music. For the rhythm and measure, by allowing us to foresee to a still greater extent the movements of the dancer, make us believe that we now control them. As we guess almost the exact attitude which the dancer is going to take, he seems to obey us when he really takes it: the regularity of the rhythm establishes a kind of communication between him and us, and the periodic returns of the measure are like so many invisible threads by means of which we set in motion this imaginary puppet. Indeed, if it stops for an instant, our hand in its impatience cannot refrain from making a movement, as though to push it, as though to replace it in the midst of this movement, the rhythm of which has taken complete possession[Pg 13] of our thought and will. Thus a kind of physical sympathy enters into the feeling of grace. Now, in analysing the charm of this sympathy, you will find that it pleases you through its affinity with moral sympathy, the idea of which it subtly suggests. This last element, in which the others are merged after having in a measure ushered it in, explains the irresistible attractiveness of grace. We could hardly make out why it affords us such pleasure if it were nothing but a saving of effort, as Spencer maintains.[1] But the truth is that in anything which we call very graceful we imagine ourselves able to detect, besides the lightness which is a sign of mobility, some suggestion of a possible movement towards ourselves, of a virtual and even nascent sympathy. It is this mobile sympathy, always ready to offer itself, which is just the essence of higher grace. Thus the increasing intensities of aesthetic feeling are here resolved into as many different feelings, each one of which, already heralded by its predecessor, becomes perceptible in it and then completely eclipses it. It is this qualitative progress which we interpret as a change of magnitude, because we like simple thoughts and because our language is ill-suited to render the subtleties of psychological analysis.
The feelings of beauty give us an even clearer example of how new elements gradually come into play, which can be seen in the core emotion and which seem to amplify its intensity, although in reality, they only change its nature. Let’s look at the simplest example, the feeling of grace. Initially, it’s merely the awareness of a certain ease, a certain naturalness in outward movements. And as those movements are effortless and pave the way for others, we start to sense a greater ease in movements that can be anticipated, in the current poses that hint at future ones. If jerky movements lack grace, it’s because each one stands alone and doesn’t hint at what follows. Curved lines are more graceful than broken ones since, while a curved line shifts direction continuously, each new direction is signaled by the preceding one. Therefore, the perception of smooth motion transitions into the enjoyment of mastering the flow of time and grasping the future in the present. A third element emerges when graceful movements follow a rhythm and are paired with music. The rhythm and timing further allow us to anticipate the dancer’s movements, leading us to feel that we have some control over them. As we almost predict the exact stance the dancer will take, he seems to respond to us, when in fact he is merely moving as intended: the consistency of the rhythm creates a connection between him and us, and the regular beats serve as invisible threads that help us maneuver this imaginary puppet. In fact, if he pauses for a moment, our impatient hand instinctively moves as if to urge him on, to place him back into this fluid motion that has fully engaged our thoughts and desires. Thus, a kind of physical sympathy becomes part of our feeling of grace. Now, if you analyze the appeal of this sympathy, you’ll find that it’s enjoyable due to its connection to moral empathy, which it subtly evokes. This final element, where the others blend after having somewhat introduced it, explains grace's irresistible charm. It's hard to understand why it brings us such joy if it’s merely a way to save effort, as Spencer argues. But the truth is that in anything we consider truly graceful, we think we can sense, beyond the lightness that signifies movement, a hint of a potential movement towards us, along with a virtual and even budding sympathy. This fluid sympathy, always poised to reach out, is the essence of higher grace. Thus, the increasing intensities of aesthetic feeling break down into distinct feelings, each one already hinted at by its predecessor, becoming apparent in it and then overshadowing it completely. This qualitative advancement is interpreted as a change in size because we prefer straightforward ideas and our language struggles to express the nuances of psychological analysis.
To understand how the feeling of the beautiful itself admits of degrees, we should have to submit[Pg 14] it to a minute analysis. Perhaps the difficulty which we experience in defining: it is largely owing to the fact that we look upon the beauties of nature as anterior to those of art: the processes of art are thus supposed to be nothing more than means by which the artist expresses the beautiful, and the essence of the beautiful remains unexplained. But we might ask ourselves whether nature is beautiful otherwise than through meeting by chance certain processes of our art, and whether, in a certain sense, art is not prior to nature. Without even going so far, it seems more in conformity with the rules of a sound method to study the beautiful first in the works in which it has been produced by a conscious effort, and then to pass on by imperceptible steps from art to nature, which may be looked upon as an artist in its own way. By placing ourselves at this point of view, we shall perceive that the object of art is to put to sleep the active or rather resistant powers of our personality, and thus to bring us into a state of perfect responsiveness, in which we realize the idea that is suggested to us and sympathize with the feeling that is expressed. In the processes of art we shall find, in a weakened form, a refined and in some measure spiritualized version of the processes commonly used to induce the state of hypnosis. Thus, in music, the rhythm and measure suspend the normal flow of our sensations and ideas by causing our attention to swing to and[Pg 15] fro between fixed points, and they take hold of us with such force that even the faintest imitation of a groan will suffice to fill us with the utmost sadness. If musical sounds affect us more powerfully than the sounds of nature, the reason is that nature confines itself to expressing feelings, whereas music suggests them to us. Whence indeed comes the charm of poetry? The poet is he with whom feelings develop into images, and the images themselves into words which translate them while obeying the laws of rhythm. In seeing these images pass before our eyes we in our turn experience the feeling which was, so to speak, their emotional equivalent: but we should never realize these images so strongly without the regular movements of the rhythm by which our soul is lulled into self-forgetfulness, and, as in a dream, thinks and sees with the poet. The plastic arts obtain an effect of the same kind by the fixity which they suddenly impose upon life, and which a physical contagion carries over to the attention of the spectator. While the works of ancient sculpture express faint emotions which play upon them like a passing breath, the pale immobility of the stone causes the feeling expressed or the movement just begun to appear as if they were fixed for ever, absorbing our thought and our will in their own eternity. We find in architecture, in the very midst of this startling immobility, certain effects analogous to those of rhythm. The symmetry of form, the indefinite repetition of the same[Pg 16] architectural motive, causes our faculty of perception to oscillate between the same and the same again, and gets rid of those customary incessant changes which in ordinary life bring us back without ceasing to the consciousness of our personality: even the faint suggestion of an idea will then be enough to make the idea fill the whole of our mind. Thus art aims at impressing feelings on us rather than expressing them; it suggests them to us, and willingly dispenses with the imitation of nature when it finds some more efficacious means. Nature, like art, proceeds by suggestion, but does not command the resources of rhythm. It supplies the deficiency by the long comradeship, based on influences received in common by nature and by ourselves, of which the effect is that the slightest indication by nature of a feeling arouses sympathy in our minds, just as a mere gesture on the part of the hypnotist is enough to force the intended suggestion upon a subject accustomed to his control. And this sympathy is shown in particular when nature displays to us beings of normal proportions, so that our attention is distributed equally over all the parts of the figure without being fixed on any one of them: our perceptive faculty then finds itself lulled and soothed by this harmony, and nothing hinders any longer the free play of sympathy, which is ever ready to come forward as soon as the obstacle in its path is removed.
To understand how the feeling of beauty varies in intensity, we need to analyze it closely. The difficulty we have in defining it may mostly stem from the fact that we see the beauties of nature as existing before those of art. This leads us to believe that artistic processes are merely ways for the artist to express beauty, leaving the essence of beauty itself unexplained. But we could ask ourselves whether nature is beautiful outside of chance encounters with certain artistic processes, and whether, in a way, art might not actually come before nature. Even without going that far, it seems more logical to first study beauty in works created with conscious effort, and then gradually transition from art to nature, which can also be viewed as an artist in its own way. By adopting this perspective, we can see that the purpose of art is to quiet the active or resistant aspects of our personality, bringing us to a state of complete receptivity, where we perceive the ideas suggested to us and connect with the feelings expressed. In artistic processes, we find a softer, somewhat spiritualized version of the methods typically used to induce a state of hypnosis. For instance, in music, rhythm and meter disrupt the normal flow of our sensations and thoughts by allowing our attention to swing back and forth between fixed points, grabbing hold of us so intensely that even a faint imitation of a groan can evoke profound sadness. If musical sounds impact us more powerfully than the sounds of nature, it's because nature merely expresses feelings, while music suggests them. Where, then, does the magic of poetry come from? A poet transforms feelings into images, and those images into words that align with the rules of rhythm. As we see these images unfold before us, we experience the feelings they embody; however, we wouldn't grasp those images nearly as intensely without the steady movements of rhythm that lull our minds into a state of self-forgetfulness, allowing us to think and see alongside the poet. The visual arts achieve a similar effect through the stillness they impose upon life, which, through a physical connection, captivates the viewer's attention. While ancient sculptures may express subtle emotions like a passing breath, the lifelessness of the stone makes those feelings or movements appear frozen in time, drawing us into their eternal presence. In architecture, amid this striking stillness, we find effects similar to those of rhythm. The symmetry of forms and the indefinite repetition of the same architectural motif cause our perception to oscillate between the same forms, eliminating the usual constant changes that remind us of our own identities. Even a slight hint of an idea can then fill our entire mind. Thus, art seeks to instill feelings in us rather than just express them; it suggests them, willingly moving away from imitating nature when it discovers more effective methods. Like art, nature also operates through suggestion, but lacks the tools of rhythm. It makes up for this through the long-standing relationship based on shared influences between nature and ourselves, which results in the slightest sign of a feeling from nature sparking a sympathetic response in us, just as a simple gesture from a hypnotist can prompt a subject familiar with their influence. This sympathy is especially evident when nature presents us with beings of normal proportions, allowing our attention to be evenly distributed across all parts of the figure without fixating on any single part. Our perception then finds itself calmed by this harmony, and there’s nothing left to obstruct the free flow of sympathy, which is always ready to emerge as soon as any barriers are removed.
It follows from this analysis that the feeling of[Pg 17] the beautiful is no specific feeling, but that every feeling experienced by us will assume an aesthetic character, provided that it has been suggested, and not caused. It will now be understood why the aesthetic emotion seems to us to admit of degrees of intensity, and also of degrees of elevation. Sometimes the feeling which is suggested scarcely makes a break in the compact texture of psychic phenomena of which our history consists; sometimes it draws our attention from them, but not so that they become lost to sight; sometimes, finally, it puts itself in their place, engrosses us and completely monopolizes our soul. There are thus distinct phases in the progress of an aesthetic feeling, as in the state of hypnosis; and these phases correspond less to variations of degree than to differences of state or of nature. But the merit of a work of art is not measured so much by the power with which the suggested feeling takes hold of us as by the richness of this feeling itself: in other words, besides degrees of intensity we instinctively distinguish degrees of depth or elevation. If this last concept be analysed, it will be seen that the feelings and thoughts which the artist suggests to us express and sum up a more or less considerable part of his history. If the art which gives only sensations is an inferior art, the reason is that analysis often fails to discover in a sensation anything beyond the sensation itself. But the greater number of emotions are instinct with a[Pg 18] thousand sensations, feelings or ideas which pervade them: each one is then a state unique of its kind and indefinable, and it seems that we should have to re-live the life of the subject who experiences it if we wished to grasp it in its original complexity. Yet the artist aims at giving us a share in this emotion, so rich, so personal, so novel, and at enabling us to experience what he cannot make us understand. This he will bring about by choosing, among the outward signs of his emotions, those which our body is likely to imitate mechanically, though slightly, as soon as it perceives them, so as to transport us all at once into the indefinable psychological state which called them forth. Thus will be broken down the barrier interposed by time and space between his consciousness and ours: and the richer in ideas and the more pregnant with sensations and emotions is the feeling within whose limits the artist has brought us, the deeper and the higher shall we find the beauty thus expressed. The successive intensities of the aesthetic feeling thus correspond to changes of state occurring in us, and the degrees of depth to the larger or smaller number of elementary psychic phenomena which we dimly discern in the fundamental emotion.
This analysis shows that the feeling of the beautiful isn't a specific emotion; rather, every feeling we experience can take on an aesthetic quality if it's been suggested rather than caused. This explains why aesthetic emotions seem to come in varying intensities and levels of elevation. Sometimes, the suggested feeling barely disrupts the continuous flow of our mental experiences; other times, it briefly captures our attention without completely overshadowing our thoughts; at their strongest, they fully engross us and dominate our experience. There are clear phases in the development of an aesthetic feeling, similar to those in hypnosis, and these phases reflect differences in state rather than just variations in strength. However, the value of an artwork is determined more by the richness of the feeling it evokes rather than the intensity of that feeling. In other words, besides varying levels of intensity, we instinctively recognize different depths and heights of emotion. Analyzing this last idea reveals that the feelings and thoughts an artist communicates often encapsulate a significant part of their own experiences. Art that only conveys sensations is considered inferior because analysis often finds little beyond the sensation itself. Yet most emotions are intertwined with countless sensations, feelings, or ideas that enrich them, making each one unique and hard to define; we would have to re-live the life of the person experiencing it to fully understand its complexity. The artist seeks to share this rich, personal, and novel emotion with us, enabling us to feel what they can't make us fully comprehend. They do this by selecting certain external expressions of their emotions that our bodies can mimic, even if just slightly, as soon as we perceive them, transporting us into the indescribable psychological state that inspired them. This breaks down the barrier of time and space separating their consciousness from ours: the more ideas and sensations are embedded in the feeling they present us with, the deeper and higher the beauty we'll discover in it. The varying intensities of aesthetic feelings correspond to changes within us, while the different depths relate to the number of basic mental phenomena we faintly recognize within the core emotion.
The moral feelings might be studied in the same way. Let us take pity as an example. It consists in the first place in putting oneself mentally in the place of others, in suffering their pain. But if it were[Pg 19] nothing more, as some have maintained, it would inspire us with the idea of avoiding the wretched rather than helping them, for pain is naturally abhorrent to us. This feeling of horror may indeed be at the root of pity; but a new element soon comes in, the need of helping our fellow-men and of alleviating their suffering. Shall we say with La Rochefoucauld that this so-called sympathy is a calculation, "a shrewd insurance against evils to come"? Perhaps a dread of some future evil to ourselves does hold a place in our compassion for other people's evil. These however are but lower forms of pity. True pity consists not so much in fearing suffering as in desiring it. The desire is a faint one and we should hardly wish to see it realized; yet we form it in spite of ourselves, as if Nature were committing some great injustice and it were necessary to get rid of all suspicion of complicity with her. The essence of pity is thus a need for self-abasement, an aspiration downwards. This painful aspiration nevertheless has a charm about it, because it raises us in our own estimation and makes us feel superior to those sensuous goods from which our thought is temporarily detached. The increasing intensity of pity thus consists in a qualitative progress, in a transition from repugnance to fear, from fear to sympathy, and from sympathy itself to humility.
The way we study moral feelings can be similar. Let’s take pity as an example. It primarily involves putting ourselves in someone else's shoes, experiencing their pain. But if that were all it was, as some have suggested, it might lead us to avoid the suffering rather than help them, since pain naturally repulses us. This feeling of horror could indeed be the foundation of pity; however, a new factor soon emerges: the need to help others and alleviate their suffering. Should we agree with La Rochefoucauld that this so-called sympathy is merely a strategy, “a clever insurance against future misfortunes”? Maybe a fear of potential harm to ourselves does play a role in our compassion for others' troubles. Yet, these are just basic forms of pity. True pity isn't so much about fearing suffering as it is about desiring it. The desire is faint, and we wouldn’t actually want it to happen; still, we feel it regardless, as if Nature were committing a great injustice, and we needed to clear ourselves of any complicity with her. The essence of pity is, therefore, a need for self-humiliation, an aspiration to lower ourselves. This painful aspiration, however, has a certain allure because it elevates our self-worth and makes us feel superior to the sensual pleasures from which our thoughts have temporarily disengaged. The increasing intensity of pity represents a qualitative progression, transitioning from disgust to fear, from fear to empathy, and finally from empathy to humility.
We do not propose to carry this analysis any[Pg 20] further. The psychic states whose intensity we have just defined are deep-seated states which do not seem to have any close relation to their external cause or to involve the perception of muscular contraction. But such states are rare. There is hardly any passion or desire, any joy or sorrow, which is not accompanied by physical symptoms; and, where these symptoms occur, they probably count for something in the estimate of intensities. As for the sensations properly so called, they are manifestly connected with their external cause, and though the intensity of the sensation cannot be defined by the magnitude of its cause, there undoubtedly exists some relation between these two terms. In some of its manifestations consciousness even appears to spread outwards, as if intensity were being developed into extensity, e.g. in the case of muscular effort. Let us face this last phenomenon at once: we shall thus be transported at a bound to the opposite extremity of the series of psychic phenomena.
We won't take this analysis any[Pg 20] further. The emotional states we've just defined are deeply rooted feelings that don’t seem closely related to their external causes or involve the awareness of muscle tension. However, such states are uncommon. Almost every passion or desire, every joy or sorrow, comes with physical symptoms; and where these symptoms appear, they likely play a role in assessing intensity. As for sensations in the strict sense, they are clearly linked to their external causes, and while the strength of a sensation isn’t defined by the size of its cause, there is certainly some relationship between the two. In some instances, consciousness seems to extend outward, as if intensity is transforming into extensity, like in the case of physical effort. Let’s address this last phenomenon directly: this will take us right to the opposite end of the range of psychological phenomena.
If there is a phenomenon which seems to be presented immediately to consciousness under the form of quantity or at least of magnitude, it is undoubtedly muscular effort. We picture to our minds a psychic force imprisoned in the soul like the winds in the cave of Aeolus, and only waiting for an opportunity to burst forth: our will is supposed to watch over[Pg 21] this force and from time to time to open a passage for it, regulating the outflow by the effect which it is desired to produce. If we consider the matter carefully, we shall see that this somewhat crude conception of effort plays a large part in our belief in intensive magnitudes. Muscular force, whose sphere of action is space and which manifests itself in phenomena admitting of measure, seems to us to have existed previous to its manifestations, but in smaller volume, and, so to speak, in a compressed state: hence we do not hesitate to reduce this volume more and more, and finally we believe that we can understand how a purely psychic state, which does not occupy space, can nevertheless possess magnitude. Science, too, tends to strengthen the illusion of common sense with regard to this point. Bain, for example, declares that "the sensibility accompanying muscular movement coincides with the outgoing stream of nervous energy:"[2] it is thus just the emission of nervous force which consciousness perceives. Wundt also speaks of a sensation, central in its origin, accompanying the voluntary innervation of the muscles, and quotes the example of the paralytic "who has a very distinct sensation of the force which he employs in the effort to raise his leg, although it remains motionless."[3] Most of the[Pg 22] authorities adhere to this opinion, which would be the unanimous view of positive science were it not that several years ago Professor William James drew the attention of physiologists to certain phenomena which had been but little remarked, although they were very remarkable.
If there’s a phenomenon that seems to appear directly in our awareness as a quantity or at least as a magnitude, it’s definitely muscular effort. We imagine a mental force trapped within the soul like winds in Aeolus's cave, just waiting for a chance to break free: our will is thought to keep an eye on this force and occasionally provide a way for it to escape, managing the release based on the effect we want to create. If we look closely, we’ll notice that this somewhat simplistic idea of effort plays a significant role in our belief in intense magnitudes. Muscular force, which operates in space and reveals itself through measurable phenomena, seems to have existed before its manifestations, but in a smaller and, so to speak, compressed form: thus, we don’t hesitate to decrease this volume more and more, and eventually, we come to believe that a purely mental state, which doesn’t occupy space, can still have magnitude. Science also tends to reinforce the common-sense illusion regarding this. For instance, Bain states that "the sensibility accompanying muscular movement coincides with the outgoing stream of nervous energy": it is precisely this release of nervous energy that consciousness perceives. Wundt similarly describes a sensation originating centrally that accompanies the voluntary stimulation of muscles, and he cites the example of a person who is paralyzed "who has a very distinct sensation of the force he tries to use to raise his leg, even though it stays motionless." Most experts agree with this view, which would be the common consensus in positive science if it weren't for the fact that several years ago, Professor William James brought to the attention of physiologists certain phenomena that had been largely overlooked, despite being quite remarkable.
When a paralytic strives to raise his useless limb, he certainly does not execute this movement, but, with or without his will, he executes another. Some movement is carried out somewhere: otherwise there is no sensation of effort.[4] Vulpian had already called attention to the fact that if a man affected with hemiplegia is told to clench his paralysed fist, he unconsciously carries out this action with the fist which is not affected. Ferrier described a still more curious phenomenon.[5] Stretch out your arm while slightly bending your forefinger, as if you were going to press the trigger of a pistol; without moving the finger, without contracting any muscle of the hand, without producing any apparent movement, you will yet be able to feel that you are expending energy. On a closer examination, however, you will perceive that this sensation of effort coincides[Pg 23] with the fixation of the muscles of your chest, that you keep your glottis closed and actively contract your respiratory muscles. As soon as respiration resumes its normal course the consciousness of effort vanishes, unless you really move your finger. These facts already seemed to show that we are conscious, not of an expenditure of force, but of the movement of the muscles which results from it. The new feature in Professor James's investigation is that he has verified the hypothesis in the case of examples which seemed to contradict it absolutely. Thus when the external rectus muscle of the right eye is paralysed, the patient tries in vain to turn his eye towards the right; yet objects seem to him to recede towards the right, and since the act of volition has produced no effect, it follows, said Helmholtz,[6] that he is conscious of the effort of volition. But, replies Professor James, no account has been taken of what goes on in the other eye. This remains covered during the experiments; nevertheless it moves and there is not much trouble in proving that it does. It is the movement of the left eye, perceived by consciousness, which produces the sensation of effort together with the impression that the objects perceived by the right eye are moving. These and similar observations lead Professor James to assert that the feeling[Pg 24] of effort is centripetal and not centrifugal. We are not conscious of a force which we are supposed to launch upon our organism: our feeling of muscular energy at work "is a complex afferent sensation, which comes from contracted muscles, stretched ligaments, compressed joints, an immobilized chest, a closed glottis, a knit brow, clenched jaws," in a word, from all the points of the periphery where the effort causes an alteration.
When someone who is paralyzed tries to move their useless limb, they don't actually make that movement. Instead, whether they want to or not, they accomplish another action. Some kind of movement happens somewhere; without that, there wouldn't be any feeling of effort.[4] Vulpian had already pointed out that if a person with hemiplegia is asked to clench their paralyzed fist, they unconsciously perform this action with the unaffected fist. Ferrier described an even stranger phenomenon.[5] Stretch out your arm while slightly bending your forefinger, as if you were about to pull the trigger of a gun. Without moving the finger, without tensing any muscles in your hand, and without making any visible movement, you will still feel like you're using energy. However, if you take a closer look, you'll realize that this sensation of effort coincides with the tension in your chest muscles, that you're keeping your throat closed, and you're actively contracting your breathing muscles. As soon as your breathing goes back to normal, the feeling of effort disappears unless you actually move your finger. These observations suggest that we are aware not of expending force, but rather of the muscle movements that result from it. The new aspect of Professor James's research is that he has confirmed this idea even in cases that initially seemed to completely oppose it. For example, when the external rectus muscle of the right eye is paralyzed, the patient tries unsuccessfully to turn their eye to the right; yet, objects seem to move away towards the right, and since the act of will hasn't made any difference, as Helmholtz pointed out,[6] it follows that they are aware of the effort of will. But, Professor James replies, there's no consideration of what happens in the other eye. This one remains covered during the experiments; however, it still moves, and it's not very hard to show that. The movement of the left eye, perceived by consciousness, creates the sensation of effort, along with the feeling that the objects seen by the right eye are moving. These and similar findings lead Professor James to conclude that the feeling of effort is centripetal, not centrifugal. We are not aware of a force we're supposed to be exerting on our bodies; our sense of muscular energy at work "is a complex afferent sensation, which comes from contracted muscles, stretched ligaments, compressed joints, an immobilized chest, a closed throat, a furrowed brow, and clenched jaws," in other words, from all the peripheral areas where the effort causes a change.
It is not for us to take a side in the dispute. After all, the question with which we have to deal is nοt whether the feeling of effort comes from the centre or the periphery, but in what does our perception of its intensity exactly consist? Now, it is sufficient to observe oneself attentively to reach a conclusion on this point which Professor James has not formulated, but which seems to us quite in accord with the spirit of his teaching. We maintain that the more a given effort seems to us to increase, the greater is the number of muscles which contract in sympathy with it, and that the apparent consciousness of a greater intensity of effort at a given point of the organism is reducible, in reality, to the perception of a larger surface of the body being affected.
It’s not for us to take a side in the argument. After all, the question we need to address isn’t whether the feeling of effort comes from the center or the edges, but what our perception of its intensity really consists of. It’s enough to observe ourselves carefully to come to a conclusion on this that Professor James hasn’t stated, but which aligns well with his teachings. We argue that the more a specific effort seems to increase, the more muscles contract in response to it, and that the apparent awareness of a greater intensity of effort at a specific point in the body ultimately comes down to the perception of a larger area of the body being affected.
Try, for example, to clench the fist with increasing force. You will have the impression of a sensation of effort entirely localized in your hand and running up a scale of magnitudes. In reality, what you experience in your hand[Pg 25] remains the same, but the sensation which was at first localized there has affected your arm and ascended to the shoulder; finally, the other arm stiffens, both legs do the same, the respiration is checked; it is the whole body which is at work. But you fail to notice distinctly all these concomitant movements unless you are warned of them: till then you thought you were dealing with a single state of consciousness which changed in magnitude. When you press your lips more and more tightly against one another, you believe that you are experiencing in your lips one and the same sensation which is continually increasing in strength: here again further reflection will show you that this sensation remains identical, but that certain muscles of the face and the head and then of all the rest of the body have taken part in the operation. You felt this gradual encroachment, this increase of the surface affected, which is in truth a change of quantity; but, as your attention was concentrated on your closed lips, you localized the increase there and you made the psychic force there expended into a magnitude, although it possessed no extensity. Examine carefully somebody who is lifting heavier and heavier weights: the muscular contraction gradually spreads over his whole body. As for the special sensation which he experiences in the arm which is at work, it remains constant for a very long time and hardly changes except in[Pg 26] quality, the weight becoming at a certain moment fatigue, and the fatigue pain. Yet the subject will imagine that he is conscious of a continual increase in the psychic force flowing into his arm. He will not recognize his mistake unless he is warned of it, so inclined is he to measure a given psychic state by the conscious movements which accompany it! From these facts and from many others of the same kind we believe we can deduce the following conclusion: our consciousness of an increase of muscular effort is reducible to the twofold perception of a greater number of peripheral sensations, and of a qualitative change occurring in some of them.
Try, for instance, to clench your fist with increasing force. You’ll feel like the effort is all in your hand and growing in intensity. But actually, what you feel in your hand[Pg 25] stays the same; it’s just that the sensation, which started there, has spread to your arm and moved up to your shoulder. Eventually, your other arm stiffens, both legs follow suit, and your breathing gets restricted; it’s your whole body that’s engaged. However, you don’t really notice all these simultaneous movements unless someone points them out to you. Until then, you believed you were just dealing with one state of consciousness that was changing in intensity. When you press your lips tighter and tighter against each other, you think the sensation in your lips is just one feeling getting stronger. Again, deeper thought will reveal that this sensation stays the same, but certain muscles in your face, head, and the rest of your body are also involved. You felt this slow expansion, this increase in the area affected, which is actually a change in quantity; but since your focus was on your closed lips, you localized the increase there and assumed the psychic force spent there was a measurable magnitude, even though it had no physical extent. Watch someone lifting heavier weights: the muscle contraction gradually spreads throughout their entire body. The specific sensation they feel in the working arm stays pretty constant for a long time and only changes slightly in[Pg 26] quality—what feels like weight eventually becomes fatigue, and then that fatigue turns into pain. Yet the person will think they’re aware of a constant increase in psychic force flowing into their arm. They won’t realize their mistake unless someone points it out, as they tend to gauge a certain psychic state by the conscious movements that come with it! From these observations and many others like them, we believe we can conclude that our awareness of increased muscle effort comes down to two main things: a greater number of peripheral sensations and a qualitative change in some of those sensations.
We are thus led to define the intensity of a superficial effort in the same way as that of a cases there is a qualitative progress and an increasing complexity, indistinctly perceived. But consciousness, accustomed to think in terms of space and to translate its thoughts into words, will denote the feeling by a single word and will localize the effort at the exact point where it yields a useful result: it will then become aware of an effort which is always of the same nature and increases at the spot assigned to it, and a feeling which, retaining the same name, grows without changing its nature. Now, the same illusion of consciousness is likely to be met with again in the case of the states which are[Pg 27] intermediate between superficial efforts and deep-seated feelings. A large number of psychic states are accompanied, in fact, by muscular contractions and peripheral sensations. Sometimes these superficial elements are co-ordinated by a purely speculative idea, sometimes by an idea of a practical order. In the first case there is intellectual effort or attention; in the second we have the emotions which may be called violent or acute: anger, terror, and certain varieties of joy, sorrow, passion and desire. Let us show briefly that the same definition of intensity applies to these intermediate states.
We are therefore led to define the intensity of a superficial effort in the same way as that of a case where there is a qualitative progress and an increasing complexity that is vaguely perceived. However, consciousness, which tends to think in spatial terms and translate its thoughts into words, will express the feeling with a single word and will pinpoint the effort at the exact location where it results in something useful: it will then recognize an effort that is always the same in nature and increases at that designated spot, along with a feeling that, while keeping the same name, intensifies without changing its nature. Now, the same illusion of consciousness is likely to show up again in the states that are intermediate between superficial efforts and deep-seated feelings. Many psychic states are indeed accompanied by muscular contractions and peripheral sensations. Sometimes these superficial elements are linked by a purely theoretical idea, and other times by a practical idea. In the first case, we have intellectual effort or attention; in the second, we encounter emotions that could be described as intense or acute: anger, terror, and certain types of joy, sorrow, passion, and desire. Let’s briefly show that the same definition of intensity applies to these intermediate states.
Attention is not a purely physiological phenomenon, but we cannot deny that it is accompanied by movements. These movements are neither the cause nor the result of the phenomenon; they are part of it, they express it in terms of space, as Ribot has so remarkably proved.[7] Fechner had already reduced the effort of attention in a sense-organ to the muscular feeling "produced by putting in motion, by a sort of reflex action, the muscles which are correlated with the different sense organs." He had noticed the very distinct sensation of tension and contraction of the scalp, the pressure from without inwards over the whole skull, which we experience when we make a great effort to recall something. Ribot has studied[Pg 28] more closely the movements which are characteristic of voluntary attention. "Attention contracts the frontal muscle: this muscle ... draws the eyebrow towards itself, raises it and causes transverse wrinkles on the forehead.... In extreme cases the mouth is opened wide. With children and with many adults eager attention gives rise to a protrusion of the lips, a kind of pout." Certainly, a purely psychic factor will always enter into voluntary attention, even if it be nothing more than the exclusion by the will of all ideas foreign to the one with which the subject wishes to occupy himself. But, once this exclusion is made, we believe that we are still conscious of a growing tension of soul, of an immaterial effort which increases. Analyse this impression and you will find nothing but the feeling of a muscular contraction which spreads over a wider surface or changes its nature, so that the tension becomes pressure, fatigue and pain.
Attention isn't just a physical process, but we can't deny that it comes with movements. These movements aren't the cause or result of attention; they're part of it, showing it in space, as Ribot has clearly demonstrated.[7] Fechner has already linked the effort of attention in a sense organ to the muscular feeling created by the reflex action of muscles connected to different sense organs. He observed the noticeable sensation of tension and contraction in the scalp, and the inward pressure we feel on our skull when we try hard to remember something. Ribot examined[Pg 28] more closely the movements typical of voluntary attention. "Attention tightens the frontal muscle: this muscle ... pulls the eyebrow upward, raises it, and creates transverse wrinkles on the forehead.... In extreme cases, the mouth opens wide. For children and many adults, intense attention can lead to a protrusion of the lips, almost like a pout." Undoubtedly, there will always be a mental component to voluntary attention, even if it's just the willpower to push aside all unrelated thoughts. But once we do that, we believe we're still aware of a rising tension in our mind, an immaterial effort that grows stronger. Analyze this feeling, and you'll find it's just the sensation of muscular contraction that spreads over a larger area or alters its nature, turning the tension into pressure, fatigue, and pain.
Now, we do not see any essential difference between the effort of attention and what may be The intensity called the effort of psychic tension: acute desire, uncontrolled anger, passionate love, violent hatred. Each of these states may be reduced, we believe, to a system of muscular contractions co-ordinated by an idea; but in the case of attention, it is the more or less reflective idea of knowing; in the case of emotion, the unreflective idea of acting. The intensity of these violent emotions is thus likely to be nothing but[Pg 29] the muscular tension which accompanies them. Darwin has given a remarkable description of the physiological symptoms of rage. "The action of the heart is much accelerated.... The face reddens or may turn deadly pale. The respiration is laboured, the chest heaves, and the dilated nostrils quiver. The whole body often trembles. The voice is affected. The teeth are clenched or ground together and the muscular system is commonly stimulated to violent, almost frantic action. The gestures ... represent more or less plainly the act of striking or fighting with an enemy."[8] We shall not go so far as to maintain, with Professor James,[9] that the emotion of rage is reducible to the sum of these organic sensations: there will always be an irreducible psychic element in anger, if this be only the idea of striking or fighting, of which Darwin speaks, and which gives a common direction to so many diverse movements. But, though this idea determines the direction of the emotional state and the accompanying movements, the growing intensity of the state itself is, we believe, nothing but the deeper and deeper disturbance of the organism, a disturbance which consciousness has no difficulty in measuring by the number and extent of the bodily surfaces concerned. It will be useless to assert that there is a restrained rage which is all the more intense. The reason is that, where emotion has free play, consciousness does not[Pg 30] dwell on the details of the accompanying movements, but it does dwell upon them and is concentrated upon them when its object is to conceal them. Eliminate, in short, all trace of organic disturbance, all tendency towards muscular contraction, and all that will be left of anger will be the idea, or, if you still insist on making it an emotion, you will be unable to assign it any intensity.
We don’t see any significant difference between the focus of attention and what might be called the intensity of psychic tension: strong desire, uncontrolled anger, passionate love, intense hatred. We believe each of these states can be simplified to a series of muscular contractions coordinated by an idea; in the case of attention, it involves a more or less reflective idea of knowing, while for emotions, it’s the unreflective idea of acting. Therefore, the intensity of these strong emotions is likely just the muscular tension that goes along with them. Darwin provided a striking description of the physical symptoms of rage: "The heart rate speeds up... The face turns red or may become deathly pale. Breathing becomes labored, the chest heaves, and the flared nostrils quiver. The entire body often shakes. The voice is affected. The teeth are clenched or ground together, and the muscular system is usually pushed into violent, almost frantic action. The gestures... clearly represent the act of hitting or fighting an enemy." We won’t go as far as Professor James suggests, that the emotion of rage can be reduced to just these physical sensations; there will always be an essential psychic component to anger, if only the idea of hitting or fighting, which gives a common purpose to so many different movements. However, while this idea shapes the direction of the emotional state and the movements that come with it, the increasing intensity of the emotion itself is, we believe, simply the growing disturbance within the organism, which consciousness can easily measure by the number and size of the body parts involved. It’s pointless to claim that there is a suppressed rage that’s even more intense. This is because, when emotion flows freely, consciousness doesn’t focus on the details of the accompanying movements; instead, it does focus on them and concentrates on them when trying to hide them. In short, if you remove any signs of physical disturbance, any inclination toward muscular contraction, all that remains of anger will be just the idea, or, if you still want to consider it an emotion, you won't be able to attribute any intensity to it.
"Fear, when strong," says Herbert Spencer, "expresses itself in cries, in efforts to escape, in palpitations, in tremblings."[10] We go further, and maintain that these movements form part of the terror itself: by their means the terror becomes an emotion capable of passing through different degrees of intensity. Suppress them entirely, and the more or less intense state of terror will be succeeded by an idea of terror, the wholly intellectual representation of a danger which it concerns us to avoid. There are also high degrees of joy and sorrow, of desire, aversion and even shame, the height of which will be found to be nothing but the reflex movements begun by the organism and perceived by consciousness. "When lovers meet," says Darwin, "we know that their hearts beat quickly, their breathing is hurried and their faces flushed."[11] Aversion is marked by movements of repugnance which we repeat without noticing when we think of the[Pg 31] object of our dislike. We blush and involuntarily clench the fingers when we feel shame, even if it be retrospective. The acuteness of these emotions is estimated by the number and nature of the peripheral sensations which accompany them. Little by little, and in proportion as the emotional state loses its violence and gains in depth, the peripheral sensations will give place to inner states; it will be no longer our outward movements but our ideas, our memories, our states of consciousness of every description, which will turn in larger or smaller numbers in a definite direction. There is, then, no essential difference from the point of view of intensity between the deep-seated feelings, of which we spoke at the beginning, and the acute or violent emotions which we have just passed in review. To say that love, hatred, desire, increase in violence is to assert that they are projected outwards, that they radiate to the surface, that peripheral sensations are substituted for inner states: but superficial or deep-seated, violent or reflective, the intensity of these feelings always consists in the multiplicity of simple states which consciousness dimly discerns in them.
"Strong fear," says Herbert Spencer, "shows itself through screams, attempts to escape, quick heartbeats, and shaking." [10] We go further and argue that these reactions are part of the terror itself: they allow the terror to become an emotion that can vary in intensity. If we suppress them completely, the intense feeling of terror will be replaced by a conceptual idea of terror, an intellectual representation of a danger we need to avoid. There are also extreme levels of joy, sadness, desire, aversion, and even shame, which are essentially just the physical reactions initiated by our bodies and recognized by our minds. "When lovers meet," says Darwin, "we know their hearts race, their breathing speeds up, and their faces get red." [11] Aversion is marked by expressions of disgust that we repeat unconsciously when thinking of what we dislike. We blush and instinctively clench our fists when we feel shame, even if it's looking back. The intensity of these emotions is measured by the amount and type of physical sensations that come with them. Gradually, as the emotional state becomes less intense but deeper, these physical sensations will give way to internal states; it will no longer be our physical movements but our thoughts, memories, and various states of awareness that will shift in larger or smaller quantities in a specific direction. Therefore, there’s no significant difference in intensity between the deep feelings we talked about earlier and the intense or violent emotions we just covered. To say that love, hate, or desire increases in intensity means they are expressed outwardly, radiating to the surface, where physical sensations take the place of internal states: yet whether they are superficial or deep, violent or contemplative, the intensity of these feelings always lies in the multitude of simple states that consciousness vaguely perceives within them.
We have hitherto confined ourselves to feelings and efforts, complex states the intensity of which does not absolutely depend on an external cause. But sensations seem to us simple states: in what will their magnitude[Pg 32] consist? The intensity of sensations varies with the external cause of which they are said to be the conscious equivalent: how shall we explain the presence of quantity in an effect which is inextensive, and in this case indivisible? To answer this question, we must first distinguish between the so-called affective and the representative sensations. There is no doubt that we pass gradually from the one to the other and that some affective element enters into the majority of our simple representations. But nothing prevents us from isolating this element and inquiring separately, in what does the intensity of an affective sensation, a pleasure or a pain, consist?
We have so far focused on feelings and efforts, which are complex states whose intensity doesn't solely depend on an external cause. However, sensations seem to be simple states: what determines their magnitude[Pg 32]? The intensity of sensations changes with the external cause that they represent in our consciousness: how can we explain the presence of quantity in an effect that is non-physical, and in this case, indivisible? To address this question, we first need to differentiate between what we call affective sensations and representative sensations. There’s no doubt that we gradually transition from one to the other, and that some affective element is present in most of our simple representations. But there's nothing stopping us from isolating this element and exploring separately what constitutes the intensity of an affective sensation, whether it’s pleasure or pain.
Perhaps the difficulty of the latter problem is principally due to the fact that we are unwilling to see in the affective state anything but the conscious expression of an organic disturbance, the inward echo of an outward cause. We notice that a more intense sensation generally corresponds to a greater nervous disturbance; but inasmuch as these disturbances are unconscious as movements, since they come before consciousness in the guise of a sensation which has no resemblance at all to motion, we do not see how they could transmit to the sensation anything of their own magnitude. For there is nothing in common, we repeat, between superposable magnitudes such as, for example, vibration-amplitudes, and sensations which do not occupy[Pg 33] space. If the more intense sensation seems to us to contain the less intense, if it assumes for us, like the physical impression itself, the form of a magnitude, the reason probably is that it retains something of the physical impression to which it corresponds. And it will retain nothing of it if it is merely the conscious translation of a movement of molecules; for, just because this movement is translated into the sensation of pleasure or pain, it remains unconscious as molecular movement.
Perhaps the difficulty of the latter problem mainly arises from our unwillingness to see emotions as anything more than a conscious reaction to an organic disturbance, an internal response to an external cause. We observe that a stronger sensation usually corresponds to a greater nervous disruption; however, because these disturbances are unconscious movements that occur before we become aware of them, appearing as sensations that don't resemble motion at all, we fail to understand how they could pass on any of their intensity to the sensation. There is nothing in common, we reiterate, between additive magnitudes like vibration amplitudes and sensations that don't take up [Pg 33] space. If a stronger sensation seems to include a weaker one, resembling a magnitude like the physical impression itself, it’s likely because it retains some quality of the physical impression it corresponds to. And it won’t retain anything if it’s merely the conscious interpretation of molecular movement; because, as this movement is translated into the sensation of pleasure or pain, it remains unconscious as molecular movement.
But it might be asked whether pleasure and pain, instead of expressing only what has just occurred, or what is actually occurring, in the organism, as is usually believed, could not also point out what is going to, or what is tending to take place. It seems indeed somewhat improbable that nature, so profoundly utilitarian, should have here assigned to consciousness the merely scientific task of informing us about the past or the present, which no longer depend upon us. It must be noticed in addition that we rise by imperceptible stages from automatic to free movements, and that the latter differ from the former principally in introducing an affective sensation between the external action which occasions them and the volitional reaction which ensues. Indeed, all our actions might have been automatic, and we can surmise that there are many organized beings in whose case an external stimulus causes a definite reaction without calling up consciousness as an[Pg 34] intermediate agent. If pleasure and pain make their appearance in certain privileged beings, it is probably to call forth a resistance to the automatic reaction which would have taken place: either sensation has nothing to do, or it is nascent freedom. But how would it enable us to resist the reaction which is in preparation if it did not acquaint us with the nature of the latter by some definite sign? And what can this sign be except the sketching, and, as it were, the prefiguring of the future automatic movements in the very midst of the sensation which is being experienced? The affective state must then correspond not merely to the physical disturbances, movements or phenomena which have taken place, but also, and especially, to those which are in preparation, those which are getting ready to be.
But one might wonder whether pleasure and pain, instead of only reflecting what has just happened or what is currently happening in the body, as is commonly thought, could also indicate what is about to happen or what is likely to occur. It seems somewhat unlikely that nature, which is so fundamentally practical, would limit consciousness to merely informing us about the past or present, which are beyond our control. Additionally, it's important to note that we progress through imperceptible stages from automatic to voluntary movements, and the latter mainly differ from the former by introducing an emotional sensation between the external action that triggers them and the voluntary reaction that follows. In fact, all our actions could have been automatic, and we can imagine that there are many living beings for whom an external stimulus leads to a specific reaction without triggering consciousness as an intermediary. If pleasure and pain arise in certain privileged beings, it is likely to provoke resistance against the automatic reaction that would have occurred: either sensation is irrelevant, or it represents emerging freedom. But how could it help us resist the reaction that is being prepared if it didn’t inform us about its nature in some clear way? And what could this signal be other than the outlining, and in a sense, the foreshadowing of the future automatic movements right in the middle of the sensation being felt? The emotional state must then relate not only to the physical disturbances, movements, or phenomena that have happened but also, and especially, to those that are being prepared, the ones that are getting ready to manifest.
It is certainly not obvious at first sight how this hypothesis simplifies the problem. For we are trying to find what there can be in common, from the point of view of magnitude, between a physical phenomenon and a state of consciousness, and we seem to have merely turned the difficulty round by making the present state of consciousness a sign of the future reaction, rather than a psychic translation of the past stimulus. But the difference between the two hypotheses is considerable. For the molecular disturbances which were mentioned just now are necessarily unconscious, since no trace of the movements[Pg 35] themselves can be actually perceived in the sensation which translates them. But the automatic movements which tend to follow the stimulus as its natural outcome are likely to be conscious as movements: or else the sensation itself, whose function is to invite us to choose between this automatic reaction and other possible movements, would be of no avail. The intensity of affective sensations might thus be nothing more than our consciousness of the involuntary movements which are being begun and outlined, so to speak, within these states, and which would have gone on in their own way if nature had made us automata instead of conscious beings.
It’s not immediately clear how this hypothesis simplifies the problem. We’re trying to find what’s common, in terms of magnitude, between a physical event and a state of consciousness. It seems like we’ve just shifted the issue by treating the current state of consciousness as a sign of future reactions instead of as a psychic interpretation of past stimuli. However, the difference between these two hypotheses is significant. The molecular disturbances we mentioned earlier are automatically unconscious, since there’s no detectable trace of the movements themselves in the sensation that represents them. In contrast, the automatic movements that naturally follow the stimulus are likely to be conscious movements. If they weren’t, the sensation, which is supposed to help us choose between this automatic response and other possible actions, wouldn’t be helpful at all. Therefore, the intensity of emotional sensations might just be our awareness of the involuntary movements that are starting to form, so to speak, within these states, and which would have continued on their own if nature had made us robots instead of conscious beings.
If such be the case, we shall not compare a pain
of increasing intensity to a note which grows
louder and louder, but rather to a
symphony, in which an increasing number
of instruments make themselves
heard. Within the characteristic sensation,
which gives the tone to all the others,
consciousness distinguishes a larger or smaller
number of sensations arising at different points
of the periphery, muscular contractions, organic
movements of every kind: the choir of these
elementary psychic states voices the new demands
of the organism, when confronted by a new situation.
In other words, we estimate the intensity
of a pain by the larger or smaller part of the
organism which takes interest in it. Richet[12][Pg 36]
has observed that the slighter the pain, the more
precisely is it referred to a particular spot; if it
becomes more intense, it is referred to the whole
of the member affected. And he concludes by
saying that "the pain spreads in proportion as
it is more intense."[13] We should rather reverse
the sentence, and define the intensity of the pain
by the very number and extent of the parts of
the body which sympathize with it and react,
and whose reactions are perceived by consciousness.
To convince ourselves of this, it will be
enough to read the remarkable description of
disgust given by the same author: "If the stimulus
is slight there may be neither nausea nor
vomiting.... If the stimulus is stronger, instead
of being confined to the pneumo-gastric
nerve, it spreads and affects almost the whole
organic system. The face turns pale, the smooth
muscles of the skin contract, the skin is covered
with a cold perspiration, the heart stops beating:
in a word there is a general organic disturbance
following the stimulation of the medulla oblongata,
and this disturbance is the supreme expression
of disgust."[14] But is it nothing more than
its expression? In what will the general sensation
of disgust consist, if not in the sum of these
elementary sensations? And what can we understand
here by increasing intensity, if it is not
the constantly increasing number of sensations[Pg 37]
which join in with the sensations already experienced?
Darwin has drawn a striking picture
of the reactions following a pain which becomes
more and more acute. "Great pain urges all
animals ... to make the most violent and
diversified efforts to escape from the cause of
suffering.... With men the mouth may
be closely compressed, or more commonly the
lips are retracted with the teeth clenched or
ground together.... The eyes stare wildly
... or the brows are heavily contracted.
Perspiration bathes the body.... The circulation
and respiration are much affected."[15]
Now, is it not by this very contraction of the
muscles affected that we measure the intensity
of a pain? Analyse your idea of any suffering
which you call extreme: do you not mean that
it is unbearable, that is to say, that it urges the
organism to a thousand different actions in order
to escape from it? I can picture to myself a
nerve transmitting a pain which is independent
of all automatic reaction; and I can equally
understand that stronger or weaker stimulations
influence this nerve differently. But I do not
see how these differences of sensation would
be interpreted by our consciousness as differences
of quantity unless we connected them with the
reactions which usually accompany them, and
which are more or less extended and more or[Pg 38]
less important. Without these subsequent reactions,
the intensity of the pain would be a
quality, and not a magnitude.
If that's the case, we shouldn't compare increasing pain to a note that just gets louder, but instead to a symphony where more and more instruments join in. Within that distinct feeling that sets the tone for everything else, our awareness picks out different sensations coming from various parts of the body, along with muscle contractions and different kinds of bodily movements. This collection of basic emotional states reflects the new needs of the body when faced with a new situation. In other words, we assess the intensity of pain by how many parts of the body are involved. Richet[12][Pg 36] observed that when pain is mild, it tends to be pinpointed to a specific area; as it grows stronger, it is felt throughout the entire affected limb. He concludes that "the pain spreads in proportion as it is more intense."[13] We should actually flip that around and define pain intensity by how many and which parts of the body respond to it, with their reactions being noticed by our consciousness. To see this clearly, we can look at the striking description of disgust provided by the same author: "If the stimulus is slight there may be neither nausea nor vomiting.... If the stimulus is stronger, instead of being limited to the pneumo-gastric nerve, it spreads and affects almost the whole organic system. The face pales, the smooth muscles of the skin tense up, the skin becomes cold and sweaty, the heart stops beating: in short, there’s a general organic disruption following stimulation of the medulla oblongata, and this disruption is the ultimate expression of disgust."[14] But is it merely an expression? What does the overall sensation of disgust consist of, if not the sum of these basic sensations? And what exactly do we mean by increasing intensity, if it isn't the growing number of sensations that add to those already felt? Darwin painted a vivid picture of the reactions that occur with increasingly sharp pain. "Intense pain drives all animals … to make frantic and varied efforts to escape the source of suffering.... In humans, the mouth may be tightly shut, or more often the lips are pulled back with clenched teeth.... The eyes may widen in panic
... or the brows may deeply furrow.
Sweat covers the body.... Circulation and breathing are greatly affected."[15] Now, isn't it through this tightening of the affected muscles that we measure the intensity of pain? Break down your idea of any suffering you consider extreme: don’t you mean it’s unbearable, which means it drives the body to a thousand different actions to escape it? I can imagine a nerve sending a signal of pain without any automatic reaction; and I understand that stronger or weaker stimuli affect this nerve differently. But I can’t see how these differences in sensations would be perceived by our consciousness as differences in quantity unless we link them to the reactions that usually accompany them, which vary in extent and significance. Without these subsequent reactions, pain intensity would be a quality, not a magnitude.
We have hardly any other means of comparing several pleasures with one another. What do we mean by a greater pleasure except a pleasure that is preferred? And what can our preference be, except a certain disposition of our organs, the effect of which is that, when two pleasures are offered simultaneously to our mind, our body inclines towards one of them? Analyse this inclination itself and you will find a great many little movements which begin and become perceptible in the organs concerned, and even in the rest of the body, as if the organism were coming forth to meet the pleasure as soon as it is pictured. When we define inclination as a movement, we are not using a metaphor. When confronted by several pleasures pictured by our mind, our body turns towards one of them spontaneously, as though by a reflex action. It rests with us to check it, but the attraction of the pleasure is nothing but this movement that is begun, and the very keenness of the pleasure, while we enjoy it, is merely the inertia of the organism, which is immersed in it and rejects every other sensation. Without this vis inertiae of which we become conscious by the very resistance which we offer to anything that might distract us, pleasure would be a state, but no longer a magnitude. In the moral as in[Pg 39] the physical world, attraction serves to define movement rather than to produce it.
We hardly have any other way to compare different pleasures with each other. What do we mean by a greater pleasure if not a pleasure that we prefer? And what can this preference be other than a specific condition of our mental and physical state, causing our body to lean towards one of the pleasures when two are presented to us at the same time? If you analyze this inclination, you’ll find many tiny movements starting and becoming noticeable in the related organs and even in the rest of the body, as if our whole being is ready to embrace the pleasure as soon as we imagine it. When we describe inclination as a movement, we’re not just using a figure of speech. When we face multiple pleasures in our mind, our body naturally turns toward one of them, almost like a reflex. It's up to us to stop that reaction, but the pull of the pleasure is essentially this initial movement, and the intensity of the pleasure during our enjoyment is just the inertia of our body, which is fully engaged in it and ignores all other sensations. Without this vis inertiae, which we become aware of by resisting anything that could distract us, pleasure would be a state of being, but not a significant experience. In both the moral and physical worlds, attraction primarily helps define movement rather than create it.
We have studied the affective sensations separately, but we must now notice that many representative sensations possess an affective character, and thus call forth a reaction on our part which we take into account in estimating their intensity. A considerable increase of light is represented for us by a characteristic sensation which is not yet pain, but which is analogous to dazzling. In proportion as the amplitude of sound-vibrations increases, our head and then our body seem to us to vibrate or to receive a shock. Certain representative sensations, those of taste, smell and temperature, have a fixed character of pleasantness or unpleasantness. Between flavours which are more or less bitter you will hardly distinguish anything but differences of quality; they are like different shades of one and the same colour. But these differences of quality are at once interpreted as differences of quantity, because of their affective character and the more or less pronounced movements of reaction, pleasure or repugnance, which they suggest to us. Besides, even when the sensation remains purely representative, its external cause cannot exceed a certain degree of strength or weakness without inciting us to movements which enable us to measure it. Sometimes indeed[Pg 40] we have to make an effort to perceive this sensation, as if it were trying to escape notice; sometimes on the other hand it obsesses us, forces itself upon us and engrosses us to such an extent that we make every effort to escape from it and to remain ourselves. In the former case the sensation is said to be of slight intensity, and in the latter case very intense. Thus, in order to perceive a distant sound, to distinguish what we call a faint smell or a dim light, we strain all our faculties, we "pay attention." And it is just because the smell and the light thus require to be reinforced by our efforts that they seem to us feeble. And, inversely, we recognize a sensation of extreme intensity by the irresistible reflex movements to which it incites us, or by the powerlessness with which it affects us. When a cannon is fired off close to our ears or a dazzling light suddenly flares up, we lose for an instant the consciousness of our personality; this state may even last some time in the case of a very nervous subject. It must be added that, even within the range of the so-called medium intensities, when we are dealing on even terms with a representative sensation, we often estimate its importance by comparing it with another which it drives away, or by taking account of the persistence with which it returns. Thus the ticking of a watch seems louder at night because it easily monopolizes a consciousness almost empty of sensations and ideas. Foreigners talking to one[Pg 41] another in a language which we do not understand seem to us to speak very loudly, because their words no longer call up any ideas in our mind, and thus break in upon a kind of intellectual silence and monopolize our attention like the ticking of a watch at night. With these so-called medium sensations, however, we approach a series of psychic states, the intensity of which is likely to possess a new meaning. For, in most cases, the organism hardly reacts at all, at least in a way that can be perceived; and yet we still make a magnitude out of the pitch of a sound, the intensity of a light, the saturation of a colour. Doubtless, a closer observation of what takes place in the whole of the organism when we hear such and such a note or perceive such and such a colour has more than one surprise in store for us. Has not C. Féré shown that every sensation is accompanied by an increase in muscular force which can be measured by the dynamometer?[16] But of an increase of this kind there is hardly any consciousness at all, and if we reflect on the precision with which we distinguish sounds and colours, nay, even weights and temperatures, we shall easily guess that some new element must come into play in our estimate of them.
We’ve looked at emotional sensations individually, but we now need to acknowledge that many sensory experiences have an emotional quality, prompting a reaction from us that we factor in when assessing their intensity. A significant increase in light is associated with a sensation that is not yet painful but is similar to being dazzled. As the strength of sound vibrations increases, our head and body feel like they’re vibrating or experiencing a shock. Some sensory experiences, like taste, smell, and temperature, have a definite quality of being pleasant or unpleasant. When it comes to flavors that are more or less bitter, we can scarcely identify anything beyond differences in quality; they resemble various shades of the same color. However, these quality differences are immediately interpreted as differences in quantity due to their emotional character and the varying degrees of pleasure or discomfort they provoke in us. Moreover, even when the sensation remains purely perceptual, its external cause cannot exceed a certain level of intensity or weakness without prompting reactions that allow us to gauge it. At times, we must exert effort to notice a sensation as if it’s trying to fly under the radar; at other times, it can overwhelm us, demanding our attention to the point where we try to escape it and maintain our sense of self. In the former situation, the sensation is considered to be of low intensity, while in the latter, it’s considered very intense. Therefore, to perceive a distant sound or recognize what we call a faint smell or dim light, we focus all our senses; we "pay attention." It’s precisely because smells and lights require our effort to notice that we perceive them as weak. Conversely, we identify a sensation of extreme intensity by the uncontrollable reflex actions it provokes in us or the overwhelming way it affects us. When a cannon is fired near our ears or a bright light suddenly appears, we temporarily lose our sense of self; this state can even linger for some time in very sensitive individuals. It should also be noted that even with so-called moderate intensities, when we’re dealing with a sensory experience on equal grounds, we frequently gauge its significance by comparing it to another experience that it pushes aside or by considering how persistently it returns. For instance, the ticking of a watch sounds louder at night because it easily captures our attention when our mind is nearly void of sensations and thoughts. When foreigners converse in a language we don't understand, they seem to speak very loudly since their words no longer trigger any ideas in our minds and thus intrude upon a kind of intellectual silence, monopolizing our focus like a watch ticking at night. With these so-called moderate sensations, we edge closer to a series of psychological states that may carry new meanings. In many cases, the body hardly reacts, at least not in a perceivable way; yet we still create measurements from the pitch of a sound, the brightness of a light, or the saturation of a color. Certainly, a closer examination of what occurs in the entire organism when we hear a specific note or see a particular color reveals more than a few surprises. Hasn't C. Féré demonstrated that every sensation is accompanied by a measurable increase in muscle force? But we are barely aware of such an increase, and if we reflect on how precisely we can differentiate sounds, colors, weights, and temperatures, it becomes clear that some new factor must influence our evaluation of them.
Now, the nature of this element is easy to determine.[Pg 42] For, in proportion as a sensation loses its affective character and becomes representative, the reactions which it called forth on our part tend to disappear, but at the same time we perceive the external object which is its cause, or if we do not now perceive it, we have perceived it, and we think of it. Now, this cause is extensive and therefore measurable: a constant experience, which began with the first glimmerings of consciousness and which continues throughout the whole of our life, shows us a definite shade of sensation corresponding to a definite amount of stimulation. We thus associate the idea of a certain quantity of cause with a certain quality of effect; and finally, as happens in the case of every acquired perception, we transfer the idea into the sensation, the quantity of the cause into the quality of the effect. At this very moment the intensity, which was nothing but a certain shade or quality of the sensation, becomes a magnitude. We shall easily understand this process if, for example, we hold a pin in our right hand and prick our left hand more and more deeply. At first we shall feel as it were a tickling, then a touch which is succeeded by a prick, then a pain localized at a point, and finally the spreading of this pain over the surrounding zone. And the more we reflect on it, the more clearly shall we see that we are here dealing with so many qualitatively distinct sensations,[Pg 43] so many varieties of a single species. But yet we spoke at first of one and the same sensation which spread further and further, of one prick which increased in intensity. The reason is that, without noticing it, we localized in the sensation of the left hand, which is pricked, the progressive effort of the right hand, which pricks. We thus introduced the cause into the effect, and unconsciously interpreted quality as quantity, intensity as magnitude. Now, it is easy to see that the intensity of every representative sensation ought to be understood in the same way.
Now, the nature of this element is easy to determine.[Pg 42] Because as a sensation loses its emotional aspect and becomes more about representation, the reactions it triggers in us tend to fade away. At the same time, we recognize the external object that caused it, or even if we don’t recognize it right now, we have recognized it before and we think about it. This cause is extensive and therefore measurable: a consistent experience, which started with the first hints of consciousness and continues throughout our lives, shows us a specific shade of sensation that corresponds to a certain amount of stimulation. We thus connect the idea of a certain quantity of cause with a certain quality of effect; and eventually, as happens with every learned perception, we transfer the idea into the sensation, linking the quantity of the cause to the quality of the effect. At that moment, the intensity, which was just a certain shade or quality of the sensation, becomes a measurable amount. We can easily understand this process if, for instance, we hold a pin in our right hand and prick our left hand more deeply. At first, it feels like a tickle, then a touch followed by a prick, then a localized pain at one point, and finally the spreading of this pain over the surrounding area. The more we think about it, the clearer it becomes that we’re dealing with several qualitatively distinct sensations,[Pg 43] different variations of the same type. Yet, we initially referred to it as one single sensation that spread farther and farther—a single prick that increased in intensity. This is because, without realizing it, we localized in the sensation of the left hand, which is being pricked, the continuous effort of the right hand that is doing the pricking. We thus introduced the cause into the effect and unconsciously interpreted quality as quantity, intensity as magnitude. Now, it’s clear that the intensity of every representative sensation should be understood in the same way.
The sensations of sound display well marked degrees of intensity. We have already spoken of the necessity of taking into account the affective character of these sensations, the shock received by the whole of the organism. We have shown that a very intense sound is one which engrosses our attention, which supplants all the others. But take away the shock, the well-marked vibration, which you sometimes feel in your head or even throughout your body: take away the clash which takes place between sounds heard simultaneously: what will be left except an indefinable quality of the sound which is heard? But this quality is immediately interpreted as quantity because you have obtained it yourself a thousand times, e.g. by striking some object and thus expending a definite quantity of effort. You know, too, how far you would[Pg 44] have to raise your voice to produce a similar sound, and the idea of this effort immediately comes into your mind when you transform the intensity of the sound into a magnitude. Wundt[17] has drawn attention to the quite special connexions of vocal and auditory nervous filaments which are met with in the human brain. And has it not been said that to hear is to speak to oneself? Some neuropaths cannot be present at a conversation without moving their lips; this is only an exaggeration of what takes place in the case of every one of us. How will the expressive or rather suggestive power of music be explained, if not by admitting that we repeat to ourselves the sounds heard, so as to carry ourselves back into the psychic state out of which they emerged, an original state, which nothing will express, but which something may suggest, viz., the very motion and attitude which the sound imparts to our body?
The sensations of sound have clear levels of intensity. We've already talked about how important it is to consider the emotional aspect of these sensations and the impact they have on our entire system. We’ve demonstrated that a very loud sound captures our attention and overshadows all others. But if you eliminate the shock, the strong vibration you sometimes feel in your head or body, and the clash that happens between sounds that are heard at the same time, what will be left except an indistinct quality of the sound? This quality is immediately interpreted as quantity because you’ve experienced it countless times, like when you hit an object and exert a certain amount of effort. You also know how much you’d need to raise your voice to create a similar sound, and the thought of this effort comes to mind when you think about the intensity of the sound as a measure. Wundt has pointed out the unique connections between vocal and auditory nerve fibers found in the human brain. And hasn’t it been said that hearing is like talking to oneself? Some people can't be part of a conversation without moving their lips; this is just an exaggeration of what happens with all of us. How can we explain the expressive, or even suggestive, power of music if not by acknowledging that we mentally repeat the sounds we hear to bring ourselves back into the emotional state from which they originated—a raw state that can't be fully expressed but can be suggested, like the movements and emotions that sound instills in our bodies?
Thus, when we speak of the intensity of a sound of medium force as a magnitude, we allude principally to the greater or less effort which we should have ourselves to expend in order to summon, by our own effort, the same auditory sensation.
Thus, when we talk about the intensity of a sound of medium strength as a measurement, we mainly refer to the more or less effort we would need to exert to produce the same auditory sensation ourselves.
Now, besides the intensity, we distinguish another characteristic property of the sound, its pitch.[Pg 45] Are the differences in pitch, such as our ear perceives, quantitative differences? I grant that a sharper sound calls up the picture of a higher position in space. But does it follow from this that the notes of the scale, as auditory sensations, differ otherwise than in quality? Forget what you have learnt from physics, examine carefully your idea of a higher or lower note, and see whether you do not think simply of the greater or less effort which the tensor muscle of your vocal chords has to make in order to produce the note? As the effort by which your voice passes from one note to another is discontinuous, you picture to yourself these successive notes as points in space, to be reached by a series of sudden jumps, in each of which you cross an empty separating interval: this is why you establish intervals between the notes of the scale. Now, why is the line along which we dispose them vertical rather than horizontal, and why do we say that the sound ascends in some cases and descends in others? It must be remembered that the high notes seem to us to produce some sort of resonance in the head and the deep notes in the thorax: this perception, whether real or illusory, has undoubtedly had some effect in making us reckon the intervals vertically. But we must also notice that the greater the tension of the vocal chords in the chest voice, the greater is the surface of the body affected, if the singer is inexperienced; this is just the reason why the[Pg 46] effort is felt by him as more intense. And as he breathes out the air upwards, he will attribute the same direction to the sound produced by the current of air; hence the sympathy of a larger part of the body with the vocal muscles will be represented by a movement upwards. We shall thus say that the note is higher because the body makes an effort as though to reach an object which is more elevated in space. In this way it became customary to assign a certain height to each note of the scale, and as soon as the physicist was able to define it by the number of vibrations in a given time to which it corresponds, we no longer hesitated to declare that our ear perceived differences of quantity directly. But the sound would remain a pure quality if we did not bring in the muscular effort which produces it or the vibrations which explain it.
Now, in addition to intensity, we recognize another key characteristic of sound: its pitch.[Pg 45] Are the differences in pitch, as our ears perceive, actually quantitative differences? I agree that a sharper sound conjures up the image of a higher position in space. But does that mean that the notes of the scale, as auditory sensations, differ in ways other than just quality? Forget what you learned in physics; carefully consider your idea of a higher or lower note, and see if you don’t just think of the greater or lesser effort needed from the tensor muscles of your vocal cords to produce that note. Since the effort to switch from one note to another is not continuous, you visualize these successive notes as points in space that you reach by making a series of sudden jumps, each one crossing an empty interval: this is why you create intervals between the notes of the scale. Now, why do we arrange them vertically rather than horizontally, and why do we say that the sound ascends in some cases and descends in others? It’s important to remember that high notes seem to resonate in the head and deep notes resonate in the chest: whether this perception is real or not, it has definitely influenced us to think of intervals in a vertical way. We should also note that the greater the tension in the vocal cords when using chest voice, the larger the area of the body that feels affected, especially if the singer is inexperienced; that’s why the[Pg 46] effort feels more intense to them. As they exhale air upward, they’ll assume the sound produced by that airflow also goes upward; thus, a larger part of the body sympathizes with the vocal muscles, leading to an upward movement. We’ll say that the note is higher because the body makes an effort as if reaching for something situated higher in space. In this way, it became customary to assign a certain height to each note of the scale, and once physicists could define it by the number of vibrations in a given time, we no longer hesitated to declare that our ears directly perceive differences in quantity. However, sound would remain simply a quality if we didn’t consider the muscular effort that creates it or the vibrations that explain it.
The experiments of Blix, Goldscheider and Donaldson[18] have shown that the points on the surface of the body which feel cold are not the same as those which feel heat. Physiology is thus disposed to set up a distinction of nature, and not merely of degree, between the sensations of heat and cold. But psychological observation goes further, for close attention can easily discover specific differences between the different sensations of heat, as also between the sensations of[Pg 47] cold. A more intense heat is really another kind of heat. We call it more intense because we have experienced this same change a thousand times when we approached nearer and nearer a source of heat, or when a growing surface of our body was affected by it. Besides, the sensations of heat and cold very quickly become affective and incite us to more or less marked reactions by which we measure their external cause: hence, we are inclined to set up similar quantitative differences among the sensations which correspond to lower intensities of the cause. But I shall not insist any further; every one must question himself carefully on this point, after making a clean sweep of everything which his past experience has taught him about the cause of his sensations and coming face to face with the sensations themselves. The result of this examination is likely to be as follows: it will be perceived that the magnitude of a representative sensation depends on the cause having been put into the effect, while the intensity of the affective element depends on the more or less important reactions which prolong the external stimulations and find their way into the sensation itself.
The experiments by Blix, Goldscheider, and Donaldson[18] have shown that the areas of the body that feel cold are different from those that feel heat. Physiology tends to recognize a fundamental difference, not just varying degrees, between the sensations of heat and cold. However, psychological observation goes further, as careful attention can easily reveal specific differences between various sensations of heat and also among sensations of[Pg 47] cold. A higher level of heat is actually a different kind of heat. We call it more intense because we have experienced this change countless times when we get closer to a heat source or when a larger area of our body is affected by it. Moreover, sensations of heat and cold quickly become emotionally charged and provoke notable reactions that help us gauge their external cause; therefore, we tend to identify similar quantitative differences among the sensations that correspond to lower intensities of the cause. But I won't elaborate further; everyone should reflect carefully on this matter after clearing away everything their past experiences have taught them about the cause of their sensations and confronting the sensations themselves directly. The outcome of this examination will likely be that it’s recognized that the strength of a representative sensation relies on the cause being realized in the effect, while the intensity of the emotional component depends on the significance of the reactions that extend the external stimuli and integrate into the sensation itself.
The same thing will be experienced in the case of pressure and even weight. When you say that a pressure on your hand becomes stronger, see whether you do not mean that there first was a contact, then a pressure, afterwards a[Pg 48] pain, and that this pain itself, after having gone through a series of qualitative changes, has spread further and further over the surrounding region. Look again and see whether you do not bring in the more and more intense, i.e. more and more extended, effort of resistance which you oppose to the external pressure. When the psychophysicist lifts a heavier weight, he experiences, he says, an increase of sensation. Examine whether this increase of sensation ought not rather to be called a sensation of increase. The whole question is centred in this, for in the first case the sensation would be a quantity like its external cause, whilst in the second it would be a quality which had become representative of the magnitude of its cause. The distinction between the heavy and the light may seem to be as old-fashioned and as childish as that between the hot and the cold. But the very childishness of this distinction makes it a psychological reality. And not only do the heavy and the light impress our consciousness as generically different, but the various degrees of lightness and heaviness are so many species of these two genera. It must be added that the difference of quality is here translated spontaneously into a difference of quantity, because of the more or less extended effort which our body makes in order to lift a given weight. Of this you will soon become aware if you are asked to lift a basket which, you are told, is full of scrap-iron, whilst in fact there is nothing in it. You will think you[Pg 49] are losing your balance when you catch hold of it, as though distant muscles had interested themselves beforehand in the operation and experienced a sudden disappointment. It is chiefly by the number and nature of these sympathetic efforts, which take place at different points of the organism, that you measure the sensation of weight at a given point; and this sensation would be nothing more than a quality if you did not thus introduce into it the idea of a magnitude. What strengthens the illusion on this point is that we have become accustomed to believe in the immediate perception of a homogeneous movement in a homogeneous space. When I lift a light weight with my arm, all the rest of my body remaining motionless, I experience a series of muscular sensations each of which has its "local sign," its peculiar shade: it is this series which my consciousness interprets as a continuous movement in space. If I afterwards lift a heavier weight to the same height with the same speed, I pass through a new series of muscular sensations, each of which differs from the corresponding term of the preceding series. Of this I could easily convince myself by examining them closely. But as I interpret this new series also as a continuous movement, and as this movement has the same direction, the same duration and the same velocity as the preceding, my consciousness feels itself bound to localize the difference between the second series of sensations and the first elsewhere than in the[Pg 50] movement itself. It thus materializes this difference at the extremity of the arm which moves; it persuades itself that the sensation of movement has been identical in both cases, while the sensation of weight differed in magnitude. But movement and weight are but distinctions of the reflective consciousness: what is present to consciousness immediately is the sensation of, so to speak, a heavy movement, and this sensation itself can be resolved by analysis into a series of muscular sensations, each of which represents by its shade its place of origin and by its colour the magnitude of the weight lifted.
You'll experience something similar with pressure and even weight. When you say that a pressure on your hand feels stronger, check if you mean that there was first contact, then pressure, followed by pain, and that this pain, after going through several changes, has spread further into the surrounding area. Take another look and see if you're not also considering the increasing effort you make to resist the external pressure. When a psychophysicist lifts a heavier weight, they report an increase in sensation. Think about whether this increase of sensation should actually be called a sensation of increase. The entire issue revolves around this, because in the first scenario, sensation would be a quantity, like its external cause, while in the second, it would be a quality that represents the size of its cause. The difference between heavy and light might seem as outdated and trivial as the difference between hot and cold. However, the very triviality of this distinction makes it a psychological reality. Not only do heavy and light feel distinctly different to us, but the various degrees of lightness and heaviness are specific kinds of these two categories. It should be noted that this difference in quality is automatically translated into a difference in quantity, thanks to the varying effort our body exerts to lift a certain weight. You’ll notice this if you're asked to lift a basket that you are told is full of scrap iron when, in reality, it’s empty. You might feel as if you are losing your balance when you grab it, almost as if distant muscles were preparing for the task and then felt a sudden letdown. It’s primarily the number and nature of these sympathetic efforts, occurring at different points in the body, that gauge your sensation of weight at a particular point; and this sensation would be just a quality if you didn’t introduce the idea of magnitude into it. What adds to the illusion here is that we've grown accustomed to believing in the immediate perception of a uniform movement in a uniform space. When I lift a light weight with my arm while the rest of my body stays still, I feel a series of muscular sensations, each with its own "local sign" and unique quality: it’s this series that my awareness interprets as a continuous movement in space. If I later lift a heavier weight to the same height at the same speed, I go through a new series of muscular sensations, each differing from the corresponding sensation in the previous series. I could easily confirm this by examining them closely. However, since I also interpret this new series as a continuous movement, and because this movement shares the same direction, duration, and speed as the first, my awareness tends to locate the difference between the second series of sensations and the first outside of the movement itself. It effectively materializes this difference at the end of the moving arm; it convinces itself that the sensation of movement has been the same in both cases, while the sensation of weight varied in magnitude. But movement and weight are merely distinctions of reflective consciousness: what is immediately present to consciousness is the sensation of what feels like a heavy movement, and this sensation can be broken down into a series of muscular sensations, each of which represents its origin by its shade and the magnitude of the lifted weight through its color.
Shall we call the intensity of light a quantity, or shall we treat it as a quality? It has not perhaps been sufficiently noticed what a large number of different factors co-operate in daily life in giving us information about the nature of the luminous source. We know from long experience that, when we have a difficulty in distinguishing the outlines and details of objects, the light is at a distance or on the point of going out. Experience has taught us that the affective sensation or nascent dazzling that we experience in certain cases must be attributed to a higher intensity of the cause. Any increase or diminution in the number of luminous sources alters the way in which the sharp lines of bodies stand out and also the shadows which they project. Still more important are the changes of hue which coloured[Pg 51] surfaces, and even the pure colours of the spectrum, undergo under the influence of a brighter or dimmer light. As the luminous source is brought nearer, violet takes a bluish tinge, green tends to become a whitish yellow, and red a brilliant yellow. Inversely, when the light is moved away, ultramarine passes into violet and yellow into green; finally, red, green and violet tend to become a whitish yellow. Physicists have remarked these changes of hue for some time;[19] but what is still more remarkable is that the majority of men do not perceive them, unless they pay attention to them or are warned of them. Having made up our mind, once for all, to interpret changes of quality as changes of quantity, we begin by asserting that every object has its own peculiar colour, definite and invariable. And when the hue of objects tends to become yellow or blue, instead of saying that we see their colour change under the influence of an increase or diminution of light, we assert that the colour remains the same but that our sensation of luminous intensity increases or diminishes. We thus substitute once more, for the qualitative impression received by our consciousness, the quantitative interpretation given by our understanding. Helmholtz has described a case of interpretation of the same kind, but still more complicated: "If we form white with two colours of the spectrum, and if we increase or[Pg 52] diminish the intensities of the two coloured lights in the same ratio, so that the proportions of the combination remain the same, the resultant colour remains the same although the relative intensity of the sensations undergoes a marked change.... This depends on the fact that the light of the sun, which we consider as the normal white light during the day, itself undergoes similar modifications of shade when the luminous intensity varies."[20]
Shall we consider the intensity of light as a quantity, or should we view it as a quality? It hasn’t been given enough attention that a lot of different factors come together in our daily lives to inform us about the nature of the light source. We’ve learned over time that when we struggle to see the outlines and details of objects, the light is either far away or about to go out. Experience has shown us that the blinding sensation we sometimes feel must be linked to a higher intensity of light. Any increase or decrease in the number of light sources changes how sharply objects are defined and the shadows they cast. Even more crucial are the shifts in hue that colored surfaces and even the pure colors of the spectrum undergo when the light gets brighter or dimmer. When the light source gets closer, violet takes on a bluish tint, green becomes a pale yellow, and red turns into a bright yellow. Conversely, when the light source moves away, ultramarine becomes violet, and yellow shifts to green; finally, red, green, and violet tend to morph into a pale yellow. Physicists have noted these hue changes for some time; what’s even more surprising is that most people don’t notice them unless they focus on them or are alerted. Once we decide to interpret changes in quality as changes in quantity, we start by claiming that every object has its unique color, definite and unchanging. And when the hue of objects shifts to yellow or blue, rather than saying we see their color change due to an increase or decrease in light, we assert that the color stays the same, but our perception of light intensity changes. This way, we replace the qualitative impression we get with a quantitative interpretation from our understanding. Helmholtz described a similar case of interpretation, but even more complex: "If we mix two colors from the spectrum to make white, and if we increase or decrease the intensities of the two colored lights in the same proportion, keeping the combination ratios the same, the resulting color will stay the same even though the relative intensity of the sensations changes significantly.... This is because sunlight, which we consider normal white light during the day, also undergoes similar shade changes when the intensity of light varies."
But yet, if we often judge of variations in the luminous source by the relative changes of hue of the objects which surround us, this is no longer the case in simple instances where a single object, e.g. a white surface, passes successively through different degrees of luminosity. We are bound to insist particularly on this last point. For the physicist speaks of degrees of luminous intensity as of real quantities: and, in fact, he measures them by the photometer. The psychophysicist goes still further: he maintains that our eye itself estimates the intensities of light. Experiments have been attempted, at first by Delbœuf,[21] and afterwards by Lehmann and Neiglick,[22] with[Pg 53] the view of constructing a psychophysical formula from the direct measurement of our luminous sensations. Of these experiments we shall not dispute the result, nor shall we deny the value of photometric processes; but we must see how we have to interpret them.
However, if we often judge the variations in light sources by the changes in color of the objects around us, this isn’t the case in simple examples where a single object, like a white surface, goes through different levels of brightness. We must emphasize this last point. Physicists refer to levels of light intensity as real quantities: they measure them with a photometer. The psychophysicist takes it a step further, arguing that our eyes evaluate light intensities themselves. Experiments have been conducted, first by Delbœuf,[21] and later by Lehmann and Neiglick,[22] intending to create a psychophysical formula based on direct measurements of our light sensations. We will not dispute the results of these experiments, nor deny the value of photometric processes; however, we need to consider how we interpret them.
Look closely at a sheet of paper lighted e.g. by four candles, and put out in succession one, two, Photometric three of them. You say that the surface remains white and that its brightness diminishes. But you are aware that one candle has just been put out; or, if you do not know it, you have often observed a similar change in the appearance of a white surface when the illumination was diminished. Put aside what you remember of your past experiences and what you are accustomed to say of the present ones; you will find that what you really perceive is not a diminished illumination of the white surface, it is a layer of shadow passing over this surface at the moment the candle is extinguished. This shadow is a reality to your consciousness, like the light itself. If you call the first surface in all its brilliancy white, you will have to give another name to what you now see, for it is a different thing: it is, if we may say so, a new shade of white. We have grown accustomed, through the combined influence of our past experience and of physical theories, to regard black as the absence, or at least as the minimum, of luminous sensation, and the successive[Pg 54] shades of grey as decreasing intensities of white light. But, in point of fact, black has just as much reality for our consciousness as white, and the decreasing intensities of white light illuminating a given surface would appear to an unprejudiced consciousness as so many different shades, not unlike the various colours of the spectrum. This is the reason why the change in the sensation is not continuous, as it is in the external cause, and why the light can increase or decrease for a certain period without producing any apparent change in the illumination of our white surface: the illumination will not appear to change until the increase or decrease of the external light is sufficient to produce a new quality. The variations in brightness of a given colour—the affective sensations of which we have spoken above being left aside—would thus be nothing but qualitative changes, were it not our custom to transfer the cause to the effect and to replace our immediate impressions by what we learn from experience and science. The same thing might be said of degrees of saturation. Indeed, if the different intensities of a colour correspond to so many different shades existing between this colour and black, the degrees of saturation are like shades intermediate between this same colour and pure white. Every colour, we might say, can be regarded under two aspects, from the point of view of black and from the point of view of white. And black is then to intensity what white is to saturation.
Look closely at a sheet of paper lit by four candles, and then blow out one, two, or three of them one after the other. You’ll notice that the surface stays white, but its brightness decreases. However, you know that one candle has just been extinguished; or if you don’t realize it, you’ve likely seen a similar change in the appearance of a white surface as the light dims. If you set aside what you remember from your past experiences and what you usually say about your current ones, you’ll find that what you truly perceive is not just a reduction in the brightness of the white surface, but a layer of shadow moving over it at the moment the candle goes out. This shadow is just as real to your awareness as the light itself. If you call the initial bright surface white, you’ll need to use a different term for what you now see, as it is something distinct: it is, we could say, a new shade of white. We’ve become accustomed, through our past experiences and physical theories, to view black as the absence or at least the minimum of light sensation, and the various shades of grey as decreasing intensities of white light. But, in reality, black has just as much validity for our awareness as white, and the varying intensities of white light reflecting off a surface would appear to an unbiased awareness as several different shades, similar to the colors of the spectrum. This is why the change in sensation isn’t continuous, unlike the external cause, and why light can increase or decrease for a certain period without showing any noticeable change in the illumination of our white surface: the brightness won’t seem to change until the increase or decrease in external light is significant enough to introduce a new quality. The variations in brightness of a specific color—setting aside the emotional sensations we mentioned earlier—would merely be qualitative changes if it weren’t for our habit of attributing the cause to the effect and replacing our immediate impressions with what we learn from experience and science. The same can be said for degrees of saturation. In fact, if the different intensities of a color correspond to various shades between that color and black, the degrees of saturation represent shades that lie between that same color and pure white. Every color, we might say, can be viewed in two ways, from the perspective of black and from the perspective of white. In this way, black relates to intensity as white relates to saturation.
The meaning of the photometric experiments will now be understood. A candle placed at a certain distance from a sheet of paper illuminates it in a certain way: you double the distance and find that four candles are required to produce the same effects, sensation. From this you conclude that if you had doubled the distance without increasing the intensity of the luminous source, the resultant illumination would have been only one-fourth as bright. But it is quite obvious that you are here dealing with the physical and not the psychological effect. For it cannot be said that you have compared two sensations with one another: you have made use of a single sensation in order to compare two different luminous sources with each other, the second four times as strong as the first but twice as far off. In a word, the physicist never brings in sensations which are twice or three times as great as others, but only identical sensations, destined to serve as intermediaries between two physical quantities which can then be equated with one another. The sensation of light here plays the part of the auxiliary unknown quantity which the mathematician introduces into his calculations, and which is not intended to appear in the final result.
The meaning of the photometric experiments will now be clear. A candle placed at a certain distance from a sheet of paper lights it up in a specific way: if you double the distance, you find that you need four candles to achieve the same effect. From this, you conclude that if you had just doubled the distance without increasing the brightness of the light source, the resulting illumination would only be one-fourth as bright. However, it's clear that you're looking at the physical effect and not the psychological one. You aren't comparing two sensations directly; instead, you're using one sensation to compare two different light sources, where the second is four times as bright as the first but twice as far away. In short, physicists don't deal with sensations that are twice or three times as strong as others; they only use identical sensations as intermediaries between two physical quantities that can be compared. The sensation of light here acts like an auxiliary unknown variable that a mathematician uses in calculations, which isn’t meant to be part of the final result.
But the object of the psychophysicist is entirely different: it is the sensation of light itself which he studies, and claims to measure. Sometimes he will proceed to integrate infinitely small[Pg 56] differences, after the method of Fechner; sometimes he will compare one sensation directly with another. The latter method, due to Plateau and Delbœuf, differs far less than has hitherto been believed from Fechner's: but, as it bears more especially on the luminous sensations, we shall deal with it first. Delbœuf places an observer in front of three concentric rings which vary in brightness. By an ingenious arrangement he can cause each of these rings to pass through all the shades intermediate between white and black. Let us suppose that two hues of grey are simultaneously produced on two of the rings and kept unchanged; let us call them A and B. Delbœuf alters the brightness, C, of the third ring, and asks the observer to tell him whether, at a certain moment, the grey, B, appears to him equally distant from the other two. A moment comes, in fact, when the observer states that the contrast A Β is equal to the contrast Β C, so that, according to Delbœuf, a scale of luminous intensities could be constructed on which we might pass from each sensation to the following one by equal sensible contrasts: our sensations would thus be measured by one another. I shall not follow Delbœuf into the conclusions which he has drawn from these remarkable experiments: the essential question, the only question, as it seems to me, is whether a contrast A B, formed of the elements A and B, is really equal to a contrast Β C, which is differently[Pg 57] composed. As soon as it is proved that two sensations can be equal without being identical, psychophysics will be established. But it is this equality which seems to me open to question: it is easy to explain, in fact, how a sensation of luminous intensity can be said to be at an equal distance from two others.
But the goal of the psychophysicist is completely different: they study the sensation of light itself and claim to measure it. Sometimes they will integrate infinitesimally small[Pg 56] differences, using Fechner's method; other times, they will directly compare one sensation to another. The latter method, attributed to Plateau and Delbœuf, is not as different from Fechner's as was previously thought: however, since it focuses more specifically on luminous sensations, we'll address it first. Delbœuf positions an observer in front of three concentric rings that differ in brightness. Through an innovative setup, he can make each of these rings transition through all the shades between white and black. Imagine that two shades of grey are simultaneously shown on two of the rings and remain unchanged; let's call them A and B. Delbœuf adjusts the brightness, C, of the third ring and asks the observer to indicate whether, at a certain moment, the grey B seems to be equally distant from the other two. There comes a moment when the observer reports that the contrast A-B is equal to the contrast B-C, so according to Delbœuf, a scale of luminous intensities could be created where we could transition from one sensation to the next through equal noticeable contrasts: our sensations would therefore be measured against each other. I won’t delve into the conclusions that Delbœuf has made from these fascinating experiments: the key question, the only question that appears important to me, is whether a contrast A-B, made up of the elements A and B, is genuinely equal to a contrast B-C, which is composed differently[Pg 57]. Once it is demonstrated that two sensations can be equal without being identical, psychophysics will be validated. But this equality seems questionable to me: it is quite straightforward to explain how a sensation of luminous intensity can be perceived as equidistant from two others.
Let us assume for a moment that from our birth onwards the growing intensity of a luminous source had always called up in our consciousness, one after the other, the different colours of the spectrum. There is no doubt that these colours would then appear to us as so many notes of a gamut, as higher or lower degrees in a scale, in a word, as magnitudes. Moreover it would be easy for us to assign each of them its place in the series. For although the extensive cause varies continuously, the changes in the sensation of colour are discontinuous, passing from one shade to another shade. However numerous, then, may be the shades intermediate between the two colours, A and B, it will always be possible to count them in thought, at least roughly, and ascertain whether this number is almost equal to that of the shades which separate Β from another colour C. In the latter case it will be said that Β is equally distant from A and C, that the contrast is the same on one side as on the other. But this will always be merely a convenient interpretation: for although the number of intermediate shades may be equal[Pg 58] on both sides, although we may pass from one to the other by sudden leaps, we do not know whether these leaps are magnitudes, still less whether they are equal magnitudes: above all it would be necessary to show that the intermediaries which have helped us throughout our measurement could be found again inside the object which we have measured. If not, it is only by a metaphor that a sensation can be said to be an equal distance from two others.
Let’s imagine that from the moment we were born, the increasing brightness of a light source always triggered in our minds the different colors of the spectrum, one after another. There’s no doubt that these colors would seem to us like notes in a musical scale, as higher or lower points on a continuum, essentially, as quantities. Additionally, it would be easy for us to place each color within that sequence. Even though the overall cause varies continuously, the sensations of color change in distinct steps, moving from one shade to the next. No matter how many shades exist between two colors, A and B, we can always roughly count them in our mind and determine if that number is nearly the same as the shades separating B from another color, C. In this situation, we would say that B is equally distant from A and C, indicating that the contrast on both sides is the same. However, this is just a convenient interpretation: while the number of shades may be the same on both sides and we can jump between them unexpectedly, we don’t know if these jumps represent actual quantities, let alone whether they are equal quantities. Most importantly, we would need to demonstrate that the intermediate colors we used in our measurement can be found within the object we measured. If not, it’s only a metaphor to say that one sensation is an equal distance from two others.
Now, if the views which we have before enumerated with regard to luminous intensities are accepted, it will be recognized that the different hues of grey which Delbœuf displays to us are strictly analogous, for our consciousness, to colours, and that if we declare that a grey tint is equidistant from two other grey tints, it is in the same sense in which it might be said that orange, for example, is at an equal distance from green and red. But there is this difference, that in all our past experience the succession of grey tints has been produced in connexion with a progressive increase or decrease in illumination. Hence we do for the differences of brightness what we do not think of doing for the differences of colour: we promote the changes of quality into variations of magnitude. Indeed, there is no difficulty here about the measuring, because the successive shades of grey produced by a continuous decrease of illumination are discontinuous, as being[Pg 59] qualities, and because we can count approximately the principal intermediate shades which separate any two kinds of grey. The contrast A Β will thus be declared equal to the contrast Β C when our imagination, aided by our memory, inserts between A and Β the same number of intermediate shades as between Β and C. It is needless to say that this will necessarily be a very rough estimate. We may anticipate that it will vary considerably with different persons. Above all it is to be expected that the person will show more hesitation and that the estimates of different persons will differ more widely in proportion as the difference in brightness between the rings A and Β is increased, for a more and more laborious effort will be required to estimate the number of intermediate hues. This is exactly what happens, as we shall easily perceive by glancing at the two tables drawn up by Delbœuf.[23] In proportion as he increases the difference in brightness between the exterior ring and the middle ring, the difference between the numbers on which one and the same observer or different observers successively fix increases almost continuously from 3 degrees to 94, from 5 to 73, from 10 to 25, from 7 to 40. But let us leave these divergences on one side: let us assume that the observers are always consistent and always agree with one another; will it then be established that the contrasts A Β and Β C are equal? It would first be necessary to[Pg 60] prove that two successive elementary contrasts are equal quantities, whilst, in fact, we only know that they are successive. It would then be necessary to prove that inside a given tint of grey we perceive the less intense shades which our imagination has run through in order to estimate the objective intensity of the source of light. In a word, Delbœuf's psychophysics assumes a theoretical postulate of the greatest importance, which is disguised under the cloak of an experimental result, and which we should formulate as follows: "When the objective quantity of light is continuously increased, the differences between the hues of grey successively obtained, each of which represents the smallest perceptible increase of physical stimulation, are quantities equal to one another. And besides, any one of the sensations obtained can be equated with the sum of the differences which separate from one another all previous sensations, going from zero upwards." Now, this is just the postulate of Fechner's psychophysics, which we are going to examine.
Now, if we accept the views we've already outlined about luminous intensities, it's clear that the various shades of grey that Delbœuf presents to us are comparable to colors in our perception. When we say that one grey shade is equidistant from two other grey shades, it's the same as saying that orange is equidistant from green and red. However, there's a key difference: in all our prior experiences, the sequence of grey shades has been linked to a gradual increase or decrease in brightness. Therefore, we treat brightness differences in a way we don't for color differences: we translate quality changes into magnitude variations. In fact, measuring this is straightforward because the successive shades of grey resulting from a consistent decrease in illumination are tangible qualities. We can roughly count the main intermediate shades that separate any two grey types. Thus, the contrast A B will be considered equal to the contrast B C when our imagination, supported by our memory, fills in the same number of intermediate shades between A and B as it does between B and C. It's important to note that this will always be a rough estimate. We can expect this estimate to vary significantly between different individuals. Most notably, as the brightness difference between rings A and B increases, individuals will likely show more uncertainty, leading to wider discrepancies in estimates since determining the number of intermediate shades will become increasingly challenging. This is precisely what happens, as we can easily see in the two tables created by Delbœuf.[23] As the brightness difference between the outer ring and the middle ring increases, the difference in the numbers that one observer or different observers focus on also rises almost consistently from 3 degrees to 94, from 5 to 73, from 10 to 25, from 7 to 40. But let's set these variations aside: if we assume that observers are always consistent and in agreement with one another; does that mean the contrasts A B and B C are equal? First, it must be shown that two consecutive elementary contrasts are equal in measure, while we only know they occur in sequence. Next, it needs to be demonstrated that within a specific grey shade, we can perceive the less intense shades that our imagination has processed to estimate the objective intensity of the light source. In summary, Delbœuf's psychophysics relies on an important theoretical assumption that is masked as an experimental result, which can be stated as follows: "When the objective amount of light is continuously increased, the differences between the grey shades obtained—each representing the smallest noticeable increase in physical stimulation—are equal quantities. Furthermore, any one of the sensations produced can be represented as the sum of the differences separating all previous sensations, starting from zero." This aligns with the assumption in Fechner's psychophysics, which we are about to explore.
Fechner took as his starting-point a law discovered by Weber, according to which, given a certain stimulus which calls forth a certain sensation, the amount by which the stimulus must be increased for consciousness to become aware of any change bears a fixed relation to the original stimulus. Thus, if we denote by Ε the stimulus which corresponds to the sensation S, and by ΔΕ[Pg 61] the amount by which the original stimulus must be increased in order that a sensation of difference may be produced, we shall have ΔΕ/E = const. This formula has been much modified by the disciples of Fechner, and we prefer to take no part in the discussion; it is for experiment to decide between the relation established by Weber and its substitutes. Nor shall we raise any difficulty about granting the probable existence of a law of this nature. It is here really a question not of measuring a sensation but only of determining the exact moment at which an increase of stimulus produces a change in it. Now, if a definite amount of stimulus produces a definite shade of sensation, it is obvious that the minimum amount of stimulus required to produce a change in this shade is also definite; and since it is not constant, it must be a function of the original stimulus. But how are we to pass from a relation between the stimulus and its minimum increase to an equation which connects the "amount of sensation" with the corresponding stimulus? The whole of psychophysics is involved in this transition, which is therefore worthy of our closest consideration.
Fechner started with a law discovered by Weber, which states that when a certain stimulus leads to a certain sensation, the amount by which the stimulus needs to be increased for us to notice any change is always in a fixed ratio to the original stimulus. So, if we call Ε the stimulus that corresponds to the sensation S, and ΔΕ[Pg 61] the amount the original stimulus needs to be increased to create a noticeable difference in sensation, we have ΔΕ/E = const. This formula has been modified a lot by Fechner's followers, and we prefer not to join the debate; it’s up to experiments to determine whether Weber's relationship or its alternatives are correct. We also won't argue against acknowledging that a law like this probably exists. The real issue isn't about measuring sensation but figuring out the exact moment when an increase in stimulus causes a change in sensation. If a specific amount of stimulus creates a particular shade of sensation, it’s clear that the smallest change in stimulus needed to alter that shade is also specific; and since it isn't constant, it has to depend on the original stimulus. But how do we move from the relationship between the stimulus and its minimum increase to an equation that links the "amount of sensation" with the corresponding stimulus? This whole issue is central to psychophysics and deserves our close attention.
We shall distinguish several different artifices in the process of transition from Weber's experiments, or from any other series of similar observations, to a psychophysical law like Fechner's. It is[Pg 62] first of all agreed to consider our consciousness of an increase of stimulus as an increase of the sensation S: this is therefore called S. It is then asserted that all the sensations ΔS, which correspond to the smallest perceptible increase of stimulus, are equal to one another. They are therefore treated as quantities, and while, on the one hand, these quantities are supposed to be always equal, and, on the other, experiment has given a certain relation ΔΕ = ⨍(E) between the stimulus Ε and its minimum increase, the constancy of ΔS is expressed by writing ΔS = C ΔE/⨍(E), C being a constant quantity. Finally it is agreed to replace the very small differences ΔS and ΔΕ by the infinitely small differences dS and dE, whence an equation which is, this time, a differential one: dS = C dE/⨍(E). We shall now simply have to integrate on both sides to obtain the desired relation[24]: S=C ⨍Eo dE/⨍(E). And the transition will thus be made from a proved law, which only concerned the occurrence of a sensation, to an unprovable law which gives its measure.
We’ll identify various methods used in the transition from Weber's experiments or any other similar observations to a psychophysical law like Fechner's. It’s first agreed that our awareness of an increase in stimulus is treated as an increase in sensation S, which we will call S. It’s then stated that all sensations ΔS corresponding to the smallest noticeable increase in stimulus are equal to each other. They are treated as quantities, and while one hand assumes these quantities are always equal, experiments show a certain relationship ΔΕ = ⨍(E) between the stimulus Ε and its minimum increase. The consistency of ΔS is presented as ΔS = C ΔE/⨍(E), where C is a constant quantity. Lastly, we agree to replace the very small differences ΔS and ΔΕ with the infinitely small differences dS and dE, leading us to a differential equation: dS = C dE/⨍(E). Now we just need to integrate both sides to get the desired relationship[24]: S=C ⨍Eo dE/⨍(E). This completes the transition from a validated law concerning the occurrence of a sensation to an unprovable law that provides its measure.
Without entering upon any thorough discussion[Pg 63] of this ingenious operation, let us show in a few words how Fechner has grasped the real difficulty of the problem, how he has tried to overcome it, and where, as it seems to us, the flaw in his reasoning lies.
Without going into a detailed discussion[Pg 63] of this clever operation, let's briefly explain how Fechner understood the actual challenge of the problem, how he attempted to tackle it, and where we believe the weakness in his reasoning is.
Fechner realized that measurement could not be introduced into psychology without first defining what is meant by the equality and addition of two simple states, e.g. two sensations. But, unless they are identical, we do not at first see how two sensations can be equal. Undoubtedly in the physical world equality is not synonymous with identity. But the reason is that every phenomenon, every object, is there presented under two aspects, the one qualitative and the other extensive: nothing prevents us from putting the first one aside, and then there remains nothing but terms which can be directly or indirectly superposed on one another and consequently seen to be identical. Now, this qualitative element, which we begin by eliminating from external objects in order to measure them, is the very thing which psychophysics retains and claims to measure. And it is no use trying to measure this quality Q by some physical quantity Q' which lies beneath it: for it would be necessary to have previously shown that Q is a function of Q', and this would not be possible unless the quality Q had first been measured with some fraction of itself. Thus nothing prevents us from measuring the sensation of heat by[Pg 64] the degree of temperature; but this is only a convention, and the whole point of psychophysics lies in rejecting this convention and seeking how the sensation of heat varies when you change the temperature. In a word, it seems, on the one hand, that two different sensations cannot be said to be equal unless some identical residuum remains after the elimination of their qualitative difference; but, on the other hand, this qualitative difference being all that we perceive, it does not appear what could remain once it was eliminated.
Fechner understood that we couldn’t measure anything in psychology without first defining what we mean by the equality and addition of two simple states, like two sensations. But unless they are exactly the same, it’s not clear how two sensations could be equal. In the physical world, equality doesn’t mean the same thing as identity. The reason for this is that every phenomenon or object presents itself in two ways: qualitatively and extensively. We can ignore the first aspect, leaving us with terms that can be directly or indirectly compared and thus seen as identical. Now, this qualitative element that we initially set aside from external objects for measurement is actually what psychophysics holds onto and aims to measure. Trying to measure this quality Q with some underlying physical quantity Q' doesn't help, because we would need to prove that Q is dependent on Q', which wouldn’t be possible unless we had already measured quality Q in some part of itself. So, there’s nothing stopping us from measuring the sensation of heat by the degree of temperature; however, that’s merely a convention. The core of psychophysics is about rejecting this convention and exploring how the sensation of heat changes when you alter the temperature. In summary, it seems that two different sensations can’t be considered equal unless there’s some identical element left after we remove their qualitative differences; but on the other hand, since that qualitative difference is all we actually perceive, it’s unclear what would be left once it’s taken away.
The novel feature in Fechner's treatment is that he did not consider this difficulty insurmountable. Taking advantage of the fact that sensation varies by sudden jumps while the stimulus increases continuously, he did not hesitate to call these differences of sensation by the same name: they are all, he says, minimum differences, since each corresponds to the smallest perceptible increase in the external stimulus. Therefore you can set aside the specific shade or quality of these successive differences; a common residuum will remain in virtue of which they will be seen to be in a manner identical: they all have the common character of being minima. Such will be the definition of equality which we were seeking. Now, the definition of addition will follow naturally. For if we treat as a quantity the difference perceived by consciousness between two sensations which succeed one another in the course of a continuous increase[Pg 65] of stimulus, if we call the first sensation S, and the second S + ΔS, we shall have to consider every sensation S as a sum, obtained by the addition of the minimum differences through which we pass before reaching it. The only remaining step will then be to utilize this twofold definition in order to establish, first of all, a relation between the differences ΔS and ΔΕ, and then, through the substitution of the differentials, between the two variables. True, the mathematicians may here lodge a protest against the substitution of differential for difference; the psychologists may ask, too, whether the quantity ΔS, instead of being constant, does not vary as the sensation S itself;[25] finally, taking the psychophysical law for granted, we may all debate about its real meaning. But, by the mere fact that ΔS is regarded as a quantity and S as a sum, the fundamental postulate of the whole process is accepted.
The new aspect of Fechner's approach is that he didn't see this challenge as impossible to overcome. Recognizing that sensation changes in sudden jumps while the stimulus increases gradually, he confidently referred to these changes in sensation by the same term: they're all, according to him, minimum differences, since each one reflects the smallest noticeable increase in the external stimulus. This means you can disregard the specific nuances or qualities of these successive differences; there will be a common element that makes them seem essentially the same: they all share the fundamental characteristic of being minima. This will provide the definition of equality that we were looking for. Now, we can naturally move on to the definition of addition. If we treat the difference perceived by our consciousness between two sensations occurring in a continuous increase[Pg 65] of the stimulus as a quantity, calling the first sensation S, and the second S + ΔS, we’ll need to think of every sensation S as a sum, derived from the addition of the minimum differences we go through to reach it. The next step will be to apply this twofold definition to first establish a relationship between the differences ΔS and ΔΕ, and then, through substituting the differentials, between the two variables. True, mathematicians may object to replacing difference with differential; psychologists may also question whether the quantity ΔS is constant or changes along with sensation S itself;[25] and finally, taking the psychophysical law as given, we can all discuss its actual meaning. However, by simply recognizing ΔS as a quantity and S as a sum, the fundamental assumption of the whole process is acknowledged.
Now it is just this postulate which seems to us open to question, even if it can be understood. Assume that I experience a sensation S, and that, increasing the stimulus continuously, I perceive this increase after a certain time. I am now notified of the increase of the cause: but why should I call this notification an arithmetical difference? No doubt the notification consists in the fact that the original state S has changed:[Pg 66] it has become S'; but the transition from S to S' could only be called an arithmetical difference if I were conscious, so to speak, of an interval between S and S', and if my sensation were felt to rise from S to S' by the addition of something. By giving this transition a name, by calling it ΔS, you make it first a reality and then a quantity. Now, not only are you unable to explain in what sense this transition is a quantity, but reflection will show you that it is not even a reality; the only realities are the states S and S' through which I pass. No doubt, if S and S' were numbers, I could assert the reality of the difference S'—S even though S and S' alone were given; the reason is that the number S'—S, which is a certain sum of units, will then represent just the successive moments of the addition by which we pass from S to S'. But if S and S' are simple states, in what will the interval which separates them consist? And what, then, can the transition from the first state to the second be, if not a mere act of your thought, which, arbitrarily and for the sake of the argument, assimilates a succession of two states to a differentiation of two magnitudes?
Now it’s this assumption that seems questionable to us, even if we can understand it. Let’s say I have a sensation S, and as I gradually increase the stimulus, I notice this increase after a while. I’m aware of the cause getting stronger, but why should I label this awareness as an arithmetical difference? Sure, I realize that the original state S has changed: it has become S’; but the change from S to S’ can only be called an arithmetical difference if I am consciously aware of an interval between S and S’, and if my sensation feels like it’s rising from S to S’ by adding something. By naming this change, calling it ΔS, you make it first a reality and then a quantity. However, not only can’t you explain how this change is a quantity, but on reflection, you’ll see it’s not even a reality; the only actual states are S and S’ that I go through. Of course, if S and S’ were numbers, I could claim the reality of the difference S’—S even though only S and S’ were known; that’s because the number S’—S, which represents a particular sum of units, captures the series of moments in the addition that takes us from S to S’. But if S and S’ are just simple states, what would the interval between them consist of? And what can the transition from the first state to the second be other than just an act of your thought, which, arbitrarily and for the sake of the argument, likens a series of two states to a distinction between two quantities?
Either you keep to what consciousness presents to you or you have recourse to a conventional mode of representation. In the first case you will find a difference between S and S' like that between the shades sense. Of rainbow, and not at all an interval of magnitude. In the second case you may[Pg 67] introduce the symbol ΔS if you like, but it is only in a conventional sense that you will speak here of an arithmetical difference, and in a conventional sense, also, that you will assimilate a sensation to a sum. The most acute of Fechner's critics, Jules Tannery, has made the latter point perfectly clear. "It will be said, for example, that a sensation of 50 degrees is expressed by the number of differential sensations which would succeed one another from the point where sensation is absent up to the sensation of 50 degrees.... I do not see that this is anything but a definition, which is as legitimate as it is arbitrary."[26]
Either you stick to what your consciousness shows you, or you rely on a traditional way of expressing things. In the first scenario, you'll notice a difference between S and S' that's more about the nuances of experience, like the colors of a rainbow, rather than a measurable gap. In the second scenario, you might introduce the symbol ΔS if you want, but when you discuss an arithmetic difference here, it’s only in a conventional way, and similarly, when you connect a sensation to a total. The sharpest critic of Fechner, Jules Tannery, has clarified this point perfectly. "It would be said, for instance, that a sensation of 50 degrees is expressed by the number of incremental sensations that would follow one another from the point where there’s no sensation up to the sensation of 50 degrees... I don’t see this as anything more than a definition, which is just as valid as it is arbitrary."[Pg 67]
We do not believe, in spite of all that has been said, that the method of mean gradations has set psychophysics on a new path. The novel feature in Delbœuf's investigation was that he chose a particular case, in which consciousness seemed to decide in Fechner's favour, and in which common sense itself played the part of the psychophysicist. He inquired whether certain sensations did not appear to us immediately as equal although different, and whether it would not be possible to draw up, by their help, a table of sensations which were double, triple or quadruple those which preceded them. The mistake which Fechner made, as we have just seen, was that he believed in an interval between two successive[Pg 68] sensations S and S', when there is simply a passing from one to the other and not a difference in the arithmetical sense of the word. But if the two terms between which the passing takes place could be given simultaneously, there would then be a contrast besides the transition; and although the contrast is not yet an arithmetical difference, it resembles it in a certain respect; for the two terms which are compared stand here side by side as in a case of subtraction of two numbers. Suppose now that these sensations belong to the same genus and that in our past experience we have constantly been present at their march past, so to speak, while the physical stimulus increased continuously: it is extremely probable that we shall thrust the cause into the effect, and that the idea of contrast will thus melt into that of arithmetical difference. As we shall have noticed, moreover, that the sensation changed abruptly while the stimulus rose continuously, we shall no doubt estimate the distance between two given sensations by a rough guess at the number of these sudden jumps, or at least of the intermediate sensations which usually serve us as landmarks. To sum up, the contrast will appear to us as a difference, the stimulus as a quantity, the sudden jump as an element of equality: combining these three factors, we shall reach the idea of equal quantitative differences. Now, these conditions are nowhere so well realized as when surfaces of the same[Pg 69] colour, more or less illuminated, are simultaneously presented to us. Not only is there here a contrast between similar sensations, but these sensations correspond to a cause whose influence has always been felt by us to be closely connected with its distance; and, as this distance can vary continuously, we cannot have escaped noticing in our past experience a vast number of shades of sensation which succeeded one another along with the continuous increase in the cause. We are therefore able to say that the contrast between one shade of grey and another, for example, seems to us almost equal to the contrast between the latter and a third one; and if we define two equal sensations by saying that they are sensations which a more or less confused process of reasoning interprets as such, we shall in fact reach a law like that proposed by Delbœuf. But it must not be forgotten that consciousness has here passed through the same intermediate steps as the psychophysicist, and that its judgment is worth here just what psychophysics is worth; it is a symbolical interpretation of quality as quantity, a more or less rough estimate of the number of sensations which can come in between two given sensations. The difference is thus not as great as is believed between the method of least noticeable differences and that of mean gradations, between the psychophysics of Fechner and that of Delbœuf. The first led to a conventional measurement of sensation; the second[Pg 70] appeals to common sense in the particular cases where common sense adopts a similar convention. In a word, all psychophysics is condemned by its origin to revolve in a vicious circle, for the theoretical postulate on which it rests condemns it to experimental verification, and it cannot be experimentally verified unless its postulate is first granted. The fact is that there is no point of contact between the unextended and the extended, between quality and quantity. We can interpret the one by the other, set up the one as the equivalent of the other; but sooner or later, at the beginning or at the end, we shall have to recognize the conventional character of this assimilation.
We don't believe, despite everything that's been said, that the method of mean gradations has put psychophysics on a new track. The unique aspect of Delbœuf's study was that he focused on a specific case where consciousness seemed to favor Fechner's approach, with common sense itself acting as the psychophysicist. He asked whether certain sensations appear to us as equal even though they are different, and whether it would be possible to create a table of sensations that are double, triple, or quadruple those that came before them. The mistake Fechner made, as we just discussed, was thinking there was an interval between two consecutive sensations S and S', while there is merely a transition from one to the other without an arithmetical difference. However, if the two sensations involved in the transition could be presented simultaneously, there would then be a contrast in addition to the transition; and while the contrast isn't exactly an arithmetical difference, it is somewhat similar, as the two sensations being compared are positioned side by side like in a subtraction of two numbers. Now, if these sensations belong to the same category and we've consistently observed their gradual increase in our past experiences, it's very likely we'll confuse the cause with the effect, causing the idea of contrast to blend with that of arithmetical difference. Furthermore, since we have noticed that the sensation changed abruptly while the stimulus increased continuously, we would likely estimate the distance between two given sensations by roughly counting these sudden changes or at least the intermediate sensations that typically act as landmarks. In short, the contrast will seem to us like a difference, the stimulus as a quantity, and the sudden change as an element of equality: combining these three factors will lead us to the concept of equal quantitative differences. These conditions are most clearly realized when we see surfaces of the same color, illuminated to varying degrees, presented to us at the same time. Here, we not only have a contrast between similar sensations, but these sensations correspond to a cause whose influence we have always perceived as closely related to its distance; and since this distance can vary continuously, we cannot help but notice a vast array of shades of sensation that change alongside the steady increase in the cause. Therefore, we can say that the contrast between one shade of gray and another seems almost equal to the contrast between that shade and a third one; and if we define two equal sensations as those that a more or less unclear reasoning process interprets as such, we will, in fact, arrive at a law similar to the one proposed by Delbœuf. However, we must remember that consciousness has gone through the same intermediate steps as the psychophysicist, and its judgment is worth as much as psychophysics itself; it’s a symbolic interpretation of quality as quantity, a rough estimate of the number of sensations that could exist between two given sensations. Thus, the difference between the method of least noticeable differences and that of mean gradations is not as significant as believed, nor is the gap between Fechner's and Delbœuf's psychophysics. The first led to a conventional measurement of sensation; the second appeals to common sense in the specific cases where common sense adopts a similar convention. In short, all of psychophysics is trapped in a loop because the theoretical premise it relies on requires experimental verification, which can only happen if that premise is accepted first. The fact is, there is no actual connection between the unextended and the extended, between quality and quantity. We can interpret one through the other, treat one as the equivalent of the other; but eventually, we must acknowledge the conventional nature of this assimilation.
In truth, psychophysics merely formulates with precision and pushes to its extreme consequences a conception familiar to common sense. As speech dominates over thought, as external objects, which are common to us all, are more important to us than the subjective states through which each of us passes, we have everything to gain by objectifying these states, by introducing into them, to the largest possible extent, the representation of their external cause. And the more our knowledge increases, the more we perceive the extensive behind the intensive, quantity behind quality, the more also we tend to thrust the former into the latter, and to treat our sensations as magnitudes. Physics,[Pg 71] whose particular function it is to calculate the external cause of our internal states, takes the least possible interest in these states themselves: constantly and deliberately it confuses them with their cause. It thus encourages and even exaggerates the mistake which common sense makes on the point. The moment was inevitably bound to come at which science, familiarized with this confusion between quality and quantity, between sensation and stimulus, should seek to measure the one as it measures the other: such was the object of psychophysics. In this bold attempt Fechner was encouraged by his adversaries themselves, by the philosophers who speak of intensive magnitudes while declaring that psychic states cannot be submitted to measurement. For if we grant that one sensation can be stronger than another, and that this inequality is inherent in the sensations themselves, independently of all association of ideas, of all more or less conscious consideration of number and space, it is natural to ask by how much the first sensation exceeds the second, and to set up a quantitative relation between their intensities. Nor is it any use to reply, as the opponents of psychophysics sometimes do, that all measurement implies superposition, and that there is no occasion to seek for a numerical relation between intensities, which are not superposable objects. For it will then be necessary to explain why one sensation is said to be more intense than another, and how the conceptions[Pg 72] of greater and smaller can be applied to things which, it has just been acknowledged, do not admit among themselves of the relations of container to contained. If, in order to cut short any question of this kind, we distinguish two kinds of quantity, the one intensive, which admits only of a "more or less," the other extensive, which lends itself to measurement, we are not far from siding with Fechner and the psychophysicists. For, as soon as a thing is acknowledged to be capable of increase and decrease, it seems natural to ask by how much it decreases or by how much it increases. And, because a measurement of this kind does not appear to be possible directly, it does not follow that science cannot successfully accomplish it by some indirect process, either by an integration of infinitely small elements, as Fechner proposes, or by any other roundabout way. Either, then, sensation is pure quality, or, if it is a magnitude, we ought to try to measure it.
Honestly, psychophysics just clearly defines and takes to the extreme a concept that’s already familiar to common sense. Just as speech is more important than thought, and as the external objects we all share are more relevant to us than the subjective experiences we each have, we benefit from making these experiences objective, incorporating the representation of their external causes as much as possible. As our knowledge grows, we increasingly recognize the extensive behind the intensive, quantity behind quality, and we tend to merge the two, treating our sensations as measurable magnitudes. Physics, which is primarily concerned with calculating the external causes of our internal states, shows little interest in those states themselves and often deliberately confuses them with their causes. This reinforces and even amplifies the common misconception. Eventually, science, having become accustomed to this confusion between quality and quantity, sensation and stimulus, sought to measure sensations just like it measures stimuli; that was the goal of psychophysics. In this daring endeavor, Fechner was supported by his opponents, the philosophers who talk about intensive magnitudes while insisting that psychological states cannot be quantified. If we accept that one sensation can be stronger than another and that this difference is inherent in the sensations themselves, independent of any associations or conscious considerations of numbers and space, it naturally leads us to ask how much one sensation surpasses another and to establish a quantitative relationship between their intensities. It’s not helpful when critics of psychophysics argue that all measurement requires superposition and that we have no reason to find a numerical relationship between intensities, which aren't directly comparable. This brings up the question of why we say one sensation is more intense than another and how we can apply concepts of greater and lesser to things that, as we've just agreed, do not have relationships of container to contained. If, to bypass this issue, we identify two types of quantity—intensive, which only allows for "more or less," and extensive, which can be measured—we're leaning toward supporting Fechner and the psychophysicists. As soon as something is recognized as capable of increasing or decreasing, it makes sense to ask by how much it changes. And just because direct measurement doesn't seem feasible, it doesn’t mean that science can't find a way to achieve it indirectly, either through integration of infinitely small elements, like Fechner suggests, or another indirect method. So, either sensation is purely qualitative, or if it has magnitude, we should attempt to measure it.
To sum up what precedes, we have found the notion of intensity to present itself under a double aspect, according as we study the states of consciousness which represent an external cause, or those which are self-sufficient. In the former case the perception of intensity consists in a certain estimate of the magnitude of the cause means of a certain quality in the effect: it is, as the Scottish philosophers[Pg 73] would have said, an acquired perception. In the second case, we give the name of intensity to the larger or smaller number of simple psychic phenomena which we conjecture to be involved in the fundamental state: it is no longer an acquired perception, but a confused perception. In fact, these two meanings of the word usually intermingle, because the simpler phenomena involved in an emotion or an effort are generally representative, and because the majority of representative states, being at the same time affective, themselves include a multiplicity of elementary psychic phenomena. The idea of intensity is thus situated at the junction of two streams, one of which brings us the idea of extensive magnitude from without, while the other brings us from within, in fact from the very depths of consciousness, the image of an inner multiplicity. Now, the point is to determine in what the latter image consists, whether it is the same as that of number, or whether it is quite different from it. In the following chapter we shall no longer consider states of consciousness in isolation from one another, but in their concrete multiplicity, in so far as they unfold themselves in pure duration. And, in the same way as we have asked what would be the intensity of a representative sensation if we did not introduce into it the idea of its cause, we shall now have to inquire what the multiplicity of our inner states becomes, what form duration assumes, when the space in which[Pg 74] it unfolds is eliminated. This second question is even more important than the first. For, if the confusion of quality with quantity were confined to each of the phenomena of consciousness taken separately, it would give rise to obscurities, as we have just seen, rather than to problems. But by invading the series of our psychic states, by introducing space into our perception of duration, it corrupts at its very source our feeling of outer and inner change, of movement, and of freedom. Hence the paradoxes of the Eleatics, hence the problem of free will. We shall insist rather on the second point; but instead of seeking to solve the question, we shall show the mistake of those who ask it.
To summarize what came before, we’ve discovered that the idea of intensity presents itself in two ways, depending on whether we examine states of consciousness representing an external cause or those that are self-contained. In the first case, perceiving intensity involves estimating the magnitude of the cause through a certain quality of the effect: it’s, as Scottish philosophers would say, an acquired perception. In the second case, we refer to intensity as the larger or smaller number of simple mental phenomena that we believe are part of the fundamental state: it’s no longer an acquired perception, but a confused perception. In fact, these two meanings of the word often overlap, because the simpler phenomena involved in an emotion or effort are often representative, and because most representative states are also affective, including many elementary mental phenomena. The concept of intensity thus sits at the intersection of two streams, one bringing us the concept of extensive magnitude from the outside, while the other emanates from within, right from the depths of consciousness, presenting an image of inner complexity. Now, the key question is to ascertain what this latter image entails, whether it aligns with the concept of number, or if it differs entirely. In the next chapter, we will no longer examine states of consciousness in isolation but in their concrete multiplicity as they unfold in pure duration. Just as we previously asked about the intensity of a representative sensation without considering its cause, we now need to explore what our inner states' multiplicity becomes and what form duration takes when the space in which it unfolds is removed. This second question is even more critical than the first. If the confusion of quality with quantity were limited to each phenomenon of consciousness taken individually, it would create obscurities, as we've seen, rather than real problems. However, by invading the series of our mental states and introducing space into our perception of duration, it undermines at its very foundation our sense of external and internal change, movement, and freedom. This is the basis for the paradoxes of the Eleatics and the problem of free will. We will focus more on this second point; instead of trying to resolve the question, we will demonstrate the error of those who pose it.
[1] Essays, (Library Edition, 1891), Vol. ii, p. 381.
Please provide the text you'd like me to modernize. Essays, (Library Edition, 1891), Vol. ii, p. 381.
[7] Le mécanisme de l'attention. Alcan, 1888.
[12] L'homme et l'intelligence, p. 36.
[13] Ibid. p. 37.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 37.
[14] Ibid. p. 43.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Same source, p. 43.
[16] C. Féré, Sensation et Mouvement. Paris, 1887.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ C. Féré, Sensation and Movement. Paris, 1887.
[18] "On the Temperature Sense," Mind, 1885.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ "On the Temperature Sense," Mind, 1885.
[19] Rood, Modern Chromatics,(1879), pp. 181-187.
[21] Éléments de psychophysique. Paris, 1883.
[23] Éléments de psychophysique, pp. 61, 69.
[24] In the particular case where we admit without restriction Weber's Law ΔE/E=const., integration gives S=C log. E/Q. Q being a constant. This is Fechner's "logarithmic law."
[24] In the specific instance where we accept Weber's Law ΔE/E=const., integration leads to S=C log. E/Q. Here, Q is a constant. This is Fechner's "logarithmic law."
[26] Revue scientifique, March 13 and April 24, 1875.
[26] Scientific Review, March 13 and April 24, 1875.
CHAPTER II
THE MULTIPLICITY OF CONSCIOUS STATES[1]
THE IDEA OF DURATION
Number maybe defined in general as a collection of units, or, speaking more exactly, as the synthesis of the one and the many. Every number is one, since it is brought before the[Pg 76] mind by a simple intuition and is given a name; but the unity which attaches to it is that of a sum, it covers a multiplicity of parts which can be considered separately. Without attempting for the present any thorough examination of these conceptions of unity and multiplicity, let us inquire whether the idea of number does not imply the representation of something else as well.
Number can generally be defined as a collection of units, or more accurately, as the combination of the one and the many. Every number is one, as it appears in our mind through a straightforward understanding and has a name; however, this unity is that of a sum, encompassing multiple parts that can be viewed separately. Without diving into a detailed analysis of these concepts of unity and multiplicity right now, let's explore whether the idea of number also suggests the representation of something else.
It is not enough to say that number is a collection of units; we must add that these units are identical with one another, or at least that they are assumed to be identical when they are counted. No doubt we can count the sheep in a flock and say that there are fifty, although they are all different from one another and are easily recognized by the shepherd: but the reason is that we agree in that case to neglect their individual differences and to take into account only what they have in common. On the other hand, as soon as we fix our attention on the particular features of objects or individuals, we can of course make an enumeration of them, but not a total. We place ourselves at these two very different points of view when we count the soldiers in a battalion and when we call the roll. Hence we may conclude that the idea of number implies the simple intuition of a multiplicity of parts or units, which are absolutely alike.
It's not enough to say that a number is just a collection of units; we also need to acknowledge that these units are identical to each other, or at least that we assume they are identical when we count them. Sure, we can count the sheep in a flock and say there are fifty, even though each sheep is different and easily recognizable by the shepherd. The reason for this is that we agree to overlook their individual differences and focus only on what they have in common. However, as soon as we pay attention to the unique features of objects or individuals, we can count them, but we can't determine a total. We adopt two very different perspectives when we count the soldiers in a battalion versus when we take attendance. Therefore, we can conclude that the concept of number involves the straightforward understanding of a multitude of parts or units that are completely alike.
And yet they must be somehow distinct from one another, since otherwise they would merge into a single unit. Let us assume that all the sheep in the flock are identical; they differ at least by the position which they occupy in space, otherwise they would not form a flock. But now let us even set aside the fifty sheep themselves and retain only the idea of them. Either we include them all in the same image, and it follows as a necessary consequence that we place them side by side in an ideal space, or else we repeat fifty times in succession the image of a single one, and in that case it does seem, indeed, that the series lies in duration rather than in space. But we shall soon find out that it cannot be so. For if we picture to ourselves each of the sheep in the flock in succession and separately, we shall never have to do with more than a single sheep. In order that the number should go on increasing in proportion as we advance, we must retain the successive images and set them alongside each of the new units which we picture to ourselves: now, it is in space that such a juxtaposition takes place and not in pure duration. In fact, it will be easily granted that counting material objects means thinking all these objects together, thereby leaving them in space. But does this intuition of space accompany every idea of number, even of an abstract number?
And yet they must somehow be different from each other, or else they would blend into one unit. Let's assume that all the sheep in the flock are identical; they at least differ by their positions in space, or else they wouldn't form a flock. But now, if we set aside the fifty sheep themselves and keep only the concept of them, we either include them all in the same image, which would mean placing them side by side in an ideal space, or we repeat the image of a single sheep fifty times, which might suggest that the series exists in time rather than in space. However, we will soon discover that this can't be the case. If we envision each sheep in the flock one after another and separately, we'll only ever be dealing with a single sheep. For the count to increase as we progress, we need to hold onto the successive images and arrange them alongside new units that we visualize: this juxtaposition happens in space, not pure duration. In fact, it's easy to accept that counting physical objects means thinking of them all together, thus placing them in space. But does this sense of space come with every idea of number, even an abstract number?
Any one can answer this question by reviewing[Pg 78] the various forms which the idea of number has assumed for him since his childhood. It will be seen that we began by imagining e.g. a row of balls, that these balls afterwards became points, and, finally, this image itself disappeared, leaving behind it, as we say, nothing but abstract number. But at this very moment we ceased to have an image or even an idea of it; we kept only the symbol which is necessary for reckoning and which is the conventional way of expressing number. For we can confidently assert that 12 is half of 24 without thinking either the number 12 or the number 24: indeed, as far as quick calculation is concerned, we have everything to gain by not doing so. But as soon as we wish to picture number to ourselves, and not merely figures or words, we are compelled to have recourse to an extended image. What leads to misunderstanding on this point seems to be the habit we have fallen into of counting in time rather than in space. In order to imagine the number 50, for example, we repeat all the numbers starting from unity, and when we have arrived at the fiftieth, we believe we have built up the number in duration and in duration only. And there is no doubt that in this way we have counted moments of duration rather than points in space; but the question is whether we have not counted the moments of duration by means of points in space. It is certainly possible to perceive in time, and in time[Pg 79] only, a succession which is nothing but a succession, but not an addition, i.e. a succession which culminates in a sum. For though we reach a sum by taking into account a succession of different terms, yet it is necessary that each of these terms should remain when we pass to the following, and should wait, so to speak, to be added to the others: how could it wait, if it were nothing but an instant of duration? And where could it wait if we did not localize it in space? We involuntarily fix at a point in space each of the moments which we count, and it is only on this condition that the abstract units come to form a sum. No doubt it is possible, as we shall show later, to conceive the successive moments of time independently of space; but when we add to the present moment those which have preceded it, as is the case when we are adding up units, we are not dealing with these moments themselves, since they have vanished for ever, but with the lasting traces which they seem to have left in space on their passage through it. It is true that we generally dispense with this mental image, and that, after having used it for the first two or three numbers, it is enough to know that it would serve just as well for the mental picturing of the others, if we needed it. But every clear idea of number implies a visual image in space; and the direct study of the units which go to form a discrete multiplicity will lead us to the same conclusion on this point as the examination of number itself.
Anyone can answer this question by looking back at[Pg 78] the different ways the idea of number has shown up for them since childhood. We started by imagining, for example, a line of balls, which then became points, and eventually, that image faded away, leaving us with what we call abstract number. But at that moment, we stopped having an image or even an idea of it; we were left with only the symbol we need for calculations, the conventional way of expressing number. We can confidently say that 12 is half of 24 without even thinking about the numbers 12 or 24: actually, for quick calculations, we gain a lot by not doing so. However, when we try to visualize number and not just figures or words, we need to rely on a broader image. The misunderstanding here seems to come from the habit we’ve developed of counting in time instead of in space. To imagine the number 50, for example, we list all the numbers starting from one, and when we reach fifty, we think we've built the number based only on time. It's true that this way, we've counted moments in time rather than points in space; but the question is whether we've counted these moments using points in space. It’s certainly possible to perceive time as nothing but a sequence without it being an addition, meaning a sequence that leads to a total. Although we reach a total by considering a sequence of different terms, each of those terms must remain as we move to the next one and should be ready to be added to the others: how could it be ready if it were just a moment of time? And where could it be if we didn’t locate it in space? We unconsciously fix each of the moments we count at a point in space, and it’s only under this condition that the abstract units come together to form a total. It is indeed possible, as we will show later, to think of the successive moments of time separately from space; but when we add the present moment to those that came before it, like when we’re adding units, we aren’t dealing with those moments themselves since they are gone forever, but with the lasting marks they seem to leave in space as they pass through it. It’s true that we usually skip this mental image, and after using it for the first two or three numbers, it's enough to know that it would work just as well for the mental visualization of the others if we needed it. But every clear idea of number includes a visual image in space; and studying the units that make up a discrete set will lead us to the same conclusion about this as examining number itself.
Every number is a collection of units, as we have said, and on the other hand every number is itself a unit, in so far as it is a synthesis of the units which compose it. But is the word unit taken in the same sense in both cases? When we assert that number is a unit, we understand by this that we master the whole of it by a simple and indivisible intuition of the mind; this unity thus includes a multiplicity, since it is the unity of a whole. But when we speak of the units which go to form number, we no longer think of these units as sums, but as pure, simple, irreducible units, intended to yield the natural series of numbers by an indefinitely continued process of accumulation. It seems, then, that there are two kinds of units, the one ultimate, out of which a number is formed by a process of addition, and the other provisional, the number so formed, which is multiple in itself, and owes its unity to the simplicity of the act by which the mind perceives it. And there is no doubt that, when we picture the units which make up number, we believe that we are thinking of indivisible components: this belief has a great deal to do with the idea that it is possible to conceive number independently of space. Nevertheless, by looking more closely into the matter, we shall see that all unity is the unity of a simple act of the mind, and that, as this is an act of unification, there must be some multiplicity for it to unify. No doubt, at[Pg 81] the moment at which I think each of these units separately, I look upon it as indivisible, since I am determined to think of its unity alone. But as soon as I put it aside in order to pass to the next, I objectify it, and by that very deed I make it a thing, that is to say, a multiplicity. To convince oneself of this, it is enough to notice that the units by means of which arithmetic forms numbers are provisional units, which can be subdivided without limit, and that each of them is the sum of fractional quantities as small and as numerous as we like to imagine. How could we divide the unit, if it were here that ultimate unity which characterizes a simple act of the mind? How could we split it up into fractions whilst affirming its unity, if we did not regard it implicitly as an extended object, one in intuition but multiple in space? You will never get out of an idea which you have formed anything which you have not put into it; and if the unity by means of which you make up your number is the unity of an act and not of an object, no effort of analysis will bring out of it anything but unity pure and simple. No doubt, when you equate the number 3 to the sum of 1 + 1 + 1, nothing prevents you from regarding the units which compose it as indivisible: but the reason is that you do not choose to make use of the multiplicity which is enclosed within each of these units. Indeed, it is probable that the number 3 first assumes to our mind this simpler shape, because we think[Pg 82] rather of the way in which we have obtained it than of the use which we might make of it. But we soon perceive that, while all multiplication implies the possibility of treating any number whatever as a provisional unit which can be added to itself, inversely the units in their turn are true numbers which are as big as we like, but are regarded as provisionally indivisible for the purpose of compounding them with one another. Now, the very admission that it is possible to divide the unit into as many parts as we like, shows that we regard it as extended.
Every number is made up of units, as we’ve said, and at the same time, every number itself counts as a unit because it is a combination of the individual units that make it up. But do we understand the term 'unit' the same way in both instances? When we say that a number is a unit, we mean that we grasp its entirety through a simple and indivisible mental intuition; this unity encompasses a multiplicity since it represents the unity of a whole. However, when we refer to the units that form a number, we no longer consider these units as sums, but rather as pure, simple, irreducible units designed to create the natural series of numbers through an endless process of addition. It appears that there are two types of units: one is the fundamental unit from which a number derives through addition, and the other is provisional, which is the number itself that is multiple in nature and derives its unity from the simple act by which we understand it. There’s no doubt that when we visualize the units comprising a number, we think of them as indivisible components; this belief greatly influences the idea that we can conceive numbers independent of space. Yet, upon closer examination, we find that all unity arises from a simple act of the mind, and since this act serves to unify, multiplicity must exist for it to unify. Certainly, at the moment I consider each of these units individually, I view them as indivisible, as I focus solely on their unity. However, once I set a unit aside to move on to the next, I objectify it, which turns it into a thing, or rather, a multiplicity. To understand this, it’s enough to observe that the units used in arithmetic to form numbers are provisional units that can be subdivided infinitely, and each is composed of fractional parts as small and numerous as we can imagine. How could we divide the unit if it were the ultimate unity that represents a simple act of the mind? How can we break it down into fractions while still asserting its unity if we don’t implicitly see it as an extended object, unified in our intuition but multiple in space? You can’t extract anything from an idea you formed that you didn’t put into it; and if the unity through which you create a number is the unity of an act and not of an object, no analysis will yield anything but pure unity. Certainly, when you equate the number 3 with the sum of 1 + 1 + 1, nothing stops you from viewing the units that form it as indivisible; but this is because you choose not to acknowledge the multiplicity contained within each of these units. In fact, it’s likely that we first perceive the number 3 in this simpler form because we focus more on how we derived it rather than how we might use it. However, we soon realize that while all multiplication suggests the potential to treat any number as a provisional unit that can be added to itself, conversely, the units themselves are true numbers that can be as large as we like, but are considered provisionally indivisible for the purpose of combining them. Now, the very fact that we can divide the unit into as many pieces as we wish indicates that we consider it as extended.
For we must understand what is meant by the of number. It cannot be denied that the formation or construction of a number implies discontinuity. In other words, as we remarked above, each of the units with which we form the number 3 seems to be indivisible while we are dealing with it, and we pass abruptly from one to the other. Again, if we form the same number with halves, with quarters, with any units whatever, these units, in so far as they serve to form the said number, will still constitute elements which are provisionally indivisible, and it is always by jerks, by sudden jumps, so to speak, that we advance from one to the other. And the reason is that, in order to get a number, we are compelled to fix our attention successively on each of the units of which it is compounded. The indivisibility of the act by which[Pg 83] we conceive any one of them is then represented under the form of a mathematical point which is separated from the following point by an interval of space. But, while a series of mathematical points arranged in empty space expresses fairly well the process by which we form the idea of number, these mathematical points have a tendency to develop into lines in proportion as our attention is diverted from them, as if they were trying to reunite with one another. And when we look at number in its finished state, this union is an accomplished fact: the points have become lines, the divisions have been blotted out, the whole displays all the characteristics of continuity. This is why number, although we have formed it according to a definite law, can be split up on any system we please. In a word, we must distinguish between the unity which we think of and the unity which we set up as an object after having thought of it, as also between number in process of formation and number once formed. The unit is irreducible while we are thinking it and number is discontinuous while we are building it up: but, as soon as we consider number in its finished state, we objectify it, and it then appears to be divisible to an unlimited extent. In fact, we apply the term subjective to what seems to be completely and adequately known, and the term objective to what is known in such a way that a constantly increasing number of new impressions could be substituted for the idea which we actually have[Pg 84] of it. Thus, a complex feeling will contain a fairly large number of simple elements; but, as long as these elements do not stand out with perfect clearness, we cannot say that they were completely realized, and, as soon as consciousness has a distinct perception of them, the psychic state which results from their synthesis will have changed for this very reason. But there is no change in the general appearance of a body, however it is analysed by thought, because these different analyses, and an infinity of others, are already visible in the mental image which we form of the body, though they are not realized: this actual and not merely virtual perception of subdivisions in what is undivided is just what we call objectivity. It then becomes easy to determine the exact part played by the subjective and the objective in the idea of number. What properly belongs to the mind is the indivisible process by which it concentrates attention successively on the different parts of a given space; but the parts which have thus been isolated remain in order to join with the others, and, once the addition is made, they may be broken up in any way whatever. They are therefore parts of space, and space is, accordingly, the material with which the mind builds up number, the medium in which the mind places it.
We need to understand what is meant by the concept of number. It's clear that forming or constructing a number involves some discontinuity. In other words, as we mentioned earlier, each unit that makes up the number 3 seems indivisible while we're considering it, and we shift abruptly from one to the next. If we create the same number using halves, quarters, or any other units, those units, as they contribute to forming that number, will still represent elements that are temporarily indivisible. We always move from one unit to another in sudden, jarring steps. The reason is that to form a number, we have to focus on each of the units that make it up one at a time. The indivisibility of the act of conceiving any one of these units is then depicted as a mathematical point, separated from the next point by a gap of space. However, while a series of mathematical points arranged in empty space accurately reflects the way we form the idea of a number, these points tend to turn into lines as our focus shifts away from them, as if they’re trying to connect. When we view a number in its completed form, this connection is achieved: the points become lines, the divisions disappear, and the whole displays characteristics of continuity. This is why, although we create numbers according to a specific rule, they can be divided in any way we want. In short, we must differentiate between the unity we think about and the unity we establish as an object after thinking about it, as well as between numbers that are still being formed and those that are fully formed. The unit is indivisible while we think about it, and the number is discontinuous while we're building it up; but, once we consider a number in its finished form, we objectify it, and it appears to be divisible without limits. In fact, we use the term *subjective* for what seems completely and adequately known, and the term *objective* for what is understood in a way that allows an ever-growing number of new impressions to replace the idea we currently have of it. Thus, a complex feeling will contain numerous simple elements, but as long as these elements aren't perfectly clear, we can't say they are fully realized. As soon as our consciousness distinctly perceives them, the mental state that results from their combination will change for that very reason. However, there is no change in the overall appearance of a body, no matter how it's analyzed by thought, because these various analyses, along with countless others, are already visible in the mental image we have of the body, even if they're not fully realized. This actual and not just potential awareness of subdivisions in what appears undivided is what we refer to as objectivity. It becomes straightforward to pinpoint the roles of the subjective and objective in the concept of number. What belongs to the mind is the indivisible process of focusing on the different sections of a particular space one by one; yet the isolated sections stay in order to connect with the others, and after the addition is made, they can be divided in any manner. Therefore, they are portions of space, and space is, consequently, the material the mind uses to construct numbers, the medium in which the mind positions them.
Properly speaking, it is arithmetic which teaches us to split up without limit the units of which number consists. Common sense is very much inclined to build up number with indivisibles.
Properly speaking, arithmetic teaches us to break down the units that make up a number without any limit. Common sense often tends to create numbers using indivisible parts.
And this is easily understood, since the provisional simplicity of the component units is just what they owe to the mind, and the latter pays more attention to its own acts than to the material on which it works. Science confines itself, here, to drawing our attention to this material: if we did not already localize number in space, science would certainly not succeed in making us transfer it thither. From the beginning, therefore, we must have thought of number as of a juxtaposition in space. This is the conclusion which we reached at first, basing ourselves on the fact that all addition implies a multiplicity of parts simultaneously perceived.
This is easy to understand because the temporary simplicity of the individual components is exactly what our mind creates, and our minds focus more on their own actions than on the material they work with. Science limits itself to pointing out this material: if we didn’t already associate numbers with space, science wouldn’t be able to make us do that. From the start, we must have thought of numbers as existing together in space. This is the conclusion we initially reached, based on the fact that every addition involves perceiving multiple parts at the same time.
Now, if this conception of number is granted, it will be seen that everything is not counted in the same way, and that there are two very different kinds of multiplicity. When we speak of material objects, we refer to the possibility of seeing and touching them; we localize them in space. In that case, no effort of the inventive faculty or of symbolical representation is necessary in order to count them; we have only to think them, at first separately, and then simultaneously, within the very medium in which they come under our observation. The case is no longer the same when we consider purely affective psychic states, or even mental[Pg 86] images other than those built up by means of sight and touch. Here, the terms being no longer given in space, it seems, a priori, that we can hardly count them except by some process of symbolical representation. In fact, we are well aware of a representation of this kind when we are dealing with sensations the cause of which is obviously situated in space. Thus, when we hear a noise of steps in the street, we have a confused vision of somebody walking along: each of the successive sounds is then localized at a point in space where the passer-by might tread: we count our sensations in the very space in which their tangible causes are ranged. Perhaps some people count the successive strokes of a distant bell in a similar way, their imagination pictures the bell coming and going; this spatial sort of image is sufficient for the first two units, and the others follow naturally. But most people's minds do not proceed in this way. They range the successive sounds in an ideal space and then fancy that they are counting them in pure duration. Yet we must be clear on this point. The sounds of the bell certainly reach me one after the other; but one of two alternatives must be true. Either I retain each of these successive sensations in order to combine it with the others and form a group which reminds me of an air or rhythm which I know: in that case I do not count the sounds, I limit myself to gathering, so to speak, the qualitative impression produced by the whole series. Or[Pg 87] else I intend explicitly to count them, and then I shall have to separate them, and this separation must take place within some homogeneous medium in which the sounds, stripped of their qualities, and in a manner emptied, leave traces of their presence which are absolutely alike. The question now is, whether this medium is time or space. But a moment of time, we repeat, cannot persist in order to be added to others. If the sounds are separated, they must leave empty intervals bet ween them. If we count them, the intervals must remain though the sounds disappear: how could these intervals remain, if they were pure duration and not space? It is in space, therefore, that the operation takes place. It becomes, indeed, more and more difficult as we penetrate further into the depths of consciousness. Here we find ourselves confronted by a confused multiplicity of sensations and feelings which analysis alone can distinguish. Their number is identical with the number of the moments which we take up when we count them; but these moments, as they can be added to one another, are again points in space. Our final conclusion, therefore, is that there are two kinds of multiplicity: that of material objects, to which the conception of number is immediately applicable; and the multiplicity of states of consciousness, which cannot be regarded as numerical without the help of some symbolical representation, in which a necessary element is space.
Now, if we accept this understanding of numbers, it becomes clear that not everything is counted in the same way, and there are two distinct types of multiplicity. When we talk about physical objects, we refer to our ability to see and touch them; we locate them in space. In this case, no creativity or symbolic representation is needed to count them; we simply think of them first individually and then simultaneously within the context of our observation. The situation changes when we look at purely emotional mental states or even mental images that aren't formed through sight and touch. Here, since the terms aren't given in space, it seems, beforehand, that we can hardly count them without some form of symbolic representation. In fact, we recognize this type of representation when dealing with sensations whose causes are clearly located in space. So, when we hear footsteps in the street, we have a vague mental image of someone walking by: each successive sound is linked to a point in space where the person might step: we count our sensations in the same space where their physical causes are positioned. Some people might count the distant ringing of a bell in a similar manner, picturing the bell coming and going; this spatial image is sufficient for the first two units, and the others follow naturally. However, most people’s minds don’t work this way. They place successive sounds in an imagined space and then believe they are counting them in pure duration. But we need to be clear on this point. The sounds of the bell do reach me one after another; but one of two things must be true. Either I hold onto each of these successive sensations so I can combine them and form a group that reminds me of a melody or rhythm I know: in that case, I don’t actually count the sounds; I just gather the overall qualitative impression produced by the entire series. Or, if I do intend to count them explicitly, then I need to separate them, and this separation must occur in some consistent medium where the sounds, stripped of their qualities, leave behind uniform traces of their presence. The question now is whether this medium is time or space. But we reiterate, a moment of time cannot persist to be added to others. If the sounds are separated, they must have empty gaps in between them. If we count them, those gaps must remain even if the sounds fade away: how could these gaps exist if they were pure duration and not space? Therefore, the operation takes place in space. It certainly gets more challenging as we delve deeper into consciousness. Here, we face a confusing multiplicity of sensations and feelings that only analysis can distinguish. Their number matches the number of moments we account for when we count them; but these moments, since they can be added together, are again points in space. Our final conclusion, then, is that there are two types of multiplicity: one for physical objects, where the concept of numbers applies directly; and the multiplicity of states of consciousness, which cannot be considered numerical without some symbolic representation that necessarily includes space.
As a matter of fact, each of us makes a distinction between these two kinds of multiplicity whenever he speaks of the impenetrability of matter. We sometimes set up impenetrability as a fundamental property of bodies, known in the same way and put on the same level as e.g. weight or resistance. But a purely negative property of this kind cannot be revealed by our senses; indeed, certain experiments in mixing and combining things might lead us to call it in question if our minds were not already made up on the point. Try to picture one body penetrating another: you will at once assume that there are empty spaces in the one which will be occupied by the particles of the other; these particles in their turn cannot penetrate one another unless one of them divides in order to fill up the interstices of the other; and our thought will prolong this operation indefinitely in preference to picturing two bodies in the same place. Now, if impenetrability were really a quality of matter which was known by the senses, it is not at all clear why we should experience more difficulty in conceiving two bodies merging into one another than a surface devoid of resistance or a weightless fluid. In reality, it is not a physical but a logical necessity which attaches to the proposition: "Two bodies cannot occupy the same place at the same time." The contrary assertion involves an absurdity which no conceivable experience could succeed in dispelling.
In fact, each of us makes a distinction between these two types of multiplicity whenever we talk about the impenetrability of matter. Sometimes we regard impenetrability as a fundamental property of physical bodies, recognized in the same way and placed on the same level as, for example, weight or resistance. However, such a purely negative property cannot be perceived by our senses; indeed, specific experiments in mixing and combining substances might lead us to question it if our minds weren't already made up on the matter. Try to imagine one body passing through another: you'll immediately think that there are empty spaces in one that would be filled by the particles of the other; these particles cannot pass through each other unless one of them divides to occupy the gaps of the other. Our thoughts tend to extend this process infinitely rather than picturing two bodies existing in the same space. Now, if impenetrability were genuinely a quality of matter that we could sense, it's unclear why we would struggle more to picture two bodies merging into each other than a surface without resistance or a weightless fluid. In truth, it’s not a physical but a logical necessity that supports the statement: "Two bodies cannot occupy the same place at the same time." The opposite claim leads to an absurdity that no imaginable experience could clear up.
In a word, it implies a contradiction. But does not this amount to recognizing that the very idea of the number 2, or, more generally, of any number whatever, involves the idea of juxtaposition in space? If impenetrability is generally regarded as a quality of matter, the reason is that the idea of number is thought to be independent of the idea of space. We thus believe that we are adding something to the idea of two or more objects by saying that they cannot occupy the same place: as if the idea of the number 2, even the abstract number, were not already, as we have shown, that of two different positions in space! Hence to assert the impenetrability of matter is simply to recognize the interconnexion between the notions of number and space, it is to state a property of number rather than of matter.—Yet, it will be said, do we not count feelings, sensations, ideas, all of which permeate one another, and each of which, for its part, takes up the whole of the soul?—Yes, undoubtedly; but, just because they permeate one another, we cannot count them unless we represent them by homogeneous units which occupy separate positions in space and consequently no longer permeate one another. Impenetrability thus makes its appearance at the same time as number; and when we attribute this quality to matter in order to distinguish it from everything which is not matter, we simply state under another form the distinction established above between extended objects, to which the[Pg 90] conception of number is immediately applicable, and states of consciousness, which have first of all to be represented symbolically in space.
In short, it suggests a contradiction. But doesn't this mean we recognize that the idea of the number 2, or any number in general, involves the idea of placement in space? If we generally consider impenetrability to be a quality of matter, it's because we think the concept of number is independent of the concept of space. We believe we're adding something to the idea of two or more objects by stating that they can't occupy the same place, as if the concept of the number 2, even as an abstract number, isn't already about two separate positions in space! Therefore, asserting the impenetrability of matter simply acknowledges the connection between the concepts of number and space; it's stating a characteristic of number rather than matter. — Yet, one might argue, don’t we count feelings, sensations, and ideas, all of which blend into one another and each of which fully engages the soul? — Yes, certainly; but because they blend, we can’t count them unless we represent them with uniform units that occupy distinct positions in space and thus no longer blend. Impenetrability appears simultaneously with number; and when we attribute this quality to matter to distinguish it from everything that isn't matter, we merely restate the distinction made earlier between extended objects, to which the concept of number directly applies, and states of consciousness, which must first be represented symbolically in space.
It is advisable to dwell on the last point. If, in order to count states of consciousness, we have to represent them symbolically in space, is it not likely that this symbolical representation will alter the normal conditions of inner perception? Let us recall what we said a short time ago about the intensity of certain psychic states. Representative sensation, looked at in itself, is pure quality; but, seen through the medium of extensity, this quality becomes in a certain sense quantity, and is called intensity. In the same way, our projection of our psychic states into space in order to form a discrete multiplicity is likely to influence these states themselves and to give them in reflective consciousness a new form, which immediate perception did not attribute to them. Now, let us notice that when we speak of time, we generally think of a homogeneous medium in which our conscious states are ranged alongside one another as in space, so as to form a discrete multiplicity. Would not time, thus understood, be to the multiplicity of our psychic states what intensity is to certain of them, —a sign, a symbol, absolutely distinct from true duration? Let us ask consciousness to isolate itself from the external world, and, by a vigorous effort of abstraction, to become itself again. We[Pg 91] shall then put this question to it: does the multiplicity of our conscious states bear the slightest resemblance to the multiplicity of the units of a number? Has true duration anything to do with space? Certainly, our analysis of the idea of number could not but make us doubt this analogy, to say no more. For if time, as the reflective consciousness represents it, is a medium in which our conscious states form a discrete series so as to admit of being counted, and if on the other hand our conception of number ends in spreading out in space everything which can be directly counted, it is to be presumed that time, understood in the sense of a medium in which we make distinctions and count, is nothing but space. That which goes to confirm this opinion is that we are compelled to borrow from space the images by which we describe what the reflective consciousness feels about time and even about succession; it follows that pure duration must be something different. Such are the questions which we have been led to ask by the very analysis of the notion of discrete multiplicity. But we cannot throw any light upon them except by a direct study of the ideas of space and time in their mutual relations.
It's worth considering the last point. If, to categorize states of consciousness, we have to represent them symbolically in space, isn't it likely that this symbolic representation will change the normal conditions of our inner perception? Let's remember what we mentioned earlier about the intensity of certain psychic states. Representative sensation, viewed in isolation, is pure quality; however, when viewed in terms of extensity, this quality becomes, in a way, quantity, and we refer to it as intensity. Similarly, projecting our psychic states into space to create a distinct multiplicity is likely to affect these states themselves and give them in reflective consciousness a new form that immediate perception didn't attribute to them. Now, when we talk about time, we usually think of it as a uniform medium where our conscious states are arranged side by side just like in space, creating a discrete multiplicity. Wouldn't time, understood this way, be to the multiplicity of our psychic states what intensity is to certain states—a sign or symbol, completely separate from true duration? Let's ask consciousness to isolate itself from the external world and, through a strong effort of abstraction, to return to itself. We[Pg 91] can then pose this question: does the multiplicity of our conscious states resemble the multiplicity of numerical units in any way? Does true duration have anything to do with space? Clearly, analyzing the concept of number leads us to question this analogy, to say the least. If time, as reflective consciousness portrays it, is a medium where our conscious states form a discrete series that can be counted, and if our understanding of number ultimately spreads everything that can be directly counted out into space, we can assume that time, seen as a medium in which we differentiate and count, is simply space. What supports this view is that we are forced to borrow spatial images to describe how reflective consciousness perceives time and even succession; this indicates that pure duration must be something entirely different. These are the questions that arise from our analysis of the concept of discrete multiplicity. However, we can only shed light on them through a direct study of the ideas of space and time in relation to each other.
We shall not lay too much stress on the question of the absolute reality of space: perhaps we might as well ask whether space is or is not in space. In short, our senses perceive the qualities of bodies and space along[Pg 92] with them: the great difficulty seems to have been to discover whether extensity is an aspect of these physical qualities—a quality of quality—or whether these qualities are essentially unextended, space coming in as a later addition, but being self-sufficient and existing without them. On the first hypothesis, space would be reduced to an abstraction, or, speaking more correctly, an extract; it would express the common element possessed by certain sensations called representative. In the second case, space would be a reality as solid as the sensations themselves, although of a different order. We owe the exact formulation of this latter conception to Kant: the theory which he works out in the Transcendental Aesthetic consists in endowing space with an existence independent of its content, in laying down as de jure separable what each of us separates de facto, and in refusing to regard extensity as an abstraction like the others. In this respect the Kantian conception of space differs less than is usually imagined from the popular belief. Far from shaking our faith in the reality of space, Kant has shown what it actually means and has even justified it.
We won’t put too much emphasis on the question of whether space is absolutely real: we might as well ask if space exists within itself. In short, our senses perceive the qualities of objects and space together: the big challenge seems to be figuring out whether extension is a feature of these physical qualities—a quality of a quality—or if these qualities are fundamentally unextended, with space being a later addition that exists independently. In the first scenario, space would become an abstraction, or more accurately, an extract; it would represent the common element shared by certain sensations we call representative. In the second case, space would be just as real as the sensations themselves, albeit of a different nature. We owe the precise definition of this latter idea to Kant: the theory he develops in the Transcendental Aesthetic consists of granting space an existence independent of its content, establishing what each of us separates in practice as separable in principle, and refusing to view extension as an abstraction like the others. In this way, the Kantian view of space isn't as different from common belief as people usually think. Rather than undermining our belief in the reality of space, Kant has explained what it truly means and has even validated it.
Moreover, the solution given by Kant does not seem to have been seriously disputed since his time: indeed, it has forced itself, sometimes without their knowledge, on the majority of those who have approached the problem anew, whether nativists or empiricists. Psychologists[Pg 93] agree in assigning a Kantian origin to the nativistic explanation of Johann Müller; but Lotze's hypothesis of local signs, Bain's theory, and the more comprehensive explanation suggested by Wundt, may seem at first quite independent of the Transcendental Aesthetic. The authors of these theories seem indeed to have put aside the problem of the nature of space, in order to investigate simply by what process our sensations come to be situated in space and to be set, so to speak, alongside one another: but this very question shows that they regard sensations as inextensive and make a radical distinction, just as Kant did, between the matter of representation and its form. The conclusion to be drawn from the theories of Lotze and Bain, and from Wundt's attempt to reconcile them, is that the sensations by means of which we come to form the notion of space are themselves unextended and simply qualitative: extensity is supposed to result from their synthesis, as water from the combination of two gases. The empirical or genetic explanations have thus taken up the problem of space at the very point where Kant left it: Kant separated space from its contents: the empiricists ask how these contents, which are taken out of space by our thought, manage to get back again. It is true that they have apparently disregarded the activity of the mind, and that they are obviously inclined to regard the extensive form under which we represent[Pg 94] things as produced by a kind of alliance of the sensations with one another: space, without being extracted from the sensations, is supposed to result from their co-existence. But how can we explain such an origination without the active intervention of the mind? The extensive differs by hypothesis from the inextensive: and even if we assume that extension is nothing but a relation between inextensive terms, this relation must still be established by a mind capable of thus associating several terms. It is no use quoting the example of chemical combinations, in which the whole seems to assume, of its own accord, a form and qualities which did not belong to any of the elementary atoms. This form and these qualities owe their origin just to the fact that we gather up the multiplicity of atoms in a single perception: get rid of the mind which carries out this synthesis and you will at once do away with the qualities, that is to say, the aspect under which the synthesis of elementary parts is presented to our consciousness. Thus inextensive sensations will remain what they are, viz., inextensive sensations, if nothing be added to them. For their co-existence to give rise to space, there must be an act of the mind which takes them in all at the same time and sets them in juxtaposition: this unique act is very like what Kant calls an a priori form of sensibility.
Moreover, the solution provided by Kant doesn’t seem to have been seriously challenged since his time: in fact, it has influenced, often without their realization, most people who have tackled the problem afresh, whether they are nativists or empiricists. Psychologists[Pg 93] agree that the nativistic explanation of Johann Müller has a Kantian origin; however, Lotze's hypothesis of local signs, Bain's theory, and the broader explanation proposed by Wundt might initially appear quite independent of the Transcendental Aesthetic. The authors of these theories seem to have set aside the issue of the nature of space to simply investigate how our sensations are located in space and arranged, so to speak, alongside one another: but this very question indicates that they view sensations as inextensive and draw a clear distinction, much like Kant did, between the substance of representation and its form. The takeaway from the theories of Lotze and Bain, along with Wundt's attempt to reconcile them, is that the sensations through which we come to understand the concept of space are themselves unextended and merely qualitative: extensity is thought to emerge from their synthesis, similar to how water comes from the combination of two gases. The empirical or genetic explanations have thus picked up the issue of space right where Kant left it: Kant separated space from its contents; the empiricists question how these contents, which our thoughts draw out of space, manage to return. It’s true that they seem to overlook the mind's activity, and they are clearly inclined to view the extensive form under which we represent[Pg 94] things as created by some kind of alliance among sensations: space, instead of being extracted from the sensations, is believed to arise from their coexistence. But how can we explain such a origin without the active involvement of the mind? The extensive is hypothesized to differ from the inextensive: and even if we assume that extension is just a relation between inextensive terms, this relation still needs to be established by a mind capable of associating several terms in that way. It’s useless to cite chemical combinations, where the whole seems to naturally assume a form and qualities that weren’t present in any of the individual atoms. This form and these qualities originate specifically because we perceive the multitude of atoms in a single perception: remove the mind that performs this synthesis, and you immediately eliminate the qualities, which means the way the synthesis of elementary parts presents itself to our consciousness. Thus, inextensive sensations will remain as they are, that is, inextensive sensations, unless something is added to them. For their coexistence to create space, there needs to be a mental act that considers them all at once and places them side by side: this singular act is very much like what Kant refers to as an a priori form of sensibility.
If we now seek to characterize this act, we see that it consists essentially in the intuition, or[Pg 95] rather the conception, of an empty homogeneous medium. For it is scarcely possible to give any other definition of space: space is what enables us to distinguish a number of identical and simultaneous sensations from one another; it is thus a principle of differentiation other than that of qualitative differentiation, and consequently it is a reality with no quality. Someone may say, with the believers in the theory of local signs, that simultaneous sensations are never identical, and that, in consequence of the diversity of the organic elements which they affect, there are no two points of a homogeneous surface which make the same impression on the sight or the touch. We are quite ready to grant it, for if these two points affected us in the same way, there would be no reason for placing one of them on the right rather than on the left. But, just because we afterwards interpret this difference of quality in the sense of a difference of situation, it follows that we must have a clear idea of a homogeneous medium, i.e. of a simultaneity of terms which, although identical in quality, are yet distinct from one another. The more you insist on the difference between the impressions made on our retina by two points of a homogeneous surface, the more do you thereby make room for the activity of the mind, which perceives under the form of extensive homogeneity what is given it as qualitative heterogeneity. No doubt, though the[Pg 96] representation of a homogeneous space grows out of an effort of the mind, there must be within the qualities themselves which differentiate two sensations some reason why they occupy this or that definite position in space. We must thus distinguish between the perception of extensity and the conception of space: they are no doubt implied in one another, but, the higher we rise in the scale of intelligent beings, the more clearly do we meet with the independent idea of a homogeneous space. It is therefore doubtful whether animals perceive the external world quite as we do, and especially whether they represent externality in the same way as ourselves. Naturalists have pointed out, as a remarkable fact, the surprising ease with which many vertebrates, and even some insects, manage to find their way through space. Animals have been seen to return almost in a straight line to their old home, pursuing a path which was hitherto unknown to them over a distance which may amount to several hundreds of miles. Attempts have been made to explain this feeling of direction by sight or smell, and, more recently, by the perception of magnetic currents which would enable the animal to take its bearings like a living compass. This amounts to saying that space is not so homogeneous for the animal as for us, and that determinations of space, or directions, do not assume for it a purely geometrical form. Each of these directions might appear to it with its own shade, its peculiar quality. We[Pg 97] shall understand how a perception of this kind is possible if we remember that we ourselves distinguish our right from our left by a natural feeling, and that these two parts of our own extensity do then appear to us as if they bore a different quality; in fact, this is the very reason why we cannot give a proper definition of right and left. In truth, qualitative differences exist everywhere in nature, and I do not see why two concrete directions should not be as marked in immediate perception as two colours. But the conception of an empty homogeneous medium is something far more extraordinary, being a kind of reaction against that heterogeneity which is the very ground of our experience. Therefore, instead of saying that animals have a special sense of direction, we may as well say that men have a special faculty of perceiving or conceiving a space without quality. This faculty is not the faculty of abstraction: indeed, if we notice that abstraction assumes clean-cut distinctions and a kind of externality of the concepts or their symbols with regard to one another, we shall find that the faculty of abstraction already implies the intuition of a homogeneous medium. What we must say is that we have to do with two different kinds of reality, the one heterogeneous, that of sensible qualities, the other homogeneous, namely space. This latter, clearly conceived by the human intellect, enables us to use clean-cut distinctions, to count, to abstract, and perhaps also to speak.
If we now try to define this act, we see that it fundamentally involves the intuition, or rather the idea, of an empty, uniform space. It’s hard to come up with any other definition of space: space is what allows us to differentiate between a number of identical and simultaneous sensations; it serves as a principle of differentiation that is separate from qualitative differences, and as such, it is a reality without any quality. Some might argue, drawing from the theory of local signs, that simultaneous sensations are never truly identical, and that due to the varying organic elements they affect, no two points on a uniform surface create the same impression on sight or touch. We’re happy to concede this point because if these two points did affect us in the same way, there would be no reason to place one on the right instead of the left. However, since we later interpret this difference in quality as a difference in location, it follows that we need to clearly understand a uniform medium, meaning a simultaneity of elements that, while identical in quality, are still distinct from each other. The more you emphasize the difference between the impressions made on our retina by two points on a uniform surface, the more you create space for the mind's activity, which perceives extensive uniformity where it is given qualitative diversity. Certainly, while the idea of a uniform space arises from a mental effort, there must be some reason within the qualities that differentiate two sensations for why they occupy specific positions in space. Thus, we need to differentiate between the perception of extent and the idea of space: they are likely interconnected, but the higher we go on the scale of intelligent beings, the more clearly we encounter the independent notion of a uniform space. Therefore, it's uncertain if animals perceive the external world quite like we do, and especially whether they conceive of externality in the same way. Naturalists have noted the remarkable ease with which many vertebrates, and even some insects, navigate through space. Animals have been observed returning in a nearly straight line to their old homes, traveling along paths previously unknown to them over distances of several hundred miles. Explanations for this sense of direction have been offered, focusing on sight or smell, and more recently, on the ability to perceive magnetic fields, which would allow the animal to orient itself like a living compass. This suggests that space isn't as uniform for animals as it is for us, and that spatial determinations or directions don't take on a purely geometric form for them. Each of these directions might present itself with its own nuance, its unique quality. We will understand how such a perception is possible if we recall that we distinguish our right from our left through a natural sense, and that these two sides of our own extent do appear to us as if they possess a different quality; in fact, this is precisely why we can't properly define right and left. Truly, qualitative differences exist everywhere in nature, and I see no reason why two specific directions shouldn't be as distinct in immediate perception as two colors. But the idea of an empty, uniform medium is something much more remarkable, being a sort of response to the very diversity that underlies our experience. Thus, instead of saying that animals have a special sense of direction, we might just as well say that humans have a unique ability to perceive or conceive of a space without quality. This ability is not the ability to abstract: indeed, if we recognize that abstraction relies on sharp distinctions and a sort of externality of the concepts or their symbols in relation to one another, we will find that the ability to abstract already involves the intuition of a uniform medium. What we need to say is that we’re dealing with two different types of realities, one heterogeneous, that of sensory qualities, and the other homogeneous, namely space. The latter, clearly understood by the human intellect, allows us to make precise distinctions, to count, to abstract, and perhaps even to communicate.
Now, if space is to be defined as the homogeneous, it seems that inversely every homogeneous and unbounded medium will be space. For, homogeneity here consisting in the absence of every quality, it is hard to see how two forms of the homogeneous could be distinguished from one another. Nevertheless it is generally agreed to regard time as an unbounded medium, different from space but homogeneous like the latter: the homogeneous is thus supposed to take two forms, according as its contents co-exist or follow one another. It is true that, when we make time a homogeneous medium in which conscious states unfold themselves, we take it to be given all at once, which amounts to saying that we abstract it from duration. This simple consideration ought to warn us that we are thus unwittingly falling back upon space, and really giving up time. Moreover, we can understand that material objects, being exterior to one another and to ourselves, derive both exteriorities from the homogeneity of a medium which inserts intervals between them and sets off their outlines: but states of consciousness, even when successive, permeate one another, and in the simplest of them the whole soul can be reflected. We may therefore surmise that time, conceived under the form of a homogeneous medium, is some spurious concept, due to the trespassing of the idea of space upon the field of pure consciousness. At any rate we cannot finally admit two[Pg 99] forms of the homogeneous, time and space, without first seeking whether one of them cannot be reduced to the other. Now, externality is the distinguishing mark of things which occupy space, while states of consciousness are not essentially external to one another, and become so only by being spread out in time, regarded as a homogeneous medium. If, then, one of these two supposed forms of the homogeneous, namely time and space, is derived from the other, we can surmise a priori that the idea of space is the fundamental datum. But, misled by the apparent simplicity of the idea of time, the philosophers who have tried to reduce one of these ideas to the other have thought that they could make extensity out of duration. While showing how they have been misled, we shall see that time, conceived under the form of an unbounded and homogeneous medium, is nothing but the ghost of space haunting the reflective consciousness.
Now, if we define space as the homogeneous, it seems that every homogeneous and unbounded medium must be space. Since homogeneity here means lacking any qualities, it's hard to tell how two forms of the homogeneous could be differentiated. Nevertheless, it's commonly accepted to consider time as an unbounded medium that's different from space but homogeneous like it: the homogeneous is thought to take two forms, depending on whether its contents exist together or follow one another. Indeed, when we view time as a homogeneous medium where conscious states unfold, we perceive it all at once, which effectively means we are abstracting it from duration. This simple observation should alert us that we are unknowingly reverting to space and essentially giving up on time. Furthermore, we can see that material objects, being outside each other and ourselves, derive their separateness from the homogeneity of a medium that creates gaps between them and outlines their shapes. But states of consciousness, even when they occur one after another, penetrate one another, and in their most basic form, the whole mind can be reflected. Therefore, we might suspect that time, understood as a homogeneous medium, is a false concept stemming from the encroachment of the idea of space into the realm of pure consciousness. In any case, we cannot ultimately accept two forms of the homogeneous—time and space—without first exploring whether one can be reduced to the other. Externality is the key characteristic of things that occupy space, while states of consciousness aren't fundamentally external to each other; they only become so when spread out in time, considered as a homogeneous medium. So, if one of these two supposed forms of the homogeneous, time or space, arises from the other, we can infer a priori that the idea of space is the foundational element. However, misled by the apparent simplicity of the time concept, philosophers who have attempted to relate these ideas believed they could transform duration into extensity. By revealing how they were misled, we will see that time, viewed as an unbounded and homogeneous medium, is merely the ghost of space haunting reflective consciousness.
The English school tries, in fact, to reduce relations of extensity to more or less complex relations of succession in time. When, with our eyes shut, we run our hands along a surface, the rubbing of our fingers against the surface, and especially the varied play of our joints, provide a series of sensations, which differ only by their qualities and which exhibit a certain order in time. Moreover, experience teaches us that this series can be reversed, that we can, by an[Pg 100] effort of a different kind (or, as we shall call it later, in an opposite direction), obtain the same sensations over again in an inverse order: relations of position in space might then be defined as reversible relations of succession in time. But such a definition involves a vicious circle, or at least a very superficial idea of time. There are, indeed, as we shall show a little later, two possible conceptions of time, the one free from all alloy, the other surreptitiously bringing in the idea of space. Pure duration is the form which the succession of our conscious states assumes when our ego lets itself live, when it refrains from separating its present state from its former states. For this purpose it need not be entirely absorbed in the passing sensation or idea; for then, on the contrary, it would no longer endure. Nor need it forget its former states: it is enough that, in recalling these states, it does not set them alongside its actual state as one point alongside another, but forms both the past and the present states into an organic whole, as happens when we recall the notes of a tune, melting, so to speak, into one another. Might it not be said that, even if these notes succeed one another, yet we perceive them in one another, and that their totality may be compared to a living being whose parts, although distinct, permeate one another just because they are so closely connected? The proof is that, if we interrupt the rhythm by dwelling longer than is right on one[Pg 101] note of the tune, it is not its exaggerated length, as length, which will warn us of our mistake, but the qualitative change thereby caused in the whole of the musical phrase. We can thus conceive of succession without distinction, and think of it as a mutual penetration, an interconnexion and organization of elements, each one of which represents the whole, and cannot be distinguished or isolated from it except by abstract thought. Such is the account of duration which would be given by a being who was ever the same and ever changing, and who had no idea of space. But, familiar with the latter idea and indeed beset by it, we introduce it unwittingly into our feeling of pure succession; we set our states of consciousness side by side in such a way as to perceive them simultaneously, no longer in one another, but alongside one another; in a word, we project time into space, we express duration in terms of extensity, and succession thus takes the form of a continuous line or a chain, the parts of which touch without penetrating one another. Note that the mental image thus shaped implies the perception, no longer successive, but simultaneous, of a before and after, and that it would be a contradiction to suppose a succession which was only a succession, and which nevertheless was contained in one and the same instant. Now, when we speak of an order of succession in duration, and of the reversibility of this order, is the succession we are dealing with pure succession, such as we have just defined[Pg 102] it, without any admixture of extensity, or is it succession developing in space, in such a way that we can take in at once a number of elements which are both distinct and set side by side? There is no doubt about the answer: we could not introduce order among terms without first distinguishing them and then comparing the places which they occupy; hence we must perceive them as multiple, simultaneous and distinct; in a word, we set them side by side, and if we introduce an order in what is successive, the reason is that succession is converted into simultaneity and is projected into space. In short, when the movement of my finger along a surface or a line provides me with a series of sensations of different qualities, one of two things happens: either I picture these sensations to myself as in duration only, and in that case they succeed one another in such a way that I cannot at a given moment perceive a number of them as simultaneous and yet distinct; or else I make out an order of succession, but in that case I display the faculty not only of perceiving a succession of elements, but also of setting them out in line after having distinguished them: in a word, I already possess the idea of space. Hence the idea of a reversible series in duration, or even simply of a certain order of succession in time, itself implies the representation of space, and cannot be used to define it.
The English school aims to simplify relationships of extension into more or less complex relationships of succession over time. When we close our eyes and run our hands over a surface, the friction of our fingers against it, along with the movement of our joints, creates a series of sensations that only differ in their qualities and show a specific order in time. Additionally, experience teaches us that this sequence can be reversed; we can, with a different effort (which we will refer to later as in an opposite direction), recreate the same sensations in the opposite order. Position relations in space could then be defined as reversible relations of succession in time. However, such a definition leads to a circular argument or at least presents a very superficial understanding of time. There are, as we will explain later, two possible ideas of time: one entirely pure and the other subtly incorporating the concept of space. Pure duration is the form that the succession of our conscious states takes when our ego allows itself to live, without separating its current state from its previous states. For this to happen, it doesn’t need to be fully absorbed in the moment; otherwise, it wouldn’t endure. It also doesn’t have to forget its past states: it’s enough that when recalling these states, it doesn’t place them next to its current state as isolated points but combines both past and present states into a cohesive whole, like when we remember the notes of a tune blending together. Can we say that even if these notes follow one after the other, we still perceive them within each other, and their entirety resembles a living being whose distinct parts interpenetrate because they are so closely related? The proof lies in the fact that if we disrupt the rhythm by lingering too long on one note, it’s not the prolonged duration of that note that alerts us to our mistake, but the qualitative change it brings to the entire musical phrase. Thus, we can conceive of succession without distinguishing it and think of it as a mutual blending, an interconnection, and organization of elements, each one representing the whole and cannot be separated from it except by abstract thought. This would be the perspective of an existence that is always the same and always changing, without any concept of space. Yet, since we are familiar with the idea of space and often affected by it, we unintentionally incorporate it into our feeling of pure succession; we arrange our states of consciousness next to each other so we perceive them simultaneously rather than as part of one another. In short, we project time into space, expressing duration in terms of extension so that succession appears as a continuous line or chain, where the parts touch but do not penetrate one another. Note that this mental image suggests a perception of “before” and “after” that is simultaneous rather than successive, and it would be contradictory to think of a succession that is merely a succession while also existing in a single instant. Now, when we discuss an order of succession in duration and the reversibility of this order, are we dealing with pure succession, as we’ve just defined it, without any mixture of extension, or is it succession occurring in space, allowing us to grasp multiple distinct elements side by side? The answer is clear: we couldn’t establish an order among terms without first distinguishing them and comparing their respective positions; therefore, we must perceive them as multiple, simultaneous, and distinct; in other words, we set them side by side, and if we introduce an order in what is successive, it’s because succession has been transformed into simultaneity and projected into space. In summary, when the movement of my finger along a surface or line gives me a series of sensations with different qualities, one of two things occurs: either I visualize these sensations solely in terms of duration, in which case they follow one another in such a way that I cannot at any moment perceive multiple sensations as simultaneous yet distinct; or I identify an order of succession, but in that case, I reveal my ability not just to perceive a succession of elements but also to arrange them after distinguishing them: in other words, I already have the concept of space. Thus, the idea of a reversible series in duration, or even simply of a specific order of succession in time, itself implies the representation of space and cannot be used to define it.
To give this argument a stricter form, let us imagine a straight line of unlimited length, and[Pg 103] on this line a material point A, which moves. If this point were conscious of itself, it would feel itself change, since it moves: it would perceive a succession; but would this succession assume for it the form of a line? No doubt it would, if it could rise, so to speak, above the line which it traverses, and perceive simultaneously several points of it in juxtaposition: but by doing so it would form the idea of space, and it is in space and not in pure duration that it would see displayed the changes which it undergoes. We here put our finger on the mistake of those who regard pure duration as something similar to space, but of a simpler nature. They are fond of setting psychic states side by side, of forming a chain or a line of them, and do not imagine that they are introducing into this operation the idea of space properly so called, the idea of space in its totality, because space is a medium of three dimensions. But how can they fail to notice that, in order to perceive a line as a line, it is necessary to take up a position outside it, to take account of the void which surrounds it, and consequently to think a space of three dimensions? If our conscious point A does not yet possess the idea of space—and this is the hypothesis which we have agreed to adopt—the succession of states through which it passes cannot assume for it the form of a line; but its sensations will add themselves dynamically to one another and will organize themselves, like[Pg 104] the successive notes of a tune by which we allow ourselves to be lulled and soothed. In a word, pure duration might well be nothing but a succession of qualitative changes, which melt into and permeate one another, without precise outlines, without any tendency to externalize themselves in relation to one another, without any affiliation with number: it would be pure heterogeneity. But for the present we shall not insist upon this point; it is enough for us to have shown that, from the moment when you attribute the least homogeneity to duration, you surreptitiously introduce space.
To make this argument clearer, let’s picture an endless straight line, and on this line, there’s a point A that is moving. If this point were aware of itself, it would feel itself changing since it's in motion: it would sense a sequence of events; but would this sequence take the form of a line for it? It likely would, if it could, so to speak, rise above the line it’s traveling on and see multiple points at once next to each other: but by doing this, it would create the concept of space, and it is in space, not just in pure duration, that it would observe the changes it undergoes. Here, we highlight the mistake of those who consider pure duration similar to space, but simpler. They like to line up mental states, creating a chain or sequence, without realizing they’re incorporating the concept of space itself, a three-dimensional medium, into this process. How can they overlook that, to perceive a line as a line, it’s necessary to position oneself outside of it, consider the emptiness around it, and thus envision three-dimensional space? If our conscious point A hasn't yet grasped the concept of space—and this is the assumption we've chosen to adopt—the sequence of states it experiences won’t appear to it as a line; instead, its sensations will combine dynamically and organize themselves like the successive notes of a melody that lulls and comforts us. In short, pure duration could just be a series of qualitative changes that blend into and intermingle with each other, lacking clear boundaries, without any effort to distinguish themselves in relation to one another, and without any connection to numbers: it would be pure heterogeneity. But for now, we won't focus on this point; it’s enough to show that once you attribute even the slightest homogeneity to duration, you’re unwittingly introducing the concept of space.
It is true that we count successive moments of duration, and that, because of its relations with number, time at first seems to us to be a measurable magnitude, just like space. But there is here an important distinction to be made. I say, e.g., that a minute has just elapsed, and I mean by this that a pendulum, beating the seconds, has completed sixty oscillations. If I picture these sixty oscillations to myself all at once by a single mental perception, I exclude by hypothesis the idea of a succession. I do not think of sixty strokes which succeed one another, but of sixty points on a fixed line, each one of which symbolizes, so to speak, an oscillation of the pendulum. If, on the other hand, I wish to picture these sixty oscillations in succession, but without altering the way they are produced in space, I shall[Pg 105] be compelled to think of each oscillation to the exclusion of the recollection of the preceding one, for space has preserved no trace of it; but by doing so I shall condemn myself to remain for ever in the present; I shall give up the attempt to think a succession or a duration. Now if, finally, I retain the recollection of the preceding oscillation together with the image of the present oscillation, one of two things will happen. Either I shall set the two images side by side, and we then fall back on our first hypothesis, or I shall perceive one in the other, each permeating the other and organizing themselves like the notes of a tune, so as to form what we shall call a continuous or qualitative multiplicity with no resemblance to number. I shall thus get the image of pure duration; but I shall have entirely got rid of the idea of a homogeneous medium or a measurable quantity. By carefully examining our consciousness we shall recognize that it proceeds in this way whenever it refrains from representing duration symbolically. When the regular oscillations of the pendulum make us sleepy, is it the last sound heard, the last movement perceived, which produces this effect? No, undoubtedly not, for why then should not the first have done the same? Is it the recollection of the preceding sounds or movements, set in juxtaposition to the last one? But this same recollection, if it is later on set in juxtaposition to a single sound or movement, will remain without effect. Hence we must admit[Pg 106] that the sounds combined with one another and acted, not by their quantity as quantity, but by the quality which their quantity exhibited, i.e. by the rhythmic organization of the whole. Could the effect of a slight but continuous stimulation be understood in any other way? If the sensation remained always the same, it would continue to be indefinitely slight and indefinitely bearable. But the fact is that each increase of stimulation is taken up into the preceding stimulations, and that the whole produces on us the effect of a musical phrase which is constantly on the point of ending and constantly altered in its totality by the addition of some new note. If we assert that it is always the same sensation, the reason is that we are thinking, not of the sensation itself, but of its objective cause situated in space. We then set it out in space in its turn, and in place of an organism which develops, in place of changes which permeate one another, we perceive one and the same sensation stretching itself out lengthwise, so to speak, and setting itself in juxtaposition to itself without limit. Pure duration, that which consciousness perceives, must thus be reckoned among the so-called intensive magnitudes, if intensities can be called magnitudes: strictly speaking, however, it is not a quantity, and as soon as we try to measure it, we unwittingly replace it by space.
It’s true that we measure the length of time in seconds, minutes, and hours, and, due to its connection with numbers, time initially seems like something we can measure, just like space. But there’s an important difference to consider. For example, when I say a minute has passed, I mean that a pendulum has made sixty swings. If I visualize those sixty swings all at once in my mind, I’m imagining them as a singular point rather than as a sequence. I don’t see sixty swings happening one after the other; I see sixty points on a line, each representing a swing of the pendulum. On the other hand, if I try to picture the swings in succession while maintaining their order, I have to think about each swing independently, forgetting the previous one, since space hasn’t retained any trace of it. But if I do that, I’ll be stuck in the present and won’t be able to think about a sequence or duration. Now, if I hold onto the memory of the previous swing while also being aware of the current swing, two things might occur. Either I keep the two images separate, which leads us back to my first idea, or I perceive one within the other, each influencing the other and blending together like the notes of a song, creating what we call continuous or qualitative multiplicity, which doesn’t relate to numbers. This gives me an idea of pure duration, but I’ve completely eliminated the concept of a uniform medium or measurable quantity. By closely examining our consciousness, we’ll see that it behaves this way whenever it doesn’t symbolize duration. When the pendulum’s consistent swings make us drowsy, is it the last sound we heard or the last movement we saw that causes this? No, definitely not, because if that were the case, the first sound would have done the same thing. Is it the memory of the earlier sounds or movements, compared to the last one? Yet, this same memory, if later compared to a single sound or movement, doesn’t have any effect. Thus, we must acknowledge that the sounds interact with each other, not by their quantity, but by the quality that their quantity reveals, that is, through the rhythmic arrangement of the whole. Could the effect of a slight but constant stimulation be understood any other way? If the sensation stayed the same, it would remain indefinitely subtle and tolerable. But in reality, every increase in stimulation is absorbed into the previous ones, and together they create an effect on us like a musical phrase that’s always about to end, continuously changing due to the addition of a new note. If we claim it’s always the same sensation, it’s because we’re thinking not about the sensation itself, but about its objective cause located in space. We then lay it out in space as if it’s a single sensation unfolding endlessly, juxtaposed with itself without limit. Pure duration, as perceived by consciousness, should therefore be classified among what are called intensive magnitudes, if we can even call intensities magnitudes: strictly speaking, it isn’t a quantity, and as soon as we try to measure it, we unwittingly replace it with space.
But we find it extraordinarily difficult to think of duration in its original purity; this is due,[Pg 107] no doubt, to the fact that we do not endure alone, external objects, it seems, endure as we do, and time, regarded from this point of view, has every appearance of a homogeneous medium. Not only do the moments of this duration seem to be external to one another, like bodies in space, but the movement perceived by our senses is the, so to speak, palpable sign of a homogeneous and measurable duration. Nay more, time enters into the formulae of mechanics, into the calculations of the astronomer, and even of the physicist, under the form of a quantity. We measure the velocity of a movement, implying that time itself is a magnitude. Indeed, the analysis which we have just attempted requires to be completed, for if duration properly so-called cannot be measured, what is it that is measured by the oscillations of the pendulum? Granted that inner duration, perceived by consciousness, is nothing else but the melting of states of consciousness into one another, and the gradual growth of the ego, it will be said, notwithstanding, that the time which the astronomer introduces into his formulae, the time which our clocks divide into equal portions, this time, at least, is something different: it must be a measurable and therefore homogeneous magnitude.—It is nothing of the sort, however, and a close examination will dispel this last illusion.
But we find it really hard to think about duration in its purest form; this is probably because we don’t endure alone. External objects seem to endure just like we do, and from this perspective, time appears to be a uniform medium. Not only do the moments of this duration seem separate from each other, like objects in space, but the movement we perceive with our senses is essentially a tangible sign of a uniform and measurable duration. Moreover, time is involved in the equations of mechanics, in the calculations of astronomers, and even physicists, in the form of a quantity. We measure the speed of a movement, implying that time itself is a measurable amount. In fact, the analysis we've just attempted needs to be expanded, because if duration in its true sense can’t be measured, what exactly is being measured by the oscillations of a pendulum? Even if we accept that inner duration, as perceived by consciousness, is just the blending of states of consciousness and the gradual development of the self, one might still argue that the time used by astronomers in their equations, the time our clocks divide into equal parts, is at least something different: it must be a measurable and thus uniform quantity. However, that is not the case, and a closer look will dispel this final illusion.
When I follow with my eyes on the dial of a[Pg 108] clock the movement of the hand which corresponds to the oscillations of the pendulum, I do not measure duration, as seems to be thought; I merely count simultaneities, which is very different. Outside of me, in space, there is never more than a single position of the hand and the pendulum, for nothing is left of the past positions. Within myself a process of organization or interpenetration of conscious states is going on, which constitutes true duration. It is because I endure in this way that I picture to myself what I call the past oscillations of the pendulum at the same time as I perceive the present oscillation. Now, let us withdraw for a moment the ego which thinks these so-called successive oscillations: there will never be more than a single oscillation, and indeed only a single position, of the pendulum, and hence no duration. Withdraw, on the other hand, the pendulum and its oscillations; there will no longer be anything but the heterogeneous duration of the ego, without moments external to one another, without relation to number. Thus, within our ego, there is succession without mutual externality; outside the ego, in pure space, mutual externality without succession: mutual externality, since the present oscillation is radically distinct from the previous oscillation, which no longer exists; but no succession, since succession exists solely for a conscious spectator who keeps the past in[Pg 109] mind and sets the two oscillations or their symbols side by side in an auxiliary space. Now, between this succession without externality and this externality without succession, a kind of exchange takes place, very similar to what physicists call the phenomenon of endosmosis. As the successive phases of our conscious life, although interpenetrating, correspond individually to an oscillation of the pendulum which occurs at the same time, and as, moreover, these oscillations are sharply distinguished from one another, we get into the habit of setting up the same distinction between the successive moments of our conscious life: the oscillations of the pendulum break it up, so to speak, into parts external to one another: hence the mistaken idea of a homogeneous inner duration, similar to space, the moments of which are identical and follow, without penetrating, one another. But, on the other hand, the oscillations of the pendulum, which are distinct only because one has disappeared when the other appears on the scene, profit, as it were, from the influence which they have thus exercised over our conscious life. Owing to the fact that our consciousness has organized them as a whole in memory, they are first preserved and afterwards disposed in a series: in a word, we create for them a fourth dimension of space, which we call homogeneous time, and which enables the movement of the pendulum, although taking place at one spot, to be continually set in[Pg 110] juxtaposition to itself. Now, if we try to determine the exact part played by the real and the imaginary in this very complex process, this is what we find. There is a real space, without duration, in which phenomena appear and disappear simultaneously with our states of consciousness. There is a real duration, the heterogeneous moments of which permeate one another; each moment, however, can be brought into relation with a state of the external world which is contemporaneous with it, and can be separated from the other moments in consequence of this very process. The comparison of these two realities gives rise to a symbolical representation of duration, derived from space. Duration thus assumes the illusory form of a homogeneous medium, and the connecting link between these two terms, space and duration, is simultaneity, which might be defined as the intersection of time and space.
When I watch the hand of a[Pg 108] clock move along with the swings of the pendulum, I'm not measuring time, as people often think; I’m simply counting things happening at the same time, which is a whole different concept. Outside of myself, in space, there's only one position for the hand and the pendulum at any given moment, and nothing is left of their past positions. Inside me, however, there's a process of organizing or blending conscious states that makes up what we truly experience as duration. It’s because I endure this way that I can visualize what I call the past swings of the pendulum while simultaneously observing the current swing. Now, if we temporarily set aside the ego that perceives these so-called successive swings, we realize there’s actually only one swing of the pendulum at a time, and therefore no duration exists. On the other hand, if we remove the pendulum and its swings, all that remains is the diverse duration of the ego, with no moments that exist independently or relate to numbers. So, within our ego, there’s succession without external separation; outside the ego, in pure space, there’s external separation without succession: external separation because the current swing is completely different from the previous one, which no longer exists; but no succession exists, as succession only happens for a conscious observer who retains the past in[Pg 109] mind and places these two swings or their representations next to each other in a separate space. Now, between this succession without separation and this separation without succession, there’s a sort of exchange that resembles what scientists call endosmosis. The successive phases of our conscious life, although intertwined, correspond individually to a swing of the pendulum that happens simultaneously. Furthermore, since these swings are sharply distinct from one another, we get used to making the same distinction between the successive moments of our conscious life: the pendulum’s swings break it, in a way, into separate parts, leading to the false belief in a uniform inner duration, similar to space, where the moments are the same and follow one another without overlapping. On the flip side, the swings of the pendulum, which are only distinct because one disappears when the other appears, benefit from the influence they have over our conscious experience. Because our consciousness has organized them as a whole in memory, they are initially preserved and later arranged in a sequence; in short, we create for them a fourth dimension of space called homogeneous time, which allows the pendulum’s movement, even though it occurs in one place, to be constantly compared to itself. Now, if we try to pinpoint the role of the real and the imaginary in this intricate process, here’s what we discover. There’s a real space without duration, where phenomena appear and vanish simultaneously with our states of consciousness. There’s a real duration, whose diverse moments interpenetrate; however, each moment can relate to a state of the external world that exists concurrently with it and can be distinguished from other moments because of this process. The comparison of these two realities leads to a symbolic representation of duration drawn from space. Thus, duration takes on the deceptive form of a uniform medium, and the connection between these two terms, space and duration, is simultaneity, which could be defined as the intersection of time and space.
If we analyse in the same way the concept of motion, the living symbol of this seemingly homogeneous duration, we shall be led to make a distinction of the same kind. We generally say that a movement takes place in space, and when we assert that motion is homogeneous and divisible, it is of the space traversed that we are thinking, as if it were interchangeable with the motion itself. Now, if we reflect further, we shall see that the successive positions of the moving body really do occupy[Pg 111] space, but that the process by which it passes from one position to the other, a process which occupies duration and which has no reality except for a conscious spectator, eludes space. We have to do here not with an object but with a progress: motion, in so far as it is a passage from one point to another, is a mental synthesis, a psychic and therefore unextended process. Space contains only parts of space, and at whatever point of space we consider the moving body, we shall get only a position. If consciousness is aware of anything more than positions, the reason is that it keeps the successive positions in mind and synthesizes them. But how does it carry out a synthesis of this kind? It cannot be by a fresh setting out of these same positions in a homogeneous medium, for a fresh synthesis would be necessary to connect the positions with one another, and so on indefinitely. We are thus compelled to admit that we have here to do with a synthesis which is, so to speak, qualitative, a gradual organization of our successive sensations, a unity resembling that of a phrase in a melody. This is just the idea of motion which we form when we think of it by itself, when, so to speak, from motion we extract mobility. Think of what you experience on suddenly perceiving a shooting star: in this extremely rapid motion there is a natural and instinctive separation between the space traversed, which appears to you under the form of a line of fire, and the absolutely[Pg 112] indivisible sensation of motion or mobility. A rapid gesture, made with one's eyes shut, will assume for consciousness the form of a purely qualitative sensation as long as there is no thought of the space traversed. In a word, there are two elements to be distinguished in motion, the space traversed and the act by which we traverse it, the successive positions and the synthesis of these positions. The first of these elements is a homogeneous quantity: the second has no reality except in a consciousness: it is a quality or an intensity, whichever you prefer. But here again we meet with a case of endosmosis, an intermingling of the purely intensive sensation of mobility with the extensive representation of the space traversed. On the one hand we attribute to the motion the divisibility of the space which it traverses, forgetting that it is quite possible to divide an object, but not an act: and on the other hand we accustom ourselves to projecting this act itself into space, to applying it to the whole of the line which the moving body traverses, in a word, to solidifying it: as if this localizing of a progress in space did not amount to asserting that, even outside consciousness, the past co-exists along with the present!
If we analyze the concept of motion, the living symbol of this seemingly uniform duration, we'll need to make a similar distinction. We usually say that movement happens in space, and when we claim that motion is uniform and divisible, we are thinking about the space traveled, as if it were the same as the motion itself. However, if we think deeper, we'll realize that the successive positions of a moving object indeed occupy[Pg 111] space, but the process of moving from one position to another, which takes time and only exists for someone who is consciously observing, escapes the concept of space. What we have here is not an object but a progress: motion, in that it is a transition from one point to another, is a mental synthesis, a psychic process that isn't defined by physical space. Space only contains parts of space, and no matter where we view the moving body in space, we only see a position. If consciousness recognizes anything more than positions, it’s because it remembers the successive positions and brings them together. But how does it create this synthesis? It can't simply reiterate these same positions in a single uniform space, as a new synthesis would be needed to connect the positions endlessly. Therefore, we have to acknowledge that this synthesis is, in a sense, qualitative, a gradual organization of our series of sensations, a unity similar to a phrase in a melody. This reflects the idea of motion we form when we consider it alone, as if we are extracting mobility from motion itself. Think about your reaction to seeing a shooting star: in that incredibly fast motion, there's a natural and instinctive distinction between the space it travels, which you perceive as a trail of fire, and the absolutely[Pg 112] indivisible sensation of motion or mobility. A quick gesture made with closed eyes takes on the form of a purely qualitative sensation as long as you aren't considering the space traveled. In short, there are two aspects of motion to differentiate: the space traveled and the act of traveling it, the successive positions and the synthesis of those positions. The first is a uniform quantity; the second only exists in consciousness: it’s a quality or intensity, if you prefer. But again, we encounter a blending of the purely intensive sensation of mobility with the extensive representation of the traveled space. On one hand, we attribute the ability to divide to the motion based on the space it crosses, forgetting that while it’s possible to divide an object, it’s not possible to divide an act: and on the other hand, we tend to project this act into space, applying it to the entire line the moving body crosses, in other words, solidifying it: as if this localization of a progress in space doesn’t imply that, even outside consciousness, the past coexists with the present!
It is to this confusion between motion and the space traversed that the paradoxes of the Eleatics are due; for the interval which separates two points is infinitely divisible, and if motion consisted of parts like those of the interval itself,[Pg 113] the interval would never be crossed. But the truth is that each of Achilles' steps is a simple indivisible act, and that, after a given number of these acts, Achilles will have passed the tortoise. The mistake of the Eleatics arises from their identification of this series of acts, each of which is of a definite kind and indivisible, with the homogeneous space which underlies them. As this space can be divided and put together again according to any law whatever, they think they are justified in reconstructing Achilles' whole movement, not with Achilles' kind of step, but with the tortoise's kind: in place of Achilles pursuing the tortoise they really put two tortoises, regulated by each other, two tortoises which agree to make the same kind of steps or simultaneous acts, so as never to catch one another. Why does Achilles outstrip the tortoise? Because each of Achilles' steps and each of the tortoise's steps are indivisible acts in so far as they are movements, and are different magnitudes in so far as they are space: so that addition will soon give a greater length for the space traversed by Achilles than is obtained by adding together the space traversed by the tortoise and the handicap with which it started. This is what Zeno leaves out of account when he reconstructs the movement of Achilles according to the same law as the movement of the tortoise, forgetting that space alone can be divided and put together again in any way we like, and thus[Pg 114] confusing space with motion. Hence we do not think it necessary to admit, even after the acute and profound analysis of a contemporary thinker,[2] that the meeting of the two moving bodies implies a discrepancy between real and imaginary motion, between space in itself and indefinitely divisible space, between concrete time and abstract time. Why resort to a metaphysical hypothesis, however ingenious, about the nature of space, time, and motion, when immediate intuition shows us motion within duration, and duration outside space? There is no need to assume a limit to the divisibility of concrete space; we can admit that it is infinitely divisible, provided that we make a distinction between the simultaneous positions of the two moving bodies, which are in fact in space, and their movements, which cannot occupy space, being duration rather than extent, quality and not quantity. To measure the velocity of a movement, as we shall see, is simply to ascertain a simultaneity; to introduce this velocity into calculations is simply to use a convenient means of anticipating a simultaneity. Thus mathematics confines itself to its own province as long as it is occupied with determining the simultaneous positions of Achilles and the tortoise at a given moment, or when it admits à priori that the two moving bodies meet at a point X—a meeting which is itself a simultaneity. But it goes[Pg 115] beyond its province when it claims to reconstruct what takes place in the interval between two simultaneities; or rather it is inevitably led, even then, to consider simultaneities once more, fresh simultaneities, the indefinitely increasing number of which ought to be a warning that we cannot make movement out of immobilities, nor time out of space. In short, just as nothing will be found homogeneous in duration except a symbolical medium with no duration at all, namely space, in which simultaneities are set out in line, in the same way no homogeneous element will be found in motion except that which least belongs to it, the traversed space, which is motionless.
The confusion between movement and the space covered leads to the Eleatic paradoxes. The distance between two points can be divided infinitely, and if movement were made up of parts like that distance, it would never be completed. However, the reality is that each step Achilles takes is a simple, indivisible action, and after a certain number of these actions, Achilles will overtake the tortoise. The Eleatics make a mistake by equating this series of actions—which are each unique and indivisible—with the continuous space beneath them. Since that space can be divided and reorganized in any way, they mistakenly believe they can reconstruct Achilles' entire movement not with Achilles' type of step, but with the tortoise's type: instead of Achilles chasing the tortoise, they effectively create two tortoises that mirror each other, each taking the same kind of steps or actions simultaneously, so they never catch up. Why does Achilles surpass the tortoise? Because each of Achilles' steps and each of the tortoise's steps are indivisible actions in the context of movement, while they are different sizes in relation to space. Thus, adding the distances traveled by Achilles will quickly exceed the sum of the distance the tortoise travels plus any initial lead. This is something Zeno overlooks when he reconstructs Achilles' movement using the same principles as the tortoise's movement, neglecting that only space can be divided and rearranged in any way we choose, thus confusing space with motion. Therefore, we don't find it necessary to accept, even after the insightful analysis by a contemporary thinker, that the overlap of the two moving bodies suggests a difference between real and imaginary movement, between space itself and infinitely divisible space, between concrete time and abstract time. Why propose a clever metaphysical theory about the nature of space, time, and motion when our immediate understanding shows us that movement occurs over time, and time exists outside space? There's no need to limit the divisibility of physical space; we can agree it's infinitely divisible, as long as we distinguish between the positions of the two moving bodies, which indeed are in space, and their movements, which cannot occupy space, being duration instead of extent—quality rather than quantity. To measure the speed of a motion, as we'll see, is simply to identify a simultaneity; incorporating that speed into calculations is merely a way to predict simultaneity. Mathematics stays within its bounds when it determines the simultaneous positions of Achilles and the tortoise at a specific moment or when it assumes that the two moving bodies converge at a point X—a meeting that is itself a simultaneity. However, it ventures outside its bounds when it attempts to reconstruct what happens in the interval between two simultaneities; or rather, it is inevitably driven to consider simultaneities again, the ever-increasing number of which serves as a reminder that we cannot derive motion from stillness, nor time from space. In summary, just as nothing homogenous can be found in duration except for a purely symbolic medium that has no duration—namely space, where simultaneities are displayed in alignment—likewise, no uniform element will exist in motion except for that which is least related to it, the distance traversed, which is stationary.
Now, just for this reason, science cannot deal with time and motion except on condition of first eliminating the essential and qualitative element—of time, duration, and of motion, mobility. We may easily convince ourselves of this by examining the part played in astronomy and mechanics by considerations of time, motion, and velocity.
Now, for this reason, science can only address time and motion by first removing the essential and qualitative aspects—like time, duration, and motion, mobility. We can easily see this by looking at the roles that time, motion, and speed play in astronomy and mechanics.
Treatises on mechanics are careful to announce that they do not intend to define duration itself but only the equality of two durations. "Two intervals of time are equal when two identical bodies, in identical conditions at the beginning of each of these intervals and subject to the same actions and influences of every kind, have traversed the same space at the end of these intervals." In other words, we are to note the exact moment at[Pg 116] which the motion begins, i.e. the coincidence of an external change with one of our psychic states; we are to note the moment at which the motion ends, that is to say, another simultaneity; finally we are to measure the space traversed, the only thing, in fact, which is really measurable. Hence there is no question here of duration, but only of space and simultaneities. To announce that something will take place at the end of a time t is to declare that consciousness will note between now and then a number t of simultaneities of a certain kind. And we must not be led astray by the words "between now and then," for the interval of duration exists only for us and on account of the interpenetration of our conscious states. Outside ourselves we should find only space, and consequently nothing but simultaneities, of which we could not even say that they are objectively successive, since succession can only be thought through comparing the present with the past.—That the interval of duration itself cannot be taken into account by science is proved by the fact that, if all the motions of the universe took place twice or thrice as quickly, there would be nothing to alter either in our formulae or in the figures which are to be found in them. Consciousness would have an indefinable and as it were qualitative impression of the change, but the change would not make itself felt outside consciousness, since the same number of simultaneities would go on taking place in space. We shall see, later on, that when the[Pg 117] astronomer predicts, e.g., an eclipse, he does something of this kind: he shortens infinitely the intervals of duration, as these do not count for science, and thus perceives in a very short time—a few seconds at the most—a succession of simultaneities which may take up several centuries for the concrete consciousness, compelled to live through the intervals instead of merely counting their extremities.
Treatises on mechanics make it clear that they don't aim to define duration itself but only the equality of two durations. "Two intervals of time are equal when two identical bodies, under the same conditions at the start of these intervals and experiencing the same actions and influences, have covered the same distance at the end of those intervals." In other words, we should note the exact moment at[Pg 116] which the motion starts, meaning the coincidence of an external change with one of our mental states; we should observe the moment the motion ends, which represents another simultaneity; finally, we need to measure the distance covered, the only truly measurable aspect. Thus, this discussion is not about duration, but rather about space and simultaneities. Saying that something will happen at the end of a time t is simply stating that consciousness will recognize a number t of simultaneities of a specific type between now and then. We shouldn't be misled by the phrase "between now and then," because the interval of duration exists only for us due to the overlap of our conscious states. Outside of ourselves, we would find only space, and therefore only simultaneities, which we couldn't even claim are objectively successive, since succession can only be understood by comparing the present with the past. — The fact that the interval of duration itself can’t be considered by science is evidenced by the idea that if all the motions in the universe happened twice or thrice as fast, nothing would change in our formulas or the figures derived from them. Consciousness would have an indescribable and almost qualitative impression of the change, but the change wouldn’t be felt outside consciousness since the same number of simultaneities would continue occurring in space. Later on, we will see that when the[Pg 117] astronomer predicts, for example, an eclipse, he is doing something along these lines: he infinitely shortens the intervals of duration, as those don’t matter for science, and thus perceives a succession of simultaneities in a very short time—a few seconds at most—that could take several centuries for the concrete consciousness, which has to live through the intervals rather than just count their endpoints.
A direct analysis of the notion of velocity will bring us to the same conclusion. Mechanics gets this notion through a series of ideas, the connexion of which it is easy enough to trace. It first builds up the idea of uniform motion by picturing, on the one hand, the path AB of a certain moving body, and, on the other, a physical phenomenon which is repeated indefinitely under the same conditions, e.g., a stone always falling from the same height on to the same spot. If we mark on the path AB the points Μ, Ν, Ρ ... reached by the moving body at each of the moments when the stone touches the ground, and if the intervals AM, MN and NP are found to be equal to one another, the motion will be said to be uniform: and any one of these intervals will be called the velocity of the moving body, provided that it is agreed to adopt as unit of duration the physical phenomenon which has been chosen as the term of comparison. Thus, the velocity of a uniform motion is defined by mechanics without appealing to any other notions[Pg 118] than those of space and simultaneity. Now let us turn to the case of a variable motion, that is, to the case when the elements AM, MN, NP ... are found to be unequal. In order to define the velocity of the moving body A at the point M, we shall only have to imagine an unlimited number of moving bodies A1, A2, A3 ... all moving uniformly with velocities v1 v2, v3 ... which are arranged, e.g., in an ascending scale and which correspond to all possible magnitudes. Let us then consider on the path of the moving body A two points M' and M", situated on either side of the point M but very near it. At the same time as this moving body reaches the points M', M, M", the other moving bodies reach points M'1 M1 M"1, M'2 M2 M"2 ... on their respective paths; and there must be two moving bodies Ah and Ap such that we have on the one hand M' M= M'h Mh and on the other hand M M"= Mp M"p. We shall then agree to say that the velocity of the moving body A at the point M lies between vh and vp. But nothing prevents our assuming that the points M' and M" are still nearer the point M, and it will then be necessary to replace vh and vp by two fresh velocities vi and vn, the one greater than vh and the other less than vp. And in proportion as we reduce the two intervals M'M and MM", we shall lessen the difference between the velocities of the uniform corresponding movements. Now, the two intervals being capable of decreasing right down to zero, there evidently exists between vi[Pg 119] and vn a certain velocity vm, such that the difference between this velocity and vh, vi ... on the one hand, and vp, vn ... on the other, can become smaller than any given quantity. It is this common limit vm which we shall call the velocity of the moving body A at the point M.—Now, in this analysis of variable motion, as in that of uniform motion, it is a question only of spaces once traversed and of simultaneous positions once reached. We were thus justified in saying that, while all that mechanics retains of time is simultaneity, all that it retains of motion itself—restricted, as it is, to a measurement of motion—is immobility.
A direct analysis of the concept of velocity will lead us to the same conclusion. Mechanics develops this idea through a series of concepts that are relatively easy to connect. It starts by constructing the idea of uniform motion by imagining, on one side, the path AB of a certain moving body, and on the other, a physical event that happens repeatedly under the same conditions, like a stone always falling from the same height onto the same spot. If we mark the points Μ, Ν, Ρ ... on the path AB where the moving body reaches each moment the stone hits the ground, and if the intervals AM, MN, and NP are found to be equal, the motion will be classified as uniform. Any of these intervals will be referred to as the velocity of the moving body, given that we agree to use the chosen physical event as the unit of time for comparison. Thus, the velocity of uniform motion is defined by mechanics without needing to reference any other concepts [Pg 118] other than those of space and simultaneity. Now, let's look at variable motion, which occurs when the elements AM, MN, NP ... are found to be different. To define the velocity of the moving body A at point M, we only need to imagine an endless number of moving bodies A1, A2, A3 ... all moving uniformly with velocities v1, v2, v3 ... arranged, for example, in an ascending order that correspond to all possible values. Next, let's consider two points M' and M", situated on either side of point M but very close to it, on the path of the moving body A. As this moving body reaches points M', M, M", the other moving bodies reach points M'1, M1, M"1, M'2, M2, M"2 ... on their respective paths; and there must be two moving bodies Ah and Ap such that, on one hand, M' M= M'h Mh and on the other hand, M M"= Mp M"p. We then agree to say that the velocity of the moving body A at point M lies between vh and vp. But nothing stops us from assuming that points M' and M" are even closer to point M, making it necessary to replace vh and vp with two new velocities vi and vn, one larger than vh and the other smaller than vp. As we reduce the two intervals M'M and MM", we lessen the difference between the velocities of the corresponding uniform movements. Now, since the two intervals can decrease all the way to zero, there clearly exists a certain velocity vm between vi and vn such that the difference between this velocity and vh, vi ... on one side, and vp, vn ... on the other, can become smaller than any given quantity. This common limit vm is what we will refer to as the velocity of the moving body A at point M.—In this analysis of variable motion, like in that of uniform motion, it is only about distances once traversed and simultaneous positions once reached. Thus, we can say that while mechanics holds onto only the aspect of time being simultaneity, all that it retains of motion itself—limited, as it is, to a measurement of motion—is immobility.
This result might have been foreseen by noticing that mechanics necessarily deals with equations, and that an algebraic equation always expresses something already done. Now, it is of the very essence of duration and motion, as they appear to our consciousness, to be something that is unceasingly being done; thus algebra can represent the results gained at a certain moment of duration and the positions occupied by a certain moving body in space, but not duration and motion themselves. Mathematics may, indeed, increase the number of simultaneities and positions which it takes into consideration by making the intervals very small: it may even, by using the differential instead of the difference, show that it is possible to increase without limit the number of these[Pg 120] intervals of duration. Nevertheless, however small the interval is supposed to be, it is the extremity of the interval at which mathematics always places itself. As for the interval itself, as for the duration and the motion, they are necessarily left out of the equation. The reason is that duration and motion are mental syntheses, and not objects; that, although the moving body occupies, one after the other, points on a line, motion itself has nothing to do with a line; and finally that, although the positions occupied by the moving body vary with the different moments of duration, though it even creates distinct moments by the mere fact of occupying different positions, duration properly so called has no moments which are identical or external to one another, being essentially heterogeneous, continuous, and with no analogy to number.
This result could have been predicted by realizing that mechanics deals with equations, and that an algebraic equation always represents something that has already happened. The essence of duration and motion, as we experience them, is that they are things that are continuously happening. So, while algebra can show the results at a specific moment in time and the positions of a moving object in space, it cannot capture duration and motion themselves. Mathematics can indeed add more moments and positions by making the intervals extremely small; it can even demonstrate that by using differentials rather than differences, it’s possible to infinitely increase the number of these intervals of duration. However, no matter how small the interval is said to be, mathematics always focuses on the end of the interval. As for the interval itself, as well as duration and motion, they are fundamentally excluded from the equation. This is because duration and motion are mental constructs, not physical objects; even though the moving body passes through points on a line one after the other, motion itself isn’t tied to a line. Finally, even though the positions of the moving body change with different moments of duration, and it even distinguishes moments simply by occupying different positions, true duration has no identical or external moments since it is inherently diverse, continuous, and doesn’t relate to numbers.
It follows from this analysis that space alone is homogeneous, that objects in space form a discrete multiplicity, and that every discrete multiplicity is got by a process of unfolding in space. It also follows that there is neither duration nor even succession in space, if we give to these words the meaning in which consciousness takes them: each of the so-called successive states of the external world exists alone; their multiplicity is real only for a consciousness that can first retain them and then set them side by side by externalizing them in relation[Pg 121] to one another. If it retains them, it is because these distinct states of the external world give rise to states of consciousness which permeate one another, imperceptibly organize themselves into a whole, and bind the past to the present by this very process of connexion. If it externalizes them in relation to one another, the reason is that, thinking of their radical distinctness (the one having ceased to be when the other appears on the scene), it perceives them under the form of a discrete multiplicity, which amounts to setting them out in line, in the space in which each of them existed separately. The space employed for this purpose is just that which is called homogeneous time.
This analysis shows that space by itself is uniform, that objects in space create a separate collection, and that every separate collection is formed through a process of unfolding in space. It also indicates that there is no duration or even sequence in space, if we take these terms in the sense that consciousness understands them: each of the so-called successive states of the outside world exists on its own; their collection is real only for a consciousness that can first hold onto them and then arrange them together by relating them to one another. If it retains them, it's because these distinct states of the external world evoke states of consciousness that blend with one another, subtly organize into a whole, and connect the past to the present through this very process of linkage. If it relates them to one another, it's because, considering their fundamental distinction (the first state having ended when the next one comes into being), it perceives them as a separate collection, essentially laying them out in order within the space where each existed independently. The space used for this is what we refer to as homogeneous time.
But another conclusion results from this analysis, namely, that the multiplicity of conscious states, regarded in its original purity, is not at all like the discrete multiplicity which goes to form a number. In such a case there is, as we said, a qualitative multiplicity. In short, we must admit two kinds of multiplicity, two possible senses of the word "distinguish," two conceptions, the one qualitative and the other quantitative, of the difference between same and other. Sometimes this multiplicity, this distinctness, this heterogeneity contains number only potentially, as Aristotle would have said. Consciousness, then, makes a qualitative discrimination without any further thought of counting the qualities or even of distinguishing them as several. In such[Pg 122] a case we have multiplicity without quantity. Sometimes, on the other hand, it is a question of a multiplicity of terms which are counted or which are conceived as capable of being counted; but we think then of the possibility of externalizing them in relation to one another, we set them out in space. Unfortunately, we are so accustomed to illustrate one of these two meanings of the same word by the other, and even to perceive the one in the other, that we find it extraordinarily difficult to distinguish between them or at least to express this distinction in words. Thus I said that several conscious states are organized into a whole, permeate one another, gradually gain a richer content, and might thus give any one ignorant of space the feeling of pure duration; but the very use of the word "several" shows that I had already isolated these states, externalized them in relation to one another, and, in a word, set them side by side; thus, by the very language which I was compelled to use, I betrayed the deeply ingrained habit of setting out time in space. From this spatial setting out, already accomplished, we are compelled to borrow the terms which we use to describe the state of a mind which has not yet accomplished it: these terms are thus misleading from the very beginning, and the idea of a multiplicity without relation to number or space, although clear for pure reflective thought, cannot be translated into the language of common sense. And yet we cannot even form the idea of discrete[Pg 123] multiplicity without considering at the same time a qualitative multiplicity. When we explicitly count units by stringing them along a spatial line, is it not the case that, alongside this addition of identical terms standing out from a homogeneous background, an organization of these units is going on in the depths of the soul, a wholly dynamic process, not unlike the purely qualitative way in which an anvil, if it could feel, would realize a series of blows from a hammer? In this sense we might almost say that the numbers in daily use have each their emotional equivalent. Tradesmen are well aware of it, and instead of indicating the price of an object by a round number of shillings, they will mark the next smaller number, leaving themselves to insert afterwards a sufficient number of pence and farthings. In a word, the process by which we count units and make them into a discrete multiplicity has two sides; on the one hand we assume that they are identical, which is conceivable only on condition that these units are ranged alongside each other in a homogeneous medium; but on the other hand the third unit, for example, when added to the other two, alters the nature, the appearance and, as it were, the rhythm of the whole; without this interpenetration and this, so to speak, qualitative progress, no addition would be possible. Hence it is through the quality of quantity that we form the idea of quantity without quality.
But another conclusion comes from this analysis, specifically, that the variety of conscious states, when viewed in its original form, is not at all like the separate variety that makes up a number. In this instance, as we mentioned, there's a qualitative variety. In short, we need to recognize two types of variety, two possible meanings of the word "distinguish," and two concepts: one qualitative and the other quantitative, regarding the difference between same and other. Sometimes this variety, this distinctness, this heterogeneity only holds potential for number, as Aristotle would say. Consciousness, then, makes a qualitative distinction without any further consideration of counting the qualities or even recognizing them as several. In such[Pg 122] cases, we have variety without quantity. On the other hand, there are times when we deal with a variety of terms that are counted or perceived as countable; but then we consider their potential to be related to one another, we arrange them in space. Unfortunately, we are so used to illustrating one of these two meanings of the same word with the other, and even seeing one within the other, that we find it extremely difficult to differentiate between them or at least to articulate this distinction clearly. So, I mentioned that several conscious states are organized into a whole, influence one another, gradually gain richer content, and might give anyone unfamiliar with space the sense of pure duration; however, the very use of the word "several" shows that I had already isolated these states, externalized them concerning one another, and essentially placed them side by side; thus, through the very language I had to use, I revealed the deeply ingrained habit of portraying time in spatial terms. From this spatial arrangement, which has already taken place, we are forced to borrow the terms we use to describe a state of mind that hasn't achieved this yet: these terms are consequently misleading from the very start, and the idea of a variety without reference to number or space, although clear for pure reflective thought, cannot be expressed in everyday language. Yet we can't even conceptualize discrete[Pg 123] variety without also considering a qualitative variety. When we explicitly count units by laying them out on a spatial line, is it not true that, along with this addition of identical terms standing out against a homogeneous background, an organization of these units is occurring deep within the soul, a completely dynamic process, not unlike how an anvil, if it could feel, would perceive a series of blows from a hammer? In this way, we could almost claim that the numbers we use daily each have their emotional equivalents. Tradespeople know this well, and instead of showing the price of an item as a round number of shillings, they'll mark the next smaller number, planning to later fill in a sufficient number of pence and farthings. In short, the process by which we count units and transform them into a discrete variety has two aspects; on one side, we assume they are identical, which is only conceivable if these units are arranged next to one another in a homogeneous medium; but on the other side, the third unit, for instance, when added to the previous two, changes the nature, appearance, and rhythm of the whole; without this intermingling and, so to speak, qualitative progression, no addition would be possible. Therefore, it is through the quality of quantity that we develop the idea of quantity without quality.
It is therefore obvious that, if it did not betake itself to a symbolical substitute, our consciousness our successive would never regard time as a homogeneous medium, in which the terms of a succession remain outside one another. But we naturally reach this symbolical representation by the mere fact that, in a series of identical terms, each term assumes a double aspect for our consciousness: one aspect which is the same for all of them, since we are thinking then of the sameness of the external object, and another aspect which is characteristic of each of them, because the supervening of each term brings about a new organization of the whole. Hence the possibility of setting out in space, under the form of numerical multiplicity, what we have called a qualitative multiplicity, and of regarding the one as the equivalent of the other. Now, this twofold process is nowhere accomplished so easily as in the perception of the external phenomenon which takes for us the form of motion. Here we certainly have a series of identical terms, since it is always the same moving body; but, on the other hand, the synthesis carried out by our consciousness between the actual position and what our memory calls the former positions, causes these images to permeate, complete, and, so to speak, continue one another. Hence, it is principally by the help of motion that duration assumes the form of a homogeneous medium, and that time is projected[Pg 125] into space. But, even if we leave out motion, any repetition of a well-marked external phenomenon would suggest to consciousness the same mode of representation. Thus, when we hear a series of blows of a hammer, the sounds form an indivisible melody in so far as they are pure sensations, and, here again, give rise to a dynamic progress; but, knowing that the same objective cause is at work, we cut up this progress into phases which we then regard as identical; and this multiplicity of elements no longer being conceivable except by being set out in space, since they have now become identical, we are necessarily led to the idea of a homogeneous time, the symbolical image of real duration. In a word, our ego comes in contact with the external world at its surface; our successive sensations, although dissolving into one another, retain something of the mutual externality which belongs to their objective causes; and thus our superficial psychic life comes to be pictured without any great effort as set out in a homogeneous medium. But the symbolical character of such a picture becomes more striking as we advance further into the depths of consciousness: the deep-seated self which ponders and decides, which heats and blazes up, is a self whose states and changes permeate one another and undergo a deep alteration as soon as we separate them from one another in order to set them out in space. But as this deeper self forms one and the same person with the superficial ego,[Pg 126] the two seem to endure in the same way. And as the repeated picture of one identical objective phenomenon, ever recurring, cuts up our superficial psychic life into parts external to one another, the moments which are thus determined determine in their turn distinct segments in the dynamic and undivided progress of our more personal conscious states. Thus the mutual externality which material objects gain from their juxtaposition in homogeneous space reverberates and spreads into the depths of consciousness: little by little our sensations are distinguished from one another like the external causes which gave rise to them, and our feelings or ideas come to be separated like the sensations with which they are contemporaneous.
It’s clear that if we didn’t turn to a symbolic representation, our awareness would never view time as a uniform space where the elements of a sequence exist independently of one another. We naturally arrive at this symbolic representation simply because, in a series of identical elements, each element has two perspectives for our consciousness: one that is the same across all of them, as we are considering the sameness of the external object, and another that is unique to each, because the introduction of each element prompts a new arrangement of the whole. This allows us to express, in numerical terms, what we've referred to as qualitative multiplicity and to see them as equivalent. This dual process is most easily seen in how we perceive external phenomena that present themselves as motion. Here we have a series of identical elements, since it’s always the same moving object; however, the synthesis our consciousness performs between the current position and what our memory identifies as previous positions causes these images to blend, complete, and, in a way, extend each other. Therefore, it is mainly through motion that duration takes on the form of a uniform space, projecting time into space. Even without motion, any repetition of a well-defined external phenomenon suggests a similar mode of representation in our consciousness. For instance, when we hear a series of hammer blows, the sounds create a unified melody insofar as they are pure sensations, generating a dynamic progression; but recognizing that the same external cause is at play, we break this progression into phases that we then consider identical. This multiplicity of elements can only be understood when represented in space since they have now become identical, leading us to the concept of a uniform time, the symbolic depiction of true duration. In short, our self interacts with the external world at its surface; our successive sensations, while blending together, retain some degree of the mutual independence linked to their objective causes; thus, our superficial mental life can be easily envisioned as situated within a uniform space. However, the symbolic nature of this view becomes even more evident as we delve deeper into consciousness: the core self that reflects and makes decisions, which feels deeply and passionately, is a self whose states and changes intermingle and undergo profound transformation as soon as we separate them to represent them spatially. Yet, since this deeper self is the same person as the superficial ego, the two appear to endure in a similar manner. As the repeated representation of one identical external phenomenon slices our surface mental life into distinct parts, the determined moments in turn create separate segments in the uninterrupted progression of our more personal conscious experiences. Thus, the mutual independence that physical objects acquire from their placement in uniform space reverberates into the deeper levels of consciousness: gradually, our sensations are differentiated from one another like the external causes that created them, and our feelings or thoughts become distinct like the sensations they occur with.
That our ordinary conception of duration depends on a gradual incursion of space into the domain of pure consciousness is proved by the fact that, in order to deprive the ego of the faculty of perceiving a homogeneous time, it is enough to take away from it this outer circle of psychic states which it uses as a balance-wheel. These conditions are realized when we dream; for sleep, by relaxing the play of the organic functions, alters the communicating surface between the ego and external objects. Here we no longer measure duration, but we feel it; from quantity it returns to the state of quality; we no longer estimate past time mathematically: the mathematical estimate gives place to a confused instinct,[Pg 127] capable, like all instincts, of committing gross errors, but also of acting at times with extraordinary skill. Even in the waking state, daily experience ought to teach us to distinguish between duration as quality, that which consciousness reaches immediately and which is probably what animals perceive, and time so to speak materialized, time that has become quantity by being set out in space. Whilst I am writing these lines, the hour strikes on a neighbouring clock, but my inattentive ear does not perceive it until several strokes have made themselves heard. Hence I have not counted them; and yet I only have to turn my attention backwards to count up the four strokes which have already sounded and add them to those which I hear. If, then, I question myself carefully on what has just taken place, I perceive that the first four sounds had struck my ear and even affected my consciousness, but that the sensations produced by each one of them, instead of being set side by side, had melted into one another in such a way as to give the whole a peculiar quality, to make a kind of musical phrase out of it. In order, then, to estimate retrospectively the number of strokes sounded, I tried to reconstruct this phrase in thought: my imagination made one stroke, then two, then three, and as long as it did not reach the exact number four, my feeling, when consulted, answered that the total effect was qualitatively different. It had thus ascertained in its own way the succession of four strokes, but quite[Pg 128] otherwise than by a process of addition, and without bringing in the image of a juxtaposition of distinct terms. In a word, the number of strokes was perceived as a quality and not as a quantity: it is thus that duration is presented to immediate consciousness, and it retains this form so long as it does not give place to a symbolical representation derived from extensity.
Our usual understanding of time depends on a gradual blending of space into pure awareness. This is shown by the fact that, to prevent the ego from perceiving a consistent time, we simply need to remove the outer circle of mental states that it uses as a reference point. This situation happens when we dream; sleep, by relaxing our bodily functions, changes the interaction between the ego and outside objects. In these moments, we no longer measure time; we feel it instead. It shifts from a quantitative experience to one of quality; we no longer assess past time mathematically: numerical evaluation is replaced by vague instincts, which, like all instincts, can make major mistakes but can also act with remarkable precision at times. Even when awake, everyday experiences should teach us to differentiate between time as a quality—what awareness captures directly, and what animals likely sense—and time that has been materialized—time that has turned into quantity by being laid out in space. While I write these words, the hour chimes on a nearby clock, but my distracted ear doesn’t register it until several chimes are heard. So, I haven’t counted them; yet, I only need to reflect back to total the four chimes I have already heard and add them to those currently sounding. If I then carefully consider what just happened, I realize that the first four sounds reached my ear and impacted my awareness, but the sensations from each one intertwined instead of remaining separate, creating a distinct quality and forming a kind of musical phrase. To retrospectively determine the number of chimes, I tried to mentally reconstruct this phrase: my imagination made one sound, then two, then three, and only when it reached the precise number four did my feeling, when prompted, confirm that the overall effect was qualitatively different. It had therefore identified, in its own way, the sequence of four chimes, but in a manner entirely different from simple addition and without invoking the image of distinct, separate elements. In essence, the number of chimes was perceived as a quality rather than a quantity: this is how time appears to immediate awareness, and it maintains this form until it is replaced by a symbolic representation derived from extension.
We should therefore distinguish two forms of multiplicity, two very different ways of regarding duration, two aspects of conscious life. Below homogeneous duration, which is the extensive symbol of true duration, a close psychological analysis distinguishes a duration whose heterogeneous moments permeate one another; below the numerical multiplicity of conscious states, a qualitative multiplicity; below the self with well-defined states, a self in which succeeding each other means melting into one another and forming an organic whole. But we are generally content with the first, i.e. with the shadow of the self projected into homogeneous space. Consciousness, goaded by an insatiable desire to separate, substitutes the symbol for the reality, or perceives the reality only through the symbol. As the self thus refracted, and thereby broken to pieces, is much better adapted to the requirements of social life in general and language in particular, consciousness prefers it, and gradually loses sight of the fundamental self.
We should therefore recognize two types of multiplicity, two distinct ways of viewing duration, two aspects of conscious experience. Below the uniform duration, which serves as the broad symbol of true duration, a close psychological analysis reveals a duration where its varied moments influence each other; beneath the numerical variety of conscious states, there’s a qualitative variety; under the self with clear states, there’s a self in which successive moments mean blending into each other and creating an organic whole. However, we are usually satisfied with the first, that is, with the shadow of the self cast into uniform space. Consciousness, driven by an endless urge to separate, replaces the reality with the symbol or perceives reality only through the symbol. As the self becomes refracted and thus fragmented, it fits the demands of social life in general and language in particular much better; consciousness favors this and gradually loses sight of the fundamental self.
In order to recover this fundamental self, as the unsophisticated consciousness would perceive it, a vigorous effort of analysis is necessary, which will isolate the fluid inner states from their image, first refracted, then solidified in homogeneous space. In other words, our perceptions, sensations, emotions and ideas occur under two aspects: the one clear and precise, but impersonal; the other confused, ever changing, and inexpressible, because language cannot get hold of it without arresting its mobility or fit it into its common-place forms without making it into public property. If we have been led to distinguish two forms of multiplicity, two forms of duration, we must expect each conscious state, taken by itself, to assume a different aspect according as we consider it within a discrete multiplicity or a confused multiplicity, in the time as quality, in which it is produced, or in the time as quantity, into which it is projected.
To recover our fundamental self, as a simple consciousness would see it, we need to put in a strong effort to analyze our experiences. This analysis will separate our fluid inner states from their image, first distorted, then fixed in uniform space. In other words, our perceptions, sensations, emotions, and thoughts occur in two ways: one is clear and precise, but impersonal; the other is muddled, constantly changing, and hard to express, because language can't capture it without stopping its flow or fitting it into typical forms that make it public property. If we've been led to identify two types of multiplicity and two types of duration, we should expect each conscious state, considered on its own, to take on a different aspect depending on whether we view it within a discrete multiplicity or a confused multiplicity, in qualitative time, where it emerges, or in quantitative time, where it is projected.
When e.g. I take my first walk in a town in which I am going to live, my environment produces on me two impressions at the same time, one of which is destined to last while the other will constantly change. Every day I perceive the same houses, and as I know that they are the same objects, I always call them by the same name and I also fancy that they always look the same to me. But if I recur, at the end of a sufficiently long period, to the impression[Pg 130] which I experienced during the first few years, I am surprised at the remarkable, inexplicable, and indeed inexpressible change which has taken place. It seems that these objects, continually perceived by me and constantly impressing themselves on my mind, have ended by borrowing from me something of my own conscious existence; like myself they have lived, and like myself they have grown old. This is not a mere illusion; for if to-day's impression were absolutely identical with that of yesterday, what difference would there be between perceiving and recognizing, between learning and remembering? Yet this difference escapes the attention of most of us; we shall hardly perceive it, unless we are warned of it and then carefully look into ourselves. The reason is that our outer and, so to speak, social life is more practically important to us than our inner and individual existence. We instinctively tend to solidify our impressions in order to express them in language. Hence we confuse the feeling itself, which is in a perpetual state of becoming, with its permanent external object, and especially with the word which expresses this object. In the same way as the fleeting duration of our ego is fixed by its projection in homogeneous space, our constantly changing impressions, wrapping themselves round the external object which is their cause, take on its definite outlines and its immobility.
When I take my first walk in a town where I'm going to live, my surroundings create two impressions at once: one that will last and another that will keep changing. Every day I see the same houses, and because I know they are the same, I always call them by the same name and think they look the same to me. But if I reflect, after a long enough time, on the impression I had during the first few years, I’m surprised by the significant, mysterious, and really indescribable change that has happened. It seems these objects, which I continually perceive and which constantly make an impression on my mind, have, in a way, absorbed something of my own conscious existence; just like me, they have lived and grown old. This isn’t just an illusion; if today’s impression were exactly the same as yesterday’s, what would be the difference between seeing and recognizing, between learning and remembering? Yet most of us overlook this difference; we barely notice it unless we are alerted to it and then introspect carefully. The reason is that our external, social life tends to be more practically important to us than our inner, individual existence. We naturally try to solidify our impressions so we can express them in words. As a result, we confuse the feeling itself, which is always evolving, with its permanent external object, especially with the word that represents this object. Just as the transient nature of our sense of self is captured by its projection in uniform space, our ever-changing impressions, wrapping around the external object that causes them, take on its clear outlines and unchanging nature.
Our simple sensations, taken in their natural[Pg 131] state, are still more fleeting. Such and such a flavour, such and such a scent, pleased me when I was a child though I dislike them to-day. Yet I still give the same name to the sensation experienced, and I speak as if only my taste had changed, whilst the scent and the flavour have remained the same. Thus I again solidify the sensation; and when its changeableness becomes so obvious that I cannot help recognizing it, I abstract this changeableness to give it a name of its own and solidify it in the shape of a taste. But in reality there are neither identical sensations nor multiple tastes: for sensations and tastes seem to me to be objects as soon as I isolate and name them, and in the human soul there are only processes. What I ought to say is that every sensation is altered by repetition, and that if it does not seem to me to change from day to day, it is because I perceive it through the object which is its cause, through the word which translates it. This influence of language on sensation is deeper than is usually thought. Not only does language make us believe in the unchangeableness of our sensations, but it will sometimes deceive us as to the nature of the sensation felt. Thus, when I partake of a dish that is supposed to be exquisite, the name which it bears, suggestive of the approval given to it, comes between my sensation and my consciousness; I may believe that the flavour pleases me when a slight effort of attention would prove the contrary,[Pg 132] In short, the word with well-defined outlines, the rough and ready word, which stores up the stable, common, and consequently impersonal element in the impressions of mankind, overwhelms or at least covers over the delicate and fugitive impressions of our individual consciousness. To maintain the struggle on equal terms, the latter ought to express themselves in precise words; but these words, as soon as they were formed, would turn against the sensation which gave birth to them, and, invented to show that the sensation is unstable, they would impose on it their own stability.
Our basic sensations, in their natural state, are even more fleeting. Certain flavors and scents delighted me as a child, but I dislike them now. Yet, I still use the same name for the sensation I felt, and I talk as if only my taste has changed while the scent and flavor remain the same. This way, I again make the sensation feel solid. When its changing nature becomes so clear that I can't ignore it, I separate this change and give it its own name, solidifying it into a *taste.* But the truth is, there are no identical sensations or multiple tastes: sensations and tastes seem like *objects* to me as soon as I define and name them, while there are only *processes* in the human soul. What I really should say is that every sensation is altered by repetition, and if it doesn't seem to change from day to day, it's because I perceive it through the object that causes it, through the word that describes it. This influence of language on sensation runs deeper than most people realize. Language not only leads us to believe that our sensations are unchanging, but it can also mislead us about the nature of the sensation we're experiencing. For instance, when I eat a dish that's supposed to be amazing, the name it has, which suggests approval, comes between my sensation and my awareness; I might think the flavor pleases me when a slight effort of focus would show otherwise. In short, the well-defined word, the straightforward word that captures the stable, common, and therefore impersonal element in human impressions, overshadows or at least obscures the delicate and fleeting impressions of our individual consciousness. To keep the struggle balanced, these impressions should be expressed in precise words; but those words, as soon as they are formed, would turn against the sensation that inspired them, and, created to indicate the sensation's instability, would impose their own stability on it.
This overwhelming of the immediate consciousness is nowhere so striking as in the case of our feelings. A violent love or a deep melancholy takes possession of our SOUL: here we feel a thousand different elements which dissolve into and permeate one another without any precise outlines, without the least tendency to externalize themselves in relation to one another; hence their originality. We distort them as soon as we distinguish a numerical multiplicity in their confused mass: what will it be, then, when we set them out, isolated from one another, in this homogeneous medium which may be called either time or space, whichever you prefer? A moment ago each of them was borrowing an indefinable colour from its surroundings: now we have it colourless, and ready to accept a name. The feeling itself is a[Pg 133] being which lives and develops and is therefore constantly changing; otherwise how could it gradually lead us to form a resolution? Our resolution would be immediately taken. But it lives because the duration in which it develops is a duration whose moments permeate one another. By separating these moments from each other, by spreading out time in space, we have caused this feeling to lose its life and its colour. Hence, we are now standing before our own shadow: we believe that we have analysed our feeling, while we have really replaced it by a juxtaposition of lifeless states which can be translated into words, and each of which constitutes the common element, the impersonal residue, of the impressions felt in a given case by the whole of society. And this is why we reason about these states and apply our simple logic to them: having set them up as genera by the mere fact of having isolated them from one another, we have prepared them for use in some future deduction. Now, if some bold novelist, tearing aside the cleverly woven curtain of our conventional ego, shows us under this appearance of logic a fundamental absurdity, under this juxtaposition of simple states an infinite permeation of a thousand different impressions which have already ceased to exist the instant they are named, we commend him for having known us better than we knew ourselves. This is not the case, however, and the very fact that he spreads out our feeling in a homogeneous[Pg 134] time, and expresses its elements by words, shows that he in his turn is only offering us its shadow: but he has arranged this shadow in such a way as to make us suspect the extraordinary and illogical nature of the object which projects it; he has made us reflect by giving outward expression to something of that contradiction, that interpenetration, which is the very essence of the elements expressed. Encouraged by him, we have put aside for an instant the veil which we interposed between our consciousness and ourselves. He has brought us back into our own presence.
The way our immediate consciousness gets overwhelmed is nowhere more obvious than with our feelings. A strong love or deep sadness takes over our SOUL: here we experience a thousand different elements that blend and overlap without clear boundaries, lacking any desire to define themselves in relation to one another; this is what makes them unique. We misinterpret them as soon as we start to identify a numerical variety within their chaotic mix: what will it look like when we lay them out, separated from each other, in this consistent environment we call either time or space, whichever you prefer? Just a moment ago, each feeling borrowed an undefined hue from its surroundings: now, we've stripped it of color, making it ready to be labeled. The feeling itself is a[Pg 133] living entity that grows and is therefore always changing; otherwise, how could it gradually guide us toward making a decision? Our decision would be made instantly. But it exists because the time it takes to develop is a duration where moments blend together. By isolating these moments, by spreading time across space, we’ve caused this feeling to lose its life and color. Thus, we now stand before our own shadow: we think we’ve analyzed our feeling, while we’ve actually replaced it with a collection of lifeless states that can be expressed in words, each representing the shared essence, the impersonal residue, of the impressions experienced by society as a whole. That’s why we reason about these states and apply our basic logic to them: by turning them into categories just by isolating them, we’ve prepped them for future arguments. Now, if a bold novelist, pulling aside the cleverly arranged curtain of our conventional self, reveals to us the fundamental absurdity beneath our logic, showcasing an infinite blend of countless impressions that have already faded the moment they are named, we praise him for understanding us better than we understand ourselves. However, that’s not the case, and the very act of him spreading our feeling across a uniform[Pg 134] time and expressing its components in words shows that he, too, is only presenting its shadow: yet he's arranged this shadow in such a way that it makes us suspect the extraordinary and illogical nature of the object casting it; he’s prompted us to reflect by giving outward form to something of that contradiction, that blending, which is the true nature of the elements expressed. Encouraged by him, we momentarily set aside the barrier we placed between our consciousness and ourselves. He has brought us back to our own presence.
We should experience the same sort of surprise if we strove to seize our ideas themselves in their natural state, as our consciousness would perceive them if it were no longer beset by space. This breaking up of the constituent elements of an idea, which issues in abstraction, is too convenient for us to do without it in ordinary life and even in philosophical discussion. But when we fancy that the parts thus artificially separated are the genuine threads with which the concrete idea was woven, when, substituting for the interpenetration of the real terms the juxtaposition of their symbols, we claim to make duration out of space, we unavoidably fall into the mistakes of associationism. We shall not insist on the latter point, which will be the subject of a thorough examination in the next chapter. Let it be enough to say that the impulsive zeal with[Pg 135] which we take sides on certain questions shows how our intellect has its instincts—and what can an instinct of this kind be if not an impetus common to all our ideas, i.e. their very interpenetration? The beliefs to which we most strongly adhere are those of which we should find it most difficult to give an account, and the reasons by which we justify them are seldom those which have led us to adopt them. In a certain sense we have adopted them without any reason, for what makes them valuable in our eyes is that they match the colour of all our other ideas, and that from the very first we have seen in them something of ourselves. Hence they do not take in our minds that common looking form which they will assume as soon as we try to give expression to them in words; and, although they bear the same name in other minds, they are by no means the same thing. The fact is that each of them has the same kind of life as a cell in an organism: everything which affects the general state of the self affects it also. But while the cell occupies a definite point in the organism, an idea which is truly ours fills the whole of our self. Not all our ideas, however, are thus incorporated in the fluid mass of our conscious states. Many float on the surface, like dead leaves on the water of a pond: the mind, when it thinks them over and over again, finds them ever the same, as if they were external to it. Among these are the ideas which we receive ready made, and which remain in us without ever being[Pg 136] properly assimilated, or again the ideas which we have omitted to cherish and which have withered in neglect. If, in proportion as we get away from the deeper strata of the self, our conscious states tend more and more to assume the form of a numerical multiplicity, and to spread out in a homogeneous space, it is just because these conscious states tend to become more and more lifeless, more and more impersonal. Hence we need not be surprised if only those ideas which least belong to us can be adequately expressed in words: only to these, as we shall see, does the associationist theory apply. External to one another, they keep up relations among themselves in which the inmost nature of each of them counts for nothing, relations which can therefore be classified. It may thus be said that they are associated by contiguity or for some logical reason. But if, digging below the surface of contact between the self and external objects, we penetrate into the depths of the organized and living intelligence, we shall witness the joining together or rather the blending of many ideas which, when once dissociated, seem to exclude one another as logically contradictory terms. The strangest dreams, in which two images overlie one another and show us at the same time two different persons, who yet make only one, will hardly give us an idea of the interweaving of concepts which goes on when we are awake. The imagination of the dreamer, cut off from the external world, imitates with[Pg 137] mere images, and parodies in its own way, the process which constantly goes on with regard to ideas in the deeper regions of the intellectual life.
We should be just as surprised if we tried to grasp our ideas in their natural state as our mind would perceive them if it weren't limited by space. This breaking down of an idea into its basic components, which leads to abstraction, is too convenient for us to do without in everyday life and even in philosophical discussions. However, when we think that these artificially separated parts are the real threads that make up the concrete idea, when we replace the interconnectedness of real terms with the simple placement of their symbols, and we attempt to create duration from space, we inevitably fall into the traps of associationism. We won't dwell on this point, as it will be thoroughly examined in the next chapter. Suffice it to say that the enthusiastic way we take sides on certain issues shows how our intellect has its instincts—and what can an instinct like this be if not a shared drive among all our ideas, meaning their very interconnectedness? The beliefs we hold most strongly are often the ones we find hardest to explain, and the reasons we give for justifying them are rarely the ones that led us to embrace them. In a way, we adopt them without any reason, because what makes them valuable to us is that they resonate with all our other ideas, and from the very beginning, we've seen something of ourselves in them. Therefore, they don't take on that typical form in our minds that they will once we try to express them in words; and while they may share the same name in other minds, they're not the same thing at all. The truth is that each idea has a life similar to a cell in an organism: everything that impacts the overall state of the self also affects it. But while the cell occupies a specific spot in the organism, an idea that truly belongs to us fills our entire self. However, not all our ideas are integrated into the fluid mass of our conscious states. Many float on the surface like dead leaves on the water of a pond: when the mind thinks about them repeatedly, they remain unchanged, as if they are external to it. These include ideas we receive fully formed, which linger in us without ever being properly assimilated, or ideas we have neglected and which have faded away. As we move away from the deeper levels of the self, our conscious states tend to become more like a numerical abundance, spreading out in a uniform space, because these states become more lifeless and impersonal. Thus, it shouldn't surprise us that only those ideas that least belong to us can be adequately expressed in words: only these, as we will see, fit within the framework of associationist theory. Existing separately from one another, they maintain relationships among themselves where the inner nature of each one matters little, making them classifiable. So, they can be said to be associated by closeness or for some logical reason. But if we dig deeper into the relationship between the self and external objects, we will observe the merging or rather the blending of many ideas that, when separated, seem to contradict each other logically. The most bizarre dreams, where two images overlap and show us two different people that somehow form one, barely give us an idea of the intertwining of concepts that occurs when we are awake. The dreamer's imagination, cut off from the external world, mimics mere images and comically mirrors the process that constantly happens regarding ideas in the deeper realms of intellectual life.
Thus may be verified, thus, too, will be illustrated by a further study of deep-seated psychic phenomena the principle from which we started: conscious life displays two aspects according as we perceive it directly or by refraction through space. Considered in themselves, the deep-seated conscious states have no relation to quantity, they are pure quality; they intermingle in such a way that we cannot tell whether they are one or several, nor even examine them from this point of view without at once altering their nature. The duration which they thus create is a duration whose moments do not constitute a numerical multiplicity: to characterize these moments by saying that they encroach on one another would still be to distinguish them. If each of us lived a purely individual life, if there were neither society nor language, would our consciousness grasp the series of inner states in this unbroken form? Undoubtedly it would not quite succeed, because we should still retain the idea of a homogeneous space in which objects are sharply distinguished from one another, and because it is too convenient to set out in such a medium the somewhat cloudy states which first attract the attention of consciousness, in order to[Pg 138] resolve them into simpler terms. But mark that the intuition of a homogeneous space is already a step towards social life. Probably animals do not picture to themselves, beside their sensations, as we do, an external world quite distinct from themselves, which is the common property of all conscious beings. Our tendency to form a clear picture of this externality of things and the homogeneity of their medium is the same as the impulse which leads us to live in common and to speak. But, in proportion as the conditions of social life are more completely realized, the current which carries our conscious states from within outwards is strengthened; little by little these states are made into objects or things; they break off not only from one another, but from ourselves. Henceforth we no longer perceive them except in the homogeneous medium in which we have set their image, and through the word which lends them its common-place colour. Thus a second self is formed which obscures the first, a self whose existence is made up of distinct moments, whose states are separated from one another and easily expressed in words. I do not mean, here, to split up the personality, nor to bring back in another form the numerical multiplicity which I shut out at the beginning. It is the same self which perceives distinct states at first, and which, by afterwards concentrating its attention, will see these states melt into one another like the crystals of a snow-flake when touched[Pg 139] for some time with the finger. And, in truth, for the sake of language, the self has everything to gain by not bringing back confusion where order reigns, and in not upsetting this ingenious arrangement of almost impersonal states by which it has ceased to form "a kingdom within a kingdom." An inner life with well distinguished moments and with clearly characterized states will answer better the requirements of social life. Indeed, a superficial psychology may be content with describing it without thereby falling into error, on condition, however, that it restricts itself to the study of what has taken place and leaves out what is going on. But if, passing from statics to dynamics, this psychology claims to reason about things in the making as it reasoned about things made, if it offers us the concrete and living self as an association of terms which are distinct from one another and are set side by side in a homogeneous medium, it will see difficulty after difficulty rising in its path. And these difficulties will multiply the greater the efforts it makes to overcome them, for all its efforts will only bring into clearer light the absurdity of the fundamental hypothesis by which it spreads out time in space and puts succession at the very centre of simultaneity. We shall see that the contradictions implied in the problems of causality, freedom, personality, spring from no other source, and that, if we wish to get rid of them, we have only to go back to the real and concrete self and give up its symbolical substitute.
Thus may be verified, and this will also be illustrated by a further study of deep-seated psychic phenomena, the principle from which we started: conscious life displays two aspects depending on whether we perceive it directly or indirectly through space. When considered on their own, these deep-seated conscious states have no relation to quantity; they are purely qualitative. They intermingle in such a way that we can’t tell if they are one or several, and even examining them from this perspective changes their nature immediately. The duration they create is one where the moments don’t make up a numerical multiplicity: characterizing these moments by saying they overlap would still be a form of distinction. If each of us lived purely individual lives, without society or language, would our consciousness grasp the series of inner states in this unbroken form? Undoubtedly not, because we would still hold a concept of a homogeneous space in which objects are sharply distinguished from one another, and it’s far too convenient to lay out in such a medium the somewhat unclear states that first catch our attention, in order to break them down into simpler terms. But notice that the intuition of a homogeneous space is already a step toward social life. Animals likely don't imagine an external world distinctly separate from themselves alongside their sensations, as we do, which is the common property of all conscious beings. Our tendency to form a clear picture of this externality and the homogeneity of its medium is the same impulse that drives us to live together and to communicate. However, as the conditions of social life are more fully realized, the current that carries our conscious states outward is strengthened; gradually, these states become objects or things; they separate not only from one another but also from ourselves. From now on, we only perceive them in the homogeneous medium that we’ve placed their image in, and through the words that provide them with a common color. Thus, a second self forms, obscuring the first—this self consists of distinct moments, whose states are separated from each other and easily expressed in words. I don’t intend to split up the personality here or to reintroduce the numerical multiplicity I initially set aside. It is the same self that initially perceives distinct states, which, by concentrating its attention, will see these states blend into one another like the crystals of a snowflake when touched for a while with a finger. And, in truth, for the sake of language, the self has everything to gain by not bringing back confusion where there is order, and by not disrupting this clever arrangement of almost impersonal states that allows it to stop forming "a kingdom within a kingdom." An inner life with clearly distinguished moments and clearly characterized states will better meet the needs of social life. In fact, a superficial psychology may be satisfied with describing it without falling into error, as long as it limits itself to studying what has happened and omits what is currently happening. But if this psychology attempts to reason about things in the making as it did about things that have been made, and presents the concrete and living self as a collection of terms that are distinct from one another and positioned alongside each other in a homogeneous medium, it will encounter challenge after challenge. These challenges will increase in number the more effort it makes to address them because all those efforts will only highlight the absurdity of the fundamental hypothesis by which it spreads out time in space and places succession at the very heart of simultaneity. We shall see that the contradictions involved in the problems of causality, freedom, and personality stem from no other source, and that if we want to eliminate them, we need to return to the real and concrete self and abandon its symbolic substitute.
[1] I had already completed the present work when I read in the Critique philosophique(for 1883 and 1884) F. Pillon's very remarkable refutation of an interesting article by G. Noël on the interconnexion of the notions of number and space. But I have not found it necessary to make any alterations in the following pages, seeing that Pillon does not distinguish between time as quality and time as quantity, between the multiplicity of juxtaposition and that of interpenetration. Without this vital distinction, which it is the chief aim of the present chapter to establish, it would be possible to maintain, with Pillon, that number may be built up from the relation of co-existence. But what is here meant by co-existence? If the co-existing terms form an organic whole, they will never lead us to the notion of number; if they remain distinct, they are in juxtaposition and we are dealing with space. It is no use to quote the example of simultaneous impressions received by several senses. We either leave these sensations their specific differences, which amounts to saying that we do not count them; or else we eliminate their differences, and then how are we to distinguish them if not by their position or that of their symbols? We shall see that the verb "to distinguish" has two meanings, the one qualitative, the other quantitative: these two meanings have been confused, in my opinion, by the philosophers who have dealt with the relations between number and space.
[1] I had already finished this work when I read F. Pillon's impressive critique of an interesting article by G. Noël on the connection between the concepts of number and space in the Critique philosophique (for 1883 and 1884). However, I didn’t feel it was necessary to make any changes to the following pages, since Pillon does not differentiate between time as quality and time as quantity, or between the multiplicity of juxtaposition and that of interpenetration. Without this crucial distinction, which is the main focus of this chapter, one could argue with Pillon that number can be derived from the relationship of co-existence. But what do we mean by co-existence here? If the co-existing elements create an organic whole, they will never lead us to the idea of number; if they remain separate, they are merely in juxtaposition, and we are talking about space. Citing the example of simultaneous impressions from several senses is unhelpful. We can either maintain the specific differences of these sensations, which means we aren't counting them; or we can remove their differences, and then how do we identify them if not by their position or that of their symbols? We will see that the verb "to distinguish" has two meanings: one qualitative, the other quantitative. These two meanings have, in my view, been conflated by philosophers discussing the relationships between number and space.
[2] Évellin, Infini et quantité. Paris, 1881.
CHAPTER III
THE ORGANIZATION OF CONSCIOUS STATES
FREE WILL
It is easy to see why the question of free will brings into conflict these two rival systems of nature, mechanism and dynamism. Dynamism starts from the idea of voluntary activity, given by consciousness, and comes to represent inertia by gradually emptying this idea: it has thus no difficulty in conceiving free force on the one hand and matter governed by laws on the other. Mechanism follows the opposite course. It assumes that the materials which it synthesizes are governed by necessary laws, and although it reaches richer and richer combinations, which are more and more difficult to foresee, and to all appearance more and more contingent, yet it never gets out of the narrow circle of necessity within which it at first shut itself up.
It's easy to see why the question of free will creates a conflict between these two opposing views of nature: mechanism and dynamism. Dynamism starts with the idea of voluntary action informed by consciousness and eventually represents inertia by gradually diminishing this idea. This allows it to easily conceive free force on one side and matter governed by laws on the other. Mechanism takes the opposite approach. It assumes that the materials it combines are governed by necessary laws. Even though it creates increasingly complex combinations that are harder to predict and seem more contingent, it never escapes the narrow confines of necessity that it initially set for itself.
A thorough examination of these two conceptions of nature will show that they involve two very different hypotheses as to the relations between laws and the facts which they govern. As he looks higher and higher, the believer in dynamism thinks that he perceives facts which more and more elude the grasp of laws: he thus[Pg 141] sets up the fact as the absolute reality, and the law as the more or less symbolical expression of this reality. Mechanism, on the contrary, discovers within the particular fact a certain number of laws of which the fact is thus made to be the meeting point, and nothing else: on this hypothesis it is the law which becomes the genuine reality. Now, if it is asked why the one party assigns a higher reality to the fact and the other to the law, it will be found that mechanism and dynamism take the word simplicity in two very different senses. For the first, any principle is simple of which the effects can be foreseen and even calculated: thus, by the very definition, the notion of inertia becomes simpler than that of freedom, the homogeneous simpler than the heterogeneous, the abstract simpler than the concrete. But dynamism is not anxious so much to arrange the notions in the most convenient order as to find out their real relationship: often, in fact, the so-called simple notion—that which the believer in mechanism regards as primitive—has been obtained by the blending together of several richer notions which seem to be derived from it, and which have more or less neutralized one another in this very process of blending, just as darkness may be produced by the interference of two lights. Regarded from this new point of view, the idea of spontaneity is indisputably simpler than that of inertia, since the second can be understood and defined only by means of the first, while the first[Pg 142] is self-sufficient. For each of us has the immediate knowledge (be it thought true or fallacious) of his free spontaneity, without the notion of inertia having anything to do with this knowledge. But, if we wish to define the inertia of matter, we must say that it cannot move or stop of its own accord, that every body perseveres in the state of rest or motion so long as it is not acted upon by any force: and in both cases we are unavoidably carried back to the idea of activity. It is therefore natural that, a priori, we should reach two opposite conceptions of human activity, according to the way in which we understand the relation between the concrete and the abstract, the simple and the complex, facts and laws.
A thorough examination of these two views of nature will show that they involve two very different theories about the relationship between laws and the facts they govern. The believer in dynamism, as he looks deeper, thinks he sees facts that increasingly escape the grasp of laws: he then establishes the fact as the ultimate reality and the law as a more or less symbolic expression of this reality. Mechanism, on the other hand, discovers a number of laws within the particular fact, making the fact merely the meeting point, and nothing more: in this view, it is the law that becomes the true reality. Now, if we ask why one side assigns a higher reality to the fact while the other assigns it to the law, we'll find that mechanism and dynamism interpret the term simplicity in two very different ways. For the first, a principle is simple if its effects can be foreseen and even calculated: thus, by definition, the idea of inertia is simpler than that of freedom, the homogeneous is simpler than the heterogeneous, and the abstract is simpler than the concrete. But dynamism is less focused on neatly organizing concepts than it is on uncovering their real relationships: often, the so-called simple notion—what a mechanist considers primitive—has been derived from the blending of several richer notions that seem to stem from it, which have somewhat neutralized each other in this blending process, just as darkness can result from the interference of two lights. Viewed from this new perspective, the idea of spontaneity is undeniably simpler than that of inertia, since the latter can only be understood and defined through the former, while the former is self-sufficient. Each of us has an immediate sense (whether we consider it true or misguided) of our free spontaneity, independent of any connection to the notion of inertia. However, to define the inertia of matter, we must explain that it cannot move or stop on its own, that every body continues in its state of rest or motion unless acted upon by an external force: and in both cases, we are inevitably drawn back to the idea of activity. Therefore, it makes sense that, a priori, we arrive at two opposing views of human activity based on how we understand the relationship between the concrete and the abstract, the simple and the complex, facts and laws.
A posteriori, however, definite facts are appealed to against freedom, some physical, others psychological. Sometimes it is asserted that our actions are necessitated by our feelings, our ideas, and the whole preceding series of our conscious states; sometimes freedom is denounced as being incompatible with the fundamental properties of matter, and in particular with the principle of the conservation of energy. Hence two kinds of determinism, two apparently different empirical proofs of universal necessity. We shall show that the second of these two forms is reducible to the first, and that all determinism, even physical determinism, involves a psychological hypothesis: we shall then prove[Pg 143] that psychological determinism itself, and the refutations which are given of it, rest on an inaccurate conception of the multiplicity of conscious states, or rather of duration. Thus, in the light of the principles worked out in the foregoing chapter, we shall see a self emerge whose activity cannot be compared to that of any other force.
A posteriori, however, specific facts are cited against freedom, some based on physical evidence, others psychological. Occasionally, it’s claimed that our actions are determined by our feelings, thoughts, and the entire sequence of our conscious experiences; at other times, freedom is criticized as being incompatible with the fundamental properties of matter, particularly with the principle of energy conservation. This leads to two forms of determinism, presenting two seemingly different empirical proofs of universal necessity. We will demonstrate that the second form can be reduced to the first, and that all determinism, including physical determinism, involves a psychological hypothesis: we will then prove[Pg 143] that psychological determinism itself, along with the arguments against it, is based on a flawed understanding of the complexity of conscious states, or more accurately, of duration. Therefore, in light of the principles outlined in the previous chapter, we will see a self emerge whose activity is unlike any other force.
Physical determinism, in its latest form, is closely bound up with mechanical or rather kinetic theories of matter. The universe is pictured as a heap of matter which the imagination resolves into molecules and atoms. These particles are supposed to carry out unceasingly movements of every kind, sometimes of vibration, sometimes of translation; and physical phenomena, chemical action, the qualities of matter which our senses perceive, heat, sound, electricity, perhaps even attraction, are thought to be reducible objectively to these elementary movements. The matter which goes to make up organized bodies being subject to the same laws, we find in the nervous system, for example, only molecules and atoms which are in motion and attract and repel one another. Now if all bodies, organized or unorganized, thus act and react on one another in their ultimate parts, it is obvious that the molecular state of the brain at a given moment will be modified by the shocks which the nervous system receives from the[Pg 144] surrounding matter, so that the sensations, feelings and ideas which succeed one another in us can be defined as mechanical resultants, obtained by the compounding of shocks received from without with the previous movements of the atoms of the nervous substance. But the opposite phenomenon may occur; and the molecular movements which go on in the nervous system, if compounded with one another or with others, will often give as resultant a reaction of our organism on its environment: hence the reflex movements, hence also the so-called free and voluntary actions. As, moreover, the principle of the conservation of energy has been assumed to admit of no exception, there is not an atom, either in the nervous system or in the whole of the universe, whose position is not determined by the sum of the mechanical actions which the other atoms exert upon it. And the mathematician who knew the position of the molecules or atoms of a human organism at a given moment, as well as the position and motion of all the atoms in the universe capable of influencing it, could calculate with unfailing certainty the past, present and future actions of the person to whom this organism belongs, just as one predicts an astronomical phenomenon.[1]
Physical determinism, in its most recent form, is closely linked to mechanical or kinetic theories of matter. The universe is envisioned as a collection of matter that we can break down into molecules and atoms. These particles are thought to be in constant motion, sometimes vibrating, sometimes moving from one place to another; and physical phenomena, chemical reactions, and the qualities of matter that we perceive through our senses—heat, sound, electricity, and maybe even attraction—are believed to be objectively reducible to these basic movements. The matter that composes living bodies is subject to the same laws, so in the nervous system, for instance, we see only moving molecules and atoms that attract and repel each other. If all bodies, whether living or non-living, interact with each other at their fundamental levels, it’s clear that the molecular state of the brain at any given moment will be influenced by the shocks the nervous system receives from surrounding matter. This means that the sensations, emotions, and thoughts that arise in us can be defined as mechanical outcomes, resulting from a mix of external shocks and the previous movements of the atoms in the nervous system. However, the opposite can also happen; the molecular movements within the nervous system, when combined with each other or with external influences, often result in our body reacting to its environment. This explains reflex actions, as well as what we call free and voluntary actions. Furthermore, since the principle of conservation of energy is considered to have no exceptions, there isn't an atom in the nervous system or in the entire universe whose position isn't determined by the total mechanical actions exerted by other atoms on it. A mathematician who knows the positions of the molecules or atoms in a human body at any given moment, alongside the positions and motions of all other atoms in the universe that could affect it, could accurately calculate the past, present, and future actions of the person to whom that body belongs, just like predicting an astronomical event.[1]
We shall not raise any difficulty about[Pg 145] recognizing that this conception of physiological phenomena in general, and nervous phenomena in particular, is a very natural deduction from the law of the conservation of energy. Certainly, the atomic theory of matter is still at the hypothetical stage, and the purely kinetic explanations of physical facts lose more than they gain by being too closely bound up with it. We must observe, however, that, even if we leave aside the atomic theory as well as any other hypothesis as to the nature of the ultimate elements of matter, the necessitating of physiological facts by their antecedents follows from the theorem of the conservation of energy, as soon as we extend this theorem to all processes going on in all living bodies. For to admit the universality of this theorem is to assume, at bottom, that the material points of which the universe is composed are subject solely to forces of attraction and repulsion, arising from these points themselves and possessing intensities which depend only on their distances: hence the relative position of these material points at a given moment—whatever be their nature—would be strictly determined by relation to what it was at the preceding moment. Let us then assume for a moment that this last hypothesis is true: we propose to show, in the first place, that it does not involve the absolute determination of our conscious states by one another, and then that the very universality of the principle of the conservation[Pg 146] of energy cannot be admitted except in virtue of some psychological hypothesis.
We won’t have any issues with[Pg 145] acknowledging that this idea about physiological phenomena in general, and nervous phenomena specifically, is a logical conclusion from the law of conservation of energy. The atomic theory of matter is still largely theoretical, and purely kinetic explanations of physical facts lose more than they gain from being too closely tied to it. However, we need to note that even if we set aside the atomic theory and any other hypotheses about the nature of the ultimate elements of matter, the relationship between physiological facts and their preceding causes follows from the law of conservation of energy, as long as we apply this law to all processes in living bodies. Accepting the universality of this law means we are fundamentally assuming that the basic particles of the universe are only influenced by forces of attraction and repulsion that come from the particles themselves and have strengths that depend solely on their distances from each other. Therefore, the current positions of these particles at any given time—regardless of their nature—would be strictly determined by their positions at the previous moment. Now, let's assume for a moment that this last hypothesis is correct: we intend to demonstrate, first, that it doesn’t mean that our conscious states are absolutely determined by one another, and then that the very universality of the conservation of energy principle cannot be accepted without some psychological hypothesis.
Even if we assumed that the position, the direction and the velocity of each atom of cerebral matter are determined at every moment of time, it would not at all follow that our psychic life is subject to the same necessity. For we should first have to prove that a strictly determined psychic state corresponds to a definite cerebral state, and the proof of this is still to be given. As a rule we do not think of demanding it, because we know that a definite vibration of the tympanum, a definite stimulation of the auditory nerve, gives a definite note on the scale, and because the parallelism of the physical and psychical series has been proved in a fairly large number of cases. But then, nobody has ever contended that we were free, under given conditions, to hear any note or perceive any colour we liked. Sensations of this kind, like many other psychic states, are obviously bound up with certain determining conditions, and it is just for this reason that it has been possible to imagine or discover beneath them a system of movements which obey our abstract mechanics. In short, wherever we succeed in giving a mechanical explanation, we observe a fairly strict parallelism between the physiological and the psychological series, and we need not be surprised at it, since explanations of this kind will assuredly not be met with except where the two[Pg 147] series exhibit parallel terms. But to extend this parallelism to the series themselves in their totality is to settle a priori the problem of freedom. Certainly this may be done, and some of the greatest thinkers have set the example; but then, as we said at first, it was not for reasons of a physical order that they asserted the strict correspondence between states of consciousness and modes of extension. Leibniz ascribed it to a preestablished harmony, and would never have admitted that a motion could give rise to a perception as a cause produces an effect. Spinoza said that the modes of thought and the modes of extension correspond with but never influence one another: they only express in two different languages the same eternal truth. But the theories of physical determinism which are rife at the present day are far from displaying the same clearness, the same geometrical rigour. They point to molecular movements taking place in the brain: consciousness is supposed to arise out of these at times in some mysterious way, or rather to follow their track like the phosphorescent line which results from the rubbing of a match. Or yet again we are to think of an invisible musician playing behind the scenes while the actor strikes a keyboard the notes of which yield no sound: consciousness must be supposed to come from an unknown region and to be superimposed on the molecular vibrations, just as the melody is on the rhythmical movements of the actor. But, whatever[Pg 148] image we fall back upon, we do not prove and we never shall prove by any reasoning that the psychic fact is fatally determined by the molecular movement. For in a movement we may find the reason of another movement, but not the reason of a conscious state: only observation can prove that the latter accompanies the former. Now the unvarying conjunction of the two terms has not been verified by experience except in a very limited number of cases and with regard to facts which all confess to be almost independent of the will. But it is easy to understand why physical determinism extends this conjunction to all possible cases.
Even if we assume that the position, direction, and velocity of every atom in the brain are determined at every moment, that doesn’t mean our mental life is governed by the same rules. We first need to show that a specific mental state corresponds to a specific brain state, and we still need to provide that proof. Generally, we don’t think to ask for it because we know that a specific vibration in the eardrum or a specific stimulation of the auditory nerve produces a certain note on the scale. We have observed enough parallels between the physical and mental realms in many cases. However, no one has ever claimed that we can freely choose to hear any note or see any color we want. These types of sensations, like many other mental states, are clearly tied to specific determining conditions, which is why it has been possible to imagine or discover a system of movements that follow our abstract mechanics. In summary, whenever we’re able to provide a mechanical explanation, we see a pretty strict correlation between physiological and psychological processes, and we shouldn’t be surprised, since we will only find such explanations where both processes show parallel terms. But to apply this parallelism to both series in their entirety is to decide in advance the issue of freedom. This can be done, and some of the greatest thinkers have set this precedent; however, as we mentioned at the start, it wasn’t due to physical reasons that they claimed a strict correspondence between states of consciousness and forms of extension. Leibniz attributed it to a pre-established harmony and would never have accepted that motion could generate perception like a cause produces an effect. Spinoza argued that modes of thought and modes of extension correspond with each other but do not influence one another; they merely express the same eternal truth in two different languages. But today’s theories of physical determinism lack the same clarity and geometric rigor. They point to molecular movements in the brain, suggesting consciousness mysteriously arises from these or follows their path like a phosphorescent trail from a scratched match. Alternatively, we might imagine an invisible musician playing behind the scenes as the actor taps on a silent keyboard: consciousness is thought to emerge from an unknown source and overlay molecular vibrations, just as melody overlays the rhythmic movements of the actor. However, no matter which image we use, we cannot and will never prove, through reasoning, that the mental fact is inevitably determined by molecular movement. We can find the reason for one movement in another, but not for a conscious state; only observation can establish that the latter accompanies the former. The consistent conjunction of these two terms has not been confirmed by experience except in a very small number of cases and regarding facts that everyone agrees are almost independent of the will. But it is easy to see why physical determinism extends this conjunction to all potential cases.
Consciousness indeed informs us that the majority of our actions can be explained by motives. But it does not appear that determination here means necessity, since common sense believes in free will. The determinist, however, led astray by a conception of duration and causality which we shall criticise a little later, holds that the determination of conscious states by one another is absolute. This is the origin of associationist determinism, an hypothesis in support of which the testimony of consciousness is appealed to, but which cannot, in the beginning, lay claim to scientific rigour. It seems natural that this, so to speak, approximate determinism, this determinism of quality, should seek support from the same mechanism that underlies the phenomena of nature: the latter[Pg 149] would thus convey to the former its own geometrical character, and the transaction would be to the advantage both of psychological determinism, which would emerge from it in a stricter form, and of physical mechanism, which would then spread over everything. A fortunate circumstance favours this alliance. The simplest psychic states do in fact occur as accessories to well-defined physical phenomena, and the greater number of sensations seem to be bound up with definite molecular movements. This mere beginning of an experimental proof is quite enough for the man who, for psychological reasons, is already convinced that our conscious states are the necessary outcome of the circumstances under which they happen. Henceforth he no longer hesitates to hold that the drama enacted in the theatre of consciousness is a literal and even slavish translation of some scenes performed by the molecules and atoms of organized matter. The physical determinism which is reached in this way is nothing but psychological determinism, seeking to verify itself and fix its own outlines by an appeal to the sciences of nature.
Consciousness shows us that most of our actions can be explained by motives. However, it seems that determination doesn’t equal necessity here, as common sense supports the idea of free will. The determinist, misled by a view of duration and causality that we’ll critique later, asserts that the determination of conscious states by each other is absolute. This viewpoint leads to associationist determinism, a theory that relies on the testimony of consciousness but doesn't have the scientific rigor to back it up at the outset. It appears natural that this approximate determinism, or quality determinism, would seek support from the same mechanisms that operate in nature: the latter[Pg 149] might thus impart its geometrical properties to the former, benefiting both psychological determinism, which would become more refined, and physical mechanism, which would then apply universally. A fortunate circumstance supports this connection. The simplest mental states actually occur in conjunction with well-defined physical phenomena, and most sensations seem linked to specific molecular movements. This initial experimental proof is enough for someone who, for psychological reasons, already believes that our conscious states are the necessary results of the circumstances in which they occur. From then on, they no longer hesitate to claim that the drama played out in consciousness is a direct and even slavish reflection of scenes acted out by the molecules and atoms of organized matter. The physical determinism reached in this manner is merely psychological determinism trying to validate itself and establish its own boundaries by referring to the natural sciences.
But we must own that the amount of freedom which is left to us after strictly complying with the principle of the conservation of energy is rather limited. For, even if this law does not exert a necessitating influence over the course of our ideas, it will at least determine our movements. Our inner life will[Pg 150] still depend upon ourselves up to a certain point; but, to an outside observer, there will be nothing to distinguish our activity from absolute automatism. We are thus led to inquire whether the very extension of the principle of the conservation of energy to all the bodies in nature does not itself involve some psychological theory, and whether the scientist who did not possess a priori any prejudice against human freedom would think of setting up this principle as a universal law.
But we have to admit that the amount of freedom we have left after strictly following the principle of conservation of energy is quite limited. Even if this law doesn't directly influence the flow of our thoughts, it will at least shape our actions. Our inner life will still depend on us to some extent, but to an outside observer, there will be nothing to differentiate our actions from complete automatism. This leads us to question whether extending the principle of conservation of energy to all natural bodies also implies some psychological theory, and whether a scientist who had no built-in bias against human freedom would even think about establishing this principle as a universal law.
We must not overrate the part played by the principle of the conservation of energy in the history of the natural sciences. In its present form it marks a certain phase in the evolution of certain sciences; but it has not been the governing factor in this evolution and we should be wrong in making it the indispensable postulate of all scientific research. Certainly, every mathematical operation which we carry out on a given quantity implies the permanence of this quantity throughout the course of the operation, in whatever way we may split it up. In other words, what is given is given, what is not given is not given, and in whatever order we add up the same terms we shall get the same result. Science will for ever remain subject to this law, which is nothing but the law of non-contradiction; but this law does not involve any special hypothesis as to the nature of what we ought to take as given, or what[Pg 151] will remain constant. No doubt it informs us that something cannot come from nothing; but experience alone will tell us which aspects or functions of reality must count for something, and which for nothing, from the point of view of positive science. In short, in order to foresee the state of a determinate system at a determinate moment, it is absolutely necessary that something should persist as a constant quantity throughout a series of combinations; but it belongs to experience to decide as to the nature of this something, and especially to let us know whether it is found in all possible systems, whether, in other words, all possible systems lend themselves to our calculations. It is not certain that all the physicists before Leibniz believed, like Descartes, in the conservation of a fixed quantity of motion in the universe: were their discoveries less valuable on this account or their researches less successful? Even when Leibniz had substituted for this principle that of the conservation of vis viva, it was not possible to regard the law as quite general, since it admitted of an obvious exception in the case of the direct impact of two inelastic bodies. Thus science has done for a very long time without a universal conservative principle. In its present form, and since the development of the mechanical theory of heat, the principle of the conservation of energy certainly seems to apply to the whole range of physico-chemical phenomena. But no one can tell whether the study of physiological phenomena[Pg 152] in general, and of nervous phenomena in particular, will not reveal to us, besides the vis viva or kinetic energy of which Leibniz spoke, and the potential energy which was a later and necessary adjunct, some new kind of energy which may differ from the other two by rebelling against calculation. Physical science would not thereby lose any of its exactitude or geometrical rigour, as has lately been asserted: only it would be realized that conservative systems are not the only systems possible, and even, perhaps, that in the whole of concrete reality each of these systems plays the same part as the chemist's atom in bodies and their combinations. Let us note that the most radical of mechanical theories is that which makes consciousness an epiphenomenon which, in given circumstances, may supervene on certain molecular movements. But, if molecular movement can create sensation out of a zero of consciousness, why should not consciousness in its turn create movement either out of a zero of kinetic and potential energy, or by making use of this energy in its own way? Let us also note that the law of the conservation of energy can only be intelligibly applied to a system of which the points, after moving, can return to their former positions. This return is at least conceived of as possible, and it is supposed that under these conditions nothing would be changed in the original state of the system as a whole or of its elements. In short, time cannot bite into it; and the instinctive,[Pg 153] though vague, belief of mankind in the conservation of a fixed quantity of matter, a fixed quantity of energy, perhaps has its root in the very fact that inert matter does not seem to endure or to preserve any trace of past time. But this is not the case in the realm of life. Here duration certainly seems to act like a cause, and the idea of putting things back in their place at the end of a certain time involves a kind of absurdity, since such a turning backwards has never been accomplished in the case of a living being. But let us admit that the absurdity is a mere appearance, and that the impossibility for living beings to come back to the past is simply owing to the fact that the physico-chemical phenomena which take place in living bodies, being infinitely complex, have no chance of ever occurring again all at the same time: at least it will be granted to us that the hypothesis of a turning backwards is almost meaningless in the sphere of conscious states. A sensation, by the mere fact of being prolonged, is altered to the point of becoming unbearable. The same does not here remain the same, but is reinforced and swollen by the whole of its past. In short, while the material point, as mechanics understands it, remains in an eternal present, the past is a reality perhaps for living bodies, and certainly for conscious beings. While past time is neither a gain nor a loss for a system assumed to be conservative, it may be a gain for the living being, and it is indisputably one for the conscious being. Such[Pg 154] being the case, is there not much to be said for the hypothesis of a conscious force or free will, which, subject to the action of time and storing up duration, may thereby escape the law of the conservation of energy?
We shouldn't exaggerate the role of the principle of conservation of energy in the history of natural sciences. In its current form, it represents a specific stage in the development of certain sciences; however, it hasn't been the main driving force behind this development, and it would be a mistake to consider it an essential assumption for all scientific research. Certainly, every mathematical operation we perform on a given quantity assumes that this quantity remains constant throughout the operation, no matter how we break it down. In other words, what is established is established, what isn't established isn't established, and regardless of the order in which we sum the same terms, we will arrive at the same result. Science will forever adhere to this law, which is essentially the law of non-contradiction; however, this law does not require any specific assumption about what we should consider as given or what will remain constant. It certainly informs us that nothing comes from nothing; yet experience alone will indicate which aspects or functions of reality should matter and which should not, from the perspective of positive science. In summary, to predict the state of a specific system at a specific moment, it's crucial that something remains as a constant quantity throughout a series of combinations; but it is up to experience to determine what this something is, and especially to inform us whether it is present in all possible systems, or in other words, whether all possible systems can be used in our calculations. It's uncertain whether all physicists prior to Leibniz believed, like Descartes, in the conservation of a fixed quantity of motion in the universe: did their discoveries become less valuable due to this belief or were their research efforts less successful? Even after Leibniz replaced this principle with that of the conservation of vis viva, it was still not possible to consider the law entirely universal, as it had an obvious exception in the case of the direct impact between two inelastic bodies. Thus, science has long operated without a universal conservative principle. In its current form, and since the development of the mechanical theory of heat, the principle of conservation of energy certainly seems applicable to all physico-chemical phenomena. But no one can say whether studying physiological phenomena in general, and nervous phenomena in particular, will not reveal to us, in addition to the vis viva or kinetic energy that Leibniz referred to, and the potential energy that later became a necessary complement, some new type of energy that may differ from the others by resisting calculation. Physical science would not lose its precision or geometrical rigor by this revelation, as has been recently claimed: it would merely highlight that conservative systems are not the only possible systems, and perhaps even that in all of concrete reality, each of these systems plays a role similar to that of the chemist's atom in substances and their combinations. It's worth noting that the most radical of mechanical theories views consciousness as an epiphenomenon that, under certain circumstances, may emerge from specific molecular movements. However, if molecular movement can create sensation from a zero of consciousness, then why couldn't consciousness in turn create movement from a zero of kinetic and potential energy, or by utilizing this energy in its own way? Additionally, it's important to realize that the law of conservation of energy can only be logically applied to a system where the points, after moving, can return to their previous positions. This return is at least seen as possible, and it is assumed that under these conditions nothing would change in the original state of the system as a whole or of its components. In short, time cannot affect it; and the instinctive yet vague belief of humanity in the conservation of a fixed amount of matter, a fixed amount of energy, likely stems from the fact that inert matter does not seem to endure or retain any trace of past time. But this isn't the case in the realm of life. Here, time indeed seems to act as a cause, and the idea of putting things back in place after a certain time includes a kind of absurdity, since such a reversal has never been achieved for a living being. However, let's consider that this absurdity may only be an illusion, and that the inability of living beings to return to the past is simply due to the infinite complexity of the physico-chemical phenomena occurring in living bodies, which can never happen again all at once: at the very least, we can agree that the idea of reversing is nearly meaningless in the realm of conscious states. A sensation, by merely lasting longer, changes to the point of becoming unbearable. What remains here does not truly remain the same, but is amplified and expanded by its entire past. In essence, while the material point, as mechanics understands it, exists in an eternal present, the past is a reality, at least for living bodies, and definitely for conscious beings. While time may not be a gain or loss for a system presumed to be conservative, it could be a gain for the living being, and it is undoubtedly so for the conscious being. Given this, is there not a strong case for the hypothesis of a conscious force or free will that, influenced by time and accumulating duration, may thus evade the law of conservation of energy?
In truth, it is not a wish to meet the requirements of positive science, but rather a psychological mistake which has caused this abstract principle of mechanics to be set up as a universal law. As we are not accustomed to observe ourselves directly, but perceive ourselves through forms borrowed from the external world, we are led to believe that real duration, the duration lived by consciousness, is the same as the duration which glides over the inert atoms without penetrating and altering them. Hence it is that we do not see any absurdity in putting things back in their place after a lapse of time, in supposing the same motives acting afresh on the same persons, and in concluding that these causes would again produce the same effect. That such an hypothesis has no real meaning is what we shall prove later on. For the present let us simply show that, if once we enter upon this path, we are of course led to set up the principle of the conservation of energy as a universal law. For we have thereby got rid of just that difference between the outer and the inner world which a close examination shows to be the main one: we have identified true duration with apparent duration. After this it would be absurd[Pg 155] to consider time, even our time, as a cause of gain or loss, as a concrete reality, or a force in its own way. Thus, while we ought only to say (if we kept aloof from all presuppositions concerning free will) that the law of the conservation of energy governs physical phenomena and may, one day, be extended to all phenomena if psychological facts also prove favourable to it, we go far beyond this, and, under the influence of a metaphysical prepossession, we lay down the principle of the conservation of energy as a law which should govern all phenomena whatever, or must be supposed to do so until psychological facts have actually spoken against it. Science, properly so called, has therefore nothing to do with all this. We are simply confronted with a confusion between concrete duration and abstract time, two very different things. In a word, the so-called physical determinism is reducible at bottom to a psychological determinism, and it is this latter doctrine, as we hinted at first, that we have to examine.
In reality, it isn’t a desire to meet the standards of positive science, but rather a psychological mistake that has led to this abstract principle of mechanics being established as a universal law. Since we're not used to observing ourselves directly and perceive ourselves through concepts taken from the outside world, we start to believe that true duration—the duration experienced by consciousness—is the same as the time that passes over inert atoms without affecting them. This is why we don’t find it strange to return things to their original state after some time, to assume that the same motives will act again on the same people, and to conclude that these causes would create the same effects. We will prove later that this assumption lacks real meaning. For now, let's simply demonstrate that once we take this route, we inevitably establish the principle of energy conservation as a universal law. This approach ignores the crucial distinction between the outer world and our inner experience: we equate true duration with apparent duration. After this, it becomes absurd to think of time—not even our time—as a reason for gain or loss, as a tangible reality, or as a force in its own right. Thus, while we should only state (if we avoid all assumptions about free will) that the law of energy conservation governs physical phenomena and may someday extend to all phenomena if psychological facts support it, we go much further. Under the influence of a metaphysical bias, we assert the principle of energy conservation as a law that should govern all phenomena or must be assumed to do so until psychological facts explicitly contradict it. Proper science has nothing to do with this confusion. We face a mix-up between concrete duration and abstract time, which are two very different concepts. In short, the so-called physical determinism ultimately reduces to psychological determinism, and it is this latter idea that we need to examine.
Psychological determinism, in its latest and most precise shape, implies an associationist conception of mind. The existing state of consciousness is first thought of as necessitated by the preceding states, but it is soon realized that this cannot be a geometrical necessity, such as that which connects a resultant, for example, with its components. For between successive conscious states there[Pg 156] exists a difference of quality which will always frustrate any attempt to deduce any one of them a priori from its predecessors. So experience is appealed to, with the object of showing that the transition from one psychic state to another can always be explained by some simple reason, the second obeying as it were the call of the first. Experience really does show this: and, as for ourselves, we shall willingly admit that there always is some relation between the existing state of consciousness and any new state to which consciousness passes. But is this relation, which explains the transition, the cause of it?
Psychological determinism, in its most recent and exact form, suggests an associationist view of the mind. The current state of consciousness is initially seen as determined by previous states, but it's soon understood that this can't be a strict geometric necessity, like the relationship between a result and its components. Because there's always a difference in quality between successive conscious states that will thwart any attempt to deduce one from its predecessors a priori. Therefore, we look to experience to demonstrate that the shift from one mental state to another can always be explained by some straightforward reason, as if the second state is responding to the first. Experience does indeed show this: and as for us, we are willing to acknowledge that there is always some connection between the current state of consciousness and any new state it moves to. But is this connection, which explains the transition, also its cause?
May we here give an account of what we have personally observed? In resuming a conversation which had been interrupted for a few moments we have happened to notice that both we ourselves and our friend were thinking of some new object at the same time.—The reason is, it will be said, that each has followed up for his own part the natural development of the idea at which the conversation had stopped: the same series of associations has been formed on both sides.—No doubt this interpretation holds good in a fairly large number of cases; careful inquiry, however, has led us to an unexpected result. It is a fact that the two speakers do connect the new subject of conversation with the former one: they will even point out the intervening ideas; but, curiously enough,[Pg 157] they will not always connect the new idea, which they have both reached, with the same point of the preceding conversation, and the two series of intervening associations may be quite different. What are we to conclude from this, if not that this common idea is due to an unknown cause—perhaps to some physical influence—and that, in order to justify its emergence, it has called forth a series of antecedents which explain it and which seem to be its cause, but are really its effect?
Can we share what we've personally observed? As we picked up a conversation that had been paused for a few moments, we noticed that both our friend and we were thinking about something new at the same time. The explanation might be that each of us continued our own line of thought from where the conversation left off: the same chain of associations formed for both of us. This interpretation certainly applies in many cases; however, upon closer examination, we found an unexpected result. It's true that both speakers relate the new topic to the previous one and even highlight the ideas in between; but interestingly enough,[Pg 157] they don't always connect the new idea they've both reached to the same point in the earlier conversation, and the series of associations that came between may be quite different. What can we conclude from this, if not that this shared idea arises from an unknown influence—perhaps some physical factor—and that, to justify its emergence, it has pulled in a set of preceding ideas that make sense of it and seem to be its cause, but are actually just its effect?
When a patient carries out at the appointed time the suggestion received in the hypnotic state, the act which he performs is brought about, according to him, by the preceding series of his conscious states. Yet these states are really effects, and not causes: it was necessary that the act should take place; it was also necessary that the patient should explain it to himself; and it is the future act which determined, by a kind of attraction, the whole series of psychic states of which it is to be the natural consequence. The determinists will seize on this argument: it proves as a matter of fact that we are sometimes irresistibly subject to another's will. But does it not also show us how our own will is capable of willing for willing's sake, and of then leaving the act which has been performed to be explained by antecedents of which it has really been the cause?
When a patient carries out the suggestion given during hypnosis at the scheduled time, they believe that their action results from a series of their conscious thoughts. However, these thoughts are actually effects, not causes. The act needed to happen, and the patient also had to make sense of it for themselves. It is the upcoming action that pulls together the entire sequence of mental states that naturally lead to it. Determinists might point to this as proof that we can sometimes be compelled by someone else's will. But doesn’t it also illustrate how our own will can choose for the sake of choosing, leaving the action that’s been taken to be explained by prior thoughts, even though it was the cause of those thoughts?
If we question ourselves carefully, we shall see[Pg 158] that we sometimes weigh motives and deliberate over them, when our mind is already made up. An inner voice, hardly perceivable, whispers: "Why this deliberation? You know the result and you are quite certain of what you are going to do." But no matter! it seems that we make a point of safe-guarding the principle of mechanism and of conforming to the laws of the association of ideas. The abrupt intervention of the will is a kind of coup d'état which our mind foresees and which it tries to legitimate beforehand by a formal deliberation. True, it could be asked whether the will, even when it wills for willing's sake, does not obey some decisive reason, and whether willing for willing's sake is free willing. We shall not insist on this point for the moment. It will be enough for us to have shown that, even when adopting the point of view of associationism, it is difficult to maintain that an act is absolutely determined by its motive and our conscious states by one another. Beneath these deceptive appearances a more attentive psychology sometimes reveals to us effects which precede their causes, and phenomena of psychic attraction which elude the known laws of the association of ideas. But the time has come to ask whether the very point of view which associationism adopts does not involve a defective conception of the self and of the multiplicity of conscious states.
If we honestly reflect on ourselves, we’ll see[Pg 158] that we sometimes weigh our motives and think them over when our mind is already made up. An inner voice, barely noticeable, whispers: "Why are you even thinking this through? You know the outcome and you're sure of what you're going to do." But still, it seems we insist on protecting the principle of mechanism and following the rules of how ideas connect. The sudden interruption of our will is like a coup d'état that our mind anticipates and tries to justify beforehand through formal contemplation. It's worth asking whether the will, even when it acts just for the sake of willing, responds to some decisive reason, and whether wanting simply for wanting's sake is truly free will. For now, we won't dwell on that. It’s enough for us to have shown that, even from an associationist perspective, it’s challenging to argue that an action is entirely determined by its motives and that our conscious states dictate one another. Beneath these misleading appearances, a more watchful psychology sometimes reveals effects that occur before their causes, and phenomena of psychic attraction that evade the established rules of idea association. Now it’s time to question whether the very perspective that associationism takes reflects a flawed understanding of the self and the variety of conscious states.
Associationist determinism represents the self as[Pg 159] a collection of psychic states, the strongest of which exerts a prevailing influence and carries the others with it. This doctrine thus sharply distinguishes co-existing psychic phenomena from one another. "I could have abstained from murder," says Stuart Mill, "if my aversion to the crime and my dread of its consequences had been weaker than the temptation which impelled me to commit it."[2] And a little further on: "His desire to do right and his aversion to doing wrong are strong enough to overcome ... any other desire or aversion which may conflict with them."[3] Thus desire, aversion, fear, temptation are here presented as distinct things which there is no inconvenience in naming separately. Even when he connects these states with the self which experiences them, the English philosopher still insists on setting up clear-cut distinctions: "The conflict is between me and myself; between (for instance) me desiring a pleasure and me dreading self-reproach."[4] Bain, for his part, devotes a whole chapter to the "Conflict of Motives."[5] In it he balances pleasures and pains as so many terms to which one might attribute, at least by abstraction, an existence of their own. Note that the opponents of determinism agree to follow it into this field. They too speak of associations of ideas and conflicts of[Pg 160] motives, and one of the ablest of these philosophers, Alfred Fouillée, goes so far as to make the idea of freedom itself a motive capable of counterbalancing others.[6] Here, however, lies the danger. Both parties commit themselves to a confusion which arises from language, and which is due to the fact that language is not meant to convey all the delicate shades of inner states.
Associationist determinism sees the self as [Pg 159] a bunch of mental states, with the strongest one having the biggest influence and pulling the others along. This idea clearly separates different mental phenomena from each other. "I could have avoided murder," says Stuart Mill, "if my dislike for the crime and my fear of its consequences had been weaker than the temptation that drove me to commit it."[2] Later he adds: "His desire to do the right thing and his dislike of doing wrong are strong enough to overcome ... any other desire or dislike that might conflict with them."[3] So, desire, dislike, fear, and temptation are presented as separate things that it’s easy to name independently. Even when he relates these states to the self that experiences them, the English philosopher still insists on making clear distinctions: "The conflict is between me and myself; between (for example) me wanting a pleasure and me fearing self-blame."[4] Bain, for his part, dedicates an entire chapter to the "Conflict of Motives."[5] In it, he weighs pleasures and pains as if they were individual entities that could be abstractly considered to exist on their own. It's worth noting that the critics of determinism also engage with this topic. They talk about associations of ideas and conflicts of [Pg 160] motives, and one of the most skilled among these philosophers, Alfred Fouillée, even suggests that the concept of freedom itself can be a motive that counters others.[6] However, this is where the risk lies. Both sides fall into a confusion stemming from language, which is unable to capture all the subtle nuances of inner experiences.
I rise, for example, to open the window, and I have hardly stood up before I forget what I had to do.—All right, it will be said; you have associated two ideas, that of an end to be attained and that of a movement to be accomplished: one of the ideas has vanished and only the idea of the movement remains.—However, I do not sit down again; I have a confused feeling that something remains to be done. This particular standing still, therefore, is not the same as any other standing still; in the position which I take up the act to be performed is as it were prefigured, so that I have only to keep this position, to study it, or rather to feel it intimately, in order to recover the idea which had vanished for a moment. Hence, this idea must have tinged with a certain particular colouring the mental image of the intended movement and the position taken up, and this colouring, without doubt, would not have been the same if the end to be attained had been different. Nevertheless[Pg 161] language would have still expressed the movement and the position in the same way; and associationism would have distinguished the two cases by saying that with the idea of the same movement there was associated this time the idea of a new end: as if the mere newness of the end to be attained did not alter in some degree the idea of the movement to be performed, even though the movement itself remained the same! We should thus say, not that the image of a certain position can be connected in consciousness with images of different ends to be attained, but rather that positions geometrically identical outside look different to consciousness from the inside, according to the end contemplated. The mistake of associationism is that it first did away with the qualitative element in the act to be performed and retained only the geometrical and impersonal element: with the idea of this act, thus rendered colourless, it was then necessary to associate some specific difference to distinguish it from many other acts. But this association is the work of the associationist philosopher who is studying my mind, rather than of my mind itself.
I get up, for instance, to open the window, and barely have I stood up before I forget what I was supposed to do. — Fine, it’s been said; I’ve linked two ideas together: the goal I need to reach and the action I need to take. One of those ideas has disappeared, leaving just the idea of the action. — However, I don’t sit back down; I have this vague feeling that something still needs to be done. This particular moment of standing still is different from any other; in the stance I’ve taken, the action to be performed is somehow suggested, so I just need to hold this position, examine it, or rather, feel it deeply to recall the idea that slipped away for a moment. Therefore, this idea must have given a specific nuance to the mental image of the intended action and the position I’ve taken, and this nuance would likely be different if the goal was something else. Still, [Pg 161] language would have described the action and the position in the same way; and associationism would distinguish the two situations by claiming that along with the notion of the same action, there was this time the idea of a new goal: as if the mere novelty of the target didn’t somewhat change the perception of the action to be done, even if the action itself remains unchanged! So, we should say that it’s not that the image of a specific position can be linked in our minds with images of different goals, but rather that geometrically identical positions look different to our consciousness depending on the goal we have in mind. The error of associationism is that it first stripped away the qualitative aspect of the action to be taken and only kept the geometric and impersonal aspect: without the emotional nuance in the idea of this action, it became necessary to associate some specific difference to distinguish it from various other actions. But this association is the creation of the associationist philosopher studying my mind, rather than being a function of my mind itself.
I smell a rose and immediately confused recollections of childhood come back to my memory. In truth, these recollections have not been called up by the perfume of the rose: I breathe them in with the very scent; it means all that to me. To others it will smell differently.—It is always the same scent,[Pg 162] you will say, but associated with different ideas.—I am quite willing that you should express yourself in this way; but do not forget that you have first removed the personal element from the different impressions which the rose makes on each one of us; you have retained only the objective aspect, that part of the scent of the rose which is public property and thereby belongs to space. Only thus was it possible to give a name to the rose and its perfume. You then found it necessary, in order to distinguish our personal impressions from one another, to add specific characteristics to the general idea of rose-scent. And you now say that our different impressions, our personal impressions, result from the fact that we associate different recollections with rose-scent. But the association of which you speak hardly exists except for you, and as a method of explanation. It is in this way that, by setting side by side certain letters of an alphabet common to a number of known languages, we may imitate fairly well such and such a characteristic sound belonging to a new one; but not with any of these letters, nor with all of them, has the sound itself been built up.
I smell a rose and suddenly memories from my childhood rush back to me. Honestly, these memories aren't triggered just by the rose's scent; I take them in along with the fragrance itself; it carries that meaning for me. To others, it might smell different. You might say it’s always the same scent,[Pg 162], but it’s tied to different feelings. I’m perfectly fine with you saying it that way, but don’t forget that you’ve first stripped away the personal aspect from the various impressions the rose leaves on each of us; you’ve only kept the objective side, the part of the rose's scent that is public and belongs to everyone. That’s how it became possible to name the rose and its fragrance. Then, to differentiate our personal impressions from one another, you found it necessary to add specific traits to the general idea of rose scent. Now you claim that our different experiences, our personal impressions, come from the way we connect different memories to the scent of a rose. But the connection you mention barely exists outside of your own understanding and as a way of explaining things. It’s similar to how, by putting together certain letters of an alphabet that many languages share, we can somewhat mimic a specific sound from a new one; but none of those letters, nor all of them together, actually create that sound.
We are thus brought back to the distinction which we set up above between the multiplicity of juxtaposition and that of fusion or interpenetration. Such and such a feeling such and such an idea, contains an indefinite plurality of conscious states: but the plurality will not be observed[Pg 163] unless it is, as it were, spread out in this homogeneous medium which some call duration, but which is in reality space. We shall then perceive terms external to one another, and these terms will no longer be the states of consciousness themselves, but their symbols, or, speaking more exactly, the words which express them. There is, as we have pointed out, a close connexion between the faculty of conceiving a homogeneous medium, such as space, and that of thinking by means of general ideas. As soon as we try to give an account of a conscious state, to analyse it, this state, which is above all personal, will be resolved into impersonal elements external to one another, each of which calls up the idea of a genus and is expressed by a word. But because our reason, equipped with the idea of space and the power of creating symbols, draws these multiple elements out of the whole, it does not follow that they were contained in it. For within the whole they did not occupy space and did not care to express themselves by means of symbols; they permeated and melted into one another. Associationism thus makes the mistake of constantly replacing the concrete phenomenon which takes place in the mind by the artificial reconstruction of it given by philosophy, and of thus confusing the explanation of the fact with the fact itself. We shall perceive this more clearly as we consider deeper and more comprehensive psychic states.
We are brought back to the distinction we made earlier between the variety of juxtaposition and that of fusion or interpenetration. A certain feeling or idea contains an infinite number of conscious states: but this plurality won't be noticed[Pg 163] unless it is, in a sense, laid out in this uniform medium that some refer to as duration, but which is actually space. We will then see terms that are external to one another, and these terms will no longer be the states of consciousness themselves, but their symbols, or, more accurately, the words that express them. As we have noted, there is a strong connection between the ability to conceive of a uniform medium, like space, and the ability to think using general ideas. As soon as we attempt to describe a conscious state, to analyze it, this state, which is primarily personal, will break down into impersonal elements that are external to one another, each of which evokes the idea of a genus and is represented by a word. However, because our reasoning, equipped with the concept of space and the ability to create symbols, extracts these multiple elements from the whole, it doesn’t mean they were contained within it. Within the whole, they didn’t occupy space and didn’t express themselves through symbols; they merged and blended into each other. Associationism thus makes the error of continually replacing the concrete phenomenon occurring in the mind with the artificial reconstruction provided by philosophy, thereby confusing the explanation of the fact with the fact itself. We will see this more clearly as we delve into deeper and more comprehensive mental states.
The self comes into contact with the external[Pg 164] world at its surface; and as this surface retains the imprint of objects, the self will associate by contiguity terms which it has perceived in juxtaposition: it is connexions of this kind, connexions of quite simple and so to speak impersonal sensations, that the associationist theory fits. But, just in proportion as we dig below the surface and get down to the real self, do its states of consciousness cease to stand in juxtaposition and begin to permeate and melt into one another, and each to be tinged with the colouring of all the others. Thus each of us has his own way of loving and hating; and this love or this hatred reflects his whole personality. Language, however, denotes these states by the same words in every case: so that it has been able to fix only the objective and impersonal aspect of love, hate, and the thousand emotions which stir the soul. We estimate the talent of a novelist by the power with which he lifts out of the common domain, to which language had thus brought them down, feelings and ideas to which he strives to restore, by adding detail to detail, their original and living individuality. But just as we can go on inserting points between two positions of a moving body without ever filling up the space traversed, in the same way, by the mere fact that we associate states with states and that these states are set side by side instead of permeating one another, we fail to translate completely what our soul experiences: there[Pg 165] is no common measure between mind and language.
The self interacts with the external[Pg 164] world at its surface; and as this surface holds the imprint of objects, the self will connect terms it has perceived next to each other: it's these kinds of connections—simple and somewhat impersonal sensations—that the associationist theory explains. However, as we dig deeper and reach the true self, its states of consciousness stop being side by side and start to blend and influence one another, each colored by the others. Thus, each of us has a unique way of loving and hating; and this love or hatred reflects our entire personality. Language, however, uses the same words to describe these states in every case: it has only been able to capture the objective and impersonal aspects of love, hate, and the countless emotions that stir the soul. We judge a novelist's talent by how well they lift feelings and ideas out of the common language and restore their original, vibrant individuality by adding detail upon detail. But just like we can keep adding points between two positions of a moving body without ever filling the gap, by merely associating states with states and placing them side by side instead of blending them, we fail to fully express what our soul experiences: there[Pg 165] is no common measure between mind and language.
Therefore, it is only an inaccurate psychology, misled by language, which will show us the soul determined by sympathy, aversion, or hate as though by so many forces pressing upon it. These feelings, provided that they go deep enough, each make up the whole soul, since the whole content of the soul is reflected in each of them. To say that the soul is determined under the influence of any one of these feelings is thus to recognize that it is self-determined. The associationist reduces the self to an aggregate of conscious states: sensations, feelings, and ideas. But if he sees in these various states no more than is expressed in their name, if he retains only their impersonal aspect, he may set them side by side for ever without getting anything but a phantom self, the shadow of the ego projecting itself into space. If, on the contrary, he takes these psychic states with the particular colouring which they assume in the case of a definite person, and which comes to each of them by reflection from all the others, then there is no need to associate a number of conscious states in order to rebuild the person, for the whole personality is in a single one of them, provided that we know how to choose it. And the outward manifestation of this inner state will be just what is called a free act, since the self alone will have been the author[Pg 166] of it, and since it will express the whole of the self. Freedom, thus understood, is not absolute, as a radically libertarian philosophy would have it; it admits of degrees. For it is by no means the case that all conscious states blend with one another as raindrops with the water of a lake. The self, in so far as it has to do with a homogeneous space, develops on a kind of surface, and on this surface independent growths may form and float. Thus a suggestion received in the hypnotic state is not incorporated in the mass of conscious states, but, endowed with a life of its own, it will usurp the whole personality when its time comes. A violent anger roused by some accidental circumstance, an hereditary vice suddenly emerging from the obscure depths of the organism to the surface of consciousness, will act almost like a hypnotic suggestion. Alongside these independent elements there may be found more complex series, the terms of which do permeate one another, but which never succeed in blending perfectly with the whole mass of the self. Such is the system of feelings and ideas which are the result of an education not properly assimilated, an education which appeals to the memory rather than to the judgment. Here will be found, within the fundamental self, a parasitic self which continually encroaches upon the other. Many live this kind of life, and die without having known true freedom. But suggestion would become persuasion if the entire self assimilated it;[Pg 167] passion, even sudden passion, would no longer bear the stamp of fatality if the whole history of the person were reflected in it, as in the indignation of Alceste;[7] and the most authoritative education would not curtail any of our freedom if it only imparted to us ideas and feelings capable of impregnating the whole soul. It is the whole soul, in fact, which gives rise to the free decision: and the act will be so much the freer the more the dynamic series with which it is connected tends to be the fundamental self.
Therefore, it's just an inaccurate psychology, misled by language, that would show us the soul shaped by sympathy, aversion, or hate as if these feelings were forces pressing upon it. Each of these feelings, if they run deep enough, makes up the entirety of the soul, since the whole content of the soul is reflected in each one of them. To say that the soul is influenced by any one of these feelings is to acknowledge that it is self-determined. The associationist reduces the self to a collection of conscious states: sensations, feelings, and ideas. But if he sees these various states only as what their names suggest, retaining only their impersonal side, he can align them next to each other forever without creating anything more than a phantom self, the shadow of the ego projecting itself into space. However, if he considers these mental states with the particular tint they take on for a specific person, which they gain by reflecting off one another, then there’s no need to combine multiple conscious states to reconstruct the person, because the entire personality exists in just one of them, provided we know how to pick it. The outward expression of this inner state will be what we call a free act, since only the self will have authored it, expressing the whole self. Freedom, when understood this way, is not absolute, as a radically libertarian philosophy might suggest; it allows for degrees. It is not the case that all conscious states blend together like raindrops in a lake. The self, when dealing with a consistent space, develops on a sort of surface, and on this surface, independent growths can form and float. So, a suggestion made during a hypnotic state isn't integrated into the collection of conscious states, but instead, it possesses its own life and will take over the whole personality when the time is right. A sudden anger triggered by some random event, or a hereditary flaw suddenly surfacing in consciousness, will act similarly to a hypnotic suggestion. Alongside these independent elements, more complex sequences might be found, where the terms influence each other but never fully merge with the entire self. This includes feelings and ideas resulting from a poorly absorbed education, which relies on memory rather than judgment. In this case, within the core self, there exists a parasitic self that continually encroaches on the others. Many people live this way and die without ever experiencing true freedom. However, suggestion would turn into persuasion if the entire self were to assimilate it; passion, even an outburst of passion, would no longer feel fated if the entire personal history were reflected in it, like in Alceste’s indignation; and even the most authoritative education wouldn’t limit our freedom if it only instilled ideas and feelings capable of permeating the whole soul. In fact, it is the whole soul that leads to a free decision: and the act will be freer the more the dynamic series connected to it tends toward the fundamental self.
Thus understood, free acts are exceptional, even on the part of those who are most given to controlling and reasoning out what they do. It has been pointed out that we generally perceive our own self by refraction through space, that our conscious states crystallize into words, and that our living and concrete self thus gets covered with an outer crust of clean-cut psychic states, which are separated from one another and consequently fixed. We added that, for the convenience of language and the promotion of social relations, we have everything to gain by not breaking through this crust and by assuming it to give an exact outline of the form of the object which it covers. It should now be added that our daily actions are called forth not so much by our feelings themselves, which are constantly[Pg 168] changing, as by the unchanging images with which these feelings are bound up. In the morning, when the hour strikes at which I am accustomed to rise, I might receive this impression σὺν ὄλῃ τῇ ψυχῆ, as Plato says; I might let it blend with the confused mass of impressions which fill my mind; perhaps in that case it would not determine me to act. But generally this impression, instead of disturbing my whole consciousness like a stone which falls into the water of a pond, merely stirs up an idea which is, so to speak, solidified on the surface, the idea of rising and attending to my usual occupations. This impression and this idea have in the end become tied up with one another, so that the act follows the impression without the self interfering with it. In this instance I am a conscious automaton, and I am so because I have everything to gain by being so. It will be found that the majority of our daily actions are performed in this way and that, owing to the solidification in memory of such and such sensations, feelings, or ideas, impressions from the outside call forth movements on our part which, though conscious and even intelligent, have many points of resemblance with reflex acts. It is to these acts, which are very numerous but for the most part insignificant, that the associationist theory is applicable. They are, taken all together, the substratum of our free activity, and with respect to this activity they play the same part as our organic functions in relation to the[Pg 169] whole of our conscious life. Moreover we will grant to determinism that we often resign our freedom in more serious circumstances, and that, by sluggishness or indolence, we allow this same local process to run its course when our whole personality ought, so to speak, to vibrate. When our most trustworthy friends agree in advising us to take some important step, the sentiments which they utter with so much insistence lodge on the surface of our ego and there get solidified in the same way as the ideas of which we spoke just now. Little by little they will form a thick crust which will cover up our own sentiments; we shall believe that we are acting freely, and it is only by looking back to the past, later on, that we shall see how much we were mistaken. But then, at the very minute when the act is going to be performed, something may revolt against it. It is the deep-seated self rushing up to the surface. It is the outer crust bursting, suddenly giving way to an irresistible thrust. Hence in the depths of the self, below this most reasonable pondering over most reasonable pieces of advice, something else was going on—a gradual heating and a sudden boiling over of feelings and ideas, not unperceived, but rather unnoticed. If we turn back to them and carefully scrutinize our memory, we shall see that we had ourselves shaped these ideas, ourselves lived these feelings, but that, through some strange reluctance to exercise our will, we had thrust them back into the darkest depths of our soul[Pg 170] whenever they came up to the surface. And this is why we seek in vain to explain our sudden change of mind by the visible circumstances which preceded it. We wish to know the reason why we have made up our mind, and we find that we have decided without any reason, and perhaps even against every reason. But, in certain cases, that is the best of reasons. For the action which has been performed does not then express some superficial idea, almost external to ourselves, distinct and easy to account for: it agrees with the whole of our most intimate feelings, thoughts and aspirations, with that particular conception of life which is the equivalent of all our past experience, in a word, with our personal idea of happiness and of honour. Hence it has been a mistake to look for examples in the ordinary and even indifferent circumstances of life in order to prove that man is capable of choosing without a motive. It might easily be shown that these insignificant actions are bound up with some determining reason. It is at the great and solemn crisis, decisive of our reputation with others, and yet more with ourselves, that we choose in defiance of what is conventionally called a motive, and this absence of any tangible reason is the more striking the deeper our freedom goes.
Understood this way, free actions are rare, even for those who tend to analyze and control their behavior. It’s been noted that we usually see ourselves filtered through the world around us, that our conscious thoughts turn into words, and that our real, tangible selves become covered by a layer of clear-cut mental states that are separated and thus fixed. We also mentioned that, for the sake of communication and social interaction, we benefit from not breaking through this layer and from assuming it accurately represents the shape of what it conceals. It should now be added that our daily actions are triggered not so much by our feelings themselves, which are always changing, but by the stable images linked to those feelings. In the morning, when it's time for me to wake up, I might feel this impression with all my being, as Plato puts it; I could let it blend with the jumble of thoughts in my mind, and maybe it wouldn't push me to act. But usually, this impression doesn't disrupt all my consciousness like a stone dropped into a pond; instead, it just stirs up a solidified idea on the surface—the idea of getting up and doing my regular tasks. This impression and this idea are ultimately connected, so the action follows the impression without any interference from my self. In this situation, I become a conscious automaton, and I am this way because it benefits me. Most of our daily actions happen this way, where due to the solidification of certain sensations, feelings, or ideas in memory, external impressions lead us to act in ways that, while conscious and even thoughtful, resemble reflex actions. The associationist theory applies to these numerous but mostly trivial acts. Together, they form the foundation of our free activity, playing a role similar to our bodily functions in relation to our entire conscious life. Additionally, we can concede to determinism that we often give up our freedom in more serious situations, and that out of laziness or lack of energy, we let this local process continue when our whole personality should ideally respond. When our most trusted friends encourage us to make an important decision, their strongly expressed feelings settle on the surface of our ego and solidify like the ideas we just discussed. Gradually, they create a thick layer that hides our own feelings; we believe we’re acting freely, only to realize later, by reflecting on the past, how mistaken we were. Yet, at the very moment the action is about to occur, something may push back against it. It’s the deeper self surging up. It’s the outer layer breaking, suddenly giving way to a powerful force. Thus, beneath this calm contemplation of sensible advice, something else was happening—a slow build-up followed by an abrupt overflow of feelings and ideas, not unnoticed but largely overlooked. If we look back and examine our memories, we’ll see that we shaped those ideas and experienced those feelings ourselves, but that, due to a strange reluctance to assert our will, we pushed them down into the darkest parts of our soul whenever they surfaced. That’s why we struggle to explain our sudden change of heart by the visible events that preceded it. We want to understand why we made a decision, only to find that we decided without any reason at all, perhaps even against all reasons. Yet, sometimes that is the best reason. The action taken doesn’t merely reflect some superficial idea that’s almost external to us, clear-cut and easy to justify; it aligns with our deepest feelings, thoughts, and aspirations, with our specific understanding of life shaped by all our past experiences, in other words, with our personal concept of happiness and honor. So it has been a mistake to seek examples in ordinary and even trivial circumstances to prove that people can choose without motive. It could easily be demonstrated that these insignificant actions are tied to some underlying reason. It’s in the crucial, serious moments—those that affect our reputation with others and even more with ourselves—that we choose in defiance of what’s traditionally seen as a motive. The lack of a clear reason is more noticeable the deeper our freedom runs.
But the determinist, even when he refrains from regarding the more serious emotions or deep-seated psychic states as forces, nevertheless distinguishes them from one another and is thus[Pg 171] led to a mechanical conception of the self. He will show us this self hesitating between two contrary feelings, passing from one to the other and finally deciding in favour of one of them. The self and the feelings which stir it are thus treated as well defined objects, which remain identical during the whole of the process. But if it is always the same self which deliberates, and if the two opposite feelings by which it is moved do not change, how, in virtue of this very principle of causality which determinism appeals to, will the self ever come to a decision? The truth is that the self, by the mere fact of experiencing the first feeling, has already changed to a slight extent when the second supervenes: all the time that the deliberation is going on, the self is changing and is consequently modifying the two feelings which agitate it. A dynamic series of states is thus formed which permeate and strengthen one another, and which will lead by a natural evolution to a free act. But determinism, ever craving for symbolical representation, cannot help substituting words for the opposite feelings which share the ego between them, as well as for the ego itself. By giving first the person and then the feelings by which he is moved a fixed form by means of sharply defined words, it deprives them in advance of every kind of living activity. It will then see on the one side an ego always self-identical, and on the other contrary feelings, also[Pg 172] self-identical, which dispute for its possession; victory will necessarily belong to the stronger. But this mechanism, to which we have condemned ourselves in advance, has no value beyond that of a symbolical representation: it cannot hold good against the witness of an attentive consciousness, which shows us inner dynamism as a fact.
But the determinist, even if he doesn’t consider the deeper emotions or entrenched mental states as forces, still differentiates between them and is thus[Pg 171] led to a mechanical view of the self. He illustrates the self as wavering between two opposing feelings, switching from one to the other and finally choosing one of them. The self and the emotions that affect it are treated as clear-cut objects, which stay the same throughout the whole process. However, if it’s always the same self making decisions, and if the two opposing feelings affecting it don’t change, how is it possible, based on this very principle of causality that determinism relies on, for the self to ever make a decision? The reality is that just by experiencing the first feeling, the self has already changed a bit when the second arises: throughout the deliberation, the self is evolving and is therefore altering the two feelings that stir it. A dynamic series of states is formed that influences and reinforces each other, which will naturally lead to a free action. But determinism, always wanting a symbolic representation, can’t avoid using words to define the opposing feelings that compete for the ego, as well as for the ego itself. By assigning a fixed form through precise terminology to both the person and the feelings motivating him, it strips them of any kind of living activity in advance. It will then see on one side an ego that remains unchanged, and on the other opposing feelings, also[Pg 172] unchanging, that fight for its control; the victory will inevitably go to the stronger. However, this mechanism, to which we have prematurely confined ourselves, only serves as a symbolic representation: it cannot stand up against the testimony of a focused consciousness, which reveals inner dynamism as a reality.
In short, we are free when our acts spring from our whole personality, when they express it, when that indefinable resemblance to it which one sometimes finds between the artist and his work. It is no use asserting that we are then yielding to the all-powerful influence of our character. Our character is still ourselves; and because we are pleased to split the person into two parts so that by an effort of abstraction we may consider in turn the self which feels or thinks and the self which acts, it would be very strange to conclude that one of the two selves is coercing the other. Those who ask whether we are free to alter our character lay themselves open to the same objection. Certainly our character is altering imperceptibly every day, and our freedom would suffer if these new acquisitions were grafted on to our self and not blended with it. But, as soon as this blending takes place, it must be admitted that the change which has supervened in our character belongs to us, that we have appropriated it. In a word, if it is agreed to call every act free which springs from the self and from the self alone, the[Pg 173] act which bears the mark of our personality is truly free, for our self alone will lay claim to its paternity. It would thus be recognized that free will is a fact, if it were agreed to look for it in a certain characteristic of the decision which is taken, in the free act itself. But the determinist feeling that he cannot retain his hold on this position, takes refuge in the past or the future. Sometimes he transfers himself in thought to some earlier period and asserts the necessary determination, from this very moment, of the act which is to come; sometimes, assuming in advance that the act is already performed, he claims that it could not have taken place in any other way. The opponents of determinism themselves willingly follow it on to this new ground and agree to introduce into their definition of our free act -perhaps not without some risk—the anticipation of what we might do and the recollection of some other decision which we might have taken. It is advisable, then, that we should place ourselves at this new point of view, and, setting aside all translation into words, all symbolism in space, attend to what pure consciousness alone shows us about an action that has come to pass or an action which is still to come. The original error of determinism and the mistake of its opponents will thus be grasped on another side, in so far as they bear explicitly on a certain misconception of duration.
In short, we are free when our actions come from our entire personality, when they represent it, similar to the undeniable connection found between an artist and their work. It doesn't help to insist that we are simply surrendering to the overwhelming influence of our character. Our character is still part of who we are; and while we often like to divide the person into two parts so we can think about the self that feels or thinks and the self that acts, it would be odd to conclude that one part is forcing the other. Those who wonder whether we can change our character fall into the same trap. Certainly, our character is gradually changing every day, and our freedom would be compromised if these new traits were added to our self without integrating into it. However, once this integration happens, we must acknowledge that the change in our character is ours and that we have absorbed it. In summary, if we agree to call every action free that arises from the self and only the self, then the action that reflects our personality is genuinely free, as our self alone claims its origin. This would affirm that free will exists if we look for it in a specific aspect of the decision made, in the very act of freedom itself. But the determinist feels they cannot maintain this stance, so they retreat into the past or the future. Sometimes they transport themselves mentally to an earlier time and claim the necessary determination of the upcoming act from that very moment; other times, by presuming that the act has already happened, they argue it couldn't have occurred any other way. Even the critics of determinism willingly follow it into this new territory and agree to include in their definition of our free action—perhaps with some risk—the expectation of what we might do and the memory of other decisions we might have made. Therefore, it's wise for us to adopt this new perspective and, setting aside all verbal translations and spatial symbols, focus on what pure consciousness reveals about an action that has already happened or one that is yet to happen. The original error of determinism and the mistakes of its critics will then be understood from a different angle, as they explicitly relate to a specific misunderstanding of time.
"To be conscious of free will," says Stuart[Pg 174] Mill, "must mean to be conscious, before I have decided, that I am able to decide either way.[8] This is really the way in which the defenders of free will understand it; and they assert that when we perform an action freely, some other action would have been "equally possible." On this point they appeal to the testimony of consciousness, which shows us, beyond the act itself, the power of deciding in favour of the opposite course. Inversely, determinism claims that, given certain antecedents, only one resultant action was possible. "When we think of ourselves hypothetically," Stuart Mill goes on, "as having acted otherwise than we did, we always suppose a difference in the antecedents. We picture ourselves as having known something that we did not know, or not known something that we did know."[9] And, faithful to his principle, the English philosopher assigns consciousness the rôle of informing us about what is, not about what might be. We shall not insist for the moment on this last point: we reserve the question in what sense the ego perceives itself as a determining cause. But beside this psychological question there is another, belonging rather to metaphysics, which the determinists and their opponents solve a priori along opposite lines. The argument of[Pg 175] the former implies that there is only one possible act corresponding to given antecedents: the believers in free will assume, on the other hand, that the same series could issue in several different acts, equally possible. It is on this question of the equal possibility of two contrary actions or volitions that we shall first dwell: perhaps we shall thus gather some indication as to the nature of the operation by which the will makes its choice.
"To be aware of free will," says Stuart[Pg 174] Mill, "means to be aware, before I decide, that I can choose either option.[8] This is really how the supporters of free will see it; and they argue that when we act freely, another action could have been "equally possible." They refer to the evidence of consciousness, which shows us, beyond the action itself, the ability to choose the opposite path. In contrast, determinism argues that, given specific conditions, only one resulting action was possible. "When we consider ourselves hypothetically," Stuart Mill continues, "as having acted differently than we did, we always assume a difference in the conditions. We imagine ourselves having known something we didn’t know or not known something we did know."[9] And, staying true to his principle, the English philosopher assigns consciousness the role of informing us about what is, not about what could be. For now, we won't focus on this last point: we’ll set aside the question of how the self perceives itself as a determining cause. But alongside this psychological question, there’s another one, which is more metaphysical, that both determinists and their opponents approach a priori from opposite perspectives. The argument from[Pg 175] the former suggests that there is only one possible act corresponding to given conditions: on the other hand, supporters of free will assert that the same set of circumstances could lead to several different actions, all equally possible. It is on this question of the equal possibility of two opposing actions or choices that we will first focus: perhaps this will give us some insight into the nature of how the will makes its decision.
I hesitate between two possible actions X and Y, and I go in turn from one to the other. This means that I pass through a series of states, and that these states can be divided into two groups according as I incline more towards X or in the contrary direction. Indeed, these opposite inclinations alone have a real existence, and X and Y are two symbols by which I represent at their arrival-or termination-points, so to speak, two different tendencies of my personality at successive moments of duration. Let us then rather denote the tendencies themselves by X and Y; will this new notation give a more faithful image of the concrete reality? It must be noticed, as we said above, that the self grows, expands, and changes as it passes through the two contrary states: if not, how would it ever come to a decision? Hence there are not exactly two contrary states, but a large number of successive and different states within which I distinguish, by an effort[Pg 176] of imagination, two opposite directions.
I struggle between two possible actions, X and Y, and I shift back and forth between them. This means I go through a series of states, which can be divided into two groups depending on whether I lean more toward X or the opposite. In fact, these opposing inclinations are the only ones that truly exist, while X and Y are just symbols representing two different tendencies of my personality at different moments. So, let's refer to the tendencies themselves as X and Y; will this new labeling provide a more accurate representation of reality? It's important to note, as mentioned earlier, that the self grows, expands, and evolves as it experiences these two opposing states. Otherwise, how could it ever make a decision? Therefore, there aren't just two opposite states, but rather a whole range of successive and distinct states, within which I distinguish, through a stretch of imagination, two opposing directions.

Thus we shall get still nearer the reality by agreeing to use the invariable signs X and Y to denote, not these tendencies or states themselves, since they are constantly changing, but the two different directions which our imagination ascribes to them for the greater convenience of language. It will also be understood that these are symbolical representations, that in reality there are not two tendencies, or even two directions, but a self which lives and develops by means of its very hesitations, until the free action drops from it like an over-ripe fruit.
So, we will get even closer to reality by agreeing to use the consistent labels X and Y to represent, not these tendencies or states themselves, since they are always changing, but the two different directions we assign to them for easier communication. It will also be clear that these are symbolic representations; in reality, there aren’t just two tendencies, or even two directions, but a self that lives and grows through its very hesitations, until free action falls away like overripe fruit.
But this conception of voluntary activity does not satisfy common sense, because, being essentially a devotee of mechanism, it loves clear-cut distinctions, those which are expressed by sharply defined words or by different positions in space. Hence it will picture a self which, after having traversed a series Μ Ο of conscious states, when it reaches the point Ο finds before it two directions Ο X and Ο Y, equally open. These directions thus become things, real paths into which the highroad of consciousness leads, and it depends only on the self which of them is entered upon. In short, the continuous and living activity of this self, in which we have[Pg 177] distinguished, by abstraction only, two opposite directions, is replaced by these directions themselves, transformed into indifferent inert things awaiting our choice. But then we must certainly transfer the activity of the self somewhere or other. We will put it, according to this hypothesis, at the point Ο: we will say that the self, when it reaches Ο and finds two courses open to it, hesitates, deliberates and finally decides in favour of one of them. As we find it difficult to picture the double direction of the conscious activity in all the phases of its continuous development, we separate off these two tendencies on the one hand and the activity of the self on the other: we thus get an impartially active ego hesitating between two inert and, as it were, solidified courses of action. Now, if it decides in favour of Ο X, the line Ο Y will nevertheless remain; if it chooses Ο Y, the path Ο X will remain open, waiting in case the self retraces its steps in order to make use of it. It is in this sense that we say, when speaking of a free act, that the contrary action was equally possible. And, even if we do not draw a geometrical figure on paper, we involuntarily and almost unconsciously think of it as soon as we distinguish in the free act a number of successive phases, the conception of opposite motives, hesitation and choice—thus hiding the geometrical symbolism under a kind of verbal crystallization. Now it is easy to see that this really mechanical conception of freedom[Pg 178] issues naturally and logically in the most unbending determinism.
But this idea of voluntary activity doesn’t make sense to most people because, being fundamentally tied to mechanics, it prefers clear distinctions that are represented by sharply defined words or different spatial positions. So it imagines a self that, after going through a series of conscious states, reaches a point, finds two options in front of it, and sees these options—let’s call them OX and OY—as being equally available. These options then become things, real pathways that consciousness leads into, and it’s up to the self to decide which one to take. In short, the ongoing and active nature of the self, from which we have abstracted two opposing directions, is replaced by these directions themselves, turned into indifferent, lifeless options waiting for our choice. However, we must definitely assign the self’s activity to somewhere. We’ll place it at point O according to this theory, stating that when the self reaches point O and sees two paths open to it, it hesitates, thinks it over, and finally chooses one. Since it’s hard to visualize the dual direction of conscious activity throughout its continuous development, we separate these two tendencies from the activity of the self: this results in a neutral ego weighing between two inactive and, in a sense, solid paths of action. Now, if it chooses OX, the path OY will still exist; if it opts for OY, the route OX will remain available, waiting in case the self decides to go back and use it. In this way, when we talk about a free act, we say that the opposite action was equally possible. Even if we don’t draw a geometric shape on paper, we almost automatically think of it as soon as we recognize in the free act several successive phases: the conception of opposing motives, hesitation, and choice—thereby concealing the geometric symbolism under a kind of verbal crystallization. Now, it’s clear that this truly mechanical idea of freedom[Pg 178] naturally and logically leads to the most rigid form of determinism.
The living activity of the self, in which we distinguish by abstraction two opposite tendencies, will finally issue either at X or Y. Now, since it is agreed to localize the double activity of the self at the point O, there is no reason to separate this activity from the act in which it will issue and which forms part and parcel of it. And if experience shows that the decision has been in favour of X, it is not a neutral activity which should be placed at the point O, but an activity tending in advance in the direction Ο X, in spite of apparent hesitations. If, on the contrary, observation proves that the decision has been in favour of Y, we must infer that the activity localized by us at the point Ο was bent in this second direction in spite of some oscillations towards the first. To assert that the self, when it reaches the point O, chooses indifferently between X and Y, is to stop half way in the course of our geometrical symbolism; it is to separate off at the point Ο only a part of this continuous activity in which we undoubtedly distinguished two different directions, but which in addition has gone on to X or Y: why not take this last fact into account as well as the other two? Why not assign it the place that belongs to it in the symbolical figure which we have just constructed? But if the self, when it reaches the point O, is already[Pg 179] determined in one direction, there is no use in the other way remaining open, the self cannot take it. And the same rough symbolism which was meant to show the contingency of the action performed, ends, by a natural extension, in proving its absolute necessity.
The activity of the self, where we identify two opposing tendencies, ultimately leads to either X or Y. Since we agree to place the dual activity of the self at point O, we shouldn’t separate this activity from the decision that will result from it, as that decision is an integral part of it. If experience indicates that the choice has favored X, we should not consider the activity at point O as neutral; rather, it is an activity that already leans toward O X, despite any apparent hesitation. Conversely, if observation shows that the choice has favored Y, we must conclude that the activity we pinpointed at point O was inclined toward this second direction, even though there were some shifts back to the first. To claim that the self, when it reaches point O, chooses between X and Y without preference is to only capture part of our continuous activity in which we clearly distinguish two different paths, but which has also already moved on to X or Y. Why not also consider this last point in our symbolic representation? If the self, upon reaching point O, is already inclined in one direction, there’s no point in keeping the other option open, as the self cannot choose it. Thus, the same basic symbolism intended to illustrate the unpredictability of the action taken naturally extends to demonstrate its absolute necessity.
In short, defenders and opponents of free will agree in holding that the action is preceded by a kind of mechanical oscillation between two points X and Y. If I decide in favour of X, the former will tell me: you hesitated and deliberated, therefore Y was possible. The others will answer: you chose X, therefore you had some reason for doing so, and those who declare that Y was equally possible forget this reason: they leave aside one of the conditions of the problem. Now, if I dig deeper underneath these two opposite solutions, I discover a common postulate: both take up their position after the action X has been performed, and represent the process of my voluntary activity by a path Μ Ο which branches off at the point O, the lines Ο X and Ο Y symbolizing the two directions which abstraction distinguishes within the continuous activity of which X is the goal. But while the determinists take account of all that they know, and note that the path Μ Ο X has been traversed, their opponents mean to ignore one of the data with which they have constructed the figure, and after having traced out the lines Ο X and Ο Y, which should together[Pg 180] represent the progress of the activity of the self, they bring back the self to the point Ο to oscillate there until further orders.
In short, both supporters and critics of free will agree that the action is preceded by a kind of mechanical back-and-forth between two points, X and Y. If I choose X, the supporters will say: you hesitated and thought it over, so Y was an option. The critics will respond: you picked X, which means you had a reason for doing so, and those who insist that Y was also possible overlook this reason: they ignore one of the key elements of the problem. Now, if I look deeper into these two opposing views, I find a shared assumption: both positions emerge after the action of X has taken place, and they depict the process of my voluntary activity as a path MO that branches off at point O, with lines OX and OY representing the two directions that abstraction distinguishes within the continuous activity aimed at X. However, while determinists consider all known factors and acknowledge that the path MOX has been traveled, their opponents choose to disregard one of the facts they used to create the diagram, and after outlining the lines OX and OY, which should together[Pg 180] represent the ongoing activity of the self, they revert the self to point O to remain in limbo until further notice.
It should not be forgotten, indeed, that the figure, which is really a splitting of our psychic activity in space, is purely symbolical, and as such, cannot be constructed unless we adopt the hypothesis that our deliberation is finished and our mind made up. If you trace it beforehand, act you assume that you have reached the end and are present in imagination at the final act. In short this figure does not show me the deed in the doing but the deed already done. Do not ask me then whether the self, having traversed the path Μ Ο and decided in favour of X, could or could not choose Y: I should answer that the question is meaningless, because there is no line Μ Ο, no point O, no path Ο X, no direction O Y. To ask such a question is to admit the possibility of adequately representing time by space and a succession by a simultaneity. It is to ascribe to the figure we have traced the value of a description, and not merely of a symbol; it is to believe that it is possible to follow the process of psychic activity on this figure like the march of an army on a map. We have been present at the deliberation of the self in all its phases until the act was performed: then, recapitulating the terms of the series, we perceive succession under the form of simultaneity, we project[Pg 181] time into space, and we base our reasoning, consciously or unconsciously, on this geometrical figure. But this figure represents a thing and not a progress; it corresponds, in its inertness, to a kind of stereotyped memory of the whole process of deliberation and the final decision arrived at: how could it give us the least idea of the concrete movement, the dynamic progress by which the deliberation issued in the act? And yet, once the figure is constructed, we go back in imagination into the past and will have it that our psychic activity has followed exactly the path traced out by the figure. We thus fall into the mistake which has been pointed out above: we give a mechanical explanation of a fact, and then substitute the explanation for the fact itself. Hence we encounter insuperable difficulties from the very beginning: if the two courses were equally possible, how have we made our choice? If only one of them was possible, why did we believe ourselves free? And we do not see that both questions come back to this: Is time space?
It shouldn't be overlooked that the figure, which represents a breakdown of our mental activity in space, is purely symbolic. As such, it can't be constructed unless we assume that our deliberation is complete and our mind is made up. If you outline it in advance, you assume that you’ve come to a conclusion and are imagining the final action. In short, this figure doesn’t show me the action happening but rather the action that’s already completed. So don’t ask me whether the self, having gone from point M to point O and chosen X, could have chosen Y instead: I’d say the question is pointless because there’s no line from M to O, no point O, no path from O to X, and no direction towards Y. Asking such a question implies you believe it’s possible to represent time as if it were space and a sequence as if it were simultaneous. It suggests that the figure we created serves as a description rather than just a symbol; it implies that we can trace the process of mental activity on this figure like following an army’s movements on a map. We've experienced the self's deliberation through all its stages until the action was taken: then, by summarizing the terms of the sequence, we perceive what happened as if it occurred simultaneously, projecting time into space and basing our reasoning—consciously or unconsciously—on this geometric figure. But this figure represents a thing and not a progress; it reflects, in its stillness, a kind of fixed memory of the entire deliberation process and the final decision made. How could it give us any real sense of the actual movement and dynamic progress through which the deliberation led to the act? Yet, once the figure is made, we imagine going back into the past and insist that our mental activity followed exactly the path laid out by this figure. We then fall into the error pointed out earlier: we offer a mechanical explanation of a fact and then confuse the explanation with the fact itself. This leads us to insurmountable difficulties from the start: if both paths were equally possible, how did we make our choice? If only one was possible, why did we believe we were free? And we fail to see that both questions ultimately ask the same thing: Is time space?
If I glance over a road marked on the map and follow it up to a certain point, there is nothing to prevent my turning back and trying to find out whether it branches off anywhere. But time is not a line along which one can pass again. Certainly, once it has elapsed, we are justified in picturing the successive moments as external to one another and in thus thinking[Pg 182] of a line traversing space; but it must then be understood that this line does not symbolize the time which is passing but the time which has passed. Defenders and opponents of free will alike forget this—the former when they assert, and the latter when they deny the possibility of acting differently from what we have done. The former reason thus: "The path is not yet traced out, therefore it may take any direction whatever." To which the answer is: "You forget that it is not possible to speak of a path till the action is performed: but then it will have been traced out." The latter say: "The path has been traced out in such and such a way: therefore its possible direction was not any direction whatever, but only this one direction." To which the answer is: "Before the path was traced out there was no direction, either possible or impossible, for the very simple reason that there could not yet be any question of a path." Get rid of this clumsy symbolism, the idea of which besets you without your knowing it; you will see that the argument of the determinists assumes this puerile form: "The act, once performed, is performed," and that their opponents reply: "The act, before being performed, was not yet performed." In other words, the question of freedom remains after this discussion exactly where it was to begin with; nor must we be surprised at it, since freedom must be sought in a certain shade or quality of the action itself and[Pg 183] not in the relation of this act to what it is not or to what it might have been. All the difficulty arises from the fact that both parties picture the deliberation under the form of an oscillation in space, while it really consists in a dynamic progress in which the self and its motives, like real living beings, are in a constant state of becoming. The self, infallible when it affirms its immediate experiences, feels itself free and says so; but, as soon as it tries to explain its freedom to itself, it no longer perceives itself except by a kind of refraction through space. Hence a symbolism of a mechanical kind, equally incapable of proving, disproving, or illustrating free will.
If I look at a road marked on the map and follow it up to a certain point, nothing stops me from turning back and checking if it branches off anywhere. But time isn’t like a straight line that you can travel along again. Once it’s passed, we can think of the moments as separate from each other, visualizing a line moving through space. But keep in mind that this line doesn’t represent time that’s currently passing, but rather time that has already passed. Both supporters and critics of free will overlook this—the supporters when they argue for it, and the critics when they deny we could have acted differently. The supporters say, “The path isn’t set yet, so it could take any direction.” To which the response is, “You forget that we can’t talk about a path until the action is taken: then it will have been set out.” The critics argue, “The path has been laid out in a specific way: therefore, its possible direction wasn't any direction at all, but only this one.” The response is, “Before the path was established, there was no direction—possible or impossible—because it wasn’t even possible to consider a path yet.” Ditch this awkward symbolism that traps you without you realizing it; you’ll see that the determinists’ argument boils down to: “The act, once done, is done,” while their opponents counter: “The act, before being done, wasn’t done yet.” In other words, the issue of freedom remains unchanged after this discussion; and we shouldn’t be surprised because freedom needs to be found in a particular nuance or quality of the action itself and not in how this act relates to what it isn’t or what it could have been. The difficulty arises because both sides visualize deliberation as a back-and-forth in space, while it’s really a dynamic process where the self and its motives, like living beings, are continually evolving. The self, confident when it acknowledges its immediate experiences, feels free and claims that freedom; but as soon as it tries to explain that freedom to itself, it only sees itself through a distorted lens of space. This leads to a mechanical symbolism that can’t prove, disprove, or explain free will at all.
But determinism will not admit itself beaten, and, putting the question in a new form, it will say: "Let us leave aside actions already performed: let us consider only actions that are to come. The question is whether, knowing from now onwards all the future antecedents, some higher intelligence would not be able to predict with absolute certainty the decision which will result." —We gladly agree to the question being put in these terms: it will give us a chance of stating our own theory with greater precision. But we shall first draw a distinction between those who think that the knowledge of antecedents would enable us to state a probable conclusion and those who speak of an infallible foresight. To say that[Pg 184] a certain friend, under certain circumstances, will very probably act in a certain way, is not so much to predict the future conduct of our friend as to pass a judgment on his present character, that is to say, on his past. Although our feelings, our ideas, our character, are constantly altering, a sudden change is seldom observed; and it is still more seldom that we cannot say of a person whom we know that certain actions seem to accord fairly well with his nature and that certain others are absolutely inconsistent with it. All philosophers will agree on this point; for to say that a given action is consistent or inconsistent with the present character of a person whom one knows is not to bind the future to the present. But the determinist goes much further: he asserts that our solution is provisional simply because we never know all the conditions of the problem: that our forecast would gain in probability in proportion as we were provided with a larger number of these conditions; that, therefore, complete and perfect knowledge of all the antecedents without any exception would make our forecast infallibly true. Such, then, is the hypothesis which we have to examine.
But determinism won't admit defeat, and, reframing the question, it insists: "Let's set aside actions that have already happened and focus only on future actions. The question is whether, knowing all the future causes from now on, some higher intelligence could predict with complete certainty the decision that will follow." —We readily accept the question presented this way, as it allows us to explain our theory with greater clarity. However, we first need to distinguish between those who believe that understanding the causes would enable us to reach a probable conclusion and those who talk about infallible foresight. To say that a certain friend, given particular circumstances, will likely behave in a certain way does not predict our friend's future actions so much as it assesses their current character, which is to say, their past. While our feelings, ideas, and character constantly change, we rarely notice sudden shifts; and it's even rarer that we can't say of someone we know that specific actions align fairly well with their nature while others totally contradict it. All philosophers would agree on this point; stating that a particular action is consistent or inconsistent with the current character of someone we know isn’t the same as tying the future to the present. But the determinist goes much further: they argue that our solution is only temporary because we never know all the variables in the problem; that our predictions would become more likely as we had more information about these variables; and that, therefore, complete and flawless knowledge of all the causes without exception would make our prediction infallibly true. This is the hypothesis we need to examine.
For the sake of greater definiteness, let us imagine a person called upon to make a seemingly free decision under serious circumstances: we shall call him Peter. The question is whether a philosopher Paul, living at the same period as Peter, or, if you[Pg 185] prefer, a few centuries before, would have been able, knowing all the conditions under which Peter acts, to foretell with certainty the choice which Peter made.
For clarity, let's visualize a person faced with a seemingly free decision in serious circumstances: we'll call him Peter. The question is whether a philosopher named Paul, who lived around the same time as Peter, or if you prefer, a few centuries earlier, would have been able to accurately predict the choice Peter made, knowing all the factors influencing Peter's actions.
There are several ways of picturing the mental condition of a person at a given moment. We try to do it when e.g. we read a novel; but whatever care the author may have taken in depicting the feelings of his hero, and even in tracing back his history, the end, foreseen or unforeseen, will add something to the idea which we had formed of the character: the character, therefore, was only imperfectly known to us. In truth, the deeper psychic states, those which are translated by free acts, express and sum up the whole of our past history: if Paul knows all the conditions under which Peter acts, we must suppose that no detail of Peter's life escapes him, and that his imagination reconstructs and even lives over again Peter's history. But we must here make a vital distinction. When I myself pass through a certain psychic state, I know exactly the intensity of this state and its importance in relation to the others, not by measurement or comparison, but because the intensity of e.g. a deep-seated feeling is nothing else than the feeling itself. On the other hand, if I try to give you an account of this psychic state, I shall be unable to make you realize its intensity except by some definite sign of a mathematical kind: I shall have to measure its importance, compare it with what goes before and[Pg 186] what follows, in short determine the part which it plays in the final act. And I shall say that it is more or less intense, more or less important, according as the final act is explained by it or apart from it. On the other hand, for my own consciousness, which perceived this inner state, there was no need of a comparison of this kind: the intensity was given to it as an inexpressible quality of the state itself. In other words, the intensity of a psychic state is not given to consciousness as a special sign accompanying this state and denoting its power, like an exponent in algebra; we have shown above that it expresses rather its shade, its characteristic colouring, and that, if it is a question of a feeling, for example, its intensity consists in being felt. Hence we have to distinguish two ways of assimilating the conscious states of other people: the one dynamic, which consists in experiencing them oneself; the other static, which consists in substituting for the consciousness of these states their image or rather their intellectual symbol, their idea. In this case the conscious states are imagined instead of being reproduced; but, then, to the image of the psychic states themselves some indication of their intensity should be added, since they no longer act on the person in whose mind they are pictured and the latter has no longer any chance of experiencing their force by actually feeling them. Now, this indication itself will necessarily assume a quantitative character: it will be pointed out, for[Pg 187] example, that a certain feeling has more strength than another feeling, that it is necessary to take more account of it, that it has played a greater part; and how could this be known unless the later history of the person were known in advance, with the precise actions in which this multiplicity of states or inclinations has issued? Therefore, if Paul is to have an adequate idea of Peter's state at any moment of his history, there are only two courses open; either, like a novelist who knows whither he is conducting his characters, Paul must already know Peter's final act, and must thus be able to supplement his mental image of the successive states through which Peter is going to pass by some indication of their value in relation to the whole of Peter's history; or he must make up his mind to pass through these different states, not in imagination, but in reality. The former hypothesis must be put on one side since the very point at issue is whether, the antecedents alone being given, Paul will be able to foresee the final act. We find ourselves compelled, therefore, to alter radically the idea which we had formed of Paul: he is not, as we had thought at first, a spectator whose eyes pierce the future, but an actor who plays Peter's part in advance. And notice that you cannot exempt him from any detail of this part, for the most common-place events have their importance in a life-story; and even supposing that they have not, you cannot decide that they are insignificant except in[Pg 188] relation to the final act, which, by hypothesis, is not given. Neither have you the right to cut short—were it only by a second—the different states of consciousness through which Paul is going to pass before Peter; for the effects of the same feeling, for example, go on accumulating at every moment of duration, and the sum total of these effects could not be realized all at once unless one knew the importance of the feeling, taken in its totality, in relation to the final act, which is the very thing that is supposed to remain unknown. But if Peter and Paul have experienced the same feelings in the same order, if their minds have the same history, how will you distinguish one from the other? Will it be by the body in which they dwell? They would then always differ in some respect, viz., that at no moment of their history would they have a mental picture of the same body. Will it be by the place which they occupy in time? In that case they would no longer be present at the same events: now, by hypothesis, they have the same past and the same present, having the same experience. You must now make up your mind about it: Peter and Paul are one and the same person, whom you call Peter when he acts and Paul when you recapitulate his history. The more complete you made the sum of the conditions which, when known, would have enabled you to predict Peter's future action, the closer became your grasp of his existence and the nearer you came to living his life over again[Pg 189] down to its smallest details: you thus reached the very moment when, the action taking place, there was no longer anything to be foreseen, but only something to be done. Here again any attempt to reconstruct ideally an act really willed ends in the mere witnessing of the act whilst it is being performed or when it is already done.
There are several ways to picture someone's mental state at any given moment. We often try to do this when we read a novel; but no matter how carefully the author portrays the feelings of the main character and outlines their backstory, the outcome—whether expected or not—will add something to our understanding of that character: we only have an incomplete picture of who they are. In reality, deeper psychological states, those reflected in our actions, encompass our entire past. If Paul understands all the influences behind Peter's actions, then we must assume that he knows every detail of Peter's life and that he imagines and even relives Peter's experiences. However, a crucial distinction must be made. When I personally experience a certain mental state, I can precisely gauge its intensity and significance relative to other states, not through measurement or comparison, but because the intensity of, say, a profound feeling is the feeling itself. On the flip side, if I try to explain this mental state to you, I can only convey its intensity through some concrete, measurable reference: I would have to rank its significance and compare it with what came before and what follows, ultimately determining its role in the final outcome. I would describe it as more or less intense, more or less significant, depending on whether the final act is influenced by it or stands alone. For my own awareness, which registers this internal state, no such comparison is necessary: the intensity is inherent, an inexpressible quality of the state itself. In other words, the depth of a mental state isn’t presented to our awareness as a specific sign denoting its strength, like an exponent in math; instead, it reflects its nuance, its unique flavor, and if it’s about a feeling, its intensity lies in being experienced. Therefore, we must differentiate two ways of understanding others’ conscious states: the first is dynamic, which involves directly experiencing them; the second is static, which replaces the awareness of these states with their image or, more accurately, their conceptual symbol, their idea. In this scenario, the conscious states are imagined rather than reproduced; however, to this mental image of the states themselves, some indication of their intensity must be added since they no longer have an effect on the person picturing them, and that person cannot experience their power through actual feeling. Subsequently, this indication will inevitably have a quantitative aspect: it will be noted, for[Pg 187] instance, that one feeling is stronger than another, that it deserves more attention, that it plays a larger role; and how could we know this unless we already understood the person's later story, including the specific actions that emerge from this variety of states or tendencies? Thus, for Paul to comprehend Peter's state at any moment in his story, he only has two options: either, like a novelist aware of the direction his characters are heading, Paul must already know Peter's final outcome and, therefore, be able to enhance his mental image of the different states Peter will undergo with details of their significance in relation to Peter's overall story; or he must decide to experience these different states, not just mentally but in reality. The former possibility must be set aside since the critical question is whether, based solely on what came before, Paul can predict the final outcome. Therefore, we are compelled to fundamentally change our initial perception of Paul: he is not, as we originally assumed, a spectator who gazes into the future, but rather an actor who preempts Peter's role. Moreover, you cannot exempt him from any detail of this role, as even the most mundane events hold value in a life's story; and even if they seem insignificant, you cannot deem them so without relating them to the final outcome, which, by assumption, is not given. You also can't rush—if only by a second—the various states of consciousness through which Paul will navigate before Peter; the effects of the same feeling, for example, accumulate with every moment, and the total of these effects couldn't be fully understood all at once unless one grasped the overall significance of the feeling concerning the final outcome, which is precisely what is presumed to be unknown. But if Peter and Paul have undergone the same feelings in the same order, if their minds share the same history, how can you tell them apart? Will it be by the bodies they inhabit? They would then always differ in some way, as at no point in their journeys would they hold a mental image of the same body. Will it be by their places in time? In that scenario, they would no longer attend the same events: yet, by hypothesis, they share the same past and present, experiencing the same things. You must decide: Peter and Paul are essentially the same person, referred to as Peter when he acts and as Paul when you summarize his life story. The more you complete the list of conditions that would, if known, allow you to predict Peter's future actions, the better you grasp his existence and the closer you get to reliving his life in minute detail: you reach the exact moment when, as the action unfolds, there's nothing left to predict, only something to do. Here too, any attempt to ideate an act that is genuinely willed results in merely witnessing the act while it’s happening or after it is already performed.
Hence it is a question devoid of meaning to ask: Could or could not the act be foreseen, given the sum total of its antecedents? For there are two ways of assimilating these antecedents, the one dynamic the other static. In the first case we shall be led by imperceptible steps to identify ourselves with the person we are dealing with, to pass through the same series of states, and thus to get back to the very moment at which the act is performed; hence there can no longer be any question of foreseeing it. In the second case, we presuppose the final act by the mere fact of annexing to the qualitative description of the previous states the quantitative appreciation of their importance. Here again the one party is led merely to realize that the act is not yet performed when it is to be performed, and the other, that when performed it is performed. This, like the previous discussion, leaves the question of freedom exactly where it was to begin with.
So, it's pointless to ask: Could the action have been predicted based on everything that led up to it? There are two ways to understand these factors: one is dynamic and the other is static. In the dynamic case, we gradually align ourselves with the person involved, experiencing the same series of states, and ultimately reaching the exact moment when the action takes place; therefore, predicting it becomes irrelevant. In the static case, we assume the final action simply by attaching a quantitative value to the importance of the earlier states. Again, one side realizes that the action hasn't happened yet when it's supposed to happen, and the other acknowledges that once it happens, it has happened. This, like the previous discussion, leaves the question of freedom just as it was to begin with.
By going deeper into this twofold argument, we[Pg 190] shall find, at its very root, the two fundamental illusions of the reflective consciousness. The first consists in regarding: intensity as a mathematical property of psychic states and not, as we said at the beginning of this essay, as a special quality, as a particular shade of these various states. The second consists in substituting for the concrete reality or dynamic progress, which consciousness perceives, the material symbol of this progress when it has already reached its end, that is to say, of the act already accomplished together with the series of its antecedents. Certainly, once the final act is completed, I can ascribe to all the antecedents their proper value, and picture the interplay of these various elements as a conflict or a composition of forces. But to ask whether, the antecedents being known as well as their value, one could foretell the final act, is to beg the question; it is to forget that we cannot know the value of the antecedents without knowing the final act, which is the very thing that is not yet known; it is to suppose wrongly that the symbolical diagram which we draw in our own way for representing the action when completed has been drawn by the action itself whilst progressing, and drawn by it in an automatic manner.
By exploring this two-part argument more deeply, we[Pg 190] will uncover, at its core, the two main misconceptions of reflective consciousness. The first misconception is seeing intensity as a mathematical characteristic of mental states instead of, as we mentioned at the start of this essay, recognizing it as a unique quality, a specific nuance of these different states. The second misconception is replacing the actual reality or dynamic development that consciousness observes with the material representation of this progress after it has already been completed, meaning the act that has already occurred along with its preceding elements. Certainly, once the final act is done, I can assign the correct value to all the preceding elements and visualize the interaction of these various components as either a conflict or a combination of forces. However, to ask whether, with the antecedents and their values known, one could predict the final act is to miss the point; it's to overlook the fact that we cannot understand the value of the antecedents without knowing the final act, which is exactly what we do not yet know; it's to mistakenly assume that the symbolic diagram we create to represent the action once completed was drawn by the action itself as it was happening, and that it was done automatically.
Now, in these two illusions themselves a third one is involved, and you will see that the question whether the act could or could not be foreseen always comes back to this: Is time space?[Pg 191] You begin by setting side by side in some ideal space the conscious states which succeed one another in Peter's mind, and you perceive his life as a kind of path Μ Ο X Y traced out by a moving body M in space. You then blot out in thought the part Ο X Y of this curve, and you inquire whether, knowing Μ Ο, you would have been able to determine the portion Ο X of the curve which the moving body describes beyond O.
Now, within these two illusions, there's a third one at play, and you'll notice that the question of whether the act could be predicted always comes back to this: Is time space?[Pg 191] You start by placing side by side in some ideal space the conscious states that follow one another in Peter's mind, and you see his life as a sort of path Μ Ο X Y drawn out by a moving body M in space. Then, you imagine erasing the part Ο X Y of this curve, and you ask whether, knowing Μ Ο, you would have been able to figure out the segment Ο X of the curve that the moving body covers beyond O.

Such is, in the main, the question which you put when you bring in a philosopher Paul, who lives before Peter and has to picture to himself the conditions under which Peter will act. You thus materialize these conditions; you make the time to come into a road already marked out across the plain, which we can contemplate from the top of the mountain, even if we have not traversed it and are never to do so. But, now, you soon notice that the knowledge of the part Μ Ο of the curve would not be enough, unless you were shown the position of the points of this line, not only in relation to one another, but also in relation to the points of the whole line Μ O X Y; which would amount to being given in advance the very elements which have to be determined. So you then alter your hypothesis; you realize that time does not require to be seen, but to be lived; and hence you conclude that, if your knowledge of the line Μ Ο was not[Pg 192] a sufficient datum, the reason must have been that you looked at it from the outside instead of identifying yourself with the point M, which describes not only Μ Ο but also the whole curve, and thus making its movement your own. Therefore, you persuade Paul to come and coincide with Peter; and naturally, then, it is the line Μ Ο X Y which Paul traces out in space, since, by hypothesis, Peter describes this line. But in no wise do you prove thus that Paul foresaw Peter's action; you only show that Peter acted in the way he did, since Paul became Peter. It is true that you then come back, unwittingly, to your former hypothesis, because you continually confuse the line Μ Ο X Y in its tracing with the line Μ Ο X Y already traced, that is to say, time with space. After causing Paul to come down and identify himself with Peter as long as was required, you let him go up again and resume his former post of observation. No wonder if he then perceives the line Μ Ο X Y complete: he himself has just been completing it.
The main question you're asking comes up when you bring in a philosopher named Paul, who lives before Peter and needs to imagine the conditions under which Peter will act. You make these conditions tangible; you turn the future into a path already laid out across the landscape, which we can view from a mountaintop, even if we haven’t walked it and might never do so. However, you quickly realize that knowing the part Μ Ο of the curve isn’t enough unless you can see how the points on this line relate to each other and also to the points on the whole line Μ O X Y; that would mean having in advance the very details that need to be figured out. So, you change your hypothesis; you understand that time doesn’t just need to be observed, but lived. Hence, you conclude that if your knowledge of the line Μ Ο wasn’t a sufficient basis, it’s because you were looking at it from the outside instead of putting yourself in position M, which represents not just Μ Ο but also the entire curve, and thus making its movement your own. So, you convince Paul to come and merge his perspective with Peter’s; and naturally, it’s the line Μ Ο X Y that Paul maps out in space, since, by hypothesis, Peter follows this line. But this doesn’t prove that Paul foresaw Peter’s actions; you only demonstrate that Peter acted as he did because Paul became Peter. It’s true that you then inadvertently return to your original hypothesis, because you often confuse the line Μ Ο X Y during its mapping with the line Μ Ο X Y that’s already been mapped, in other words, time with space. After bringing Paul down to identify with Peter for as long as needed, you then let him go back up and resume his previous observational position. It’s no surprise that he then sees the line Μ Ο X Y as complete: he has just finished it himself.
What makes the confusion a natural and almost an unavoidable one is that science seems to point to many cases where we do anticipate the future. Do we not determine beforehand the conjunctions of heavenly bodies, solar and lunar eclipses, in short the greater number of astronomical phenomena? Does not, then, the human intellect embrace in the present moment immense intervals of duration still to come? No doubt it does; but an anticipation[Pg 193] of this kind has not the slightest resemblance to the anticipation of a voluntary act. Indeed, as we shall see, the reasons which render it possible to foretell an astronomical phenomenon are the very ones which prevent us from determining in advance an act which springs from our free activity. For the future of the material universe, although contemporaneous with the future of a conscious being, has no analogy to it.
What makes the confusion natural and almost unavoidable is that science seems to show many cases where we can predict the future. Don't we determine in advance the alignments of celestial bodies, solar and lunar eclipses, and many other astronomical events? Doesn't the human mind, in the present moment, grasp vast stretches of time still to come? Certainly, it does; but this kind of anticipation is nothing like the anticipation of a voluntary action. In fact, as we will see, the reasons that allow us to predict an astronomical phenomenon are the same ones that stop us from pinpointing a future act that comes from our free will. The future of the material universe, even though it coincides with the future of a conscious being, is not comparable to it.
In order to put our finger on this vital difference, let us assume for a moment that some mischievous illustration genius, more powerful still than the mischievous genius conjured up by Descartes decreed that all the movements of the universe should go twice as fast. There would be no change in astronomical phenomena, or at any rate in the equations which enable us to foresee them, for in these equations the symbol t does not stand for a duration, but for a relation between two durations, for a certain number of units of time, in short, for a certain number of simultaneities: these simultaneities, these coincidences would still take place in equal number: only the intervals which separate them would have diminished, but these intervals never make their appearance in our calculations. Now these intervals are just duration lived, duration which our consciousness perceives, and our consciousness would soon inform us of a shortening of the day if we had not experienced the usual amount of duration between sunrise and[Pg 194] sunset. No doubt it would not measure this shortening, and perhaps it would not even perceive it immediately as a change of quantity; but it would realize in some way or other a decline in the usual storing up of experience, a change in the progress usually accomplished between sunrise and sunset.
To understand this key difference, let’s imagine for a moment that some clever illustration genius, even more powerful than the tricky genius imagined by Descartes, decided that all movements in the universe should happen twice as fast. There wouldn't be any changes in astronomical phenomena, or at least in the calculations that help us predict them, because in these calculations the symbol t doesn’t represent a duration, but a relationship between two durations, or a certain number of time units, in short, a certain number of simultaneities: these simultaneities, these coincidences would still happen in the same amount; only the time intervals separating them would be shorter, but these intervals never appear in our calculations. Now, these intervals represent duration lived, the duration that our consciousness perceives, and our consciousness would quickly let us know if the day got shorter, if we hadn't experienced the usual amount of time between sunrise and[Pg 194] sunset. Of course, it might not measure this shortening, and maybe it wouldn’t even notice it right away as a change in quantity; but it would somehow recognize a reduction in the usual accumulation of experiences, a change in what typically happens between sunrise and sunset.
Now, when an astronomer foretells e.g. a lunar eclipse, he merely exercises in his own way the power which we have ascribed to our mischievous genius. He decrees that time shall go ten times, a hundred times, a thousand times as fast, and he has a right to do so, since all that he thus changes is the nature of the conscious intervals, and since these intervals, by hypothesis, do not enter into the calculations. Therefore, into a psychological duration of a few seconds he may put several years, even several centuries of astronomical time: that is his procedure when he traces in advance the path of a heavenly body or represents it by an equation. What he does is nothing but establishing a series of relations of position between this body and other given bodies, a series of simultaneities and coincidences, a series of numerical relations: as for duration properly so called, it remains outside the calculation and could only be perceived by a consciousness capable of living through the intervals and, in fact, living the intervals themselves, instead of merely perceiving their extremities. Indeed it is even conceivable that this[Pg 195] consciousness could live so slow and lazy a life as to take in the whole path of the heavenly body in a single perception, just as we do when we perceive the successive positions of a shooting star as one line of fire. Such a consciousness would find itself really in the same conditions in which the astronomer places himself ideally; it would see in the present what the astronomer perceives in the future. In truth, if the latter foresees a future phenomenon, it is only on condition of making it to a certain extent a present phenomenon, or at least of enormously reducing the interval which separates us from it. In short, the time of which we speak in astronomy is a number, and the nature of the units of this number cannot be specified in our calculations; we may therefore assume them to be as small as we please, provided that the same hypothesis is extended to the whole series of operations, and that the successive relations of position in space are thus preserved. We shall then be present in imagination at the phenomenon we wish to foretell; we shall know exactly at what point in space and after how many units of time this phenomenon takes place; if we then restore to these units their psychical nature, we shall thrust the event again into the future and say that we have foreseen it, when in reality we have seen it.
Now, when an astronomer predicts, for example, a lunar eclipse, he is simply using the ability that we attribute to our clever imagination. He decides that time should move ten times, a hundred times, a thousand times faster, and he has the right to do this since all he's changing is the character of the conscious intervals, which, by assumption, don't factor into the calculations. So, within a psychological duration of a few seconds, he can fit several years, even several centuries of astronomical time: that's his approach when he maps out the path of a celestial body or describes it with an equation. What he's doing is really establishing a series of positional relationships between this body and other known bodies, a series of simultaneous events and coincidences, a series of numerical relationships: as for actual duration, it remains outside the calculation and could only be experienced by a consciousness capable of living through those intervals and, in fact, experiencing the intervals themselves, instead of just perceiving their endpoints. It's possible that this[Pg 195] consciousness could live such a slow and leisurely life that it could take in the entire path of the celestial body in one perception, just like we do when we see the successive positions of a shooting star as a single streak of light. Such a consciousness would find itself in the same conditions that the astronomer ideally places himself in; it would see in the present what the astronomer perceives in the future. In reality, if the astronomer anticipates a future event, it’s only on the condition that he makes it, to some extent, a present event or at least dramatically shortens the gap that separates us from it. In short, the time we're talking about in astronomy is a number, and the specific nature of the units of this number cannot be defined in our calculations; we can therefore consider them as small as we want, as long as the same assumption is applied to the entire series of operations, and the successive positional relationships in space are preserved. We then imagine ourselves present at the event we want to predict; we know exactly where in space and after how many time units this event occurs; if we then restore these units to their psychological nature, we will push the event back into the future and say that we have predicted it, when in reality we have already seen it.
But these units of time which make up living duration, and which the astronomer can dispose of as he pleases because they give no handle to[Pg 196] science, are just what concern the psychologist, for psychology deals with the intervals themselves and not with their extremities. Certainly pure consciousness does not perceive time as a sum of units of duration: left to itself, it has no means and even no reason to measure time; but a feeling which lasted only half the number of days, for example, would no longer be the same feeling for it; it would lack thousands of impressions which gradually thickened its substance and altered its colour. True, when we give this feeling a certain name, when we treat it as a thing, we believe that we can diminish its duration by half, for example, and also halve the duration of all the rest of our history: it seems that it would still be the same life, only on a reduced scale. But we forget that states of consciousness are processes, and not things; that if we denote them each by a single word, it is for the convenience of language; that they are alive and therefore constantly changing; that, in consequence, it is impossible to cut off a moment from them without making them poorer by the loss of some impression, and thus altering their quality. I quite understand that the orbit of a planet might be perceived all at once or in a very short time, because its successive positions or the results of its movement are the only things that matter, and not the duration of the equal intervals which separate them. But when we have to do with a feeling, it has no precise[Pg 197] result except its having been felt; and, to estimate this result adequately, it would be necessary to have gone through all the phases of the feeling itself and to have taken up the same duration. Even if this feeling has finally issued in some definite action, which might be compared to the definite position of a planet in space, the knowledge of this act will hardly enable us to estimate the influence of the feeling on the whole of a life-story, and it is this very influence which we want to know. All foreseeing is in reality seeing, and this seeing takes place when we can reduce as much as we please an interval of future time while preserving the relation of its parts to one another, as happens in the case of astronomical predictions. But what does reducing an interval of time mean, except emptying or impoverishing the conscious states which fill it? And does not the very possibility of seeing an astronomical period in miniature thus imply the impossibility of modifying a psychological series in the same way, since it is only by taking this psychological series as an invariable basis that we shall be able to make an astronomical period vary arbitrarily as regards the unit of duration?
But these time units that make up our lives, which astronomers can manipulate as they wish because they don't hold any significance for science, are exactly what psychologists focus on. Psychology looks at the intervals themselves, not their endpoints. Pure consciousness doesn’t perceive time as a simple collection of duration units; if left alone, it has no way or even reason to measure time. For instance, a feeling that lasted only half the days wouldn't be the same feeling; it would lack thousands of impressions that gradually built up its substance and changed its quality. True, when we name this feeling and treat it as an object, we might think we can cut its duration in half, along with all the other parts of our history. It seems like it would still be the same life, just on a smaller scale. But we forget that states of consciousness are processes, not objects; that if we label them with a single word, it's just for convenience in language; that they're alive and constantly changing; and as a result, it's impossible to remove a moment from them without losing some impression and thus altering their quality. I completely understand that we might perceive a planet's orbit all at once or in a brief moment, because its successive positions or the results of its movement are what matter, not the equal intervals that separate them. However, when dealing with a feeling, it has no specific result other than the fact that it was felt, and to accurately assess this result, one would need to experience all the phases of the feeling itself and undergo the same duration. Even if this feeling eventually leads to a specific action, akin to the definite position of a planet in space, knowing about this act won't really help us understand the influence of the feeling on the entirety of a life story, and that's the influence we want to know. All foresight is really just seeing, and this seeing occurs when we can minimize a period of future time while keeping the relationships between its components intact, like what happens in astronomical predictions. But what does it mean to reduce a time interval other than to empty or impoverish the conscious states that fill it? Doesn't the very possibility of viewing an astronomical period in miniature suggest that we can't modify a psychological sequence in the same way, since it's only by treating that psychological sequence as a constant base that we can make an astronomical period vary arbitrarily concerning the unit of duration?
Thus, when we ask whether a future action could have been foreseen, we unwittingly identify that time with which we have to do in the exact sciences, and which is reducible to a number, with real duration, whose so-called quantity is really a quality,[Pg 198] and which we cannot curtail by an instant without altering the nature of the facts which fill it. No doubt the identification is made easier by the fact that in a large number of cases we are justified in dealing with real duration as with astronomical time. Thus, when we call to mind the past, i.e. a series of deeds done, we always shorten it, without however distorting the nature of the event which interests us. The reason is that we know it already; for the psychic state, when it reaches the end of the progress which constitutes its very existence, becomes a thing which one can picture to oneself all at once. Here we find ourselves in the same position as the astronomer, when he takes in at a glance the orbit which a planet will need several years to traverse. In fact, astronomical prediction should be compared with the recollection of the past state of consciousness, not with the anticipation of the future one. But when we have to determine a future state of consciousness, however superficial it may be, we can no longer view the antecedents in a static condition as things; we must view them in a dynamic condition as processes, since we are concerned with their influence alone. Now their duration is this very influence. Therefore it will no longer do to shorten future duration in order to picture its parts beforehand; one is bound to live this duration whilst it is unfolding. As far as deep-seated psychic states are concerned, there is no perceptible difference between foreseeing, seeing, and acting.
So, when we ask if a future action could have been predicted, we unknowingly connect it to the time we deal with in the exact sciences, which can be quantified as a number, with real duration. This so-called quantity is actually a quality,[Pg 198] and we can't shorten it by a moment without changing the nature of the facts that fill that time. It's easier to make this connection because, in many cases, we can treat real duration like astronomical time. So, when we think about the past, which is just a series of actions completed, we often condense it without distorting the nature of the event we're interested in. This is because we already know it; when a mental state reaches the end of the progress that constitutes its existence, it becomes a thing that we can visualize all at once. We find ourselves in the same position as an astronomer who can quickly take in the orbit that a planet will take years to complete. In fact, astronomical predictions should be compared to recalling past states of consciousness, not to anticipating future ones. But when we need to determine a future state of consciousness, no matter how trivial, we can no longer see the previous states as static objects; we must see them as dynamic processes because we're only interested in their influence. And that duration is that very influence. So, we can't simply shorten future duration to picture its parts in advance; we have to experience this duration as it unfolds. For deep-rooted mental states, there is no noticeable difference between foreseeing, seeing, and acting.
Only one course will remain open to the determinist. He will probably give up asserting the possibility of foreseeing a certain future act or state of consciousness, but will maintain that every act is determined by its psychic antecedents, or, in other words, that the facts of consciousness, went, the phenomena of nature, are subject to laws. This way of arguing means, at bottom, that he will leave out the particular features of the concrete psychic states, lest he find himself confronted by phenomena which defy all symbolical representation and therefore all anticipation. The particular nature of these phenomena is thus thrust out of sight, but it is asserted that, being phenomena, they must remain subject to the law of causality. Now, it is argued, this law means that every phenomenon is determined by its conditions, or, in other words, that the same causes produce the same effects. Either, then, the act is inseparably bound to its antecedents, or the principle of causality admits of an incomprehensible exception.
Only one option will be left for the determinist. He will likely stop claiming that it's possible to predict a specific future action or state of mind, but he will argue that every action is determined by its psychological background, or, in other words, that the facts of consciousness and the phenomena of nature are governed by laws. This line of reasoning basically means that he will ignore the unique aspects of specific psychological states, so he doesn’t have to face phenomena that elude any symbolic representation and thus any prediction. The unique nature of these phenomena is therefore overlooked, but it’s claimed that, being phenomena, they must still be subject to the law of causality. Now, it's argued that this law means that every phenomenon is determined by its conditions, or, in other words, that the same causes produce the same effects. So, either the action is inextricably linked to its background, or the principle of causality allows for an inexplicable exception.
This last form of the determinist argument differs less than might be thought from all the others which have been examined above. To say that the same inner causes will reproduce the same effects is to assume that the same cause can appear a second time on the stage of consciousness. Now, if duration is what we say, deep-seated[Pg 200] psychic states are radically heterogeneous to each other, and it is impossible that any two of them should be quite alike, since they are two different moments of a life-story. While the external object does not bear the mark of the time that has elapsed and thus, in spite of the difference of time, the physicist can again encounter identical elementary conditions, duration is something real for the consciousness which preserves the trace of it, and we cannot here speak of identical conditions, because the same moment does not occur twice. It is no use arguing that, even if there are no two deep-seated psychic states which are altogether alike, yet analysis would resolve these different states into more general and homogeneous elements which might be compared with each other. This would be to forget that even the simplest psychic elements possess a personality and a life of their own, however superficial they may be; they are in a constant state of becoming, and the same feeling, by the mere fact of being repeated, is a new feeling. Indeed, we have no reason for calling it by its former name save that it corresponds to the same external cause or projects itself outwardly into similar attitudes: hence it would simply be begging the question to deduce from the so-called likeness of two conscious states that the same cause produces the same effect. In short, if the causal relation still holds good in the realm of inner states, it cannot resemble in any way what we call[Pg 201] causality in nature. For the physicist, the same cause always produces the same effect: for a psychologist who does not let himself be misled by merely apparent analogies, a deep-seated inner cause produces its effect once for all and will never reproduce it. And if it is now asserted that this effect was inseparably bound up with this particular cause, such an assertion will mean one of two things: either that, the antecedents being given, the future action might have been foreseen; or that, the action having once been performed, any other actionals seen, under the given conditions, to have been impossible. Now we saw that both these assertions were equally meaningless, and that they also involved a false conception of duration.
This last version of the determinist argument is less different from the others we've looked at than you might think. To claim that the same inner causes will lead to the same effects assumes that the same cause can show up again in our awareness. If we consider duration as we do, then deep-seated psychic states are fundamentally different from each other, making it impossible for any two of them to be exactly alike, since they represent two different moments in a life story. While the external object doesn’t show the passage of time and thus, despite the time difference, a physicist can encounter the same basic conditions again, duration is something real for our consciousness, which retains its trace. In this context, we can't talk about identical conditions because the same moment doesn’t happen twice. It’s pointless to argue that, even if there are no two deep-seated psychic states that are completely alike, analysis could break these different states down into broader, more uniform elements for comparison. This forgets that even the simplest psychic elements have their own personality and life, no matter how shallow; they are always changing, and the same feeling, just by being repeated, is a new feeling. In fact, there’s no reason to call it by its previous name except for the fact that it corresponds to the same external cause or expresses itself in similar ways: thus, it would simply be question-begging to conclude from the so-called similarity of two conscious states that the same cause produces the same effect. In short, if the causal relationship still applies to inner states, it cannot resemble the causality we observe in nature. For physicists, the same cause always leads to the same effect; for a psychologist who doesn’t get misled by misleading similarities, a deep-seated inner cause produces its effect once and will not reproduce it. If it's now claimed that this effect was inextricably linked to this specific cause, this claim will mean one of two things: either that, given the prior conditions, the future action could have been predicted; or that, after performing that action, any other actions under the same conditions would have been deemed impossible. We already established that both assertions are equally meaningless and reflect a flawed understanding of duration.
Nevertheless it will be worth while to dwell on this latter form of the determinist argument, even though it be only to explain from our point of view the meaning of the two words "determination" and "causality." In vain do we argue that there cannot be any question either of foreseeing a future action in the way that an astronomical phenomenon is foreseen, or of asserting, when once an action is done, that any other action would have been impossible under the given conditions. In vain do we add that, even when it takes this form: "The same causes produce the same effects," the principle of universal determination loses every shred of meaning in the inner world of conscious states. The determinist will perhaps[Pg 202] yield to our arguments on each of these three points in particular, will admit that in the psychical field one cannot ascribe any of these three meanings to the word determination, will probably fail to discover a fourth meaning, and yet will go on repeating that the act is inseparably bound up with its antecedents. We thus find ourselves here confronted by so deep-seated a misapprehension and so obstinate a prejudice that we cannot get the better of them without attacking them at their root, which is the principle of causality. By analysing the concept of cause, we shall show the ambiguity which it involves, and, though not aiming at a formal definition of freedom, we shall perhaps get beyond the purely negative idea of it which we have framed up to the present.
However, it’s worthwhile to focus on this latter form of the determinist argument, even if it’s just to clarify the meanings of the two terms "determination" and "causality" from our perspective. It’s pointless to argue that we cannot predict a future action the same way we predict an astronomical event, or to claim that once an action has occurred, no other action could have happened under the given conditions. It’s also pointless to point out that, even when framed as "The same causes produce the same effects," the principle of universal determination loses all significance in the inner world of conscious experiences. The determinist might, perhaps[Pg 202] concede to our arguments on each of these three specific points, acknowledge that we cannot assign any of these three meanings to the word determination in the psychological realm, and probably struggle to find a fourth meaning, yet will continue to insist that the act is inextricably linked to its antecedents. We thus face a deeply rooted misunderstanding and stubborn prejudice that we cannot overcome without addressing them at their core, which is the principle of causality. By examining the concept of cause, we will reveal the ambiguity it carries, and though we do not aim to provide a formal definition of freedom, we may go beyond the purely negative idea of it that we have formed until now.
We perceive physical phenomena, and these phenomena obey laws. This means: (i) that phenomena a, b, c, d, previously perceived, can occur again in the same shape; (2) that a certain phenomenon P, which appeared after the conditions a, b, c, d, and after these conditions only, will not fail to recur as soon as the same conditions are again present. If the principle of causality told us nothing more, as the empiricists claim, we should willingly grant these philosophers that their principle is derived from experience; but it would no longer prove anything against our freedom. For it would then be understood that definite antecedents give rise to a[Pg 203] definite consequent wherever experience shows us this regular succession; but the question is whether this regularity is found in the domain of consciousness too, and that is the whole problem of free will. We grant you for a moment that the principle of causality is nothing but the summing up of the uniform and unconditional successions observed in the past: by what right, then, do you apply it to those deep-seated states of consciousness in which no regular succession has yet been discovered, since the attempt to foresee them ever fails? And how can you base on this principle your argument to prove the determinism of inner states, when, according to you, the determinism of observed facts is the sole source of the principle itself? In truth, when the empiricists make use of the principle of causality to disprove human freedom, they take the word cause in a new meaning, which is the very meaning given to it by common sense.
We observe physical phenomena, and these phenomena follow certain laws. This means: (i) that phenomena a, b, c, d, which we have seen before, can happen again in the same form; (2) that a particular phenomenon P, which occurs after conditions a, b, c, d, and only after them, will definitely happen again as soon as the same conditions are present. If the principle of causality taught us nothing more, as the empiricists argue, we would readily agree that their principle comes from experience; however, it would not prove anything against our freedom. It would simply mean that specific antecedents lead to a[Pg 203] specific consequent whenever experience shows us this consistent pattern; but the real question is whether this consistency exists in the realm of consciousness as well, and that is the entire issue of free will. For a moment, let's accept that the principle of causality is just a summary of the uniform and unconditional sequences we've observed in the past: by what authority, then, do you apply it to those deep-rooted states of consciousness where no consistent sequence has been found yet, especially since attempts to predict them always fail? And how can you use this principle to argue for the determinism of inner states when, according to you, the determinism of observed facts is the only basis for the principle itself? In reality, when empiricists use the principle of causality to argue against human freedom, they redefine the word cause in a way that aligns with common sense.
To assert the regular succession of two phenomena is, indeed, to recognize that, the first being given, we already catch sight of the second. But this wholly subjective connexion between two ideas is not enough for common sense. It seems to common sense that, if the idea of the second phenomenon is already implied in that of the first, the second phenomenon itself must exist objectively, in some way or other, within the first phenomenon. And common sense was bound to come to this conclusion, because to distinguish exactly[Pg 204] between an objective connexion of phenomena and a subjective association between their ideas presupposes a fairly high degree of philosophical culture. We thus pass imperceptibly from the first meaning to the second, and we picture the causal relation as a kind of prefiguring of the future phenomenon in its present conditions. Now this prefiguring can be understood in two very different ways, and it is just here that the ambiguity begins.
To assert the regular succession of two phenomena is to recognize that, once the first is established, we can already anticipate the second. However, this completely subjective connection between two ideas isn’t sufficient for common sense. Common sense suggests that if the idea of the second phenomenon is already implied in the first, then the second phenomenon itself must exist in some form within the first phenomenon. Common sense was bound to reach this conclusion because distinguishing between an objective connection of phenomena and a subjective association of their ideas requires a fairly advanced level of philosophical understanding. Thus, we move seamlessly from the first meaning to the second, envisioning the causal relationship as a kind of foresight of the future phenomenon in its present conditions. Now, this foresight can be understood in two very different ways, and it’s precisely here that the ambiguity begins.
In the first place, mathematics furnishes us with one type of this kind of prefiguring. The very movement by which we draw the circumference of a circle on a sheet of paper generates all the mathematical properties of this figure: in this sense an unlimited number of theorems can be said to pre-exist within the definition, although they will be spread out in duration for the mathematician who deduces them. It is true that we are here in the realm of pure quantity and that, as geometrical properties can be expressed in the form of equations, it is easy to understand how the original equation, expressing the fundamental property of the figure, is transformed into an unlimited number of new ones, all virtually contained in the first. On the contrary, physical phenomena, which succeed one another and are perceived by our senses, are distinguished by quality not less than by quantity, so that there would be some difficulty in at once declaring them[Pg 205] equivalent to one another. But, just because they are perceived through our sense-organs, we seem justified in ascribing their qualitative differences to the impression which they make on us and in assuming, behind the heterogeneity of our sensations, a homogeneous physical universe. Thus, we shall strip matter of the concrete qualities with which our senses clothe it, colour, heat, resistance, even weight, and we shall finally find ourselves confronted with homogeneous extensity, space without body. The only step then remaining will be to describe figures in space, to make them move according to mathematically formulated laws, and to explain the apparent qualities of matter by the shape, position, and motion of these geometrical figures. Now, position is given by a system of fixed magnitudes and motion is expressed by a law, i.e. by a constant relation between variable magnitudes; but shape is a mental image, and, however tenuous, however transparent we assume it to be, it still constitutes, in so far as our imagination has, so to speak, the visual perception of it, a concrete and therefore irreducible quality of matter. It will therefore be necessary to make a clean sweep of this image itself and replace it by the abstract formula of the movement which gives rise to the figure. Picture then algebraical relations getting entangled in one another, becoming objective by this very entanglement, and producing, by the mere effect of their complexity, concrete, visible, and tangible[Pg 206] reality,—you will be merely drawing the consequences of the principle of causality, understood in the sense of an actual prefiguring of the future in the present. The scientists of our time do not seem, indeed, to have carried abstraction so far, except perhaps Lord Kelvin. This acute and profound physicist assumed that space is filled with a homogeneous and incompressible fluid in which vortices move, thus producing the properties of matter: these vortices are the constituent elements of bodies; the atom thus becomes a movement, and physical phenomena are reduced to regular movements taking place within an incompressible fluid. But, if you will notice that this fluid is perfectly homogeneous, that between its parts there is neither an empty interval which separates them nor any difference whatever by which they can be distinguished, you will see that all movement taking place within this fluid is really equivalent to absolute immobility, since before, during, and after the movement nothing changes and nothing has changed in the whole. The movement which is here spoken of is thus not a movement which actually takes place, but only a movement which is pictured mentally: it is a relation between relations. It is implicitly supposed, though perhaps not actually realized, that motion has something to do with consciousness, that in space there are only simultaneities, and that the business of the physicist is to provide us with the means of calculating these relations[Pg 207] of simultaneity for any moment of our duration. Nowhere has mechanism been carried further than in this system, since the very shape of the ultimate elements of matter is here reduced to a movement. But the Cartesian physics already anticipated this interpretation; for if matter is nothing, as Descartes claimed, but homogeneous extensity, the movements of the parts of this extensity can be conceived through the abstract law which governs them or through an algebraical equation between variable magnitudes, but cannot be represented under the concrete form of an image. And it would not be difficult to prove that the more the progress of mechanical explanations enables us to develop this conception of causality and therefore to relieve the atom of the weight of its sensible qualities, the more the concrete existence of the phenomena of nature tends to vanish into algebraical smoke.
First of all, mathematics provides us with one type of this kind of prediction. The very act of drawing the circumference of a circle on a piece of paper generates all the mathematical properties of that figure: in this sense, an unlimited number of theorems can be said to exist within the definition, even though they will unfold over time for the mathematician who derives them. It’s true that we are operating in the realm of pure quantity and that, since geometric properties can be represented as equations, it's easy to see how the original equation, which expresses the fundamental property of the figure, transforms into an infinite number of new ones, all essentially contained within the first. In contrast, physical phenomena, which occur one after another and can be perceived by our senses, are defined not just by quantity but also by quality, making it difficult to classify them as equivalent to one another right away. However, because we perceive them through our senses, we can justify attributing their qualitative differences to the impressions they make on us and assume, beneath the diversity of our sensations, a uniform physical universe. Thus, we will strip matter of the concrete qualities our senses attribute to it, like color, heat, resistance, even weight, and we will eventually confront a homogeneous extent, space without substance. The only remaining step will be to describe shapes in space, to make them move according to mathematically formulated laws, and to explain the apparent qualities of matter by the shape, position, and motion of these geometric figures. Position is defined by a system of fixed magnitudes, and motion is expressed by a law, which is a constant relationship between variable magnitudes; but shape is a mental image, and no matter how thin or transparent we assume it to be, it still represents, as long as our imagination perceives it visually, a concrete and therefore irreducible quality of matter. Therefore, it will be necessary to completely eliminate this image and replace it with the abstract formula of the movement that creates the figure. Picture algebraic relationships becoming intertwined, becoming objective through this very entanglement, and producing, by the mere complexity of their interactions, a concrete, visible, and tangible[Pg 206] reality—you will just be drawing the implications of the principle of causality, understood as an actual prediction of the future within the present. Contemporary scientists do not seem to have taken abstraction this far, except maybe Lord Kelvin. This insightful and profound physicist suggested that space is filled with a homogeneous and incompressible fluid in which vortices move, producing the properties of matter: these vortices are the basic components of bodies; the atom thus becomes a movement, and physical phenomena are simplified to regular movements occurring within an incompressible fluid. But if you notice that this fluid is completely homogeneous, with neither gaps separating its parts nor any distinctions between them, you will see that all movement within this fluid is basically equivalent to absolute stillness, since before, during, and after the motion, nothing changes or has changed in the entirety. The movement discussed here is therefore not one that actually takes place, but merely a conceptual one: it is a relationship between relationships. It is implicitly assumed, although perhaps not fully realized, that motion connects to consciousness, that in space there are only instances of simultaneity, and that the physicist's role is to give us the tools to calculate these relations[Pg 207] of simultaneity for any moment in time. Mechanism has never been pushed further than in this system, where even the shape of the fundamental elements of matter is reduced to a movement. But Cartesian physics already foresaw this interpretation; if matter is nothing but homogeneous extension, as Descartes claimed, then the movements of parts of this extension can be understood through the abstract law governing them or through an algebraic equation involving variable magnitudes, but they cannot be represented as a concrete image. Furthermore, it would not be hard to prove that the more the advancement of mechanical explanations allows us to expand this concept of causality, relieving the atom of the burden of its tangible qualities, the more the concrete reality of natural phenomena tends to dissolve into algebraic abstraction.
Thus understood, the relation of causality is a necessary relation in the sense that it will indefinitely approach the relation of identity, as a curve approaches its asymptote. The Principle of identity is the absolute law of our consciousness: it asserts that what is thought is thought at the moment when we think it: and what gives this principle its absolute necessity is that it does not bind the future to the present, but only the present to the present: it expresses the unshakable confidence that consciousness feels in[Pg 208] itself, so long as, faithful to its duty, it confines itself to declaring the apparent present state of the mind. But the principle of causality, in so far as it is supposed to bind the future to the present, could never take the form of a necessary principle; for the successive moments of real time are not bound up with one another, and no effort of logic will succeed in proving that what has been will be or will continue to be, that the same antecedents will always give rise to identical consequents. Descartes understood this so well that he attributed the regularity of the physical world and the continuation of the same effects to the constantly renewed grace of Providence; he built up, as it were, an instantaneous physics, intended for a universe the whole duration of which might as well be confined to the present moment. And Spinoza maintained that the indefinite series of phenomena, which takes for us the form of a succession in time, was equivalent, in the absolute, to the divine unity: he thus assumed, on the one hand, that the relation of apparent causality between phenomena melted away into a relation of identity in the absolute, and, on the other, that the indefinite duration of things was all contained in a single moment, which is eternity. In short, whether we study Cartesian physics, Spinozistic metaphysics, or the scientific theories of our own time, we shall find everywhere the same anxiety to establish a relation of logical necessity between cause and effect, and we shall see that[Pg 209] this anxiety shows itself in a tendency to transform relations of succession into relations of inherence, to do away with active duration, and to substitute for apparent causality a fundamental identity.
Understood this way, the relationship of causality is a necessary connection in the sense that it will endlessly approach the connection of identity, like a curve getting closer to its asymptote. The principle of identity is the absolute law of our consciousness: it claims that what is thought is thought at the moment we think it. What gives this principle its absolute necessity is that it doesn’t tie the future to the present but only the present to the present: it expresses the unshakeable confidence that consciousness has in itself, as long as it stays true to its duty by declaring the apparent present state of the mind. However, the principle of causality, as it’s supposed to link the future to the present, could never become a necessary principle; because the continuous moments of real time are not interconnected, and no amount of logic will succeed in proving that what has happened will happen again, or that the same causes will always lead to the same effects. Descartes understood this so well that he attributed the regularity of the physical world and the persistence of the same effects to the constantly renewed grace of Providence; he essentially created an instantaneous physics suited for a universe that could just as easily be limited to the present moment. Spinoza argued that the endless series of phenomena that we see as a succession in time was equivalent to divine unity in the absolute; he suggested that, on one hand, the apparent causal relationship between phenomena melted into a relation of identity in the absolute, and on the other, the endless duration of things was all contained in a single moment, which is eternity. In short, whether we look at Cartesian physics, Spinoza's metaphysics, or the scientific theories of our time, we will find a consistent anxiety to establish a logical necessity between cause and effect. This anxiety manifests as a tendency to change sequential relationships into relationships of inherence, eliminating active duration, and replacing apparent causality with a fundamental identity.
Now, if the development of the notion of causality, understood in the sense of necessary connexion, leads to the Spinozistic or Cartesian conception of nature, inversely, all relation of necessary determination established between successive phenomena may be supposed to arise from our perceiving, in a confused form, some mathematical mechanism behind their heterogeneity. We do not claim that common sense has any intuition of the kinetic theories of matter, still less perhaps of a Spinozistic mechanism; but it will be seen that the more the effect seems necessarily bound up with the cause, the more we tend to put it in the cause itself, as a mathematical consequence in its principle, and thus to cancel the effect of duration. That under the influence of the same external conditions I do not behave to-day as I behaved yesterday is not at all surprising, because I change, because I endure. But things considered apart from our perception do not seem to endure; and the more thoroughly we examine this idea, the more absurd it seems to us to suppose that the same cause should not produce to-day the effect which it produced yesterday. We certainly feel, it is true, that although things do not[Pg 210] endure as we do ourselves, nevertheless there must be some reason why phenomena are seen to succeed one another instead of being set out all at once. And this is why the notion of causality, although it gets indefinitely near that of identity, will never seem to us to coincide with it, unless we conceive clearly the idea of a mathematical mechanism or unless some subtle metaphysics removes our very legitimate scruples on the point. It is no less obvious that our belief in the necessary determination of phenomena by one another becomes stronger in proportion as we are more inclined to regard duration as a subjective form of our consciousness. In other words, the more we tend to set up the causal relation as a relation of necessary determination, the more we assert thereby that things do not endure like ourselves. This amounts to saying that the more we strengthen the principle of causality, the more we emphasize the difference between a physical series and a psychical one. Whence, finally, it would result (however paradoxical the opinion may seem) that the assumption of a relation of mathematical inherence between external phenomena ought to bring with it, as a natural or at least as a plausible consequence, the belief in human free will. But this last consequence will not concern us for the moment: we are merely trying here to trace out the first meaning of the word causality, and we think we have shown that the prefiguring of the future in the present is easily conceived under a mathematical[Pg 211] form, thanks to a certain conception of duration which, without seeming to be so, is fairly familiar to common sense.
Now, if developing the concept of causality, understood as necessary connection, leads to the Spinozistic or Cartesian view of nature, conversely, any relationship of necessary determination established between successive events may come from our perceiving, in a vague way, some mathematical mechanism behind their differences. We don’t claim that common sense has any understanding of the kinetic theories of matter, even less so of a Spinozistic mechanism; but it becomes clear that the more the effect seems tightly linked to the cause, the more we tend to see it as part of the cause itself, like a mathematical result of its principle, and thus disregard the effect of duration. That I don’t behave today the same way I did yesterday under the same external conditions isn’t surprising at all, because I change, because I endure. However, things considered separately from our perception don’t seem to endure; and the more we analyze this idea, the more ridiculous it seems to think that the same cause wouldn’t produce today the effect it did yesterday. We certainly feel, it is true, that although things don’t[Pg 210] endure like we do, there must be some reason why phenomena appear to succeed one another instead of being revealed all at once. And this is why the concept of causality, despite getting incredibly close to that of identity, will never truly align with it, unless we clearly understand the idea of a mathematical mechanism or unless some subtle metaphysics alleviates our legitimate concerns about it. It’s also clear that our belief in the necessary determination of phenomena by one another strengthens as we are more inclined to view duration as a subjective aspect of our awareness. In other words, the more we establish the causal relationship as one of necessary determination, the more we assert that things do not endure like we do. This essentially means that the more we affirm the principle of causality, the more we highlight the difference between a physical series and a psychological one. Consequently, it results (however paradoxical it may seem) that assuming a relationship of mathematical inheritance between external phenomena should naturally or at least plausibly lead to the belief in human free will. But we won’t focus on that for now: we are merely trying to outline the initial meaning of the word causality, and we believe we have shown that envisioning the future within the present is easily understood in a mathematical[Pg 211] format, thanks to a particular understanding of duration that, while not appearing to be so, is quite familiar to common sense.
But there is a prefiguring of another kind, still more familiar to our mind, because immediate prefiguring, as consciousness gives us the type of it. We go, in fact, through successive states of consciousness, and although the later was not contained in the earlier, we had before us at the time a more or less confused idea of it. The actual realization of this idea, however, did not appear as certain but merely as possible. Yet, between the idea and the action, some hardly perceptible intermediate processes come in, the whole mass of which takes for us a form sui generis, which is called the feeling of effort. And from the idea to the effort, from the effort to the act, the progress has been so continuous that we cannot say where the idea and the effort end, and where the act begins. Hence we see that in a certain sense we may still say here that the future was prefigured in the present; but it must be added that this prefiguring is very imperfect, since the future action of which we have the present idea is conceived as realizable but not as realized, and since, even when we plan the effort necessary to accomplish it, we feel that there is still time to stop. If, then, we decide to picture the causal relation in this second form, we can assert a priori that there will no longer be a relation of necessary determination between the cause and[Pg 212] the effect, for the effect will no longer be given in the cause. It will be there only in the state of pure possibility and as a vague idea which perhaps will not be followed by the corresponding action. But we shall not be surprised that this approximation is enough for common sense if we think of the readiness with which children and primitive people accept the idea of a whimsical Nature, in which caprice plays a part no less important than necessity. Nay, this way of conceiving causality will be more easily understood by the general run of people, since it does not demand any effort of abstraction and only implies a certain analogy between the outer and the inner world, between the succession of objective phenomena and that of our subjective states.
But there’s another kind of foreshadowing that’s even more familiar to us, because immediate foreshadowing is what our consciousness understands. We actually go through different states of awareness, and even though the later state wasn’t included in the earlier one, we have a more or less unclear idea of it at the time. The actual realization of this idea, however, doesn’t seem certain but just possible. Yet, between the idea and the action, there are some barely noticeable intermediate processes that take on a unique form for us, which we call the feeling of effort. And from the idea to the effort, and from the effort to the action, the transition has been so smooth that we can’t pinpoint where the idea and the effort end and where the action begins. So, in a way, we can still say that the future was foreshadowed in the present; but we should add that this foreshadowing is quite imperfect, since the future action that we imagine in the present is seen as achievable but not yet achieved, and even when we plan the effort needed to make it happen, we feel that there’s still time to back out. If we then choose to illustrate the causal relationship in this second form, we can say ahead of time that there won’t be a necessary connection between the cause and the effect, since the effect won’t be inherent in the cause. Instead, it will exist only as a pure possibility and as a vague idea that might not lead to the corresponding action. But we shouldn’t be surprised that this approach is good enough for common sense, especially when we consider how readily children and primitive people accept the idea of a capricious Nature, where whim plays a role as crucial as necessity. In fact, this way of thinking about causality will be easier for most people to understand, as it doesn’t require much abstract thinking and merely suggests a certain analogy between the outer world and our inner experience, between the sequence of objective events and the order of our subjective states.
In truth, this second way of conceiving the relation of cause to effect is more natural than the first in that it immediately satisfies the need of a mental image. If we look for the phenomenon Β within the phenomenon A, which regularly precedes it, the reason is that the habit of associating the two images ends in giving us the idea of the second phenomenon wrapped up, as it were, in that of the first. It is natural, then, that we should push this objectification to its furthest limit and that we should make the phenomenon A itself into a psychic state, in which the phenomenon Β is supposed to be contained as a very vague idea. We simply suppose, thereby, that the objective connexion[Pg 213] of the two phenomena resembles the subjective association which suggested the idea of it to us. The qualities of things are thus set up as actual states, somewhat analogous to those of our own self; the material universe is credited with a vague personality which is diffused through space and which, although not exactly endowed with a conscious will, is led on from one state to another by an inner impulse, a kind of effort. Such was ancient hylozoism, a half-hearted and even contradictory hypothesis, which left matter its extensity although attributing to it real conscious states, and which spread the qualities of matter throughout extensity while treating these qualities as inner i.e. simple states. It was reserved for Leibniz to do away with this contradiction and to show that, if the succession of external qualities or phenomena is understood as the succession of our own ideas, these qualities must be regarded as simple states or perceptions, and the matter which supports them as an unextended monad, analogous to our soul. But, if such be the case, the successive states of matter cannot be perceived from the outside any more than our own psychic states; the hypothesis of pre-established harmony must be introduced in order to explain how these inner states are representative of one another. Thus, with our second conception of the relation of causality we reach Leibniz, as with the first we reached Spinoza. And in both cases we merely push to their extreme limit or formulate[Pg 214] with greater precision two half-hearted and confused ideas of common sense.
Honestly, this second way of thinking about the relationship between cause and effect feels more intuitive than the first because it instantly fulfills our need for a mental image. When we seek the phenomenon B within phenomenon A, which consistently comes before it, it’s because the habit of linking the two images leads us to imagine the second phenomenon as somehow wrapped up in the first. Naturally, we extend this objectification to its highest degree, transforming phenomenon A into a mental state where phenomenon B is assumed to be included as a vague idea. By doing this, we simply assume that the objective connection between the two phenomena resembles the subjective association that prompted the idea for us. The qualities of things are thus established as actual states, somewhat similar to those of our own self; we attribute a vague personality to the material universe that spreads through space and, although not exactly given a conscious will, is driven from one state to another by an internal impulse, a kind of effort. This was the essence of ancient hylozoism, a half-hearted and somewhat contradictory hypothesis that retained matter's extent while assigning it real conscious states, distributing the qualities of matter throughout that extent and viewing those qualities as internal, or simple, states. It was Leibniz who resolved this contradiction and showed that if we understand the succession of external qualities or phenomena as akin to the succession of our own ideas, then these qualities must be seen as simple states or perceptions, with the matter that supports them being an unextended monad, similar to our soul. However, if that’s the case, the successive states of matter can’t be perceived from the outside any more than our own psychological states; we have to introduce the hypothesis of pre-established harmony to explain how these internal states represent each other. Therefore, with our second understanding of causality, we arrive at Leibniz, as with the first we reached Spinoza. In both scenarios, we are simply pushing two half-hearted and confused common-sense ideas to their extreme limits or clarifying them with more precision.
Now it is obvious that the relation of causality, understood in this second way, does not involve the necessary determination of the effect by the cause. History indeed proves it. We see ancient hylozoism, the first outcome of this conception of causality, explained the regular succession of causes and effects by a real deus ex machina: sometimes it was a Necessity external to things and hovering over them, sometimes an inner Reason acting by rules somewhat similar to those which govern our own conduct. Nor do the perceptions of Leibniz's monad necessitate one another; God has to regulate their order in advance. In fact, Leibniz's determinism does not spring from his conception of the monad, but from the fact that he builds up the universe with monads only. Having denied all mechanical influence of substances on one another, he had to explain how it happens that their states correspond. Hence a determinism which arises from the necessity of positing a pre-established harmony, and not at all from the dynamic conception of the relation of causality. But let us leave history aside. Consciousness itself testifies that the abstract idea of force is that of indeterminate effort, that of an effort which has not yet issued in an act and in which the act is still only at the stage of an idea. In other words, the dynamic conception of the causal[Pg 215] relation ascribes to things a duration absolutely like our own, whatever may be the nature of this duration; to picture in this way the relation of cause to effect is to assume that the future is not more closely bound up with the present in the external world than it is in our own inner life.
Now it’s clear that the relationship of causality, understood in this second way, doesn’t imply that the effect is necessarily determined by the cause. History actually supports this. We see that ancient hylozoism, the initial outcome of this idea of causality, explained the regular sequence of causes and effects through a real deus ex machina: sometimes it was an external Necessity hovering over things, and other times it was an inner Reason acting by rules somewhat similar to those that govern our own actions. Moreover, the perceptions of Leibniz's monad do not necessitate one another; God has to regulate their order in advance. In reality, Leibniz's determinism doesn’t come from his idea of the monad, but from the fact that he constructs the universe solely with monads. After rejecting any mechanical influence of substances on each other, he had to explain how their states correspond. Thus, determinism arises from the necessity of establishing a pre-existing harmony, and not from the dynamic understanding of the relationship of causality. But let’s put history aside. Consciousness itself shows that the abstract idea of force is that of an indeterminate effort, an effort that has not yet resulted in an action and in which the action is still just an idea. In other words, the dynamic conception of the causal[Pg 215] relationship attributes to things a duration exactly like our own, regardless of the nature of this duration; to visualize the relationship of cause to effect in this way is to assume that the future is not more tightly bound to the present in the external world than it is in our own inner life.
It follows from this twofold analysis that the principle of causality involves two contradictory conceptions of duration, two mutually exclusive ways of prefiguring the future in the present. Sometimes all phenomena, physical or psychical, are pictured as enduring in the same way, and therefore in the way that we do: in this case the future will exist in the present only as an idea, and the passing from the present to the future will take the form of an effort which does not always lead to the realization of the idea conceived. Sometimes, on the other hand, duration is regarded as the characteristic form of conscious states; in this case, things are no longer supposed to endure as we do, and a mathematical pre-existence of their future in their present is admitted. Now, each of these two hypotheses, when taken by itself, safeguards human freedom; for the first would lead to the result that even the phenomena of nature were contingent, and the second, by attributing the necessary determination of physical phenomena to the fact that things do not endure as we do, invites us to regard the self which is subject to duration[Pg 216] as a free force. Therefore, every clear conception of causality, where we know our own meaning, leads to the idea of human freedom as a natural consequence. Unfortunately, the habit has grown up of taking the principle of causality in both senses at the same time, because the one is more flattering to our imagination and the other is more favourable to mathematical reasoning. Sometimes we think particularly of the regular succession of physical phenomena and of the kind of inner effort by which one becomes another; sometimes we fix our mind on the absolute regularity of these phenomena, and from the idea of regularity we pass by imperceptible steps to that of mathematical necessity, which excludes duration understood in the first way. And we do not see any harm in letting these two conceptions blend into one another, and in assigning greater importance to the one or the other according as we are more or less concerned with the interests of science. But to apply the principle of causality, in this ambiguous form, to the succession of conscious states, is uselessly and wantonly to run into inextricable difficulties. The idea of force, which really excludes that of necessary determination, has got into the habit, so to speak, of amalgamating with that of necessity, in consequence of the very use which we make of the principle of causality in nature. On the one hand, we know force only through the witness of consciousness, and consciousness does not assert,[Pg 217] does not even understand, the absolute determination, now, of actions that are still to come: that is all that experience teaches us, and if we hold by experience we should say that we feel ourselves free, that we perceive force, rightly or wrongly, as a free spontaneity. But, on the other hand, this idea of force, carried over into nature, travelling there side by side with the idea of necessity, has got corrupted before it returns from the journey. It returns impregnated with the idea of necessity: and in the light of the rôle which we have made it play in the external world, we regard force as determining with strict necessity the effects which flow from it. Here again the mistake made by consciousness arises from the fact that it looks at the self, not directly, but by a kind of refraction through the forms which it has lent to external perception, and which the latter does not give back without having left its mark on them. A compromise, as it were, has been brought about between the idea of force and that of necessary determination. The wholly mechanical determination of two external phenomena by one another now assumes in our eyes the same form as the dynamic relation of our exertion of force to the act which springs from it: but, in return, this latter relation takes the form of a mathematical derivation, the human action being supposed to issue mechanically, and therefore necessarily, from the force which produces it. There is no doubt that this mingling of two different and[Pg 218] almost opposite ideas offers advantages to common sense, since it enables us to picture in the same way, and denote by one and the same word, both the relation which exists between two moments of our life and that which binds together the successive moments of the external world. We have seen that, though our deepest conscious states exclude numerical multiplicity, yet we break them up into parts external to one another; that though the elements of concrete duration permeate one another, duration expressing itself in extensity exhibits moments as distinct as the bodies scattered in space. Is it surprising, then, that between the moments of our life, when it has been, so to speak, objectified, we set up a relation analogous to the objective relation of causality, and that an exchange, which again may be compared to the phenomenon of endosmosis, takes place between the dynamic idea of free effort and the mathematical concept of necessary determination?
This twofold analysis shows that the principle of causality involves two conflicting concepts of duration, two opposing ways of imagining the future in the present. Sometimes all phenomena, whether physical or mental, are viewed as enduring in the same way we do. In this case, the future only exists in the present as an idea, and the transition from present to future is seen as an effort that doesn’t always result in the realization of the conceived idea. Other times, duration is thought of as the defining characteristic of conscious states; in this case, things aren't believed to endure as we do, and it's accepted that the future preexists in the present in a mathematical sense. Each of these two hypotheses, when considered on its own, upholds human freedom; the first suggests that even natural phenomena are contingent, while the second, by attributing necessary determination of physical phenomena to the idea that things do not endure as we do, encourages us to see the self that experiences duration[Pg 216] as a free force. Thus, any clear understanding of causality, when we grasp our own meaning, leads to the idea of human freedom as a natural outcome. Unfortunately, we’ve developed a habit of interpreting the principle of causality in both senses simultaneously, as one is more flattering to our imagination, while the other is better suited to mathematical reasoning. Sometimes we emphasize the regular succession of physical phenomena and the inner effort involved in one becoming another; other times, we focus on the absolute regularity of these phenomena, and from the idea of regularity, we subtly shift to that of mathematical necessity, which rules out duration as understood initially. We often overlook the drawbacks of allowing these two concepts to merge, assigning more importance to one or the other based on our varying concerns with the interests of science. However, applying the principle of causality in this ambiguous way to the succession of conscious states creates unnecessary and complex difficulties. The concept of force, which fundamentally excludes necessary determination, has become habitually mixed with that of necessity because of how we use the principle of causality in nature. On one hand, we only know force through our conscious experience, and consciousness does not assert, nor can it even grasp, the absolute determination of actions that are still to come: that's what experience teaches us, and if we adhere to experience, we should say we feel free, perceiving force, whether rightly or wrongly, as a free spontaneity. On the other hand, this idea of force, carried into nature and existing alongside the idea of necessity, has become tainted before it returns from that journey. It comes back laden with the idea of necessity: and given the role we've assigned it in the external world, we see force as strictly determining the effects that follow from it. Here again, the mistake consciousness makes comes from the fact that it observes the self not directly but through a refracted lens shaped by the frameworks it has applied to external perception, leaving a mark on them. A kind of compromise has formed between the idea of force and that of necessary determination. The purely mechanical determination of two external phenomena by each other now appears to us in the same light as the dynamic relationship of our exertion of force to the action that results from it: yet this latter relationship takes on the form of a mathematical derivation, with human action supposed to arise mechanically, and therefore necessarily, from the force that generates it. Clearly, this mixing of two different and[Pg 218] nearly opposite ideas offers some advantages to common sense, as it allows us to visualize similarly and use the same term for both the relationship between two moments of our life and that which connects the successive moments of the external world. We’ve observed that although our deepest states of consciousness exclude numerical multiplicity, we still break them down into parts that are external to each other; that while the components of concrete duration interpenetrate, duration expressed in extent shows moments as distinct as the objects scattered in space. Isn’t it surprising, then, that between the moments of our life, once it has been, so to speak, objectified, we establish a relationship similar to the objective relation of causality, and that an exchange, which could again be likened to the phenomenon of endosmosis, takes place between the dynamic idea of free effort and the mathematical concept of necessary determination?
But the sundering of these two ideas is an accomplished fact in the natural sciences. The physicist may speak of forces, and even picture their mode of action by analogy with an inner effort, but he will never introduce this hypothesis into a scientific explanation. Even those who, with Faraday, replace the extended atoms by dynamic points, will treat the centres of force and the lines of force mathematically, without troubling about[Pg 219] force itself considered as an activity or an effort. It thus comes to be understood that the relation of external causality is purely mathematical, and has no resemblance to the relation between psychical force and the act which springs from it.
But the separation of these two ideas is a reality in the natural sciences. The physicist can talk about forces and even illustrate their function by comparing it to an internal effort, but he will never include this assumption in a scientific explanation. Even those who, like Faraday, replace extended atoms with dynamic points will handle the centers of force and the lines of force mathematically, without considering[Pg 219] force itself as an activity or effort. It becomes clear that the relationship of external causality is purely mathematical and has no similarity to the relationship between psychological force and the action that arises from it.
It is now time to add that the relation of inner causality is purely dynamic, and has no analogy with the relation of two external phenomena which condition one another. For as the latter are capable of recurring in a homogeneous space, their relation can be expressed in terms of a law, whereas deep-seated psychic states occur once in consciousness and will never occur again. A careful analysis of the psychological phenomenon led us to this conclusion in the beginning: the study of the notions of causality and duration, viewed in themselves, has merely confirmed it.
It’s now important to point out that the relationship of inner causality is purely dynamic and doesn’t compare to the relationship between two external phenomena that influence each other. While the latter can happen repeatedly in a similar space, their relationship can be described by a law, whereas deep-seated mental states happen once in consciousness and never repeat. A thorough analysis of the psychological phenomenon brought us to this conclusion at the outset: examining the concepts of causality and duration, in and of themselves, has only reinforced it.
We can now formulate our conception of freedom. Freedom is the relation of the concrete self to the act which it performs. This relation is indefinable, just because we are free. For we can analyse a thing, but not a process; we can break up extensity, but not duration. Or, if we persist in analysing it, we unconsciously transform the process into a thing and duration into extensity. By the very fact of breaking up concrete time we set out its moments in homogeneous space; in place of the doing we put the already done; and, as we have begun by, so to speak, stereotyping the activity[Pg 220] of the self, we see spontaneity settle down into inertia and freedom into necessity. Thus, any positive definition of freedom will ensure the victory of determinism.
We can now shape our understanding of freedom. Freedom is the relationship between the real self and the actions it takes. This relationship is impossible to define precisely, simply because we are free. We can analyze an object, but not a process; we can dissect space, but not time. If we insist on analyzing it, we unknowingly turn the process into an object and time into space. By breaking down concrete time, we lay out its moments in uniform space; instead of focusing on what’s being done, we focus on what has already been done; and as we start by, so to speak, freezing the activity[Pg 220] of the self, we see spontaneity turn into inertia and freedom into necessity. Therefore, any clear definition of freedom will ultimately favor determinism.
Shall we define the free act by saying of this act, when it is once done, that it might have been left undone? But this assertion, as also its opposite, implies the idea of an absolute equivalence between concrete duration and its spatial symbol: and as soon as we admit this equivalence, we are led on, by the very development of the formula which we have just set forth, to the most rigid determinism.
Should we define the free act by saying that once it’s done, it could have been left undone? But this claim, just like its opposite, assumes there's a clear equivalence between actual time and its spatial representation: and once we accept this equivalence, we are inevitably led, by the very nature of the formula we just discussed, to strict determinism.
Shall we define the free act as "that which could not be foreseen, even when all the conditions were known in advance?" But to conceive all the conditions as given, is, when dealing with concrete duration, to place oneself at the very moment at which the act is being performed. Or else it is admitted that the matter of psychic duration can be pictured symbolically in advance, which amounts, as we said, to treating time as a homogeneous medium, and to reasserting in new words the absolute equivalence of duration with its symbol. A closer study of this second definition of freedom will thus bring us once more to determinism.
Should we define a free act as "something that couldn’t be predicted, even when all the conditions were known ahead of time?" However, to consider all conditions as fixed, when looking at actual time, means positioning oneself right at the moment the act takes place. Otherwise, we are acknowledging that the matter of psychological time can be represented symbolically in advance, which, as we stated, is equivalent to treating time as a uniform medium and reiterating in different words the complete equivalence of duration with its symbol. A deeper examination of this second definition of freedom will therefore lead us back to determinism.
Shall we finally define the free act by saying that it is not necessarily determined by its cause? But either these words lose their meaning or we understand by them that the same inner causes will not always call forth the same effects. We admit,[Pg 221] then, that the psychic antecedents of a free act can be repeated, that freedom is displayed in a duration whose moments resemble one another, and that time is a homogeneous medium, like space. We shall thus be brought back to the idea of an equivalence between duration and its spatial symbol; and by pressing the definition of freedom which we have laid down, we shall once more get determinism out of it.
Should we finally define the free act by saying that it isn’t necessarily determined by its cause? But either these words lose their meaning or we understand that the same inner causes won’t always lead to the same effects. We admit, [Pg 221] then, that the mental factors of a free act can be repeated, that freedom shows itself in a duration where the moments resemble each other, and that time is a uniform medium, like space. Therefore, we’ll come back to the idea of an equivalence between duration and its spatial representation; and by pushing the definition of freedom that we’ve established, we will once again arrive at determinism.
To sum up; every demand for explanation in regard to freedom comes back, without our suspecting it, to the following question: "Can time be adequately represented by space?" To which we answer: Yes, if you are dealing with time flown; No, if you speak of time flowing. Now, the free act takes place in time which is flowing and not in time which has already flown. Freedom is therefore a fact, and among the facts which we observe there is none clearer. All the difficulties of the problem, and the problem itself, arise from the desire to endow duration with the same attributes as extensity, to interpret a succession by a simultaneity, and to express the idea of freedom in a language into which it is obviously untranslatable.
To sum up, every request for an explanation regarding freedom ultimately leads us to this question: "Can time be represented by space?" To which we respond: Yes, if you're talking about time that has already passed; No, if you're discussing time that is currently flowing. Now, a free act occurs in time that is flowing, not in time that has already passed. Freedom is therefore a fact, and there is none more evident among the facts we observe. All the complexities of the problem, and the problem itself, come from the attempt to attribute the same qualities of space to duration, to interpret a sequence through simultaneous events, and to express the idea of freedom in a language that simply can't convey it.
CONCLUSION
To sum up the foregoing discussion, we shall put aside for the present Kant's terminology and also his doctrine, to which we shall return later, and we shall take the point of view of common sense. Modern psychology seems to us particularly concerned to prove that we perceive things through the medium of certain forms, borrowed from our own constitution. This tendency has become more and more marked since Kant: while the German philosopher drew a sharp line of separation between time and space, the extensive and the intensive, and, as we should say to-day, consciousness and external perception, the empirical school, carrying analysis still further, tries to reconstruct the extensive out of the intensive, space out of duration, and externality out of inner states. Physics, moreover, comes in to complete the work of psychology in this respect: it shows that, if we wish to forecast[Pg 223] phenomena, we must make a clean sweep of the impression which they produce on consciousness and treat sensations as signs of reality, not as reality itself.
To sum up the previous discussion, we will set aside Kant's terminology and his doctrine for now, which we will revisit later, and instead focus on common sense. Modern psychology seems particularly focused on showing that we perceive things through certain forms that come from our own makeup. This trend has become more prominent since Kant: while the German philosopher clearly separated time and space, the extensive and the intensive, and what we would call today consciousness and external perception, the empirical school, pushing analysis even further, attempts to reconstruct the extensive from the intensive, space from duration, and externality from inner states. Additionally, physics helps to complete the work of psychology in this area: it demonstrates that if we want to predict phenomena, we need to completely disregard the impressions they make on consciousness and treat sensations as indicators of reality, not as reality itself.
It seemed to us that there was good reason to set ourselves the opposite problem and to ask whether the most obvious states of the ego itself, which we believe that we grasp directly, are not mostly perceived through the medium of certain forms borrowed from the external world, which thus gives us back what we have lent it. A priori it seems fairly probable that this is what happens. For, assuming that the forms alluded to, into which we fit matter, come entirely from the mind, it seems difficult to apply them constantly to objects without the latter soon leaving a mark on them: by then using these forms to gain a knowledge of our own person we run the risk of mistaking for the colouring of the self the reflection of the frame in which we place it, i.e. the external world. But one can go further still and assert that forms applicable to things cannot be entirely our own work, that they must result from a compromise between matter and mind, that if we give much to matter we probably receive something from it, and that thus, when we try to grasp ourselves after an excursion into the external world, we no longer have our hands free.
It seemed to us that there was good reason to challenge ourselves with the opposite question and to ask whether the most obvious states of the self, which we think we understand directly, are mostly perceived through certain forms borrowed from the outside world, which then returns what we have given it. A priori, it seems quite likely that this is what happens. Because if we assume that the forms we use to interpret matter come entirely from the mind, it seems hard to apply them continuously to objects without those objects leaving a mark on them. By using these forms to understand our own identity, we risk confusing the true nature of the self with the reflection of the frame we place it in, meaning the external world. But we can go even further and argue that the forms we apply to things cannot be solely our own creations; they must result from a compromise between matter and mind. Therefore, if we give a lot to matter, we probably receive something back from it, and when we try to understand ourselves after venturing into the external world, we no longer have our hands free.
Now just as, in order to ascertain the real relations[Pg 224] of physical phenomena to one another, we abstract whatever obviously clashes with them in our way of perceiving and thinking, so, in order to view the self in its original purity, psychology ought to eliminate or correct certain forms which bear the obvious mark of the external world. What are these forms? When isolated from one another and regarded as so many distinct units, psychic states seem to be more or less intense. Next, looked at in their multiplicity, they unfold in time and constitute duration. Finally, in their relations to one another, and in so far as a certain unity is preserved throughout their multiplicity, they seem to determine one another. Intensity, duration, voluntary determination, these are the three ideas which had to be clarified by ridding them of all that they owe to the intrusion of the sensible world and, in a word, to the obsession of the idea of space.
Now just as we need to clarify the real relationships between physical phenomena by ignoring distractions in our perception and thinking, psychology should also strip away or adjust certain aspects that clearly stem from the external world in order to view the self in its true form. What are these aspects? When separated and considered as individual units, mental states appear to be more or less intense. Then, when examined in their variety, they unfold over time and create duration. Finally, in terms of their relationships to each other, and as a certain unity remains present even in their diversity, they seem to determine one another. Intensity, duration, voluntary determination—these are the three concepts that needed clarification by removing everything influenced by the sensible world and, in general, the fixation on the idea of space.
Examining the first of these ideas, we found that psychic phenomena were in themselves pure quality or qualitative multiplicity, and that, on the other hand, their cause situated in space was quantity. In so far as this quality becomes the sign of the quantity and we suspect the presence of the latter behind the former, we call it intensity. The intensity of a simple state, therefore, is not quantity but its qualitative sign. You will find that it arises from a compromise between[Pg 225] pure quality, which is the state of consciousness, and pure quantity, which is necessarily space. Now you give up this compromise without the least scruple when you study external things, since you then leave aside the forces themselves, assuming that they exist, and consider only their measurable and extended effects. Why, then, do you keep to this hybrid concept when you analyse in its turn the state of consciousness? If magnitude, outside you, is never intensive, intensity, within you, is never magnitude. It is through having overlooked this that philosophers have been compelled to distinguish two kinds of quantity, the one extensive, the other intensive, without ever succeeding in explaining what they had in common or how the same words "increase" and "decrease" could be used for things so unlike. In the same way they are responsible for the exaggerations of psychophysics, for as soon as the power of increasing in magnitude is attributed to sensation in any other than a metaphorical sense, we are invited to find out by how much it increases. And, although consciousness does not measure intensive quantity, it does not follow that science may not succeed indirectly in doing so, if it be a magnitude. Hence, either a psychophysical formula is possible or the intensity of a simple psychic state is pure quality.
Looking at the first of these ideas, we found that psychic phenomena are purely qualitative or have qualitative variety, while their cause in space is quantitative. When this quality represents quantity and we sense the latter behind the former, we call it intensity. So, the intensity of a simple state is not quantity but its qualitative indicator. It arises from a compromise between[Pg 225]pure quality, which is the state of consciousness, and pure quantity, which is always space. You easily give up this compromise when you study external things, as you ignore the forces themselves, assuming they exist, and focus only on their measurable and extended effects. So why do you stick to this mixed concept when analyzing the state of consciousness? If magnitude outside of you is never intensive, then intensity within you is never magnitude. By overlooking this, philosophers have been forced to identify two types of quantity—one extensive and the other intensive—without ever explaining what they have in common or how the same terms "increase" and "decrease" could apply to such different things. They are also responsible for the exaggerations in psychophysics, because as soon as we attribute the power to increase magnitude to sensation in any literal sense, we're asked to determine by how much it increases. And although consciousness doesn't measure intensive quantity, it doesn’t mean science can't eventually succeed in doing so, if it is a magnitude. So, either a psychophysical formula is possible, or the intensity of a simple psychic state is pure quality.
Turning then to the concept of multiplicity, we saw that to construct a number we must first have the intuition of a homogeneous medium,[Pg 226] viz. space, in which terms distinct from one another could be set out in line, and, secondly, a process of permeation and organization by which these units are dynamically added together and form what we called a qualitative multiplicity. It is owing to this dynamic process that the units get added, but it is because of their presence in space that they remain distinct. Hence number or discrete multiplicity also results from a compromise. Now, when we consider material objects in themselves, we give up this compromise, since we regard them as impenetrable and divisible, i.e. endlessly distinct from one another. Therefore, we must give it up, too, when we study our own selves. It is through having failed to do so that associationism has made many mistakes, such as trying to reconstruct a psychic state by the addition of distinct states of consciousness, thus substituting the symbol of the ego for the ego itself.
Looking at the idea of multiplicity, we realized that to create a number, we first need to understand a uniform medium, [Pg 226] like space, where distinct terms can line up. Secondly, we need a process of blending and organizing that allows these units to come together and form what we call a qualitative multiplicity. This dynamic process is what allows the units to be combined, but it's their existence in space that keeps them separate. Thus, number or discrete multiplicity arises from a compromise. When we examine solid objects on their own, we abandon this compromise because we see them as solid and divisible, meaning they are infinitely distinct from one another. Consequently, we need to let go of this compromise when we analyze ourselves as well. The failure to do so has led associationism to make several errors, like attempting to rebuild a mental state by simply adding together distinct states of consciousness, effectively replacing the symbol of the ego with the ego itself.
These preliminary considerations enabled us to approach the principal object of this work, the analysis of the ideas of duration and voluntary determination.
These initial thoughts allowed us to tackle the main focus of this work, which is the analysis of the concepts of duration and voluntary decision-making.
What is duration within us? A qualitative multiplicity, with no likeness to number; an organic evolution which is yet not an increasing quantity; a pure heterogeneity within which there are no distinct qualities. In a word, the moments of inner duration are not external to one another.
What is duration within us? A qualitative mix, unlike any number; an organic evolution that isn't just an increasing quantity; a pure variety where there are no distinct qualities. In short, the moments of inner duration aren’t separate from each other.
What duration is there existing outside us? The present only, or, if we prefer the expression, simultaneity. No doubt external things change, but their moments do not succeed one another, if we retain the ordinary meaning of the word, except for a consciousness which keeps them in mind. We observe outside us at a given moment a whole system of simultaneous positions; of the simultaneities which have preceded them nothing remains. To put duration in space is really to contradict oneself and place succession within simultaneity. Hence we must not say that external things endure, but rather that there is in them some inexpressible reason in virtue of which we cannot examine them at successive moments of our own duration without observing that they have changed. But this change does not involve succession unless the word is taken in a new meaning: on this point we have noted the agreement of science and common sense.
What duration exists outside of us? Just the present, or, if we prefer, simultaneity. It's clear that external things change, but their moments don’t follow one another in the usual sense of the word, except for a consciousness that keeps them in mind. We see at any given moment a whole system of simultaneous positions; nothing remains from the simultaneities that have come before. To think of duration in space really contradicts itself and puts succession within simultaneity. Therefore, we shouldn’t say that external things endure, but rather that there is an indescribable reason that prevents us from examining them at different moments of our own duration without noticing that they’ve changed. However, this change doesn't imply succession unless we redefine the term: on this matter, we have noted the agreement of science and common sense.
Thus in consciousness we find states which succeed, without being distinguished from one another; and in space simultaneities which, without succeeding, are distinguished from one another, in the sense that one has ceased to exist when the other appears. Outside us, mutual externality without succession; within us, succession without mutual externality.
Thus in consciousness, we find states that follow one another without being distinguished from each other; and in space, we have simultaneous events that, without following one another, are distinct in the sense that one has stopped existing when the other appears. Outside of us, there is mutual externality without succession; inside of us, there is succession without mutual externality.
Here again a compromise comes in. To the simultaneities, which constitute the external[Pg 228] world, and, although distinct, succeed one another for our consciousness, we attribute succession in themselves. Hence the idea that things endure as we do ourselves and that time may be brought within space. But while our consciousness thus introduces succession into external things, inversely these things themselves externalize the successive moments of our inner duration in relation to one another. The simultaneities of physical phenomena, absolutely distinct in the sense that the one has ceased to be when the other takes place, cut up into portions, which are also distinct and external to one another, an inner life in which succession implies interpenetration, just as the pendulum of a clock cuts up into distinct fragments and spreads out, so to speak, lengthwise, the dynamic and undivided tension of the spring. Thus, by a real process of endosmosis we get the mixed idea of a measurable time, which is space in so far as it is homogeneity, and duration in so far as it is succession, that is to say, at bottom, the contradictory idea of succession in simultaneity.
Here we see a compromise again. To the simultaneities that make up the external[Pg 228] world, we think of them as distinct yet following one another in our consciousness. We ascribe succession to them. This leads to the belief that things endure just like we do and that time can be contained within space. While our consciousness assigns succession to external things, those things reflect the successive moments of our inner duration to one another. The simultaneities of physical phenomena, which are completely distinct in that one stops being when the other occurs, break into segments that are also distinct and separate from each other, shaping an inner life where succession involves interconnection, just as the pendulum of a clock breaks into separate fragments, spreading out the dynamic and undivided tension of the spring in a lengthwise manner. Thus, through a real process of endosmosis, we arrive at the mixed idea of measurable time, which is space in terms of its homogeneity, and duration in terms of its succession, in essence, the contradictory notion of succession within simultaneity.
Now, these two elements, extensity and duration, science tears asunder when it undertakes the close study of external things. For we have pointed out that science retains nothing of duration but simultaneity, and nothing of motion itself position of the moving body,[Pg 229] i.e. immobility. A very sharp separation is here made and space gets the best of it.
Now, these two elements, extent and time, science pulls apart when it closely examines external things. As we've noted, science only holds onto simultaneity in terms of time and nothing of motion itself regarding the position of the moving body,[Pg 229] which is essentially immobility. A clear distinction is made here, and space comes out on top.
Therefore the same separation will have to be made again, but this time to the advantage of duration, when inner phenomena are studied, —not inner phenomena once developed, to be sure, or after the discursive reason has separated them and set them out in a homogeneous medium in order to understand them, but inner phenomena in their developing, and in so far as they make up, by their interpenetration, the continuous evolution of a free person. Duration, thus restored to its original purity, will appear as a wholly qualitative multiplicity, an absolute heterogeneity of elements which pass over into one another.
So, we’ll need to make that same separation again, but this time to emphasize duration when we study inner phenomena—not the inner phenomena after they've developed, or after analytical reasoning has broken them down and organized them in a uniform way to understand them, but the inner phenomena as they’re unfolding, and how, through their interaction, they contribute to the ongoing development of a free person. Duration, returned to its original essence, will show itself as a completely qualitative diversity, a total mixture of elements that blend into each other.
Now it is because they have neglected to make this necessary separation that one party has been led to deny freedom and the other to define it, and thereby, involuntarily, to deny it too. They ask in fact whether the act could or could not be foreseen, the whole of its conditions being given; and whether they assert it or deny it, they admit that this totality of conditions could be conceived as given in advance: which amounts, as we have shown, to treating duration as a homogeneous thing and intensities as magnitudes. They will either say that the act is determined by its conditions, without perceiving that they are playing on the double sense of the word causality,[Pg 230] and that they are thus giving to duration at the same time two forms which are mutually exclusive. Or else they will appeal to the principle of the conservation of energy, without asking whether this principle is equally applicable to the moments of the external world, which are equivalent to one another, and to the moments of a living and conscious being, which acquire a richer and richer content. In whatever way, in a word, freedom is viewed, it cannot be denied except on condition of identifying time with space; it cannot be defined except on condition of demanding that space should adequately represent time; it cannot be argued about in one sense or the other except on condition of previously confusing succession and simultaneity. All determinism will thus be refuted by experience, but every attempt to define freedom will open the way to determinism.
Now it's because they've neglected to make this important separation that one side has ended up denying freedom while the other defines it, inadvertently leading to its denial as well. They really ask whether the act could or couldn't have been anticipated, given all its conditions; whether they assert it or deny it, they acknowledge that this set of conditions could be viewed as predetermined: which amounts, as we've shown, to treating time as uniform and intensities as quantities. They will either claim that the act is determined by its conditions, not realizing that they are playing on the dual meaning of causality,[Pg 230] and thus giving time two forms that contradict each other. Or they will reference the principle of conservation of energy, without questioning whether this principle applies equally to the moments of the external world, which are interchangeable, and to the moments of a living and conscious being, which gain deeper and richer meaning. In any case, to sum up, freedom can only be denied by equating time with space; it can only be defined by demanding that space adequately represents time; it can't be debated in one way or another without first muddling succession and simultaneity. Every form of determinism will be disproven by experience, but every attempt to define freedom will lead back to determinism.
Inquiring then why this separation of duration and extensity, which science carries out so naturally in the external world, demands such an effort and rouses so much repugnance when it is a question of inner states, we were not long in perceiving the reason. The main object of science is to forecast and measure: now we cannot forecast physical phenomena except on condition that we assume that they do not endure as we do; and, on the other hand, the only thing we are able to measure is space. Hence the breach here comes about of itself between quality and quantity, between true[Pg 231] duration and pure extensity. But when we turn to our conscious states, we have everything to gain by keeping up the illusion through which we make them share in the reciprocal externality of outer things, because this distinctness, and at the same time this solidification, enables us to give them fixed names in spite of their instability, and distinct ones in spite of their interpenetration. It enables us to objectify them, to throw them out into the current of social life.
Wondering why separating time and space, which science does so easily in the external world, is so difficult and feels so wrong when it comes to our internal states, we quickly figured out why. The main goal of science is to predict and measure; we can't predict physical events unless we assume they don't endure like we do. On the other hand, the only thing we can measure is space. This is how the split naturally occurs between quality and quantity, between true[Pg 231] duration and pure space. But when we focus on our conscious experiences, we benefit from maintaining the illusion that they are similar to the external reality of physical objects. This separation, along with its solidification, allows us to assign them clear names despite their changeability, and distinct ones even though they overlap. It helps us to objectify them and project them into the flow of social life.
Hence there are finally two different selves, one of which is, as it were, the external projection of the other, its spatial and, so to speak, social representation. We reach the former by deep introspection, which leads us to grasp our inner states as living things, constantly becoming, as states not amenable to measure, which permeate one another and of which the succession in duration has nothing in common with juxtaposition in homogeneous space. But the moments at which we thus grasp ourselves are rare, and that is just why we are rarely free. The greater part of the time we live outside ourselves, hardly perceiving anything of ourselves but our own ghost, a colourless shadow which pure duration projects into homogeneous space. Hence our life unfolds in space rather than in time; we live for the external world rather than for ourselves; we speak rather than think; we "are acted" rather than act ourselves. To act[Pg 232] freely is to recover possession of oneself, and to get back into pure duration.
So there are finally two different selves, one of which is basically the outer projection of the other, its spatial and, so to speak, social representation. We reach the former through deep introspection, which helps us understand our inner states as living things, constantly becoming, as states that can’t be measured—intertwined and whose progression in time has nothing to do with mere placement in uniform space. But the moments when we truly understand ourselves are rare, and that’s why we are rarely free. Most of the time we live outside ourselves, barely perceiving anything about ourselves except our own ghost, a colorless shadow that pure duration casts into uniform space. So our life plays out in space rather than in time; we live for the external world rather than for ourselves; we talk instead of think; we are “acted upon” rather than acting ourselves. To act freely is to regain a sense of self and return to pure duration.
Kant's great mistake was to take time as a homogeneous medium. He did not notice that real duration is made up of moments inside one another, and that when it seems to assume the form of a homogeneous whole, it is because it gets expressed in space. Thus the very distinction which he makes between space and time amounts at bottom to confusing time with space, and the symbolical representation of the ego with the ego itself. He thought that consciousness was incapable of perceiving psychic states otherwise than by juxtaposition, forgetting that a medium in which these states are set side by side and distinguished from one another is of course space, and not duration. He was thereby led to believe that the same states can recur in the depths of consciousness, just as the same physical phenomena are repeated in space; this at least is what he implicitly admitted when he ascribed to the causal relation the same meaning and the same function in the inner as in the outer world. Thus freedom was made into an incomprehensible fact. And yet, owing to his unlimited though unconscious confidence in this inner perception whose scope he tried to restrict, his belief in freedom remained unshakable. He therefore raised it to the sphere of noumena; and as he had[Pg 233] confused duration with space, he made this genuine free self, which is indeed outside space, into a self which is supposed to be outside duration too, and therefore out of the reach of our faculty of knowledge. But the truth is that we perceive this self whenever, by a strenuous effort of reflection, we turn our eyes from the shadow which follows us and retire into ourselves. Though we generally live and act outside our own person, in space rather than in duration, and though by this means we give a handle to the law of causality, which binds the same effects to the same causes, we can nevertheless always get back into pure duration, of which the moments are internal and heterogeneous to one another, and in which a cause cannot repeat its effect since it will never repeat itself.
Kant's major mistake was viewing time as a uniform medium. He overlooked the fact that real duration consists of nested moments, and when it seems to form a uniform whole, it's because it's being expressed in space. The distinction he makes between space and time ultimately confuses time with space and equates the symbolic representation of the self with the self itself. He believed that consciousness could only perceive mental states by placing them next to each other, ignoring that a medium where these states are positioned and distinguished from one another is actually space, not duration. This led him to think that the same states could recur in the depths of consciousness, similar to how physical phenomena repeat in space; he at least implied this when he attributed the same meaning and function to causal relations in both the inner and outer worlds. As a result, freedom became an incomprehensible concept. Yet, due to his unwavering but unconscious trust in this inner perception that he tried to limit, his belief in freedom remained intact. He elevated it to the realm of noumena; and because he confused duration with space, he represented this genuine free self, which truly exists outside of space, as a self that is also outside of duration and thus beyond our understanding. However, the truth is that we perceive this self whenever we make a strong effort to reflect and turn our attention away from the shadow that follows us, retreating into ourselves. Although we generally live and act outside our own selves, in space rather than in duration, and by doing so, we provide a basis for the law of causality that ties the same effects to the same causes, we can still return to pure duration, where the moments are internal and different from one another, and in which a cause cannot repeat its effect because it will never be the same again.
In this very confusion of true duration with its symbol both the strength and the weakness of Kantianism reside. Kant imagines on the one side "things in themselves," and on the other a homogeneous Time and Space, through which the "things in themselves," are refracted: thus are supposed to arise on the one hand the phenomenal self—a self which consciousness perceives—and, on the other, external objects. Time and space on this view would not be any more in us than outside us; the very distinction of outside and inside would be the work of time and space. This doctrine has the advantage of providing our empirical thought[Pg 234] with a solid foundation, and of guaranteeing that phenomena, as phenomena, are adequately knowable. Indeed, we might set up these phenomena as absolute and do without the incomprehensible "things in themselves," were it not that the Practical Reason, the revealer of duty, came in, like the Platonic reminiscence, to warn us that the "thing in itself" exists, invisible but present. The controlling factor in the whole of this theory is the very sharp distinction between the matter of consciousness and its form, between the homogeneous and the heterogeneous, and this vital distinction would probably never have been made unless time also had been regarded as a medium indifferent to what fills it.
In this confusion between true duration and its symbol lies both the strength and weakness of Kantianism. Kant envisions, on one side, "things in themselves," and on the other, a uniform Time and Space that refract these "things in themselves." This leads to the emergence of, on one hand, the phenomenal self—a self that consciousness perceives—and, on the other, external objects. From this perspective, time and space wouldn't just exist within us but also outside us; the very distinction between inside and outside would be shaped by time and space. This idea has the advantage of providing our empirical thought[Pg 234] with a solid foundation and ensuring that phenomena, as phenomena, can be adequately understood. In fact, we could treat these phenomena as absolute and set aside the incomprehensible "things in themselves," if not for the Practical Reason, which reveals duty and, similar to Platonic reminiscence, warns us of the existence of the "thing in itself," invisible yet present. The key element of this theory is the clear distinction between the content of consciousness and its form, between the uniform and the varied, and this crucial distinction probably wouldn’t have been made if time hadn’t also been seen as a medium indifferent to what it contains.
But if time, as immediate consciousness perceives it, were, like space, a homogeneous medium, science would be able to deal with it, as it can with space. Now we have tried to prove that duration, as duration, and motion, as motion, elude the grasp of mathematics: of time everything slips through its fingers but simultaneity, and of movement everything but immobility. This is what the Kantians and even their opponents do not seem to have perceived: in this so-called phenomenal world, which, we are told, is a world cut out for scientific knowledge, all the relations which cannot be translated into simultaneity, i.e. into space, are scientifically unknowable.
But if time, as we experience it, were like space, a uniform medium, science would be able to handle it the same way it handles space. We've tried to show that duration, as duration, and motion, as motion, slip away from mathematics; with time, everything escapes its grasp except for simultaneity, and with movement, everything except for stillness. This is something that Kantians and even their critics seem to overlook: in this so-called phenomenal world, which is supposedly designed for scientific understanding, all the relationships that cannot be expressed as simultaneity, meaning translated into space, are scientifically unknowable.
In the second place, in a duration assumed to[Pg 235] be homogeneous, the same states could occur over again, causality would imply necessary determination, and all freedom would become incomprehensible. Such, indeed, is the result to which the Critique of Pure Reason leads. But instead of concluding from this that real duration is heterogeneous, which, by clearing up the second difficulty, would have called his attention to the first, Kant preferred to put freedom outside time and to raise an impassable barrier between the world of phenomena, which he hands over root and branch to our understanding, and the world of things in themselves, which he forbids us to enter.
In the second place, if we assume duration is constant, the same events could keep happening, and causality would mean everything is predetermined, making freedom impossible to understand. This is, in fact, the conclusion that the Critique of Pure Reason leads to. However, instead of concluding that actual duration is varied, which would have resolved the second issue and directed him back to the first, Kant chose to place freedom outside of time and create a strict divide between the world of phenomena, which he completely hands over to our understanding, and the world of things as they are, which he prevents us from accessing.
But perhaps this distinction is too sharply drawn and perhaps the barrier is easier to cross than he supposed. For if perchance the moments of real duration, perceived by an attentive consciousness, permeated one another instead of lying side by side, and if these moments formed in relation to one another a heterogeneity within which the idea of necessary determination lost every shred of meaning, then the self grasped by consciousness would be a free cause, we should have absolute knowledge of ourselves, and, on the other hand, just because this absolute constantly commingles with phenomena and, while filling itself with them, permeates them, these phenomena themselves would not be as amenable as is claimed to mathematical reasoning,
But maybe this distinction is too clear-cut, and the barrier is easier to cross than he thought. If, by chance, the moments of real duration that an attentive mind perceives blend into each other instead of lying side by side, and if these moments create a diversity in which the idea of necessary determination loses all meaning, then the self understood by consciousness would be a free cause. We would have complete knowledge of ourselves, and on the flip side, because this absolute constantly mixes with phenomena and, while absorbing them, permeates them, these phenomena wouldn’t be as easily handled by mathematical reasoning as is often claimed.
So we have assumed the existence of a homogeneous Space and, with Kant, distinguished this space from the matter which fills it. With him we have admitted that homogeneous space is a "form of our sensibility": and we understand by this simply that other minds, e.g. those of animals, social life, although they perceive objects, do not distinguish them so clearly either from one another or from themselves. This intuition of a homogeneous medium, an intuition peculiar to man, enables us to externalize our concepts in relation to one another, reveals to us the objectivity of things, and thus, in two ways, on the one hand by getting everything ready for language, and on the other by showing us an external world, quite distinct from ourselves, in the perception of which all minds have a common share, foreshadows and prepares the way for social life.
So, we have accepted the idea of a uniform space and, like Kant, separated this space from the matter that fills it. Along with him, we’ve recognized that uniform space is a "form of our awareness": and we simply mean that other minds, like those of animals, while they perceive objects, do not clearly distinguish them from each other or from themselves. This understanding of a uniform medium, which is unique to humans, allows us to relate our concepts to one another, reveals the objectivity of things to us, and thus, in two ways—first, by setting the stage for language, and second, by showing us a world outside ourselves, which all minds can perceive together—anticipates and paves the way for social life.
Over against this homogeneous space we have put the self as perceived by an attentive consciousness, a living self, whose states, at once undistinguished and unstable, cannot be separated without changing their nature, and cannot receive a fixed form or be expressed in words without becoming public property. How could this self, which distinguishes external objects so sharply and represents them so easily by means of symbols, withstand the temptation to introduce the same distinctions into its own life and to replace the[Pg 237] interpenetration of its psychic states, their wholly qualitative multiplicity, by a numerical plurality of terms which are distinguished from one another, set side by side, and expressed by means of words? In place of a heterogeneous duration whose moments permeate one another, we thus get a homogeneous time whose moments are strung on a spatial line. In place of an inner life whose successive phases, each unique of its kind, cannot be expressed in the fixed terms of language, we get a self which can be artificially reconstructed, and simple psychic states which can be added to and taken from one another just like the letters of the alphabet in forming words. Now, this must not be thought to be a mode of symbolical representation only, for immediate intuition and discursive thought are one in concrete reality, and the very mechanism by which we only meant at first to explain our conduct will end by also controlling it. Our psychic states, separating then from each other, will get solidified; between our ideas, thus crystallized, and our external movements we shall witness permanent associations being formed; and little by little, as our consciousness thus imitates the process by which nervous matter procures reflex actions, automatism will cover over freedom.[10] It is just at this point[Pg 238] that the associationists and the determinists come in on the one side, and the Kantians on the other. As they look at only the commonest aspect of our conscious life, they perceive clearly marked states, which can recur in time like physical phenomena, and to which the law of causal determination applies, if we wish, in the same sense as it does to nature. As, on the other hand, the medium in which these psychic states are set side by side exhibits parts external to one another, in which the same facts seem capable of being repeated, they do not hesitate to make time a homogeneous medium and treat it as space. Henceforth all difference between duration and extensity, succession and simultaneity, is abolished: the only thing left is to turn freedom out of doors, or, if you cannot entirely throw off your traditional respect for it, to escort it with all due ceremony up to the supratemporal domain of "things in themselves," whose mysterious threshold your consciousness cannot cross. But, in our view, there is a third course which might be taken, namely, to carry[Pg 239] ourselves back in thought to those moments of our life when we made some serious decision, moments unique of their kind, which will never be repeated —any more than the past phases in the history of a nation will ever come back again. We should see that if these past states cannot be adequately expressed in words or artificially reconstructed by a juxtaposition of simpler states, it is because in their dynamic unity and wholly qualitative multiplicity they are phases of our real and concrete duration, a heterogeneous duration and a living one. We should see that, if our action was pronounced by us to be free, it is because the relation of this action to the state from which it issued could not be expressed by a law, this psychic state being unique of its kind and unable ever to occur again. We should see, finally, that the very idea of necessary determination here loses every shred of meaning, that there cannot be any question either of foreseeing the act before it is performed or of reasoning about the possibility of the contrary action once the deed is done, for to have all the conditions given is, in concrete duration, to place oneself at the very moment of the act and not to foresee it. But we should also understand the illusion which makes the one party think that they are compelled to deny freedom, and the others that they must define it. It is because the transition is made by imperceptible steps from concrete duration, whose elements permeate one another, to symbolical duration, whose[Pg 240] moments are set side by side, and consequently from free activity to conscious automatism. It is because, although we are free whenever we are willing to get back into ourselves, it seldom happens that we are willing. It is because, finally, even in the cases where the action is freely performed, we cannot reason about it without setting out its conditions externally to one another, therefore in space and no longer in pure duration. The problem of freedom has thus sprung from a misunderstanding: it has been to the moderns what the paradoxes of the Eleatics were to the ancients, and, like these paradoxes, it has its origin in the illusion through which we confuse succession and simultaneity, duration and extensity, quality and quantity.
Against this uniform space, we have the self as seen by an aware consciousness, a living self whose states, both indistinct and unstable, can't be separated without changing their essence, and can't take on a fixed shape or be put into words without becoming public domain. How could this self, which sharply distinguishes external objects and easily represents them with symbols, resist the urge to apply the same distinctions to its own life and replace the intermingling of its mental states, their wholly qualitative variety, with a numerical plurality of terms that are separated, lined up, and expressed in words? Instead of a varied duration where moments blend into one another, we end up with a uniform time where moments are lined up on a spatial line. Instead of an inner life where successive phases, each unique, can't be captured in fixed language, we have a self that can be artificially reconstructed, and simple mental states that can be added or removed like letters in forming words. This shouldn't be seen just as a mode of symbolic representation, as immediate intuition and analytical thought are one in reality, and the very mechanism we initially intended to explain our behavior will end up controlling it. Our mental states, splitting apart, will become solidified; between our crystallized ideas and our external actions, we will see lasting associations formed; and gradually, as our consciousness mimics the process by which nervous matter creates reflex actions, automatism will overshadow freedom. It is precisely at this point that the associationists and determinists step in on one side, and the Kantians on the other. Since they focus only on the most obvious aspects of our conscious life, they clearly see distinct states that can reoccur over time like physical phenomena, and to which the law of causal determination applies, just as it does in nature. Meanwhile, the medium where these mental states are arrayed shows parts separate from one another, in which the same facts seem capable of repeatability, leading them to treat time as a homogeneous medium just like space. Consequently, all distinctions between duration and extent, succession and simultaneity, disappear: the only option left is to dismiss freedom, or if you can't completely reject your traditional respect for it, to ceremonially escort it into the timeless realm of "things in themselves," which your consciousness cannot access. However, we propose a third option, which is to mentally transport ourselves back to those moments in our lives when we made serious decisions, moments that are completely unique and will never recur—just as past phases in a nation's history will not return. We should realize that if these past states cannot be accurately expressed in words or artificially reconstructed through the juxtaposition of simpler states, it's because in their dynamic unity and completely qualitative variety they represent phases of our real and concrete duration, a varied and living duration. We should recognize that if we declare our actions to be free, it's because the relationship of that action to the state from which it arose cannot be defined by a law, as that mental state is unique and cannot happen again. Ultimately, we should see that the very idea of necessary determination loses all meaning here, that there can be no question of predicting the action before it happens or reasoning about the possibility of an alternative action once it's done, because having all conditions in place, in concrete duration, means placing oneself at the moment of the act rather than predicting it. But we should also grasp the illusion that leads one group to deny freedom and another to try to define it. It's because there is an imperceptible shift from concrete duration, where elements seep into one another, to symbolic duration, where moments stand apart, and thus from free activity to conscious automatism. It's because, even though we are free whenever we choose to turn inward, it rarely happens that we actually want to. Finally, even in instances where the action is performed freely, we can't reason about it without setting out its conditions in relation to one another, therefore viewing them spatially rather than in pure duration. The problem of freedom thus arises from a misunderstanding: it has been for modern thinkers what the Eleatic paradoxes were for ancient ones, and like those paradoxes, it originates from the illusion that makes us confuse succession with simultaneity, duration with extent, quality with quantity.
[3] Ibid. p. 585.
[4] Ibid. p. 585.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Ibid. p. 585.
[6] Fouillée, La Liberté et le Déterminisme.
[7] In Molière's comedy Le Misanthrope, (Tr.).
[9] Ibid. p. 583.
[10] of these voluntary acts which may be compared to reflex movements, and he has restricted freedom to moments of crisis. But he does not seem to have noticed that the process of our free activity goes on, as it were, unknown to ourselves, in the obscure depths of our consciousness at every moment of duration, that the very feeling of duration comes from this source, and that without this heterogeneous and continuous duration, in which our self evolves, there would be no moral crisis. The study, even the close study, of a given free action will thus not settle the problem of freedom. The whole series of our heterogeneous states of consciousness must be taken into consideration. In other words, it is in a close analysis of the idea of duration that the key to the problem must be sought.
[10] of these voluntary actions can be likened to reflex responses, and he has limited freedom to moments of crisis. However, he seems to have overlooked that our free actions unfold, in a sense, beneath our awareness, in the hidden layers of our consciousness at every moment of time; that the very experience of time comes from this origin, and that without this diverse and ongoing sense of time, in which our self develops, there would be no moral crisis. Examining, even closely, a specific free action will not resolve the issue of freedom. The entire range of our varied states of consciousness must be considered. In other words, it is through a detailed analysis of the concept of duration that the answer to the problem must be sought.
INDEX
Absolute, reality of space, 91; freedom
not, 166; law of consciousness, 207;
Spinoza and, 208; knowledge of ourselves, 235.
Abstraction, implies homogeneous
medium, 97; breaks up elements
of idea, 134; and diagram of process
of reaching a decision, 177 f.;
and Lord Kelvin's theory of matter, 206.
Acceleration, hypothetical, of motions
of universe, 116 f., 193 ff.
Achilles, and tortoise, 73 f.
Act, not divisible like object, 112;
free acts, 165 ff.; "possible acts," 174 ff.
Act, of mind: all unity due to, 80 f.;
neglected in empirical theory of
space, 93 f.; nature of, 95.
Addition, of sensation-differences, 64, 65;
process of, 80, 123, 226;
implies multiplicity of parts, 85.
Advice, relation of, to freedom, 169.
Aeolus, cave of, 20.
Aesthetic, Kant's Transcendental, 92, 93·
Aesthetic feelings, 11 ff.; suggested,
not caused, 17; stages in, 17.
Alceste, indignation of, 167.
Algebra, deals with results not processes, 119.
Analysis, already visible in mental
image, 84; distorts feelings, 132 f.;
of a thing, not of a process, 219.
Anger, psychic element in, 29; and
organic disturbance, 30.
Animals, ability to find their way
through space, 96; space not so
homogeneous for, 97; perceive
duration as quality, 127; do not
picture distinct external world, 138, 236.
Antecedents, same, and same consequents, 199, 208.
Architecture, compared with rhythm, 15.
Aristotle, distinguishes potential and actual, 121.
Arithmetic, splits up units, 84.
Art, and beauty, 14; object of, 14;
and hypnotism, 14; the plastic
arts, 15; suggesting, not expressing
feelings, 16; merit of work of, 17;
yielding only sensations, 17;
aim and method of artist, 18.
Artificial, reconstruction of concrete phenomenon, 163.
Aspect, twofold, of terms in a series, 124, 226;
of the self, 128 ff.; of
conscious states, 129 ff.; 137 ff.
Association, by contiguity, 136, 164;
self cannot be constituted by, 139, 165, 226;
associationist determinism, 148, 155, 159;
of ideas in interrupted conversation, 156;
illustration from hypnotism, 157;
illustration from deliberation, 158;
involves defective conception of
self, 159 ff., 165, 226; of end and
movement, 160 f.; associations of
smell, 161; its mistakes, 161 ff.;
fits simple sensations, 164; cannot
explain deeper states of self, 164;
every-day acts obey laws of, 167 ff., 238.
Astronomy, measurement of time in, 107;
prediction of celestial phenomena, 117, 192 ff., 198.
Attention, and muscular tension, 27;
Fechner on, 27; Ribot on, 27; and
psychic tension, 28; and formation
of number, 82, 84.
Bain, on nervous energy, 21; on
theory of space, 93; on conflict of
motives, 159.
Beauty, feeling of, 14 ff.; in nature
and art, 14 ff.
Beliefs, adopted without reason, 135;
compared to cell in organism, 135;
some not properly assimilated, 136.
Blix, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Body, movements of, as suggesting
psychic state, 18; inclination of,
in comparing pleasures, 38.
Causality, law of, 199, 201; as
regular succession, 202 f.; common
sense and meaning of, 203; as
prefiguring of future phenomenon
in present conditions, 204 ff.; not
a necessary principle, 208; Spinoza
on, 208; identity and, 209, 210;
as necessary determination of
phenomena means human freedom, 210;
and second type of prefiguring, 211 f.;
this leads to Leibniz, 213,
this does not involve determinism, 214;
involves two conceptions of duration, 215;
confusion of these two senses, 216;
relation of external, as mathematical, 219;
relation of inner, as dynamic, 219;
Kant ascribed same meaning to, in inner
and outer world, 232.
Cause, external, and intensity, 4 f., 20, 42 ff., 72;
introduced into effect, 42, 47, 54, 68;
external, and separation of sensations, 109, 125;
series of associations sometimes effect
rather than, 156 ff.; in inner states
no recurrence of same, 154, 199 f., 233;
assertion that effect bound up with, 201;
analysis of concept of, 201; self as free, 235.
Cell, in organism, beliefs compared to, 135.
Change, but not duration, attributed
to external things, 227.
Character, freedom and, 172 f.; and
prediction of future actions, 184.
Clocks, measurement of time by, 108 f.;
perception of strokes of without
expressly counting, 127.
Co-existence, number and relations
of, 75 n.; can space result from
relations of, 94; of past and present
only in consciousness, 112.
Cold, perception of, 46.
Colour, changes of hue and invariable
colours, 51 white, grey and black,
53 f.; degrees of saturation, 54;
intensity of, 54; colours of spectrum,
51, 54, 57; changes in sensation
of, 57; can there be equidistant
tints, 58.
Compromise, see also Endosmosis:
between idea of free force and
necessity, 217; forms of perception
result of, 223; intensity as
compromise between quality and
quantity, 225; number results
from a, 226; idea of measurable
time results from a, 228.
Consciousness, compared to invisible
musician, 147; as epiphenomenon, 152;
Kant separates external
perception and, 222; succession
without distinction in, 227; matter
and form of, 234.
Conservation, of energy, see Energy;
of motion, 151; of vis viva, 151;
conservative systems not the only
ones possible, 152.
Continuity, of number when formed, 82 f.
Contradiction, law of non-, 89, 150, 207,
reconciliation of apparent at
deeper level, 136.
Counting, units mast be identical, 76;
also distinct, 77; flock of sheep, 76 f.;
battalion of soldiers, 76;
implies intuition of space, 77 ff.;
material objects, 85; conscious
states, 86, 89; strokes of a bell, 86;
moments of duration, 104;
oscillations of a pendulum, 104 f.;
two sides of the process of, 123;
strokes of a clock by qualitative
effect, 127.
Crisis, freedom shown at, 170, 239.
Critique of Pure Reason, result of, 235.
Critique philosophique, article in, 75 n.
Dancer, and feeling of grace, 12.
Darwin, on rage, 29; on violent
emotions and reflex movements, 30;
on pain and reactions, 37.
Definition, of equality of sensation-differences, 64;
of addition of sensation-differences, 64, 65;
of number, 75; of subjective and objective, 83;
of space, 95, 98; none of right and left, 97;
of simultaneity, 110; of equal intervals
of time, 115; of velocity, 117 f.;
of inertia of matter, 142; of freedom,
leads to determinism, 220 f., 230, 239.
Delbœuf, his measurement of luminous
sensation, 52, 56 ff., 67 ff.;
his underlying postulate, 60.
Deliberation, process of, 158, 171;
wrongly pictured as oscillation in
space, 183.
Depth, of aesthetic feeling, 17 f.; of
emotional states, 31.
Descartes, and conservation of motion, 151;
his mischievous genius, 193;
his view of matter, 207;
Cartesian physics, 207;
and regularity of physical world, 208.
Desire, progress of a, 8; conceived
as a distinct thing, 159.
Determinism, two kinds of, 142;
physical, 143 ff.; psychological, 155 ff.;
rests on misconception of duration, 143, 173;
and molecular theory of matter, 143 f., 147;
of psychic states does not follow from
that of cerebral states, 146 f.;
associationist, 148, 155, 159; and
hypnotism, 157; self-determination, 165, 172;
its mechanical conception of self, 171;
could act have been different? 173, 201, 220, 239;
can act be predicted? 173, 183 ft., 201, 220, 239;
and "possible acts," 174; and character, 184 ff., 172;
and astronomical prediction, 192 ff.;
and law of causality, 199 ff.;
misunderstanding of causality underlies all, 201 ff.;
of phenomena as involving human freedom, 210, 215 ff.;
not involved in second type of prefiguring, 211 f., 215 f.;
Leibniz's, 214; as compromis between idea of
free effort and necessity, 217;
attempt to define freedom leads to, 220, 230, 239;
all, refuted by experience, 230;
meaningless if duration heterogeneous, 235, 239.
Diagrams, geometrical, 176, 191.
Differentials, expressing Fechner's Law, 62, 65;
dealing with motion, 119.
Dimension, time as fourth, 109.
Discontinuity, of number, 82 f.
Disgust, Richet's description of, 36.
Distinction, two meanings of, 75 n., 121;
succession without, 101; of psychic states,
leads to mechanical conception of self, 171;
Kant's, between matter and form of
consciousness, 234.
Donaldson, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Dreams, freshness in, 8; charm in, 10;
superficial psychic states removed
in, 126; overlying images in, 136.
Duration, moments counted by means
of points in space, 78 f., 87; differs
from homogeneous time in having
nothing to do with space, 91; empirical
attempts to build up space
from, 99 f., 222; conception of
pure, 100, 104 ff., 229; expressed
in terms of space, 101, 103, 232;
order of succession in, 101 f.; any
homogeneity in, implies space, 104, 115;
as interpenetration of conscious
states, 104, 107, 108, 110,
128, 218, 226, 232 ff., 235; pure, is
wholly qualitative, 106, 126 f., 229;
not measurable, 107 ff.; not
measured by clocks, 108 f.; as
heterogeneous and with no relation
to number, 109, 110, 120, 226, 229, 235, 239;
how mistaken idea of homogeneity arises, 109;
and motion, 110, 114, 124; eliminated
from time by science, 115, 116, 228;
and simultaneity, 115 f.; and
astronomical prediction, 117, 192
ff.; cannot be represented by
mathematical formulae, 119; as
mental synthesis, 120; none in
space, 120, 227; as quality, 127,
193, 197, 226; felt as quality in
sleep, 126; perceived as quality by
animals, 127; homogeneous, as
symbolical representation derived
from space, 128, 219, 239, 240; its
two forms, 128; constituted by
deep-seated conscious states, 137, 224;
determinism rests on inaccurate
conception of, 143, 153, 173,
209, 215 f., 220, 235, 239; acts like
a cause in realm of life, 153;
heterogeneity of, precludes return
to former state, 154, 200, 219, 232, 233, 239;
real, and prediction, 183 ff.;
of conscious states unalterable, 196 f.;
difference between past and
future, 198; applicable to persons,
not to external things, 200, 209 f., 215, 227;
as contained in single moment, 208;
real, as leading to
free will, 210, 215 f.; attributed to
things, 215, 228; two conceptions
of, in causality, 215; separated
from extensity by science, 228 f., 230;
must similarly be separated
by philosophy, 229 f.; Kant put
self outside, 233; possible to get
back into pure, 233; Kant confused
with space, 233; science
cannot deal with, 234; if homogeneous,
no freedom, 235; origin
of feeling of, 238 n.; no moral
crisis without, 238 n.; key to
problem of free will, 238 n.
Dynamism, as system of nature, 140;
and relation between facts and
laws, 140 f.; its view of simplicity, 141;
inner, 172.
Eclipse, prediction of, 117, 194·
Education, not properly assimilated, 166;
may curtail freedom, 167.
Effort, intensity of, 7, 24, 25, 26;
muscular, 20 ff.; apparently quantitative, 21;
feeling of, 21 ff., 211;
experimental investigation of, 22 ff.;
superficial, 26; in estimating
intensity and pitch of sound, 45 f.;
in second type of prefiguring, 211;
force and, 214; ideas of free, and
necessity to be kept apart, 217, 218.
Eleatics, their paradoxes, 74, 240;
arise from confusion between motion
and space, 112 ff.; Achilles
and tortoise, 113 f.
Elevation, of aesthetic feeling, 17.
Emotions, violent, intensity of, 28 ff.
Empiricist, theory of space, 93 f.;
derivation of extensive from inextensive, 94, 222.
Endosmosis, see also Compromise:—between
succession and externality, 109, 228;
between mobility and space, 112;
between free effort and
necessary determination, 218.
Energy, kinetic and potential, 152;
may be new kind of, 152.
Energy, conservation of: incompatible
with freedom, 142, 144;
and determination of physiological
and nervous phenomena, 145;
does not involve determinism of
conscious states, 146 f.; is it
universal? 150, 154; in the natural
sciences, 150; implies return of
system to former state, 152; conscious
force or free will may escape
law of, 154; illegitimate extension
of, 155, 230.
English philosophers, on extensity
and succession, 99.
Epiphenomenon, consciousness as, 152.
Equations, expressing Fechner's Law, 62;
express something finished, 19;
transformability of, 204.
Évellin, on space, time and motion, 114.
Experiments, and experimental observations:
Wundt on paralytic, 21; Vulpian on hemiplegia, 22;
Ferner on feeling of effort, 22 f.;
James on feeling of effort, 23;
clenching the fist, 24; compressing
the lips, 25; lifting a weight, 25, 48 f.;
Féré on muscular force, 41;
pin pricks, 42; on temperature
sense, 46; Helmholtz on colour
and intensity, 51; photometric, 52 ff.;
Lehmann and Neiglick's, 52;
Delbœuf's on measurement
of luminous sensation, 52 ff., 56 ff.
Explanation, confused with fact, 163, 181.
Extensity, implies relation of container
to contained, 3; no point of
contact between extended and unextended, 70;
as aspect of physical
qualities, 92; Kant on, 92, 148;
attempted derivation of, from the
unextended, 93 f., 99 f., 222; homogeneous,
as result of stripping
matter of concrete qualities, 205;
Descartes' view of matter as homogeneous, 207;
hylozoism and qualities of matter, 213; confusion
with duration raises problem of
freedom, 221, 240; separated from
duration by science, 228, 230.
Externality, of things in space, 99;
exists outside the ego, 108, 227;
endosmosis between succession
and, 109, 228; of things, helps to
cut up psychic life, 109, 125 f., 130, 228;
animals have not same tendency
to picture, 138; empirical
school attempts to build up, from
inner states, 222; external things
subject to change but not duration, 227;
external world distinct from
ourselves, 236.
Fact, relation between law and, 140 f.;
explanation confused with, 163, 181.
Faraday, and centres of force, 218.
Fear, Spencer on, 30; conceived as
distinct state, 159.
Fechner, on attention and tension 27;
his psychophysics, 56, 60 ff.;
his formulae, 61, 62; his law, 61;
his logarithmic law, 62 n.; method
of minimum differences, 64, 69.
Feeling, intensity of, 7, 185;
deep-seated, 7 ff.; aesthetic, 11 ff.; of
grace, 11 f.; of beauty, 14 f.;
richness of aesthetic, 17 f.; moral, 18 f.;
and physical symptoms, 20 ff.;
of effort, 21 ff., 211; distorted
by analysis, 132 f.; something
living and developing, 133;
leads to resolution, 133, 171;
whole soul reflected in each, 165;
change in duration of, means
change in nature, 197 f.
Féré, C, on sensation and muscular force, 41.
Ferrier, on feeling of effort, 16.
Figure, see Diagram.
Flavour, changing, solidified by language, 131.
Force, alleged psychic, 20 f., 25;
muscular, 21; nervous, 21; sensation
of, 21; conscious states not
forces, 165, 170; idea of, as indeterminate
effort, 214; self as a free, 216;
idea of, and necessity, 216, 217;
as free spontaneity, 217;
ideas of free force and necessity
separated by science, 218.
"Form of Sensibility," Kant's theory
of, 94; homogeneous space as, 236.
Forms, borrowed from external world
in perception of self, 154, 167, 183,
217, 223; borrowed from self in
perception of things, 222; of perception,
result of compromise, 223;
elimination of those borrowed
from external world, 224; Kant's
distinction between matter and, 93, 234.
Formulae, Weber's, 61; Fechner's, 62;
dealing with velocity, 118.
Fouillée, on freedom as a motive, 160.
Fourth dimension, time as, 109.
Freedom, Free Will, see also Determinism:
origin of problem, 74, 139, 221, 240;
cause of conflict between mechanism
and dynamism, 140; twofold objection to, 142;
and molecular theory of matter, 143 f.;
and conservation of energy, 145 ff.;
strictly limited if principle of conservation
universal, 149 f.; as conscious force,
exempt from law of conservation, 154;
defenders of, mistakenly agree
that conscious states are
distinct things, 159; Fouillée on,
160; as self-expression, 165, 172;
not absolute, but admits of degrees, 166;
many live without realizing, 166;
may be curtailed by education, 167;
free acts rare, 167, 231, 240;
free decision springs from whole or
fundamental self, 167, 172, 231, 240;
covered over by automatism, 168, 231, 237;
sometimes resigned through indolence, 169;
shown in times of crisis, 170, 239;
and character, 172; to be sought
in characteristic of the decision
or act, 173, 182 f.; Mill on, 174;
and "possible acts," 174; free
action compared to over-ripe fruit, 176;
distinction of successive
phases in, leads to determinism, 177 ff.;
the self infallible in affirming its, 183;
not disproved by causality as regular succession, 202 f.;
safe-guarded by different conceptions of
causality taken by themselves, 215 f.;
self as free cause, 216, 235;
real but indefinable, 219 ff., 230, 239 f.;
why denied and defined, 229;
Kant on, 232, 233, 235, 238; incomprehensible
if duration homogeneous, 235;
key to problem of, 238 n.; follows
from uniqueness of relation of
psychic state to act, 239.
Fusion, see Interpenetration.
Future, see Prediction.
Ghost, time as ghost of space, 99.
Goldscheider, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Grace, feeling of, 11 f.
Hamilton, Mill on, quoted, 159, 174·
Harmony, Leibniz on pre-established, 147, 213, 214.
Heat, sensation of, 46 f.; mechanical theory of, 151.
Helmholtz, on effort of volition, 23;
on colour and intensity, 51.
Hemiplegia, Vulpian on, 22.
Heterogeneity, qualitative, interpreted
as extensive homogeneity, 95;
of pure duration, 109, 110, 120, 128, 226, 229, 235, 239;
of deep-seated psychic states, 200;
homogeneous universe assumed behind, 205;
Kant's distinction between homogeneity and, 234.
Homogeneity, of time, 90, 98, 107, 124, 234, 237;
of space, 95 f., 98, 120, 236; is all homogeneity
space? 98; supposed two forms
of, 98; none in duration, 104, 115;
none in motion, 110, 115; how
introduced into duration, 124 f., 128;
connection between, and general ideas, 163;
assumed behind heterogeneity, 205; Kant's
distinction between heterogeneity and, 234.
Hope, why pleasurable, 9 f.
Hylozoism, ancient, 213, 214.
Hypnotism, and art, 14;
and aesthetic feeling, 17;
illustrating association of ideas, 157;
non-incorporation of idea received
during, 166.
Ideas, analysis of, 134; interpenetration of, 135;
unreasoning adherence to, 135;
some not incorporated, 135;
associationism fits superficial, 136;
reconciliation of, at deeper level, 136;
association of, in interrupted conversation, 156;
general, and perception of homogeneous medium, 163.
Identity, principle of, 207; attempt
to replace causality by, 209;
causality does not coincide with, 210.
Illusion, as to psychic states possessing
magnitude, 21; reflective
consciousness has two fundamental, 190;
of attributing mutual externality
to conscious states, 231;
leading to difficulties about free will, 240.
Immobility, movement cannot be
made from, 115; all that science
retains of motion is, 119, 229, 234.
Impenetrability, of matter, 88 f.
Inertia, of organism, and pleasure, 38;
vis inertiae,38; dynamism
derives, from voluntary activity, 140;
idea of spontaneity simpler
than, 141; spontaneity settling
down into, 220.
Instinct, perception of duration in
sleep compared to, 127; of the
intellect, 135.
Intensity, of psychic states, 1 ff., 224 f.;
of sensations, 1 ff., 7, 20, 32, 40,
42, 47, 172 f.; alleged intensive
magnitude, 2, 3 f., 71 f., 106, 225;
no point of contact with extensive, 3, 70;
estimated by external causes, 4 f., 20, 32 f., 42, 72;
estimated by atomic movements, 6;
different kinds of, 7; of deep-seated
psychic states, 8, 26; of a
growing desire, 8 f.; of joy, 10;
of sorrow, 11; of aesthetic feelings, 11 ff., 17 f.,
of moral feelings, pity, 18 f.;
of feeling of effort, 24 f.;
of superficial effort, 26; of intermediate
states, 27; of violent
emotions, 28 f., 31; as multiplicity
of simple states, 31, 73; of affective
sensations, 32 f., 34 f., 47, 73
and organic disturbance, 32; of
pain, 35 ff.; of disgust, 36; of
representative sensations, 39 ff., 72;
as quality, 42, 90, 190, 224; of
sensation of sound, 43 f.; of heat
and cold, 46 f.; of sensation of
weight, 48; of sensation of light, 50 ff.;
of a colour, 54; two factors
contributing to, 73; as qualitative
sign of quantity, 90, 224; of deep-seated
feeling, nothing but the
feeling, 185; how others made to
realize, 185 f.; as compromise
between quality and quantity, 225.
Interpenetration, multiplicity of, 75, 162;
of conscious states, 99, 100 f., 132 f., 163, 164, 231, 237;
in pure duration, 104, 107, 108, 110, 128, 218, 235;
of states of deep-seated self, 125, 137, 164;
of strong feelings, 132 f.; of ideas, 135;
of apparently contradictory ideas
at deeper level, 136; in process
of addition, 226; replaced by
plurality, 237.
Introspection, as leading to fundamental self, 231.
Intuition, of space necessary to idea
of number, 77 ff., 84, 225; of
homogeneous medium, perhaps
peculiar to man, 95 f., 236; of
motion and duration, 114; of
homogeneous space as step towards
social life, 138, 163, 236; immediate,
and discursive thought, 237.
James, W. on feeling of effort, 22, 23, 24; on rage, 29.
Joy, feeling of, 10.
Juxtaposition, see also Interpenetration:
inapplicable to inner states, 8 f.;
multiplicity of, 75 n., 162;
implies intuition of space, 77 f.;
number as a, 85, 89;
of conscious states, 101, 232; in
homogeneous time, 121; of lifeless
states, replaces a feeling, 133.
Kant, theory of space, 92 f.; Transcendental
Aesthetic, 92, 93; distinguished matter and
form of representation, 93; "form of
sensibility," 94, 236; separated
time and space, 222, 232; mistake
about time, 232; gave causality
same meaning in inner and outer
world, 232; clung to freedom
but made it noumenal, 232, 238;
put free self outside space and time,
233, 235; on "things in themselves," 233 f.;
made time and space homogeneous, 233; and the
Practical Reason, 234; distinguished
matter and form of consciousness, 234;
result of Critique of Pure Reason, 235;
raised barrier between phenomena and
things in themselves, 235; distinguished
space from matter, 236.
Kelvin, Lord, his theory of matter, 206.
Lange, on materialism and determinism, 144.
Language, unequal to psychological
analysis, 9, 13, 160, 196, 237;
foreign, sounds louder, 41; dominates
thought, 70, 231; perhaps
implies intuition of space, 97, 163, 236;
uses terms borrowed from space, 122;
favours separation of states of self, 128, 137, 139, 167, 231;
solidifying influence of, on impressions, 129 f.;
gives fixed form to fleeting sensations, 131 f.;
description distorts the feelings, 132 ff.;
only ideas which least belong to us can
be expressed by, 136, 164; and social life, 137, 167, 231, 236;
same impulse to picture externality as to speak, 138;
second self formed, whose states expressed by, 138;
illustration of inadequacy of, 160 f.;
general ideas and intuition of space, 163;
fixes only impersonal aspect of emotions, 164;
psychology misled by, 165;
how determinism aided by, 171; why same feeling,
when repeated, called by same name, 200;
favoured by avoiding separation of
duration and extensity, 230 f.
La Rochefoucauld, on sympathy, 19.
Law, Weber's, 60; Fechner's, 62;
Fechner's logarithmic, 62 w.; of
non-contradiction, 89, 150, 207;
of Nature, mechanism and dynamism
on, 140 f.; relation between
facts and, 140 f.; "same antecedents,
same consequents," 199, 208;
of causality, 199 ff.; physical
phenomena obey, 202, 219; principle
of identity as absolute, 207;
relation of psychic state to act
cannot be expressed by, 239.
Lehmann, his photometric experiments, 52,
Leibniz, on pre-established harmony, 147, 213, 214;
and conservation of vis viva,151;
on qualities of matter, 213;
on matter as monad, 213, 214;
conception of causality as leading to, 213;
and determinism, 214.
Light, sensation of, 50 ff.
Line, succession symbolized as a, 103;
motion not a, 120; time not a, 181.
"Local signs," 49, 95; Lotze on, 93.
Lotze, theory of local signs, 93.
Magnitude, quantitative differences applicable to, 2 ff.;
alleged intensive, 2, 3 f., 71 f., 106, 225;
two species of, 3 f.; of growing desire, 9;
and muscular effort, 20 f.; of sensations, 31 ff., 72;
intensity of pain as a, 37; pleasure as a, 38;
of representative sensations, 47;
interval between colours as, 57 f.;
interval between sensations as, 66, 68 f.;
intensity not a, 225.
Mathematics, represents results, not
processes, 119, 234; exemplifies
one type of prefiguring, 204 f.
Matter, impenetrability of, 88;
molecular theory of, and determinism, 143 f., 209;
atomic theory of, still hypothetical, 145;
has no apparent duration, 153; stripped
of concrete qualities, 205; shape
as quality of, 205; Lord Kelvin's
vortex theory of, 206; Descartes'
view of, 207; hylozoism and
qualities of, 213; Leibniz and
qualities of, 213; distinguished
from form, 223, 234; distinguished
from space, 236.
Mean gradations, method of, 56, 59, 67, 69.
Mechanics, treatment of time and duration
in, 115; and notion of velocity, 117;
deals with equations, 119.
Mechanism, as system of nature, 140;
and relation between facts and laws, 140 f.;
its view of simplicity, 141;
its influence on determinism, 148, 209;
makes consciousness an epiphenomenon, 152;
and Lord Kelvin's theory of matter, 207;
Spinozistic, 209; and coincidence
of causality with identity, 210;
meant to explain conduct,
will control it, 237.
Metaphor, see Symbolical Representation.
Method, of mean gradations, 56, 59, 67, 69;
of minimum differences, 64f., 69.
Mill, on Hamilton, 159 n., 174 n.;
on distinct states of self, 159; on free will, 174.
Mind, act of, see Act.
Mind, articles in, quoted, 29 n., 46 n.
Minimum differences, method of, 64 f., 69.
Mobility, and motion, in f.; eliminated
by science, 115, 228.
Molière, Le Misanthrope quoted, 167.
Monad, Leibniz on matter as, 213, 214.
Motion, see also Movement: analysis
of concept of, 110 f.; real only for
conscious spectator, 111; as mental
synthesis, in, 120; mobility and, 111;
of shooting star, 111; confused
with space in Eleatic paradox, 113 f.;
intuition of, 114; not derivable from
immobilizes, 115;
no homogeneous element in, 115;
science eliminates mobility from, 115, 228, 234;
hypothetical acceleration of cosmic, 116 f., 193 ff.;
cannot be represented by mathematical
formulae, 119 f., 234;
helps to form idea of homogeneous
duration, 124; Descartes and
conservation of, 151; and Lord
Kelvin's theory of matter, 206.
Motives, actions explained by, 148;
and process of deliberation, 158;
act not determined by, 158; Bain
on conflict of, 159; Fouillée on
freedom as a, 160; choice without,
shown at crisis, 170.
Movement, see also Motion: atomic,
and intensity, 6; molecular, and
sensation, 33, 34; automatic and
free, 33, 35; in estimating sensation
of weight, 49 f.; measurement
of velocity of, 107, 117.
Müller, Johann, nativistic theory of space, 93.
Multiplicity, inner, 73; of conscious states, 75 ff., 90 f.;
of juxtaposition, 75 n., 162;
of interpenetration, 75 n., 162;
implied in number, 76, 80 f.; implied in addition, 85;
two kinds of 85 f., 91, 121, 128, 129;
discrete, 90, 91, 120 f., 226;
of number and of conscious states, 91, 121;
continuous or qualitative, 105, 121, 128, 224, 226, 229, 239;
determinism rests on inaccurate conception of, 143, 173;
associationism confuses the two kinds of, 162 f.;
of psychic states as constituting duration, 224;
duration as qualitative, 226, 229.
Music, and suggestion, 15, 44;
duration and musical rhythm, 100;
increase of stimulus compared to
musical phrase, 106; organization
of sensations compared to melodic
phrase, 111; strokes of clock
compared to musical phrase, 127;
consciousness compared to invisible
musician, 147.
Nativist theory of space, 93.
Nature beauty in, 14; compared
with art, 16; profoundly utilitarian, 33;
view taken by mechanism
and dynamism, 140 f.; concrete
phenomena of, abolished, 207;
view of, as whimsical, 212.
Necessity, see also Determinism:
mechanism cannot escape, 140;
as deus ex machina in ancient
hylozoism, 214; and idea of force, 216 ff.
Neiglick, his photometric experiments, 52
Noël, G., article on number and space, 75 n.
Notes, why classified as higher and lower, 45 f.
Noumenon, freedom as, 232.
Novelist, how effects produced, 133, 164, 185.
Number, natural series, 2, 80; definition of, 75;
article on space and, 75 n.;
units of, identical, 76;
units of, distinct, 77, 226; implies
intuition of space, 77 ff., 83 f., 225;
both unit and synthesis of units, 80 f.;
discontinuity of, 82; process
of forming a, 82 f.; why divisible
at will, 83; subjective and
objective in, 84; thought of as a
juxtaposition, 85; inapplicable to
multiplicity of conscious states, 87;
and impenetrability of matter, 89;
those in daily use have emotional
equivalents, 123; time as a, 195, 197;
results from a compromise, 226.
Objective, definition of, 83.
Objectivity, of things, 236.
Objects, contrasted with progress,
in, 112, 219; can be analysed, 112;
help to cut up our psychic
life, 124 f.; seem to live and grow
old, 130; tend to fix changing
feelings, 130; in human soul
processes, not, 131.
Order, of succession, implies space, 101 f.
Pain, and pity, 18 f.; as sign of
future reaction, 33; intensity of, 35 f.;
Darwin on, 37; conceived as distinct thing, 159.
Paradox, the Eleatic, 74, 112 f., 240.
Parallelism, of physical and psychical series, 146 f.
Paralysis, and feeling of effort, 21, 22.
Past, no recurrence of, 154, 200 f., 219, 232, 233, 239.
Paul, his prediction of Peter's action, 184 ff.
Pendulum, counting oscillations of, 104 f.;
what do oscillations of, measure, 107 ff;
oscillations of, help to cut up our
psychic life, 109; spreads out undivided
tension of spring, 228.
Permeation, see Interpenetration.
Peter, Paul's prediction of his action, 184 ff.
Photometric experiments, 52 ff.
Physics, and sound-vibrations, 46;
and degrees of luminous intensity, 52 f.;
interested in external cause, 71;
physical phenomena and law, 202;
Cartesian, 207, 208;
Descartes' instantaneous, 208;
and forecasting of phenomena, 222, 230.
Pillon, F., article on number and space, 75 n.
Pitch, of a sound, 44 f.
Plateau, his method of measuring
luminous sensations, 56.
Plato, quoted, 168; Platonic reminiscence, 234.
Pleasure, as sign of future reaction, 33 f.;
and bodily inclination, 38;
keenness of, as inertia of organism, 38;
conceived as distinct thing, 159.
Poetry, how effects produced, 15.
"Possible acts," 174 f., 239.
Postulate, Delbœuf's, 60; Fechner's, 60;
fundamental, of psychophysics, 65, 70;
underlying geometrical
representation of voluntary activity, 179.
Prediction, astronomical, 117, 192 ff., 198;
determinism and, 173, 183 ff., 220;
real duration and, 183 ff.; of
future actions, 183 ff., 229, 239;
probable and infallible, 183 f., and
character, 184, 172; hypothetical
case of Peter and Paul, 184 ff.;
all foreseeing as seeing, 195, 197, 198;
of phenomena, and physics, 222, 230.
Prefiguring, of future phenomenon in
present conditions, 204 ff., 210;
two kinds of, 204 ff., 215; as in
mathematics, 204 f.; as having
idea of possible future act, 211 f.
Pressure, sensation of, 47 f.
Process, motion as a, in; conscious
states not things but, 131, 196;
misleading to substitute material
symbol for, 190; cannot be
analysed, 219.
Progress, motion as a, in; not
divisible, 112; cannot be represented
by geometrical figure, 181;
misleading to substitute material
symbol for, 190; psychic state as
a, 198; from idea to act, 211.
Providence, Descartes and grace of, 208.
Psychology, descriptive, limits of, 139;
sometimes misled by language, 165;
deals with intervals of duration
and not their extremities, 196;
modern, and perception through
subjective forms, 222.
Psychophysics, and measurement of
sensations, 1, 55 ff.; measurement
of intensity of light, 52 ff.; Delbœuf's
experiments, 52, 56, 58 f., 67 f.;
method of mean gradations, 56, 59, 67, 69;
method of minimum differences, 64 f., 69;
Delbœuf's postulate, 60; Weber's Law, 60;
all, involved in transition from
stimulus to amount of sensation, 61;
Fechner's Law, 61 f.; postulate of, 65, 70;
fallacy of all, 65 f., 70;
exaggerations of, 225.
Quality, interpreted as quantity or magnitude,
9, 13, 39, 42, 43, 48 f., 51, 58, 69, 70;
sound as a, 46;
sensation of increase qualitative, 48;
intensity of light as a, 50;
variations in brightness qualitative, 54;
psychophysics attempts to measure, 63;
no point of contact with quantity, 70;
sensation as a, 72, 90; confusion with
quantity invades whole series of psychic
states, 74; space devoid of, 95;
qualitative multiplicity, 105, 121,
128, 224, 226, 229, 239; sensation
of mobility qualitative, 112; qualitative
distinctions, 121 f., 204;
counting as a qualitative progress, 123;
of quantity, 123; strokes of a clock
estimated by quality of musical phrase, 127;
time as, 129; deep-seated conscious states
as pure, 137 f., 224; matter stripped of
concrete, 205; attempt to explain apparent,
of matter, 205; shape as, of matter, 205;
qualities of things set up as states, 213;
Leibniz and external, 213; psychic phenomena
as pure, 224; intensity as compromise between
quantity and, 225.
Quantity, see also Magnitude: as
applied to inner states, I ff.; alleged
two kinds of, 3 ff., 72, 225; quality
interpreted as, 9, 13, 39, 42, 43,
48 f., 51, 58, 69, 70; and muscular
effort, 20 f., 25; of cause, transferred
to quality of effect, 42, 70;
pitch and, 45, 46; increase of
sensation as, 48; difference between
hues of a colour as, 60;
psychophysics makes intervals between
sensations into a, 62, 65, 66, 68 f.;
no point of contact between
quality and, 70; how quantitative
relations set up between sensations, 71;
quantitative distinctions, 121
f., 204; without quality, 123;
time as, 129; cause of psychic
phenomena as, 224; quality as
sign of, 224; intensity as compromise
between quality and, 225.
Rage, Darwin on, 29; James on, 29.
Reality, of space, 91 f., 95, no;
two kinds of, 97, 110; real duration,
110, 125 ff., 154; of facts for
dynamism, 141; of laws for
mechanism, 141; time as a, 155;
attempt to produce, from algebraical
relations, 205; physics
treats sensations as signs of, 223.
Reason, beliefs adopted without, 135;
decisions taken without or against, 170;
in ancient hylozoism, 214;
the discursive, 229, 237; Kant's
doctrine of the Practical, 234;
Critique of Pure, 235.
Refraction through space, self perceived
by, 128, 129, 137, 167, 183, 217, 223;
of "things in themselves," Kant's view, 233.
Renouvier, on freedom, 237 n.
Representation, see Symbolical Representation.
Resolution, how feeling leads to, 133, 171.
Revue philosophique, referred to, 52 n.
Revue scientifique, Tannery's criticism
of Fechner in, 67.
Rhythm, connecting dancer and spectator, 12;
effect in music, 14; in poetry, 15;
and architecture, 15; Nature does not command, 16;
succession of conscious states compared to, 100.
Ribot, on attention and movements, 27 f.
Richet, on pain, 35 f.; on disgust, 36.
Rood, on changes of hue, 51.
Saturation, of a colour, 54.
Scale, notes of, why classified as
higher and lower, 45 f.
Science, eliminates duration from
time and mobility from motion, 115 ff., 228;
and hypothetical acceleration of motions
of universe, 116, 193 ff.; attempts to do away
with duration and causality, 208 f.;
separates ideas of free effort and
necessary determination, 218;
attempts to measure intensive
quantity, 225; separates extensity
and duration, 228, 230; main
object of, 230; could deal with
time if homogeneous, 234.
Scottish philosophers, 72.
Sculpture, ancient, 15.
Self, whole, reflected in each conscious
state, 98, 165; recovery of the
fundamental, 100, 128, 129, 231,
233, 236, 240; introduces distinctions
derived from external objects
into its own states, 109, 125, 237;
superficial, with mutually external
states, 125, 128, 136, 138, 167, 237;
deep-seated, with interpenetrating
states, 125, 128, 136, 164, 236;
many conscious states never blend
with whole mass of, 135, 166, 168;
perceived by refraction through
space, 128, 129, 137, 167, 183, 217, 223;
the two aspects of the, 129 ff.,
137, 231; tendency to form
secondary, 138, 166; not an
association of terms, 139, 159 ff.,
164, 165, 226; recourse to living
and concrete, necessary to solve
problems of causality, freedom, etc., 139;
activity of, cannot be compared
to that of any other force, 143, 216;
perception of, through forms borrowed
from external world, 154, 217, 223;
self-determination, 165; parasitic, as result
of education, 166; free decisions
spring from whole or fundamental,
167, 172, 231, 240; covered over
with crust of clean-cut psychic
states, 167; does not intervene in
carrying out every-day acts, 168;
uprush of deep-seated, at moment
of crisis, 169; distinction of psychic
states leads to mechanical conception
of, 171; constantly changing
and growing, 171, 175 f.; view of,
involved in geometrical representation
of process of deciding, 176 f.;
infallible in affirming its immediate
experiences, 183; as a free force,
216, 235; Kant put free, outside
space and duration, 233; Kant
and phenomenal, 233; as a free
cause, 235.
Sensations, intensity of, 1 ff., 7 ff.,
20 ff., 40, 42, 47, 72 f.; art yielding
only, 17; and external causes, 20 ff.;
peripheral, and muscular effort, 24, 26;
peripheral, and violent emotions, 31;
magnitude of, 31, 32, 47, 72; affective
and representative: affective, 32 ff., 72 f.;
and organic disturbance, 32 f.;
pleasure and pain, 33 ff.;
affective, and free movements, 33;
representative, 39 ff., 73, 90;
medium, 41; representative, measured
by external causes, 42; of
sound, 43 f.; of heat and cold, 46 f., 64;
of pressure and weight, 47 f.;
increase of, and sensation of increase, 48;
as quantity or quality, 48; of movement, 50;
of light, 50 ff.; measurement of
luminous, 52 ff.; psychophysics
attempts to measure, 55 ff., 62, 63, 225;
equal and identical, 57, 62, 63, 64, 69;
law connecting stimulus and, 60 f.;
as quantities, 62, 65, 66; addition of, 64;
considered as a sum, 65, 67; how quantitative
differences set up between, 71 f.;
as pure quality, 72; and space, 92, 93, 95;
can space be built up from, 94;
simultaneous and identical, 95;
of motion, indivisible, 112;
influence of language on, 131;
not objects but processes, 131;
altered by repetition, 131;
physics treats, as signs of reality, 223.
Series, natural, of numbers, 2, 80;
double aspect of each term in a, 124, 226;
physical and psychical, 210.
"Several," use of, implies space, 122.
Shape, as quality of matter, 205.
Simplicity, different senses of, in
dynamism and mechanism, 141.
Simultaneity, implies space, 95;
measuring duration and counting, 108 f.;
as connecting link between
space and duration, 110; definition of, 110;
in measuring velocity, 114, 117; used in defining
equal intervals of time, 116, 119;
in space nothing but, 116, 206, 227;
and astronomical prediction, 116 f., 193 ff.;
dealt with by mathematics, 119; attempted
representation of succession by, 180, 221;
all relations not translatable into,
are scientifically unknowable, 234.
Sleep, and perception of duration, 126.
Smell, illustration from associations of, 161 f.
Social life, self with well-defined states
better adapted to, 128, 137, 139, 167, 231;
more important than our inner life, 130;
intuition of homogeneous medium as step
towards, 138, 163, 236.
Solidification, of an act, in space, 112;
of changing feelings, promoted by language
and external objects, 129 f.; of sensations
owing to language, 131; of ideas on surface
of consciousness, 135, 166, 168; of conscious
states, promotes social life, 231; of conscious
states, how brought about, 237.
Sorrow, an increasing, 11.
Sound, sensations of, 43 ff.; intensity
of, 43 ff.; pitch of, 45; why
classified as higher and lower, 45 f.
Space, and magnitude, 2; introduced
into perception of duration, 74;
article on number and, 75 n.;
intuition of, implied in counting,
77 ff., 83 f., 225; material objects
counted in, 85 f.; conscious states
not countable unless symbolically
represented in, 86 f., 89, 90; idea
of impenetrability shows interconnexion
of number and, 89; projection of psychic
states into, 90, 101, 106, 231; time,
but not duration, as spatial, 90 f.;
reality of, 91 f., 95, no; as common
element in certain sensations, 92;
Kant's theory of, 92, 93; nativistic
and empirical theories of, 93;
Müller's theory, 93; Lotze's theory, 93;
Bain's theory, 93; Wundt's theory, 93;
attempt to build up, from inextensive
sensations, 93 f., 99 f., 222; definition
of, 95, 98; as a homogeneous medium without
quality, 95 ff., 98; not so homogeneous
for animals, 96; intuition of homogeneous,
peculiar to man, 97, 236; intuition of,
necessary to counting, abstraction and speech, 97;
is time, as homogeneous medium, reducible
to, 98 f.; time as ghost of, 99; duration
expressed in terms of, 101, no; order of
succession implies, 101 f.; symbolical
representation of succession,
as line implies, 103; time as fourth
dimension of, 109; simultaneity
as connecting link between time
and, no; and motion, no ff.;
projection of act into, 112, 181;
infinitely divisible, 113, 114; as
homogeneous element in motion, 115;
the only measurable element in
motion, 116, 118, 119; nothing but
simultaneities in, 116, 206, 227;
alone homogeneous, 120; no duration
or succession in, 120 227; self perceived
by refraction through, 128, 129, 137, 167,
183, 217, 223; intuition of homogeneous,
as step towards social life, 138, 163, 236;
connexion between perception of, and general
ideas, 163; is time space? 181, 190, 221;
time confused with, in prediction, 191 ff.;
as result of stripping matter of concrete
qualities, 205; separated from time by
Kant, 222; must be eliminated
in studying inner phenomena, 229;
Kant confused time with, 232;
Kant put the free self outside, 233;
we usually live and act in, not in
duration, 233; Kant on time and, 233;
existence of homogeneous,
assumed, 236; as a "form of
sensibility," 236; intuition of,
what it accomplishes, 236.
Spectrum, colours of the, 51, 54, 57.
Spencer, H., on gracefulness, 13;
on expression of fear, 30.
Spinoza, on modes of thought and
modes of extension, 147; on
causality and apparent succession
in time, 208; conception of
causality which leads to, 208, 213;
Spinozistic mechanism, 209.
Spontaneity, idea of, simpler than
that of inertia, 141; force as a
free, 217; settling down into
inertia, 220.
Stimulus, law connecting sensation
with, 60 ff.; effect of slight but
continuous, 106.
Subjective, definition of, 83.
Succession, attempt to derive extensity
from, 99 f., 222; of conscious
states compared to rhythm of
tune, 100; without distinction,
101; order of, implies distinction
and therefore space, 101 f.; cannot
be symbolized as a line without
idea of space, 103 f.; within the
ego succession, without, only
externality, 108, 227; exists only
for conscious spectator, 108, 120, 227;
endosmosis between externality
and, 109, 228; none in
space, 120, 227; attempt to represent
by simultaneity, 180, 221;
causality as regular, 202 f.; no
regular, in deep-seated psychic
states, 203; attempt to transform
into inherence, 209; apparent, of
phenomena, 201, 227; of phenomena
and conscious states, 212, 216;
Leibniz and, 213; attributed
to things, 228; idea of measurable
time arises from compromise
between simultaneity and, 228.
Suggestion, in art, 14 ff.;
in music, 15, 44.
Symbolical Representation, necessary to
counting of conscious states, 86 f., 89, 90;
of a line, implies idea of space, 103;
pure duration cannot be measured without, 105;
of duration, derived from space, 110; of
time as homogeneous medium, 124 f.; of
elements of a conscious state, 163; of the self
and its feelings, given by determinism, 171;
of process of coming to a decision, 175 ff.;
leads to determinism, 178; of time as a
line, 182; cannot be substituted
for dynamic process, 190; of ego,
confused by Kant with ego itself, 232.
Sympathy, physical, and grace, 13;
with Nature. 16; with misfortune, 19.
Tannery, J., as critic of Fechner, 67.
Taste, as changeable, 131.
"Things in themselves," Kant and, 233, 234, 238.
Time, sounds not counted in, 87, 91;
as homogeneous medium in which
conscious states are ranged, 90, 121;
as homogeneous medium, nothing
but space, 91, 98; distinct
from pure duration, 91, 98;
is it unbounded medium distinct
from space? 98 f.; as ghost of
space, 99; attempt to derive
extensity from succession in, 99 f.;
two possible conceptions of, 100;
is it measurable? 107 f.; apparently
homogeneous, 107; as dealt
with by the astronomer and
physicist, 107, 192 ff.; as measured
by clocks, 108 f.; as fourth dimension
of space, 109; concrete and abstract, 114;
science eliminates duration from, 115 f.;
definition of equal intervals of, 115;
how it comes to be represented as
homogeneous, 124 f., 237; as symbolical
image of duration, 125 f.; as
quality and quantity, 129; confusion
of, with concrete duration, 155;
is time space? 181, 190, 221;
not a line, 181; confused with
space, 181 f., 191 f., 232; as a
number, 195, 197; separated from
space by Kant, 222, 232; idea of
measurable, arises from compromise, 228;
Kant's mistake about, 232; Kant on
space and, 233; science could deal
with, if homogeneous, 234; Kant put
freedom outside, 235; heterogeneous
duration replaced by homogeneous, 237.
Tortoise, and Achilles, 113 f.
Town, objects in, seem to live and
grow old, 129 f.
Tradesmen, their avoidance of
round numbers, 123.
Transcendental Aesthetic, Kant's
theory of space in his, 92, 93.
Units, those forming a number
identical, 76; also distinct, 77;
space implied in counting, 79;
every number both unit and
synthesis of, 80; two kinds,
ultimate and provisional, 80 f.;
if divisible, then extended, 82;
split up by arithmetic, 84; regarded
by common sense as indivisible, 84.
Unity, attaching to number, 76; all,
due to simple act of the mind, 80 f.;
of act and of object, 81, 83;
Spinoza and the divine, 208.
Universe, hypothetical acceleration
of motions of, 116, 193 ff.; molecular
theory of, 143; vague personality
ascribed to, 213.
Velocity, measurement of, 107, 114;
notion of, analysed, 117; uniform
and variable, 117 f.
Vis inertiae, 38; vis viva, 151.
Vulpian, on hemiplegia, 22.
Weber, his law, 60 f.
Weight, sensation of, 25 f.; 47 ff.
Will, see also Free Will: willing for
willing's sake, 157, 158.
Words, see language.
Wundt, on paralytic's sensation of
force, 21; on connexions of vocal
and auditory nervous filaments, 44;
theory of space, 93.
Zeno, on Achilles and tortoise, 113.
Absolute reality of space, 91; freedom
not, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; law of awareness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
Spinoza and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; understanding ourselves, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Abstraction implies homogeneous
medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; divides elements
of idea, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; and a diagram of the process
of making a decision, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
and Lord Kelvin's theory of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Acceleration, hypothetical, of motions
of universe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.
Achilles and tortoise, 73 f.
Act, not divisible like object, 112;
free acts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; "possible acts," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.
Act of mind: all unity due to, 80 f.;
neglected in empirical theory of
space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; nature of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Addition of sensation-differences, 64, 65;
process of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
implies many parts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Advice, relation of, to freedom, 169.
Aeolus, cave of, 20.
Aesthetic, Kant's Transcendental, 92, 93·
Aesthetic feelings, 11 ff.; suggested,
not caused, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; stages in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Alceste, indignation of, 167.
Algebra deals with results not processes, 119.
Analysis, already visible in mental
image, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; distorts emotions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.;
of a thing, not of a process, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Anger, psychic element in, 29; and
organic disruption, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Animals, ability to find their way
through space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; space isn't so
uniform for, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; perceive
duration as quality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; don't
picture unique outside world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Antecedents, same, and same consequents, 199, 208.
Architecture compared with rhythm, 15.
Aristotle distinguishes potential and actual, 121.
Arithmetic splits up units, 84.
Art, and beauty, 14; object of, 14;
and hypnosis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; the plastic
arts, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; suggesting, not stating
feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; value of work, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
yielding only sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
artist's goals and techniques, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Artificial, reconstruction of concrete phenomenon, 163.
Aspect, twofold, of terms in a series, 124, 226;
of the self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; of
conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.
Association by contiguity, 136, 164;
self cannot be formed by, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
associationist determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
of ideas in disrupted conversation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
hypnotism illustration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
illustration from discussion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
involves flawed understanding of
self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; of end and
movement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; groups of
smell, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; its mistakes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ etc.;
fits simple feelings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; cannot
explain deeper states of self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
everyday actions follow laws of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Astronomy, measurement of time in, 107;
prediction of celestial events, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
Attention and muscular tension, 27;
Fechner on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Ribot on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; and
psychic tension, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; and shaping
of number, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Bain on nervous energy, 21; on
theory of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; on conflict of
motives, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Beauty, feeling of, 14 ff.; in nature
and art, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ etc.
Beliefs, adopted without reason, 135;
compared to a cell in an organism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
some not properly integrated, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Blix, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Body movements as suggesting
mental state, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; tendency of,
in comparing pleasures, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Causality, law of, 199, 201; as
regular succession, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; usual
sense and meaning of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; as
foreshadowing of future events
in current conditions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; not
a key principle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Spinoza
on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; identity and, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
as needed determination of
phenomena means human freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
and second type of foreshadowing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
this leads to Leibniz, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,
this isn't about determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
involves two ideas of duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
confusion of these two senses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
relation of external, as mathematical, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
relationship of the inner, as dynamic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Kant attributed the same meaning to, in the inner __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__,
and outside world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Cause, external, and intensity, 4 f., 20, 42 ff., 72;
put into effect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
external, and separation of sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
series of associations sometimes impact
instead of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; in inner states
no repeat of same, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
the claim that the effect is connected to __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Analysis of the concept of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; self as free __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Cell in organism, beliefs compared to, 135.
Change, but not duration, attributed
to external things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Character, freedom and, 172 f.; and
forecast of future actions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Clocks, measurement of time by, 108 f.;
perception of strokes without
counting specifically, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Co-existence, number and relations
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.; can space come from
relations of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of past and present
only in awareness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Cold, perception of, 46.
Colour, changes of hue and invariable
colors, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ white, gray, and black,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; saturation levels, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
intensity of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; colors of spectrum,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; changes in feeling
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; can there be equal distance
tints, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Compromise, see also Endosmosis:
between the concept of free will and
necessity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; ways of seeing
result of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; intensity like
compromise between quality and price
quantity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; number of results
from a, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; concept of measurable
time results from a, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Consciousness, compared to invisible
musician, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; as a secondary effect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
Kant distinguishes external
perception and, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; succession
without distinction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; matter
and type of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Conservation, of energy, see Energy;
of motion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of kinetic energy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
conservative systems aren't the only
ones possible, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Continuity, of number when formed, 82 f.
Contradiction, law of non-, 89, 150, 207,
reconciliation of apparent issues
deeper level, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Counting, units must be identical, 76;
also distinct, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; flock of sheep, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ females;
group of soldiers, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
implies spatial intuition, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
material things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; aware
states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; bell chimes, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
duration moments, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
pendulum swings, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
two aspects of the process of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
strokes of a clock by quality
effect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Crisis, freedom shown at, 170, 239.
Critique of Pure Reason, result of, 235.
Critique philosophique, article in, 75 n.
Dancer and feeling of grace, 12.
Darwin on rage, 29; on violent
emotions and reflex actions, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
on pain and responses, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Definition of equality of sensation-differences, 64;
of addition of sensation differences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
of number, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of subjective and objective, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; neither right nor left, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
of simultaneity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of equal intervals
of time, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of speed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.;
of inertia of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of freedom,
leads to determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
Delbœuf, his measurement of luminous
sensation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ etc., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ etc.;
his basic assumption, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Deliberation process of, 158, 171;
misrepresented as oscillation in
space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Depth of aesthetic feeling, 17 f.; of
emotional states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Descartes and conservation of motion, 151;
his playful brilliance, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
his perspective on matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Cartesian physics, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
and the consistency of the physical world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Desire, progress of a, 8; conceived
as a separate entity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Determinism, two kinds of, 142;
physical, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ et seq.; psychological, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ et seq.;
rests on misunderstanding of duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
and molecular theory of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
The occurrence of psychic states does not stem from
that of brain states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
associationist, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; and
hypnosis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; self-determination, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
its mechanical self-concept, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
could actions have been different? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
can an act be predicted? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ft., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__;
and "possible acts," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; and character, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
and astrology prediction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
and the law of causality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
misunderstanding of causality underlies all, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
of phenomena as related to human freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.;
not involved in the second type of prefiguring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.;
Leibniz's __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; as a compromise between the idea of
free effort and necessity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Trying to define freedom results in __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
all, disproven by experience, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
meaningless if duration varies, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Diagrams, geometrical, 176, 191.
Differentials expressing Fechner's Law, 62, 65;
dealing with movement, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Dimension, time as fourth, 109.
Discontinuity of number, 82 f.
Disgust, Richet's description of, 36.
Distinction, two meanings of, 75 n., 121;
succession without, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of mental states,
leads to a mechanical understanding of self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Kant's distinction between matter and form of
consciousness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Donaldson, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Dreams, freshness in, 8; charm in, 10;
shallow psychic states removed
in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; overlaying images in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Duration, moments counted by means
of points in space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; varies
from uniform time in having
It has nothing to do with space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; it's empirical.
efforts to create space
from, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; idea of
pure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; expressed
in terms of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
order of succession in, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; any
homogeneity in, implies space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
as blending of consciousness
states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__; pure, is
wholly qualitative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
not measurable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; not
measured by clocks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; as
diverse and unrelated
to number, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__;
how the mistaken idea of homogeneity comes about, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
and motion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; removed
from time by science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
and simultaneity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; and
astrological forecast, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__
ff.; cannot be displayed by
math formulas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; as
mental synthesis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; none in
space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; as quality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; felt like quality in
sleep, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; viewed as quality by
animals, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; uniform, as
symbolic representation derived
from space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__; its
two forms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; made up of
deep-rooted conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
determinism is based on inaccuracies
conception of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__; behaves like
a cause in the area of life, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
diversity of, prevents return
to previous state, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__;
real, and prediction, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
of unchangeable conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
difference between past and present
future, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; relevant to individuals,
not to external things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
as captured in a single moment, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
real, as leading to
free will, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.; attributed to
things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; two ideas
of, in causality, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; apart
from extensity by science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
must also be separated
by philosophy, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; Kant stated
self outside, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; possible to access
back into pure, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Kant was confused
with space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; science
cannot handle, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; if uniform,
no freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; source
of the feeling of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.; no moral
crisis without, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.; key to
problem of free will, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.
Dynamism, understood as a natural system, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
and relationship between facts and
laws, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; its perspective on simplicity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
inner, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Eclipse, prediction of, 117, 194·
Education, not properly assimilated, 166;
may limit freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Effort, intensity of, 7, 24, 25, 26;
muscular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; seems quantitative, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
feeling of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
experimental investigation of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
shallow, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; in assessing
sound intensity and pitch, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
in the second type of prefiguring, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
force and, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; concepts of freedom, and
need to be kept apart, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Eleatics, their paradoxes, 74, 240;
arise from confusion about motion
and space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; Achilles
and tortoise, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.
Elevation of aesthetic feeling, 17.
Emotions, violent, intensity of, 28 ff.
Empiricist theory of space, 93 f.;
derivation of extensive from inextensive, 94, 222.
Endosmosis, see also Compromise:—between
succession and externality, 109, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
between mobility and space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
between free labor and
essential determination, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Energy, kinetic and potential, 152;
may be a new kind of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Energy, conservation of: incompatible
with freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
and determination of physiological functions
and nervous phenomena, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
does not involve determinism of
conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; is it
universal? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; in nature
sciences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; suggests return of
restore system to previous state, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; aware
force or free will may evade
law of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; unauthorized extension
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
English philosophers on extensity
and succession, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Epiphenomenon, consciousness as, 152.
Equations expressing Fechner's Law, 62;
express something completed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
transformability of __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Évellin, on space, time and motion, 114.
Experiments and experimental observations:
Wundt on paralysis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Vulpian on hemiplegia, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
Ferner on feeling of effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
James on the feeling of effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
clenching the fist, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; squeezing
the lips, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; lifting a weight, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ lbs.;
Féré on muscle power, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
pin pricks, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; at temperature
sense, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Helmholtz on color
and intensity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; photometric, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.;
Lehmann and Neiglick's, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Delbœuf's on measuring
of bright sensation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.
Explanation, confused with fact, 163, 181.
Extensity, implies relation of container
to contain, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; no point in
contact between extended and unextended, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
aspects of physical
qualities, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Kant on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
attempted derivation of, from the
unextended, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__; uniform,
due to stripping
concrete qualities matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Descartes saw matter as uniform, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Hylozoism and the characteristics of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; confusion
duration presents a problem of
freedom, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; apart from
duration by science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Externality of things in space, 99;
exists outside the ego, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
endosmosis during succession
and, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; of things helps to
cut up psychic life, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
Animals do not have the same tendency.
to visualize, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; empirical
school tries to develop, from
inner states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; external factors
subject to change but not the duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
external world separate from
ourselves, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Fact, relation between law and, 140 f.;
explanation confused with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Faraday and centres of force, 218.
Fear, Spencer on, 30; conceived as
unique state, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Fechner on attention and tension 27;
his psychophysics, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.;
his formulas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; his law, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
his logarithmic law, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.; method
of minimal differences, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Feeling, intensity of, 7, 185;
deep-rooted, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.; aesthetic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ ff.; of
grace, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; beauty, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.;
rich aesthetic, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; moral, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.;
and physical symptoms, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
of effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; distorted
by analysis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; something
living and growing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
leads to resolution, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
whole soul reflected in each, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
change in duration means
change in nature, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.
Féré, C, on sensation and muscular force, 41.
Ferrier, on feeling of effort, 16.
Figure, see Diagram.
Flavour, changing, solidified by language, 131.
Force, alleged psychic, 20 f., 25;
muscular, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; anxious, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; sensation
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; unconscious states not
forces, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; concept of, as uncertain
effort, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; self as independent, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
idea of and necessity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
as free expression, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
concepts of free will and determinism
separated by science, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
"Form of Sensibility," Kant's theory
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; uniform space as, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Forms borrowed from the external world
in self-perception, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; borrowed from self in
perception of things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of perception,
result of compromise, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
elimination of borrowed items
from the outside world, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Kant's
distinction between matter and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.
Formulae, Weber's, 61; Fechner's, 62;
managing speed, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Fouillée, on freedom as a motive, 160.
Fourth dimension, time as, 109.
Freedom, Free Will, see also Determinism:
origin of issue, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
cause of conflict between systems
and dynamism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; dual objection to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
and molecular theory of matter, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
and energy conservation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
strictly limited by the principle of conservation
is universal, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.; as conscious power,
exempt from the law of conservation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
defenders of, wrongly agree
that conscious states are
distinct things, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Fouillée on,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; as self-expression, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
not absolute, but allows for varying degrees, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
many live without realizing, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
may be limited by education, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
free acts are rare, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
A free decision comes from the whole or
core self, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__;
covered by automation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
sometimes resigned due to laziness, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
shown in times of crisis, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
and character, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; to pursue
in the nature of the decision
or act, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f.; Mill on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
and "possible acts," __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; no cost
action like overripe fruit, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
successive distinction
phases in, leads to determinism, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff.;
the self is always right in affirming its __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not disproved by causality as regular succession, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
protected by different ideas of
causality considered individually, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f.;
self as free cause, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
real but undefinable, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ f.;
why denied and defined, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
Kant on, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__; confusing
if duration is uniform, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
key to problem of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ n.; follows
from the uniqueness of the relationship of
psychic state to act, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Fusion, see Interpenetration.
Future, see Prediction.
Ghost, time as ghost of space, 99.
Goldscheider, experiments on temperature sense, 46.
Grace, feeling of, 11 f.
Hamilton, Mill on, quoted, 159, 174·
Harmony, Leibniz on pre-established, 147, 213, 214.
Heat, sensation of, 46 f.; mechanical theory of, 151.
Helmholtz, on effort of volition, 23;
on color and intensity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Hemiplegia, Vulpian on, 22.
Heterogeneity, qualitative, interpreted
as widespread uniformity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
of pure duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_5__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_6__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_7__;
of deep-seated mental states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
homogeneous universe assumed behind, 205;
Kant's distinction between homogeneity and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Homogeneity of time, 90, 98, 107, 124, 234, 237;
of space, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__; is all the same
space? __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; expected two forms
of, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; none in length, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__;
none in motion, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__; how
introduced into duration, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__;
connection between and general ideas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
assumed behind diversity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; Kant's
distinction between diversity and __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Hope, why pleasurable, 9 f.
Hylozoism, ancient, 213, 214.
Hypnotism and art, 14;
and aesthetic vibe, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
illustrating the connection of ideas, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
not including received ideas
during, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Ideas, analysis of, 134; interpenetration of, 135;
blind loyalty to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
some not incorporated, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
associationism fits superficial, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
deeper-level reconciliation, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
association of, in interrupted chat, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
general, and the perception of a uniform medium, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Identity, principle of, 207; attempt
to replace causality with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
causality does not coincide with, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Illusion, as to psychic states possessing
magnitude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; introspective
consciousness has two core, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
attributing mutual externality
to conscious states, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
leading to challenges regarding free will, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Immobility, movement cannot be
made from, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; all that science
retains of motion is, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__.
Impenetrability, of matter, 88 f.
Inertia, of organism, and pleasure, 38;
vis inertia, dynamism
comes from voluntary activity, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__;
spontaneity made simpler
than, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; spontaneous settling
down into, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Instinct, perception of duration in
sleep compared to, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__; of the
intellect, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__.
Intensity, of psychic states, 1 ff., 224 f.;
of sensations, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ ff., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__,
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ f.; claimed intensive
magnitude, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_2__ f., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_3__, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_4__;